Tips for Making Lesson Planning Simple and Streamlined https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/category/lesson-planning/ Student-Centered Math Lessons Wed, 07 Feb 2024 17:30:03 +0000 en-US hourly 1 https://wordpress.org/?v=6.4.3 Teaching Probability in 7th Grade https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/auto-draft/ https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/auto-draft/#respond Tue, 13 Feb 2024 12:00:00 +0000 https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/?p=90391 Probability is a great way to end the school year! There are ample opportunities for hands-on practice, experiments, and the computation is fairly simple. Let’s talk about tips for making the most out of this 7th grade skill. Note: I found so many great probability activities as I was researching that I am going to […]

The post Teaching Probability in 7th Grade appeared first on Maneuvering the Middle.

]]>
Probability is a great way to end the school year! There are ample opportunities for hands-on practice, experiments, and the computation is fairly simple. Let’s talk about tips for making the most out of this 7th grade skill.

Note: I found so many great probability activities as I was researching that I am going to put together another blog post dedicated to just that, so be sure to check back.

Vertical Alignment

Probability is a 7th grade skill that reinforces so many other math skills. Check out these tips for helping your students master probability. | maneuveringthemiddle.com

Probability is an isolated skill. In CCSS, 6th grade and 8th grade do not have any probability concepts. However, multiplying fractions will be a key skill needed that does come from 5th and 6th grade and is covered again in 7th grade (7.NS.2). Be sure to review multiplying and simplifying fractions as well as vocabulary like numerator and denominator.

Teaching probability will reinforce so many important skills – solving proportions, converting fractions to decimals (for relative frequency), etc! This is a great unit to cover before reviewing for state tests to review these key concepts. 

Hook/Real-World

As I was putting this information together, I realized that pretty much every hook is an experiment or something that you should actually do with your students. Therefore, I will offer you this clip from the movie “21” where the Monty Hall problem is explained. This can cause some spirited debate once students have learned the basics of probability.

Make It Hands-On

Practically every probability problem can be acted out!  For introducing and explaining independent and dependent events, provide a baggie and colored tiles for each group.

For independent events, have students physically take one colored tile out of the bag and then replace it, so they could see the denominator stayed the same since the total number of tiles remained the same once replaced.

Probability is a 7th grade skill that reinforces so many other math skills. Check out these tips for helping your students master probability. | maneuveringthemiddle.com

For dependent events, have students physically take one colored tile out of the bag and place it on their desk, so they could see that now the denominator, or the total number of tiles in the bag had changed. This helps them to see that they need to subtract one from the total. This also helps them see that they would need to subtract one from the numerator if there was more than one of that color. For example: what is the probability of drawing 2 yellow tiles without replacement in a bag with 2 yellow tiles and 3 pink tiles? P(y, y) = (2/5) (1/4) Assuming they got a yellow the first time, there is only 1 yellow left and 4 total tiles left.

Number Cubes/Dice

Your students may be tempted to make a silly mistake when solving simple probability with number cubes. Misconception: Let’s say that the problem was calculating the probability of rolling a 4; students would want to write 4/6 because they saw the 4. 

Probability is a 7th grade skill that reinforces so many other math skills. Check out these tips for helping your students master probability. | maneuveringthemiddle.com

Solution:  Have students write out the numbers included on a number cube: 1 2 3 4 5 6 and circle the 4. Then they could see there was 1 possible outcome out of 6 total.

This is a great way for students to show their work. Probability of rolling an odd? Students write out 1 2 3 4 5 6 and circle all of the odd numbers to see that there are 3/6. You can also have students do this with the complement. Probability of not rolling a 3 (P’(3))? List out 1 2 3 4 5 6. Cross out the 3 since they want the probability of NOT getting a 3, and then circle the remaining numbers.

Theoretical vs. Experimental

Theoretical probability answers the question, “What should happen?” while experimental probability answers the question, “What actually happened?” Maneuvering the Middle has a fantastic Theoretical and Experimental Station Activity that will allow students to draw conclusions from multiple experiments. You can find this activity in our Probability Activity Bundle.

Other Tips + Useful Tools

  • Usually I recommend anchor charts with math concepts or vocabulary, but for probability I recommend anchor charts on what is included in a deck of cards (suites, face cards, colors) and how many sides a dice has.
Probability is a 7th grade skill that reinforces so many other math skills. Check out these tips for helping your students master probability. | maneuveringthemiddle.com
  • This online probability generator includes editable spinners, bags of marbles, deck of cards, a random number generator, and a dice. You can use this to demonstrate concepts or for students to practice theoretical vs. experimental probability.
  • This online Wheel of Names Spinner can be altered to include any word. 

Are you ready to teach probability? What tips do you have for teaching probability?

Probability is a 7th grade skill that reinforces so many other math skills. Check out these tips for helping your students master probability. | maneuveringthemiddle.com

The post Teaching Probability in 7th Grade appeared first on Maneuvering the Middle.

]]>
https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/auto-draft/feed/ 0
10 System of Equations Activities https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/10-system-of-equations-activities/ Tue, 23 Jan 2024 12:00:00 +0000 https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/?p=88855 System of Equations – there is so much to cover that it can feel overwhelming! Let’s keep this substantial math concept light and bright with some fun and engaging activities for your 8th grade and Algebra 1 students. I will be honest, I did not expect all of this goodness to exist out there for […]

The post 10 System of Equations Activities appeared first on Maneuvering the Middle.

]]>
System of Equations – there is so much to cover that it can feel overwhelming! Let’s keep this substantial math concept light and bright with some fun and engaging activities for your 8th grade and Algebra 1 students.

I will be honest, I did not expect all of this goodness to exist out there for Systems of Equations! While I will definitely be linking to our fantastic resources, I am also linking some amazing task-like resources that will make sense of all of the typical system of equation word problems.

For Graphing

  1. Systems of Two Linear Equations (Demos) This is a great way to introduce the concept that every point on a graph is a solution and the intersection is a solution to both equations. There is a whole class interaction aspect of this Desmos Activity that is pretty awesome! I would recommend this on Day 1 of graphing.
  2. System of Equations Scavenger Hunt – This is a literal scavenger hunt complete with map. Students will practice graphing systems and solving for y. “This activity has a twist–figuring out where the friends are going to meet! So fun! This is one of my favorite resources!” -E.G. Perfect as a formative assessment on day 2 of graphing.
  3. Algebra 1 Systems Performance Task – This Bowling Alley Performance task was designed specifically for Algebra 1 since it also includes a system of inequalities problem. The task asks students to compare the costs of food, shirts, and bowling ball weights at two competing bowling alleys.  It can be an alternative to assessment or a review before your unit test. It is available in our Algebra 1 Systems Activity Bundle.

All System of Equations Methods

  1. The Custom Ink Project – This free activity (complete with handout and PowerPoint file) mixes a little art and a lot of math. Students design and price t-shirts, and then analyze their profits.
  2. Dan Meyer Coin Problem – Gosh, I love this problem. Traditional coin problems can be dry and not engaging. This short video clip (30 second clip of a person putting coins into a coin counting machine) combined with a few question prompts will have all of your students trying to solve.
  3. Desmos Card Sort This card sort activity would make a great station or warm up. It has a little bit of everything – sorting systems into the best method to solve and a few practice problems for each method of solving.
  4. Dueling Discounts – Dan Meyer has another great way for students to approach systems. When provided with two coupons – 20% off and $20 off – what is the better deal on various items? At what dollar amount does it shift?

Other Helpful Things

  1. These puzzles developed by Heather Sparks aren’t your typical math problems. They would make a great extension or bell ringer during your systems unit.
  2. System of Equations Unit Review Error Analysis – Error Analysis develops both procedural and conceptual understanding. It allows students to think behind the HOW and into the WHY. Encourage mathematical discourse by assigning it as partner work at the end of your unit.
  3. CCSS System of Equations Unit | CCSS Algebra 1 Systems UnitTEKS Algebra 1 Systems Unit |  – Not ready to jump into activities yet? Do you need a liiiiiiittle push in the right direction with instruction? Never fear. Our units are packed with planning resources, student handouts, independent practice, a unit review, and a unit assessment. 

What system of equation activities do you implement in your classroom?

The post 10 System of Equations Activities appeared first on Maneuvering the Middle.

]]>
Read Before Teaching Pythagorean Theorem https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/read-before-teaching-pythagorean-theorem/ Tue, 16 Jan 2024 12:00:00 +0000 https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/?p=88842 Let’s talk about my favorite theorem, Pythagorean’s! Though it ranked 4 out of 100 in mathematicians, Paul and Jack Abad’s, list of 100 Greatest Theorems, I know it ranks number 1 in most middle school math teachers’ hearts. Vertical Alignment Before I jump into any topic, I like to see what students already know. Our […]

The post Read Before Teaching Pythagorean Theorem appeared first on Maneuvering the Middle.

]]>
Let’s talk about my favorite theorem, Pythagorean’s! Though it ranked 4 out of 100 in mathematicians, Paul and Jack Abad’s, list of 100 Greatest Theorems, I know it ranks number 1 in most middle school math teachers’ hearts.

Read this blog post for tips and activities for introducing and teaching Pythagorean Theorem to your 8th grade students. | maneuveringthemiddle.com

Vertical Alignment

Before I jump into any topic, I like to see what students already know. Our units are complete with vertical planning, so I don’t have to search far to see that students have used equations to solve for unknown angles. Now we just need to make the jump to side lengths!

Plethora of Hook Opportunities

There are so many compelling ways to introduce Pythagorean Theorem to your students. In fact, the more context and real-world examples you can provide about the math they are learning, the more investment your students will have.

This Who Wants to Be a Millionaire video clip is kind of silly, but is a short and easy way to exclaim, “YOU MIGHT BE ASKED THIS ON A GAME SHOW FOR MONEY” or more likely, be asked on the street by someone making a video for TikTok. 

Day Mayer’s Three Act – The Taco Cart was recommended by many teachers in a Middle School Math Facebook group. I would show the first video and present it as, “By the end of this unit, you will be able to solve this problem.” This Desmos Adaptation is a great digital version.

Go Hands-On

Pythagorean Theorem is incredibly visual, but it is also incredibly kinetic. Let’s encourage students to manipulate and play to develop an understanding of how and why the Pythagorean Theorem works. You can do this in a variety of ways:

  • Cheez Its or Starbursts
Read this blog post for tips and activities for introducing and teaching Pythagorean Theorem to your 8th grade students. | maneuveringthemiddle.com

Know the Parts

One of the most common misconceptions students will face is identifying the legs and the hypotenuse on a triangle especially when the triangle is orientated in a different way.

Provide ample opportunities for students to label and annotate the right triangle before moving onto any calculations. Here is a non-exhaustive list of all the ways to help students labeling parts correctly:

  • Start with the parts in the formula before using variables
    • hypotenuse^2 = leg ^2 + leg ^2
Read this blog post for tips and activities for introducing and teaching Pythagorean Theorem to your 8th grade students. | maneuveringthemiddle.com
  • Hypotenuse is the longest word and therefore the longest side
  • Have students draw an arrow directly across the right angle (like I did in pink above) to the hypotenuse and label it first thing as hypotenuse = c first! This reinforces the idea that students should double check that it is a right angle before assuming it is a right angle.
  • If a student feels hung up on the orientation of a right triangle (because it isn’t “right”), encourage students to turn their paper until the right triangle looks “right” to them.

Practice, Practice, Practice

There is a hierarchy of math practice. Students need to build up fluency, so they are able to tackle the more complex problem types. If they can’t square a number, take a square root of a number, or solve an equation for a variable, then they will struggle to solve application problems involving Pythagorean Theorem.

Pythagorean Theorem Maze Practice – This practice is scaffolded. One maze uses solely whole numbers, and then students can move on to problems involving rational numbers. 

Pythagorean Theorem He Said, She Said ActivityError analysis is beneficial for procedural and conceptual understanding. It allows students to think behind the HOW and into the WHY. These types of problems are great for partner work and encourage mathematical discourse. 

Pythagorean Theorem Performance Task – If you are looking for an alternative to a unit test, may I recommend this math task? It provides multiple opportunities to show mastery of the Pythagorean Theorem, and it will encourage students to use multiple strategies of problem solving. What is the task? Students must design the layout of various attractions at a Harvest Festival. If you haven’t assigned a performance task in your classroom, be sure to check out these performance tasks tips and tricks.

Other Pythagorean Theorem Tips

  • Does this side length make sense? Reasonableness is always something to be challenging students to consider. This develops their number sense (which is important when 8th graders are using calculators). When students are solving equations that are multi-step, I find that students can get so excited they leave off the last step. In the case of the Pythagorean Theorem, it is taking the final square root. I like to faux forget the last step and box my answer and wait for students to call me out! Then I would ask, “Does this answer make sense?” If I have side lengths of 12 and 9 inches, would the last side make sense at 225 inches?
  • Posting an anchor chart of perfect squares can be a great way to reinforce students memorizing perfect squares. If students quickly know these math facts it will serve them well in Algebra 1, so this is a great time to work on that skill. Our 8th Grade Math and Algebra 1 Fast Pass have a list of perfect squares, so download the freebie and give it to your students to reference.

What tips do you have for teaching Pythagorean Theorem?

Read this blog post for tips and activities for introducing and teaching Pythagorean Theorem to your 8th grade students. | maneuveringthemiddle.com

The post Read Before Teaching Pythagorean Theorem appeared first on Maneuvering the Middle.

]]>
3 Steps to Mastering Systems of Equations https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/3-steps-to-mastering-systems-of-equations/ Tue, 09 Jan 2024 12:00:00 +0000 https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/?p=88817 Is there anything more satisfying than solving a system of equations problem? That might be the nerdiest sentence ever published on this blog, but it is true! I loved learning systems of equations as a student, and I loved teaching it as a teacher. Let’s jump into the 3 methods for mastering systems of equations. […]

The post 3 Steps to Mastering Systems of Equations appeared first on Maneuvering the Middle.

]]>
Is there anything more satisfying than solving a system of equations problem? That might be the nerdiest sentence ever published on this blog, but it is true! I loved learning systems of equations as a student, and I loved teaching it as a teacher. Let’s jump into the 3 methods for mastering systems of equations.

This post is full, so be on the lookout for part 2 where we will discuss various systems activities for your classroom.

These tips for teaching the 3 methods for solving systems of equations will benefit your students in your math classroom. | maneuveringthemiddle.com

Vertical Alignment

Solving systems of equations starts in 8th grade and carries on being explicitly taught in Algebra 2. If you are an 8th grade teacher, you aren’t exactly starting from scratch.

Students will need to be proficient at:

  • Solving for a single variable (in this case y) and graphing lines in slope-intercept form (for solving by graphing)
  • Rational number operations (for elimination and substitution)
  • Combining like terms and distributing (for substitution)

If your students aren’t up to speed with these skills, don’t fret! There is plenty of time to refresh and practice as you introduce systems of equations. I mention this to remind you that students will not be able to solve systems of equations problems without this foundation, so give your students time + practice!

These tips for teaching the 3 methods for solving systems of equations will benefit your students in your math classroom. | maneuveringthemiddle.com

System of Equations Overview

We can often jump in with the methods to solve so quickly that we don’t properly explain what we are solving for apart from saying x and y.

Remind students daily (or even before every problem) that solving systems means we are looking for a solution that makes both equations true! Then reinforce that this is where the lines will intersect on a graph.

Let’s dive into each method for solving systems of equations. 

Graphing

The method that I recommend starting with is solving systems of equations by graphing. Due to its visual nature, I find that it makes the abstract nature of solving 2 equations more concrete.

As you introduce this skill, start with the basics of a single line. Remind and reinforce that any point that exists on that single line is a solution to that equation! You can ask students to choose a point on the line, plug in the x and y values, and show them that the equation is a true statement! You can also do the opposite – have students choose and plug in a point that is not on the line to prove that it is not a solution to the equation.

Then you can move to the conclusion that the intersection of two lines is a solution to the system of equations! When students find the point of intersection, plug that point into both equations to find that it is a solution for both equations! (Wow! I am getting pretty excited writing about this!)

Other tips:

  • If there was ever time to have your 8th grade or Algebra 1 students move their bodies around, it is this! Arms crossing for one solution, arms parallel for no solution, and arms overlapping for infinitely many solutions. 
  • Students often get stuck with how to graph vertical and horizontal lines, such as y = 3 or x = 2. It is helpful to say it as a sentence, “The y-values will always be equal to 5.” Students can plot 2-3 points with a y-value of 3 and visually see that it will be a horizontal line that also intersects the y-axis at 3.
These tips for teaching the 3 methods for solving systems of equations will benefit your students in your math classroom. | maneuveringthemiddle.com
  • Students will have to be proficient at solving for y! In fact, I wrote an entire blog post for this specific skill here.

Substitution

It is my recommendation that substitution is going to require a minimum of 2 days. For it to be done well, I recommend building a strong conceptual foundation of what substitution is before trying to actually solve anything by substituting.

I love these two ideas that I found while researching this topic. This first idea I can attribute to a teacher’s explanation in a Facebook Thread (I am going to summarize with bullet points to make it easier to follow):

  • Write a whole number on the board.
  • Ask students to write down as many different equivalent expressions of that number
  • If the number is 6, then: 3(2), 4+2, 7-1 and so on. 
  • Make the point that expressions can look different but still be equivalent.
  • Next, add variables. x=6, then: x=3+3 and x=3(2).
  • Now have students substitute their expressions for x: 3+3 = 3(2).

This blog post breaks down in painstaking detail how a visual aid (stars) makes substitution more concrete. While I used a similar technique with colored Post-it Notes, I think you will benefit from reading this teacher’s methodology. 

Other Tips:

  • One solution, no solution, infinitely many solutions will still pop up in substitution, so be sure to review. If variables cancel out and the remaining statement is true, the system has infinitely many solutions. Example: 2=2. If variables cancel out and the remaining statement is false, the system has no solution. Example: 2=/=3.
  • Distributing and managing negative signs is going to be a common error. Demonstrate and remind students that they can check their work by just plugging solutions in! This goes for elimination too!
  • If you need a fun, no-prep, and free activity for substitution, I recommend playing this “Who Wants to Be a Millionaire” style game as a class.

Elimination

This is my personal favorite – maybe it is because I like when standard form actually comes in handy!  I am hesitant to admit that I did not know why the elimination method worked until I wrote this post, so I want to share what I learned.

The Additional Property of Equality says that when you add the same quantity to both sides of an equation, you still have equality. 

For any expressions, a, b, c, and d,

If a = b

And c = d

Then a+c = b+d

Whenever I present that type of information to my students, I prefer to give a few examples with numbers.

So let’s says a = 2, b = 2, c = 1, and d = 1

If 2=2

And 1=1

Then 2+1 = 2+1

If you didn’t follow that, perhaps this color coded image will make more sense?

Other Tips:

  • Students seem to prefer elimination to substitution! I would give students the opportunity to practice changing y = mx+b into standard form. 
  • Provide lots of practice multiplying to clear the fractions.
  • Don’t forget to go back and solve for the other variable. This is why you should save elimination for after substitution. 

 What tips would you add to solving the system of equations?

These tips for teaching the 3 methods for solving systems of equations will benefit your students in your math classroom. | maneuveringthemiddle.com

The post 3 Steps to Mastering Systems of Equations appeared first on Maneuvering the Middle.

]]>
4 Division Strategies for 5th Grade https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/division-strategies-for-5th-grade/ Tue, 12 Dec 2023 12:00:00 +0000 https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/?p=87421 I will never forget my first day learning long division in third grade – the multiple steps, the division, followed by multiplication…then subtraction?? What? Fortunately, while that is the only way I ever learned division, there are now numerous other options for division, so students can feel successful. And though I believe the standard division […]

The post 4 Division Strategies for 5th Grade appeared first on Maneuvering the Middle.

]]>
I will never forget my first day learning long division in third grade – the multiple steps, the division, followed by multiplication…then subtraction?? What?

Fortunately, while that is the only way I ever learned division, there are now numerous other options for division, so students can feel successful. And though I believe the standard division algorithm is a necessity for math, it doesn’t have to be the only way students learn and internalize division.  

Before we jump into division, a quick reminder of the types of division we have. We have partitive division and measurement division.

In a Partitive division problem, the number of groups is known, and you are solving for the number in each group. Think of it like this – I have 12 cookies and want to divide them evenly by 4 children. How many cookies does each child receive?

If your students are struggling with division using the standard algorithm, then try one of these 4 division strategies! | maneuveringthemiddle.com

In a measurement division problem, the number in each group is known, and you are solving for the number of groups. For example, I have 12 cookies and want to give each child 4 cookies. How many children can receive 4 cookies?

If your students are struggling with division using the standard algorithm, then try one of these 4 division strategies! | maneuveringthemiddle.com

Now that we’ve reviewed the two types of division, here are 4 division strategies to try!

1. Partial Quotient Division

Partial quotient division does exactly what it sounds like – you work to find parts of the quotient (answer) and then add them together to find the overall quotient. 

Let’s take 432/18…

Here is a takeaway that will make teaching partial quotient division more accessible for your students; don’t try to have students do all of their multiples of 18 (which is normal when teaching the standard algorithm). It isn’t necessary. Instead, have students do friendly numbers. Depending on your dividend and divisor, this could be 10 or 100. In our case, 10 makes more sense, so 18×10=180.  Also, if I go ahead and find 18×2=36, it is painless to find 18×20=360. 

If your students are struggling with division using the standard algorithm, then try one of these 4 division strategies! | maneuveringthemiddle.com

Another math tidbit I love is that instead of trying to multiply by 4, it is easier (to me) to multiply by 2 twice. 

You can see in the example above, that I was able to find that 18 went into 432 twenty times and then 18 went into 72 four times. I simply add the partial quotients of 20 and 4 to find the quotient of 24.

Lastly, partial quotients are a great tool because students can find the answer in a variety of ways. Take a look below for another way to solve 432/18.

2. Equivalent Ratios

This is a great strategy for division that reinforces ratios! This may not work for every division problem, but it is similar to partial quotients in that you can work in baby steps to get your quotient. Familiarize your students with these division rules:

  • Numbers that end in an even number are divisible by 2.
  • Numbers that end in a 0 and 5 are divisible by 5.
  • Numbers that end in a 0 are divisible by 10.

Once your students have mastered those rules, you can introduce:

  • Numbers with the last 2 digits divisible by 4 are divisible by 4 (ex: 1016, 3412, 1004)
  • If the sum of the digits is divisible by 3, then the number is divisible by 3 (ex: 342. 3+4+2 = 9. 9 is divisible by 3, therefore, 342 is divisible by 3.) 
If your students are struggling with division using the standard algorithm, then try one of these 4 division strategies! | maneuveringthemiddle.com

Even if your student cannot get all the way down to 1, they can still divide smaller and more manageable numbers by simplifying. In this example, you can think of it as partitive division, 25 represents the number in 1 group.

3. Multiplying Up

To use the method of Multiplying Up, rewrite the division problem as a multiplication problem. Let’s take the example of 1665/15 =111. Multiplying up asks “15 x ___ = 1655?”

We know that 15×100 = 1500 gets us close to 1665. We can work from there by adding 150 (10 groups of 15) and then again 15 (1 group of 15). 100 + 10 + 1 = 111. Therefore, 1500 + 150 +15 = 1665.

If your students are struggling with division using the standard algorithm, then try one of these 4 division strategies! | maneuveringthemiddle.com

4. Repeated Subtraction

Repeated subtraction is similar to multiplying up (and partial quotient) but backwards. Obviously, these are all related! I think it works best when you are working with dividing numbers with unfriendly divisors (think 3 digit). 

Which division strategy will you try with your 5th grade or upper elementary students?

Related content: Check out this post on Dividing Fractions.

If your students are struggling with division using the standard algorithm, then try one of these 4 division strategies! | maneuveringthemiddle.com

The post 4 Division Strategies for 5th Grade appeared first on Maneuvering the Middle.

]]>
3 Math Review Games to Get Students Moving https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/math-review-games/ https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/math-review-games/#comments Tue, 05 Dec 2023 12:00:00 +0000 https://mtmmigration.flywheelsites.com/2016/01/21/math-review-games/ Students do so much sitting in a day.  During a very long professional development, my principal looked at her watch and said, “We have just hit 75 minutes — the length of a class period.”  I was shocked at how much my body just wanted to escape my chair for a walk or a stretch […]

The post 3 Math Review Games to Get Students Moving appeared first on Maneuvering the Middle.

]]>
Students do so much sitting in a day.  During a very long professional development, my principal looked at her watch and said, “We have just hit 75 minutes — the length of a class period.”  I was shocked at how much my body just wanted to escape my chair for a walk or a stretch break. 

According to the U.S. Department of Health and Human Services,Movement increases the heart rate and stimulates brain function, which facilitates a child’s ability to learn,” so here are three “Get Up and Move” activities that I implemented in my classroom. 

[Note: Some of these activities are included in Maneuvering the Middle’s All Access subscription or can be purchased here, but I am going to explain how you might prepare for and execute these activities if you are not a middle school math teacher.]

Math review games can breath life into your classroom and teaching. Most students enjoy getting out of their seats and going their work in another part of the class, whether that be with a group or individually. |maneuveringthemiddle.com

Math Review Game: FLYSWATTER

The flyswatter game was around when I was a student – I remember playing it in my Spanish class!  Students love this game, and they ask for it daily.  Since it is a very low lift, I would use it as an incentive for finished work.

PLANNING

Project around 10 answers on the board.  (I don’t recommend writing the answers on the whiteboard with dry erase markers because they will get rubbed off.)  You need two flyswatters.  Tape a line on the floor parallel to the board, about five feet from the board.  This is where students will stop to hear their problem.  

The flyswatter game works with problems that are fluency-based.  We are going for speed here.  Here is a suggestion: fraction, decimal, and percent equivalents.  You could project these answers: 40%, 25%, 0.6, ½, etc…

EXECUTION

Divide students into two groups.  Boys versus girls is my go-to. They should be in 2 lines facing the board.  Set the expectation that you will not call out a problem until it is silent.  When the first two opponents are up, you could say, “Two fifths!”  The student who hit 40% first would win and stay in the game, and the other student would take a seat.  The fly swatters are passed on.  The winner would go to the back of the line, and the next two students would be up.  You keep playing until there is one player left.

Math Review Game:  SCAVENGER HUNT

This is by far my favorite activity.  You can read more details on how to execute a scavenger hunt in this post. It’s self-checking, and you could pull or work with a small group during this activity.

MATH REVIEW GAME: Cake Walk

PLANNING 

Similar to a cake walk, students will be up and walking in a circle, so consider that when arranging desks/chairs and/or giving directions for how you want them to walk. I had tables and would push them to the side of the room and arrange chairs in a large circle. Each chair needs to be numbered. 

Have your problems ready on a slideshow. Students will need scratch paper and a clipboard to write on.

EXECUTION

Play music while students walk around the chairs. Stop the music, students sit, and you project a problem. Students then work on the problem. Use a random number generator to pick the chair number. The student sitting in that chair gets a prize (could be bonus points on a test, free homework pass, sticker, piece of candy) if their work is correct. This activity is great for review before a unit test!

If you don’t have time to plan something special for students to get out of their seats, but you can feel the restlessness in the classroom, then you can still have students get up and move!  You can have students find a partner, work out a problem, and then move to find a new partner for the next problem. 

Math Concepts for Kinesthetic Learning

These concepts are perfect for students to use their body to act out. If you have more ideas, please comment below! 

  1. Positive slope, negative slope, undefined, zero
  2. Angles – acute, obtuse, 90 degrees, 180 degrees
  3. Transformations – translate (slide), rotations, reflections, dilations (greater than 1? Act out e x p a n d i n g, less than 1? Act out shrinking)
  4. Adding and subtracting decimals (act out lining up your buttons on a shirt with lining up decimals for adding and subtracting)
  5. Coordinate plane (body is the y axis, arms are the x axis, negative space creates the quadrants)
  6. Inequalities – arms for the greater than and less than signs
  7. Types of Functions – linear, U for quadratic, and exponential
  8. Parallel and perpendicular lines
  9. Types of solutions – arms crossed for one solution, parallel arms for no solution, and arms on top of each other for infinite solutions)

How do you get students moving in your classroom?  

Check out this related post: Turn Any Worksheet Into a Math Activity

Maneuvering the Middle has been writing and publishing blog posts for almost a decade! This post was originally published in 2016 and has been updated for clarity and relevance.

Math review games can breath life into your classroom and teaching. Most students enjoy getting out of their seats and going their work in another part of the class, whether that be with a group or individually. |maneuveringthemiddle.com

The post 3 Math Review Games to Get Students Moving appeared first on Maneuvering the Middle.

]]>
https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/math-review-games/feed/ 11
5 Multiplication Strategies https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/5-multiplication-strategies/ Tue, 14 Nov 2023 12:00:00 +0000 https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/?p=86172 Do your students often make mistakes using the standard multiplication algorithm? Then this post is for you! Here are 5 alternative multiplication strategies for your upper elementary and middle school students. 1. Open Area Model The area model demonstrates that when multiplying two numbers, you can find partial products and add them together to find […]

The post 5 Multiplication Strategies appeared first on Maneuvering the Middle.

]]>
Do your students often make mistakes using the standard multiplication algorithm? Then this post is for you! Here are 5 alternative multiplication strategies for your upper elementary and middle school students.

1. Open Area Model

The standard algorithm isn't the only way to multiply! Try these 5 other multiplication strategies with your middle school students! | maneuveringthemiddle.com

The area model demonstrates that when multiplying two numbers, you can find partial products and add them together to find the overall product. The open area model is my favorite alternative multiplication strategy and where I would start. After your students understand the basics of an array, the open area model is the next best model for students to fully see what is happening conceptually when multiplying (especially when multiplying 2 digits times 2+ digits). 

The steps are already built in. They know that each box needs to be filled in. This keeps students organized and (hopefully) more accurate. 

Additional benefits: this format will help students in high school Algebra multiplying and dividing polynomials.

2. Partial Product Multiplication

Partial product multiplication is the open area model without the boxes. Essentially, students are completing the exact same steps in the same order, but without the array format. While I wouldn’t start here, I think reinforcing the open area model with a partial product number sentence is the perfect progression. 

3. Distributive Property

The standard algorithm isn't the only way to multiply! Try these 5 other multiplication strategies with your middle school students! | maneuveringthemiddle.com

Using the distributive property is a multiplication strategy that will later reinforce another important math skill. Have students break down one of the factors into its expanded form and then multiply. 

4. Chunking Using a Ratio Table

The standard algorithm isn't the only way to multiply! Try these 5 other multiplication strategies with your middle school students! | maneuveringthemiddle.com

You can use a ratio table to split a factor into chunks (in this case 24 was broken down into 4 and 20) to find partial products that are then added together to find the final product. Have students take advantage of friendly math like doubling and multiplying by 10. 

5. Over and Under

In order to use friendly numbers, multiply by more (or less) groups than necessary. Then, subtract the extra groups, or add the missing groups. 

In this example, I traded 18 for 20. After finding the product of 31 and 20, I found the product of 31 and 2 (since 20 – 18 = 2). I subtracted this product of 62 from 620 to find the answer to our original problem 18 x 31.

In this case, I shot under by trading 31 for 30. I knew I would be missing one group of 18 so I added that to the product of 30 and 18.

What multiplication strategy is your favorite? Interested in more multiplication posts, check out our posts on Multiplication Facts and the Distributive Property.

The standard algorithm isn't the only way to multiply! Try these 5 other multiplication strategies with your middle school students! | maneuveringthemiddle.com

The post 5 Multiplication Strategies appeared first on Maneuvering the Middle.

]]>
Student-Centered Math Activities https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/how-to-plan-student-centered-math-activities/ https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/how-to-plan-student-centered-math-activities/#comments Tue, 17 Oct 2023 11:00:00 +0000 https://mtmmigration.flywheelsites.com/?p=1232 Planning student-centered math activities takes work! There is the actual planning and creating that takes time, but then there is also the actual classroom time to squeeze the activities into. I have five 7 favorite activities that are fun and engaging, but also help scaffold the learning.  I think that is why I love math […]

The post Student-Centered Math Activities appeared first on Maneuvering the Middle.

]]>
Planning student-centered math activities takes work! There is the actual planning and creating that takes time, but then there is also the actual classroom time to squeeze the activities into. I have five 7 favorite activities that are fun and engaging, but also help scaffold the learning. 

I think that is why I love math so much; it can be broken down into smaller components.  The key is being able to practice the different steps and skills with student-centered math activities.

Note: I have utilized these activities in various levels of classes. At one point, I taught all three levels of 8th grade math – intervention, on-level, and advanced – within the same year. While the content of the activities may change, the activities are perfect for any level.

CUT AND PASTES

Students Practice Breaking Down the Process

Why I Love Them: While a little messy, cut and pastes keep students using their hands and doing math at the same time. They work well independently, in partners, or working with a small group. I like providing multiple incorrect answers as well. This keeps kids thinking and is a way to incorporate mathematical practices through error analysis.

When to Use Them: Cut and pastes are great for anything that requires a step-by-step process from solving equations to adding and subtracting integers. This is perfect for advanced kiddos who want to go straight to the answer or intervention students who need to focus on one step at a time.

Teacher Tip from Donna E: “Cut and Paste Activities. I actually laminate these so there is no cutting and pasting. I use these more as a sorting activity. It cuts down the time and still works out their misconceptions.” If you are going this route, you can also make it a group activity to reduce the number of individual activities you have to prepare.

SHOP CUT AND PASTES

CARD SORTS

Students Practice Differentiating Similarities and Differences


Why I Love Them: Card sorts are an excellent way to quickly assess a student’s understanding of the concept. They require higher order thinking skills, as students are required to analyze the given information and make a categorization. Although they take a bit of time upfront (cutting and laminating), they can be used over and over again. I have used card sorts for the real number system, proportional relationships, word problems, statistical and nonstatistical questions, properties of geometric figures, etc.

When to Use Them: They are fabulous as a classroom activity with pairs, an activity for early finishers, or an activity to keep skills fresh and improve fluency. In an advanced class, you could give the cards without the headers and ask students to sort them in any way possible. You would be surprised at what observations they are able to make. In an intervention setting, the headers will provide structure. 

Teacher Tip from Jordan:  “If you are at a 1-1 school or have access to technology, putting card sorts on Desmos is super easy and a great way to do activities like this digitally!” This blog post from Kate’s Math Lesson shows you how.

SHOP CARD SORTS

SOLVE AND COLORS

Students Practice Basic Math Skills 

Why I Love Them: Solve and colors are really perfect because kids get to color. Something about colored pencils in math makes the lesson more successful.

When to Use Them: My favorite use for solve and colors is for practice of basic math skills, whether that be adding and subtracting rational numbers or multiplying and dividing decimals. They are easy to leave for substitutes, to use after testing, or as fun homework assignments.

Teacher Tip from Tyne: “Use the coloring as the incentive to complete the math. Once the math was complete, I checked their work and then allowed students to start coloring.”

SHOP SOLVE AND COLORS

MATCHING CARDS

Students Practice Recognizing Multiple Representations

Why I Love Them: Matching cards require about the same amount of time upfront as a card sort, so get yourself some parent volunteers. I have found great success using matching cards to show multiple relationships. This can be depicted with ratio tables and graphs, proportional relationships, fraction, decimal, percents, and linear relationships.

When to Use Them: Again, these are perfect for sponge activities, review activities, or quick and easy lessons on Fridays. I personally loved using these over and over again with my intervention students. We would use matching cards to build number fluency with fractions, decimals, and percent representations, as well as many other necessary skills.

Teacher Tip from Tyne: Card Matches (and cut and pastes) can be great whole-class activities! When I taught 6th grade Ratio Unit, I used the Multiple Representation Cut and Paste for the entire class. Each student got a card and students had to make a group of 4 with the equivalent graph, table, equation, and verbal description. For more practice, 

SHOP MATCHING ACTIVITIES

TASK CARDS

Students Practice Individual Skills within a Small Group

Why I Love Them: Students can be working on the same concept with different types of problems. They are super flexible! In fact, we wrote an entire blog posts on task cards! Lots of teachers use them for scoot or various games, but my favorite is small groups. You can incorporate them into stations, use them for formative assessments, etc. Task cards are easy to prep and can be utilized multiple times throughout the year.

When to Use Them: When I pulled small groups, I loved using task cards, hands down. I would have a small group of students work on various problems that were all around a similar topic. I could easily scaffold the students within my small group based on the card, starting with the most basic problems and then moving on to a multi-step word problem.

Teacher Tip from Angelique: “I use task cards as an escape room activity. I have never had ALL group members engaged and truly holding each other accountable to complete the work.”

Find it, Fix It and She Said, He Said

Students practice analyzing work for errors

Why I Love Them: These error analysis type activities provide opportunities for students to not only solve the problem on their own, but evaluate how and why mistakes can be made on particular skills.

When to Use Them: I like to start with He Said, She Saids and build up to Find It, Fix It. He Said, She Said requires students to determine which answer out of 2 is correct. Find It, Fix It requires students to look at 4 different answers and determine which one is incorrect. I like using both of these activities for stations or for a whole group activity to practice skills learned that week.

Teacher Tip from Tyne: “I would post He Said, She Said and Find It, Fix It cards around the classroom, so student pairs could work together to solve. I would set a 3-5 minute timer and announce for pairs to rotate to keep students from gathering around the same problem and to also keep students on track to finish.”

If you haven’t used these student-centered math activities in class, I encourage you to try them out. All Access has all of these activities (and so so so much more), but you can shop individual activities on TpT.

The post Student-Centered Math Activities appeared first on Maneuvering the Middle.

]]>
https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/how-to-plan-student-centered-math-activities/feed/ 7
How To Structure a 100 Minute Class Period https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/structure-a-100-minute-class-period/ https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/structure-a-100-minute-class-period/#comments Tue, 10 Oct 2023 11:00:00 +0000 https://mtmmigration.flywheelsites.com/?p=2022 Most math teachers would love a longer class period! I taught a 100 minute class one year, and it definitely had its pros and cons: Pros of a 100 Minute Class Period Cons of a 100 Minute Class Period Things to Consider Below is just one way to structure your 100 minute class period. Sometimes […]

The post How To Structure a 100 Minute Class Period appeared first on Maneuvering the Middle.

]]>
Most math teachers would love a longer class period! I taught a 100 minute class one year, and it definitely had its pros and cons:

Do you have a double blocked class?  Are you responsible for teaching a 100 minute class? Ideas for how to structure a 100 minute class period. | maneuveringthemiddle.com

Pros of a 100 Minute Class Period

  • More time
  • More instruction
  • More support
  • More practice
  • At the end of the year a student has had double the amount of time in that class than a traditional schedule
  • You should definitely be able to get through your scope and sequence with 100 minute class periods
  • If you had 100 minute classes, you probably have less students over all

Cons of a 100 Minute Class Period

  • 100 minutes is a loooooong time
  • Students get distracted
  • Classroom management is tough for that long of a time period

Things to Consider

  • Students are with you for double the amount of time, but that does not mean that you simply extend a 50 minute lesson. How can you be efficient and productive with the time?
  • Students need structure. How can you develop a routine that breaks up the 100 minutes but still provides structure?
  • Students (and adults) have a short attention span. A good rule of thumb is that new learning should not take longer than 1 plus your students’ age, so if you teach 12 year olds, your notes should last no longer than 13 minutes (12+1). 

Below is just one way to structure your 100 minute class period. Sometimes things do not go according to plan, but it is always a good idea to have a structured routine for both yourself and your students, especially if you will be with them for so long. 🙂  

Do First/Bell Ringer/Warm Up 5-10 minutes

I used a very straightforward warm-up routine to get students working when they entered the classroom. The goal is that students can get started without needing assistance from me or their peers.

I used this time to:

  • Greet students with a warm smile
  • Check homework completion (if I assigned it)
  • Take attendance

I would start a timer after the bell rang for 5 minutes and project it. When the timer went off, I spent the next 3-5 minutes either going over the warm up, going over last night’s homework, or a combination of both. 

Hook 2-5 minutes

These few minutes are a great time to introduce the objective and make real-world connections. It can also be utilized to review prior content that is connected or to have students review any new vocabulary. Anything that can create a bit of buy-in is beneficial.

Instruction 15-20 minutes 

The goal of instruction is to give students enough information to understand the concept, but not so much that you are doing all of the heavy lifting in class. It is a fine line to walk.

If you need more than that recommended amount of time for direct instruction, that is okay! Give students the opportunity to practice and engage in a meaningful way before returning to direct instruction. Another idea is to assign our student videos, since they adhere to this time recommendation. 

Remember that direct instruction isn’t your only option to teach a lesson. You could:

Lastly, I think it is important to note that if you are using our curriculum, you do not need to go over every single problem on a student handout. Work the problems ahead of time, decide which are the most important, and then save the rest for small group work time. 

Class Activity 20 minutes

This is the time period where students are engaging with the work in pairs or groups. In a 100 minute class, I recommend activities with movement, as well as collaboration. Sometimes we would do card sorts, but rather than sit at desks I would let students do the sort on the floor. Other times I would use stations or scavenger hunts to get kids up and moving or use math dates to have them work with various people. I would circulate and answer questions at this time. If you have a simple worksheet, make sure to read how to turn any worksheet into an activity.

Recap 5 minutes

As the activity wraps up, take a few minutes to recap what they have learned by asking students to summarize the lesson. Depending on the activity you could go over various responses or work a few of the difficult problems together.

Do you have a double blocked class?  Are you responsible for teaching a 100 minute class? Ideas for how to structure a 100 minute class period. | maneuveringthemiddle.com

Skill Practice 5 minutes

Most students have some need for remediation, gaps in their mathematical foundation, or need to expound upon their problem solving skills. Each day I would spend no more than five minutes addressing basic math skills. At the beginning of the year this was multiplication charts with various missing numbers or adding and subtracting decimals. I often spent several weeks on number sense by practicing converting between fractions, decimals, and percents.  

Station Work 30 minutes

I used this time to focus on small groups and remediation. I would work with small groups on their assignment, some students would work independently on a computer, while others would focus on concepts that they needed additional help with. This is also the time that my co-teacher would come into class, which was a life saver. You can read more about this on my math intervention schedule post.

You can read more about planning for and implementing stations here.

Clean Up/Close 5 minutes

By this time we are all wiped! It was time to wrap up, clean up, put away supplies, and get everything back in order.  

One Hundred minute classes never failed to wear me out, but the extra time was a gift! Especially when I think about the whirlwind of a 45 minute class

Who else has 100 minutes for math? How do you structure a 100 minute class? I would love to hear how you break it down!

Do you have a double blocked class?  Are you responsible for teaching a 100 minute class? Ideas for how to structure a 100 minute class period. | maneuveringthemiddle.com

Click to find out more about Maneuvering Math™.
Maneuvering Math - a skill based math intervention program for grades 6-8 | maneuveringmath.com

The post How To Structure a 100 Minute Class Period appeared first on Maneuvering the Middle.

]]>
https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/structure-a-100-minute-class-period/feed/ 20
Staying on Track with Your Scope and Sequence https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/staying-on-track-with-your-scope-and-sequence/ Tue, 03 Oct 2023 11:00:00 +0000 https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/?p=84013 As a teacher, getting behind in your scope and sequence can feel especially stressful. These tips will keep you on track so when it comes to test review time in the spring, you have covered all of your material, and you aren’t rushing to fit it all in and trying to review too! 1. Use […]

The post Staying on Track with Your Scope and Sequence appeared first on Maneuvering the Middle.

]]>
As a teacher, getting behind in your scope and sequence can feel especially stressful. These tips will keep you on track so when it comes to test review time in the spring, you have covered all of your material, and you aren’t rushing to fit it all in and trying to review too!

Getting behind with your scope and sequence is a common issue facing teachers!  These 8 tips will help you stay on track. | maneuveringthemiddle.com

1. Use a Scope and Sequence (grab ours!)

If you fail to plan, you plan to fail. If you aren’t provided a scope and sequence by your school, or if you haven’t made one yourself, the task of organizing 50+ math standards into 180 instructional days can be daunting.

Download our free pacing guides for 6th, 7th, 8th grade math, and Algebra 1!

You can see how our Maneuvering the Middle curriculum organizes the standards. From there, download a calendar on Google Sheets, fill in district holidays and professional development days, and work backwards from your state test.

2. Give Yourself Some Cushion

When planning for a unit, give a minimum of 3 days for cushion. No new material is introduced on these days. You can use these days for review, extra practice, or reteaching content that the majority of your students did not master prior. 

In a unit that is 15 days long, I would have one day for reviewing before the unit test, one day for an activity followed by a short quiz, and one additional day for an extra challenging skill that required more practice. That means that out of 5 days of the week, on average, I am only teaching new content 4 of those days. 

3. Be Familiar with Vertical Planning

The first year I taught 6th grade math, ordering rational numbers was in my first unit. My district provided a unit plan that gave me one day to teach this very complicated concept. When we got to ordering decimals and fractions, I modeled how to divide in order to convert fractions into decimals. My highest students raised their hands in protest – “You can’t divide a smaller number by a larger number!” Students lost their minds. That didn’t even include all of the students who forgot the standard algorithm for division. I was trying to cover too much in one lesson!

The lesson I learned that day was this – you need to know what your students already know and don’t know to successfully introduce new concepts. This will come in time, but take a moment to read vertical planning documents (provided in our All Access curriculum). This will prevent you from wasting entire days because you have to pivot on the fly.

4. Formative Assessments Keep You On Track

Knowing how your students are actually doing with the skills they are learning is paramount to staying on schedule each year. I recommend a daily formative assessment on the material covered that day while it is fresh. This can be a 2 question exit ticket or it can be as simple as collecting their classwork and checking problem #5. I like to keep these open-ended (why do students love to just circle multiple-choice answers?!). These are not always graded assignments; they are simply problems that tell me if I can move on to new material the next day or if we need to spend an extra day on the material.

What you are trying to avoid is students making it all the way to the unit test only to bomb spectacularly, and then you are bewildered and overwhelmed trying to plan next steps. 

5. Save the fun stuff for the alternative schedule days

I love when you can make math applicable to the real world! Projects or performance tasks are awesome! I like to save these types of assignments for days where the schedule is already a little crazy. This usually falls before holiday breaks, after pep rallies or on early release days. This is also when there are various field trips, students are more likely to be absent, and it doesn’t really make sense to cover new material. (Which leads me to a side rant that Fridays are also a bad day to cover new skills.)

Projects and performance tasks are a great way to spiral previous learned standards, so it provides a fun way to review.

6. Don’t Waste a Day for Absences

Don’t waste a single day! With an All Access membership, your students don’t have to lose an instructional day because you are sick or need to take a personal day. The student videos cover the student handouts. Instruction can continue even when you are absent! 

7. Consider a Self-Paced Classroom

If your students have a wide range of abilities, you may want to consider a self-paced classroom. We have two blog posts and podcast episodes that I highly recommend checking out if you are interested in letting students work at their own speed (What is the Grid Method?The Self-Paced Classroom). 

Students who need more time to master a skill can receive more of your attention since students who have already mastered a skill can move on without you. 

8. Sometimes You Need to Move On

As teachers, I believe that the ideal state is for 100% of students to master 100% of the concepts that we teach. This is not the reality we live in but we can work toward it. However, 100% of our students will master 0% of the concepts that we don’t teach.

Teachers have to cover all of the material in roughly 180 instructional days. I know it can feel impossible some days, but you can do it! If you find yourself stuck in a unit and the majority of your students are truly struggling, then maybe you need to revisit the material at a later date. Maybe your students are fatigued by the skill and moving onto something new will give them the mental clarity to try it again. 

How do you stay on track with your scope and sequence during the school year?

Getting behind with your scope and sequence is a common issue facing teachers!  These 8 tips will help you stay on track. | maneuveringthemiddle.com

The post Staying on Track with Your Scope and Sequence appeared first on Maneuvering the Middle.

]]>
Using Tape Diagrams to Solve Problems https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/using-tape-diagrams-to-solve-problems/ Tue, 19 Sep 2023 11:00:00 +0000 https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/?p=80871 Welcome to Part 3 of our Problem Solving Strategy series! Today we are diving into helpful tape diagrams to solve problems.  If you want to learn more, check out this book, Mathematize It!, that covers the topic of teaching how to solve word problems in much more detail. Be sure to read: Part 1: Three […]

The post Using Tape Diagrams to Solve Problems appeared first on Maneuvering the Middle.

]]>
Welcome to Part 3 of our Problem Solving Strategy series! Today we are diving into helpful tape diagrams to solve problems. 

If you want to learn more, check out this book, Mathematize It!, that covers the topic of teaching how to solve word problems in much more detail.

Be sure to read: Part 1: Three Word Problem Types to Teach | Part 2: Three Steps to Solving Word Problems

Diagrams are a way to model what is happening in a word problem. Diagrams help provide students with the “operational sense” that they need in order to write an equation and solve a problem. We cannot rely on keywords to determine an operation.

Let’s dive into two examples. (You can see my example of open number line diagram here.)

Tape diagrams are a great tool for problem solving and can be used to solve action, comparison, and relationship word problems. | maneuveringthemiddle.com

Tape Diagrams in a Relationship Problem

Let’s start with an example problem:

Tape diagrams are a great tool for problem solving and can be used to solve action, comparison, and relationship word problems. | maneuveringthemiddle.com

After we have restated the problem, we use a diagram to represent the problem. Notice that this tape diagram is helpful because of the whole in relation to the part.

There are 2 parts to this marching band: those in percussion and those NOT in percussion. These 2 parts will make up the total number of members in the band (this is our whole).

We also know that there are 28 in percussion, so one part is 28. That leaves the unknown value as our other “part” – those not in percussion. So we will write the variable x in our model.

And now we can use the bar model to write an equation.  We can see we need to add the two parts together and set it equal to the whole, so we could write the equation x + 28 = 196.

Tape diagrams are a great tool for problem solving and can be used to solve action, comparison, and relationship word problems. | maneuveringthemiddle.com

The model helps a student develop the operational sense to write an equation with addition, but then perform subtraction to find the difference between the two values. They can see that their solution needs to be a value smaller than the total number of members.

Tape Diagrams in a Comparison Problem

Tape diagrams are a great tool for problem solving and can be used to solve action, comparison, and relationship word problems. | maneuveringthemiddle.com

Without problem solving strategies, a student may write an equation like this, p + d + c = 10.50. They have an equation with 3 different variables and then are stuck. They don’t know how to solve for d, the price of the drink. Let’s try a tape diagram.

We know the popcorn is three times as expensive as the candy and the drink is twice as expensive as the candy. Let’s create a tape diagram under each food item in our bar model. 

Tape diagrams are a great tool for problem solving and can be used to solve action, comparison, and relationship word problems. | maneuveringthemiddle.com

We know the popcorn is three times as expensive as the candy. This can be hard for students to grasp, so give them an example with simple numbers: “If candy is $1, how much is popcorn?” $3. We want students to see that popcorn is more expensive than candy and that the cost of 3 candies is equal to the cost of one popcorn. 

Similarly, the drink is twice as expensive as the candy so the drink is equivalent to 2c’s. 

Finally, we know the cost of the candy is represented with the variable c. Now we are ready to make a connection between our model and write an equation.

Tape diagrams are a great tool for problem solving and can be used to solve action, comparison, and relationship word problems. | maneuveringthemiddle.com

The model clearly shows that 6c = 10.50. We have taken a complex word problem and written a one-step equation to solve for the variable c. Once a student solves for the value of c, they can refer back to determine the cost of the drink and popcorn.

Grab our Problem Solving Poster freebie to display in your classroom!

How do you use tape diagrams in your classroom?

P.S. Check out these related posts: Math Problem Solving Strategies and How to Teach Word Problems and Problem Solving

Tape diagrams are a great tool for problem solving and can be used to solve action, comparison, and relationship word problems. | maneuveringthemiddle.com

The post Using Tape Diagrams to Solve Problems appeared first on Maneuvering the Middle.

]]>
3 Steps to Solving Word Problems https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/3-steps-to-solving-word-problems/ Tue, 12 Sep 2023 11:00:00 +0000 https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/?p=80868 In order to be a successful math student, you have to persevere through various problems. This is a skill that can be taught and must be practiced.  (Noelle recently presented an amazing math training – Practical Problem Solving Strategies – this summer, and I was truly amazed at just how much I learned. I will […]

The post 3 Steps to Solving Word Problems appeared first on Maneuvering the Middle.

]]>
In order to be a successful math student, you have to persevere through various problems. This is a skill that can be taught and must be practiced. 

(Noelle recently presented an amazing math training – Practical Problem Solving Strategies – this summer, and I was truly amazed at just how much I learned. I will be breaking down the training into 3 blog posts over the course of this month, so if you missed the training, be sure to check back here for more updates.)

If you want to learn more, check out this book, Mathematize It!, that covers the topic of teaching how to solve word problems in much more detail.

Be sure to read Part 1, Three Word Problem Types to Teach, and grab our freebie below!

Word problems can be tricky and students (and teachers!) need all the help they can get! Check out these 3 steps to solving word problems. | maneuveringthemiddle.com

Here are the 3 steps to solving word problems:

1. Restate the Problem Situation

Let’s use this word problem about Pedro as our example:

(Check back to last week’s blog post to understand why this scenario falls in the action category.)

By restating the problem, we want students to avoid seeing phrases like “leftover” and decide immediately that they must subtract. We want students to focus on the action taking place. Here is an example of restating the problem. You could have students do this verbally (think, pair, share style) or write down bullet points. Notice that there are no numbers present. 

  • Pedro makes a pitcher of lemonade.
  • He pours some for his friends and now he has some left over.
  • How much lemonade did he start with?

2. Represent the Problem Situation

There are numerous ways to represent a problem: draw a picture, create a diagram or model, use manipulatives, or write an equation (don’t think numbers and variables; it can be something like “Pedro’s pitcher = leftovers + what he poured”).

Word problems can be tricky and students (and teachers!) need all the help they can get! Check out these 3 steps to solving word problems. | maneuveringthemiddle.com

The primary goal of this stage is that representations give students that “operational sense” they need in order to write an equation. We want them to know what to do next.

The 3 diagrams we use most in middle school math are open number lines, bar models, and ratio tables. For this problem, I recommend using an open number line.

You can also make the number line a vertical number line. Liquid in a pitcher as a vertical number line might make more sense visually to students. 

Word problems can be tricky and students (and teachers!) need all the help they can get! Check out these 3 steps to solving word problems. | maneuveringthemiddle.com

There was a starting amount of lemonade in the pitcher, but we actually don’t know what that is, so that is our unknown value that we will represent with the variable x on the number line.

Then Pedro pours 34 ounces of lemonade for his friends, here is our action or change, so we will represent that with a jump on the number line. Since we know our action describes removing lemonade from the pitcher, our jump will point down.

Now he looks at the pitcher and there are 20 ounces of lemonade left, this is the resulting value. The open number line allows us to identify what each value in the situation represents, and now we know that our unknown value was the starting amount. 

To finish out our lemonade problem, let’s use our representation to write an equation.

We have a starting amount, x, then we will subtract the amount he poured, 34, and that is equal to the amount remaining in the pitcher, 20.

Notice how the equation has subtraction in it, (which makes sense because the situation describes removing a quantity) but the operation we will perform to find the solution is addition. This is what we mean by developing operational sense for a situation.

The number line also helps students see that the solution needs to be a value greater than 20, since x is higher on the vertical number line. 

These representations can be so powerful as we help transition students from the concrete to the abstract!

Be sure to grab our free Problem Solving Posters that have examples of all of these representations.

3. Solve and Reflect

When we think about problem solving, we often think about the end goal being to find the solution, which of course is important.

But in order to grow our students as problem solvers, it’s important to also take time for individual and classroom reflection. Reflection is such an important part of making meaning. If students can construct mathematical arguments to justify their solutions, you know they fully understood the problem.

After students have worked through a word problem, encourage them to share the different models or equations that they came up with, and have them explain the operations they used to solve a problem. Students will learn from each other as they are exposed to different ways of thinking about the same problem.

Word problems can be tricky and students (and teachers!) need all the help they can get! Check out these 3 steps to solving word problems. | maneuveringthemiddle.com

P.S. Check out these related posts: Math Problem Solving Strategies and How to Teach Word Problems and Problem Solving

The post 3 Steps to Solving Word Problems appeared first on Maneuvering the Middle.

]]>
3 Types of Word Problems to Teach https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/3-types-of-word-problems-to-teach/ Tue, 05 Sep 2023 11:00:00 +0000 https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/?p=80859 Problem solving is a multifaceted process! While I’ve written about Math Problem Solving Strategies and How to Teach Word Problems and Problem Solving, there is still so much more to cover. Noelle presented an amazing math training this summer on Practical Problem Solving Strategies. I was truly amazed at just how much I learned. I […]

The post 3 Types of Word Problems to Teach appeared first on Maneuvering the Middle.

]]>
Problem solving is a multifaceted process! While I’ve written about Math Problem Solving Strategies and How to Teach Word Problems and Problem Solving, there is still so much more to cover.

Noelle presented an amazing math training this summer on Practical Problem Solving Strategies. I was truly amazed at just how much I learned. I will be breaking down the training into 3 blog posts over the course of this month, so if you missed the training, be sure to check back here for more updates.

If you want to learn more, check out this book, Mathematize It!, that covers the topic of teaching how to solve word problems in much more detail.

Today we are going to talk about the 3 types or categories of word problems that you teach and your students may face: action, relationship, and comparison. The purpose of identifying word problem types is to force students to slow down and analyze what is happening in the word problem before jumping to computation.

You can also grab our problem solving posters freebie below!

There are 3 types of word problems that your students will benefit from knowing: action, relationship, and comparison. Learn more here! | maneuveringthemiddle.com

Action Word Problems

Here is an example of an action word problem: 

How do we know that this is an action? Ask yourself:

  • Did something occur?
  • Was there some kind of change?

If yes, the word problem likely falls into the action category.

Relationship Word Problems

Here is an example of a relationship word problem: 

There are 3 types of word problems that your students will benefit from knowing: action, relationship, and comparison. Learn more here! | maneuveringthemiddle.com

How do we know this is a relationship? Ask yourself:

  • Are parts being described or referred to in relation to a whole? 
  • Is a whole being described or referred to in relation to a part?

If yes, the word problem is a relationship. Here we can see the parts of the marching band relate to the total number of marching band members. 

Comparison Word Problems

And lastly, here is an example of a comparison word problem: 

How do we know this is a comparison?

Ask yourself:

  • Is something in the word problem being described in comparison to something else?

In this word problem, we can see that the cost of popcorn is being described by the cost of the candy. 

Why is this helpful to know?

Why do students need to know this? Well, by observing and “making meaning” from the words and scenarios they are processing, students are less likely to rush to determine a path to the solution. 

Does this sound familiar? Students quickly perform some operations with the values given. In this first step of the problem-solving process, we want to take the focus off the values and direct students to notice what is being described in the problem.

The goal is not for them to be able to identify and put the word problem into the correct category. We simply want students to notice what is happening, and over time they will start to recognize patterns in word problems. 

Next week, I will dive deeper into how we take these word problem types and use them to help students with the first part of the problem solving process: restating the problem.

Grab our problem solving posters freebie!

In the meantime, can you identify the category these sample problems belong in?

  1. Ricky buys a package of chicken to use throughout the week. On Monday, he uses 28 ounces to make chicken salad for lunch. On Thursday, he grills 53 ounces of chicken for dinner. If Ricky determines he has 37 ounces of chicken remaining to cook, how many ounces of chicken did he buy at the beginning of the week?
  2. Gavin has two pet turtles, a red-eared slider and a map turtle. His red-eared slider weighs 2,680 grams and his map turtle weighs 670 grams. How many times bigger is the red-eared slider than the map turtle?
  3. Ivory created a paper chain of her school colors, blue, green, and white, as a decoration for a pep rally. The blue section measured 5.5  feet long, the green section measured 4.25  feet long, and the white section measured 3.75  feet long. What is the total length of the paper chain?
  4. A king-sized chocolate bar has a mass of 2.6 ounces. A regular-sized chocolate bar has a mass of 1.55 ounces. How many more ounces is the king-sized chocolate bar than the regular-sized chocolate bar?
  5. A nature center has a stocked pond with an automatic fish feeder. The fish feeder has 70.5 pounds of fish food and releases food into the pond twice a day. If the feeder releases 2.6 pounds of food in the morning and 1.2 pounds of food in the evening, how many pounds of food are remaining in the feeder at the end of the day? 
  6. The San Francisco Bay Area is hosting a triathlon, a race consisting of swimming, biking, and running. The athletes will swim for 0.75  miles and bike for 15.5  miles. If the total distance of the triathlon is 20.5  miles, how many miles is the running portion of the race?
There are 3 types of word problems that your students will benefit from knowing: action, relationship, and comparison. Learn more here! | maneuveringthemiddle.com

The post 3 Types of Word Problems to Teach appeared first on Maneuvering the Middle.

]]>
How to Teach Problem Solving https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/how-to-teach-problem-solving/ https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/how-to-teach-problem-solving/#comments Tue, 27 Jun 2023 11:00:00 +0000 https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/?p=35326 Problem solving can be a challenge to teach. Perhaps, it is because we are trying to teach students to manage and implement a myriad of skills: thinking, observing, investigating, reasoning through situations, and accessing prior knowledge. Check out these strategies to get students thinking! LISTEN ON: APPLE PODCAST | SPOTIFY Problem Solving with Word Problems […]

The post How to Teach Problem Solving appeared first on Maneuvering the Middle.

]]>

Problem solving can be a challenge to teach. Perhaps, it is because we are trying to teach students to manage and implement a myriad of skills: thinking, observing, investigating, reasoning through situations, and accessing prior knowledge. Check out these strategies to get students thinking!

Problem solving can be a challenge to teach. Tackling word problems and find out what you should not be doing when teaching problem solving.| maneuveringthemiddle.com

LISTEN ON: APPLE PODCAST | SPOTIFY

Problem Solving with Word Problems

In the book The Young Child and Mathematics, Juanita Copley states that problem solving happens through “doing, talking, reflecting, discussing, observing, investigating, listening, and reasoning.”

We can often mistake different methods for decoding word problems as problem solving skills. R.U.B.I.E.S. and C.U.B.E.S. and all of the acronyms where students are supposed to underline, box, or circle may feel productive, but they cannot produce the skills needed to solve real-world problems. 

Why Are Problem Solving is so Difficult

There are a lot of different factors that play into this challenge and it could be a single isolated one or it could be a combination of several factors.

  • Need for perseverance – some students can routinely go through all of the procedures involved in solving a math problem, but they haven’t yet acquired the perseverance needed to reason through a real-life situation 
  • Reading skills — tasks and real-world applications require reading comprehension and decoding skills to fully understand the situation and apply the mathematical reasoning skills necessary to solve
  • Multiple steps — requires students to create a plan with several steps and work through the plan
  • Incorrect vocabulary usage — when solving word problems, sometimes students have been instructed to primarily look for specific words like “per” “of” “each” “sum”…and then they attempt to apply the operation — but we know that doesn’t always work and can also over simplify the process.

Shift the Focus from the Answer

This post and video from Phil Daro (co-author of the CCSS) says that based on their studies, teachers need to shift the focus from answer-getting to sense-making. “When the answer is the only goal, genuine learning is undermined.”

He says that teachers put too much emphasis on the answers; answers are part of the process, but they are not the only learning outcome. That wrong answers are part of the learning outcome. 

  • Consider framing wrong “answers” as “discoveries.” If students reached a wrong answer, you talked more about why that approach doesn’t work instead of how to get the right answer.
  • Consider giving students the answers before solving, removing some of the power, and instead spent class time figuring out different ways to get to the answer.

The goal of solving math problems is the critical thinking that happens along the way. Not the answer.

How do we teach problem solving?

Learning is not necessarily the solution to a specific question. We want students to apply sense-making to the rest of their lives.

I really want you to watch the video, but one of Daro’s suggestions is to provide students the correct answer before having students solve. It removes some of the power of finding the right answer, and puts an emphasis on figuring out different ways to get the answer. There are so many different ways to solve problems and it encourages students to think in this way.

Tip #1 – Allow flexibility in how students solve problems.

Showing your work is said so often that it can seem meaningless to a student. Give students options for ways they can show their work.

Grab a free REPRESENT IT bulletin board that will provide a visual aid for different ways to represent their work!

Here are a few examples:

  • Write an equation
  • Solve a simpler problem
  • Draw a bar model
  • Draw a picture
  • Draw a graph
  • Use an open number line
  • Use manipulatives
  • Guess and check
  • Use logical reasoning
  • Make a ratio table

Tip #2- Focus on quality over quantity.

Quality over quantity is going to mean different things for different teachers, depending on the number of students, the length of your class period and even the different concepts being covered.  Here is one example for helping students focus on “sense-making” in a problem. 

Let’s take this pretty basic word problem >> Mr. Roy overdrafts his account by $25.50 and then is charged a $10.35 fee by the bank. What is the change in Mr. Roy’s bank account?

Before modeling a think-aloud to discuss how to solve this problem (and move on quickly to the next), ask so many questions that students will have no choice but to THINK about what the problem is asking for. Shift the workload to the students. Here are a few I brainstormed:

  • Who is Mr. Roy?
  • What is an overdraft?
  • Is a fee a good thing or bad thing? For who?
  • Why is Mr. Roy charged a fee?
  • What is the change measuring? 
  • Does he have more money or less money?

I just asked 6 questions and haven’t even gotten to the math yet! Model for students the type of critical thinking and questioning you want students to use when they are solving solo.

Then have students just try out the problem. Circulate to see the different methods. Come together to discuss the different ways you saw the problem solved. 

Bring this problem to life by providing Monopoly money to students to “act” it out. 

I love seeing students be problem solvers and I think it is such a lifelong skill that they will always carry with them. In fact, they may not frequently need to calculate the equation of a line or the probability of a compound event, but each and everyday they will use their “sense-making skills” to solve problems and make decisions. 

If you want to focus on teaching problem solving, then All Access may be right for you!

Problem solving can be a challenge to teach. Tackling word problems and find out what you should not be doing when teaching problem solving. | maneuveringthemiddle.com

The post How to Teach Problem Solving appeared first on Maneuvering the Middle.

]]>
https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/how-to-teach-problem-solving/feed/ 1
Math Problem Solving Strategies https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/problem-solving-strategies/ https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/problem-solving-strategies/#comments Mon, 12 Jun 2023 11:00:00 +0000 https://mtmmigration.flywheelsites.com/?p=2667 How many times have you been teaching a concept that students are feeling confident in, only for them to completely shut down when faced with a word problem?  For me, the answer is too many to count.  Word problems require problem solving strategies. And more than anything, word problems require decoding, eliminating extra information, and […]

The post Math Problem Solving Strategies appeared first on Maneuvering the Middle.

]]>

How many times have you been teaching a concept that students are feeling confident in, only for them to completely shut down when faced with a word problem?  For me, the answer is too many to count.  Word problems require problem solving strategies. And more than anything, word problems require decoding, eliminating extra information, and opportunities for students to solve for something that the question is not asking for.  There are so many places for students to make errors! Let’s talk about some problem solving strategies that can help guide and encourage students!

Problem solving strategies are a must teach skill. Today I analyze strategies that I have tried and introduce the strategy I plan to use this school year. | maneuveringthemiddle.com

Math Problem Solving Strategies

Problem solving strategies are a must teach skill. Today I analyze strategies that I have tried and introduce the strategy I plan to use this school year.  | maneuveringthemiddle.com

1. C.U.B.E.S.

C.U.B.E.S stands for circle the important numbers, underline the question, box the words that are keywords, eliminate extra information, and solve by showing work.  

  • Why I like it: Gives students a very specific ‘what to do.’
  • Why I don’t like it: With all of the annotating of the problem, I’m not sure that students are actually reading the problem.  None of the steps emphasize reading the problem but maybe that is a given.

2. R.U.N.S.

R.U.N.S. stands for read the problem, underline the question, name the problem type, and write a strategy sentence. 

  • Why I like it: Students are forced to think about what type of problem it is (factoring, division, etc) and then come up with a plan to solve it using a strategy sentence.  This is a great strategy to teach when you are tackling various types of problems.
  • Why I don’t like it: Though I love the opportunity for students to write in math, writing a strategy statement for every problem can eat up a lot of time.

3. U.P.S. CHECK

U.P.S. Check stands for understand, plan, solve, and check.

  • Why I like it: I love that there is a check step in this problem solving strategy.  Students having to defend the reasonableness of their answer is essential for students’ number sense.
  • Why I don’t like it: It can be a little vague and doesn’t give concrete ‘what to dos.’ Checking that students completed the ‘understand’ step can be hard to see.

Problem solving strategies are a must teach skill. Today I analyze strategies that I have tried and introduce the strategy I plan to use this school year.  | maneuveringthemiddle.com

4. Maneuvering the Middle Strategy AKA K.N.O.W.S.

Here is the strategy that I adopted a few years ago.  It doesn’t have a name yet nor an acronym, (so can it even be considered a strategy…?)

UPDATE: IT DOES HAVE A NAME! Thanks to our lovely readers, Wendi and Natalie!

  • Know: This will help students find the important information.
  • Need to Know: This will force students to reread the question and write down what they are trying to solve for.
  • Organize:  I think this would be a great place for teachers to emphasize drawing a model or picture.
  • Work: Students show their calculations here.
  • Solution: This is where students will ask themselves if the answer is reasonable and whether it answered the question.

I have rolled this problem solving strategy out to students, and it went decently.  When I provided the boxes (seen below) for them to fill out, I received no heavy sighs that I was forcing them to show their work.  
I think the boxes made it clear that it was part of the required work – not something ‘extra’ I was wasting their time with.Problem solving strategies are a must teach skill. Today I analyze strategies that I have tried and introduce the strategy I plan to use this school year. | maneuveringthemiddle.com

Ideas for Promoting Showing Your Work

  • White boards are a helpful resource that make (extra) writing engaging!
  • Celebrating when students show their work. Create a bulletin board that says ***I showed my work*** with student exemplars.
  • Take a picture that shows your expectation for how work should look and post it on the board like Marissa did here.

Problem solving strategies are a must teach skill. Today I analyze strategies that I have tried and introduce the strategy I plan to use this school year.  | maneuveringthemiddle.com

Show Work Digitally

Many teachers are facing how to have students show their work or their problem solving strategy when tasked with submitting work online. Platforms like Kami make this possible. Go Formative has a feature where students can use their mouse to “draw” their work. 

If you want to spend your energy teaching student problem solving instead of writing and finding math problems, look no further than our All Access membership. Click the button to learn more. 

Students who plan succeed at a higher rate than students who do not plan.  Do you have a go to problem solving strategy that you teach your students? 

Problem solving strategies are a must teach skill. Today I analyze strategies that I have tried and introduce the strategy I plan to use this school year. | maneuveringthemiddle.com

Editor’s Note: Maneuvering the Middle has been publishing blog posts for nearly 8 years! This post was originally published in September of 2017. It has been revamped for relevancy and accuracy.

The post Math Problem Solving Strategies appeared first on Maneuvering the Middle.

]]>
https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/problem-solving-strategies/feed/ 18
5 Ideas for Open Number Lines https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/5-ideas-for-open-number-lines/ Tue, 06 Jun 2023 11:00:00 +0000 https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/?p=73649 What is an Open Number Line? An open number line is exactly what it sounds like – a blank number line that students can use to solve a multitude of middle school math problems. Open number lines provide a great visual for abstract concepts.  Let’s talk about 5 ways to use open number lines in […]

The post 5 Ideas for Open Number Lines appeared first on Maneuvering the Middle.

]]>
What is an Open Number Line? An open number line is exactly what it sounds like – a blank number line that students can use to solve a multitude of middle school math problems. Open number lines provide a great visual for abstract concepts. 

Let’s talk about 5 ways to use open number lines in middle school math!

1. Fluency

Adding friendly numbers – This method leaves one addend whole and adds the other addend in friendly amounts. 

These 5 ideas for open number lines will help your students solve math problems from fluency to word problems. | maneuveringthemiddle.com

In this example, 275 was added to 173 in friendly chunks of 200, 50, 20, and 5 to get the final sum of 448.

Adding to friendly numbers – This method adds a small amount first to get a partial sum that is friendly, then adds the remaining amount in friendly chunks.

In this example, 2 was added to 398 to get the friendly number of 400. Then, the remaining 112 was added in chunks of 100 and 12 to get the final sum of 512.

Distance (Subtraction) – Because subtraction is the distance between the two values, students can use an open number line to count up to the total distance between the two numbers.  Values closer together are better suited for this method.

Removal (Subtraction) – Removal takes away to find the difference between two values. Values further apart may be easier to subtract using removal.

Constant Difference – Add or subtract the same number from both values to make the numbers easier while keeping a constant difference. 

In this example, 620-370 was adjusted by subtracting 20 from each value (620-20=600 and 370-20=350)  and finding the difference between 600-350. (I could have added 30 to 370 and 620 too!)

2. Ratios and Conversions

Double Number Lines – Double number lines are useful for ratios and conversions. If you typically use a table for solving ratio problems, then an open number line is not too far off.

These 5 ideas for open number lines will help your students solve math problems from fluency to word problems. | maneuveringthemiddle.com

3. Ordering Numbers

You can read more about this in our Ordering Rational Numbers post, but ultimately, no problem that involves ordering numbers is complete without a number line. It provides context and is a way to actually show student thinking. 

While starting with a completely blank number line can work for some students, I recommend writing in whole numbers first.

Example: -½, -2.2, -1.5

Before placing a single number from above on an open number line, I would ask students to provide the integer numbers (for simplicity sake, I am referring to -3, -2, -1, and 0) that make sense with the numbers provided in the example.

Once determined, students will have a much easier job placing -1.5 between -2 and -1 than on a blank number line with -½ and -2.2.

Hint: Use a vertical number line when involving negative numbers.

4. Problem Solving

These problem solving strategies are best explained in word problem format. Please read the word problems to fully understand the open number line diagrams.

Active Situations – This method describes a situation in which quantities are joined or removed. There is a start, a change, and a result.

Part Part Whole – This describes a relationship that includes two or more parts that relate to a whole.

Additive Comparisons – These are situations that describe how two quantities compare to each other. They include a smaller quantity, a larger quantity, and the difference between the two quantities.

These 5 ideas for open number lines will help your students solve math problems from fluency to word problems. | maneuveringthemiddle.com

I had no idea there are so many ways to use number lines to solve so many different types of middle school math problems. Do you use open number lines?

If you are interested in learning more about open number lines, our Maneuvering Math Intervention Program will be adding a new module called Jump Start in time for Back to School Season! Jump Start is an introductory component to equip students with tools and strategies for number operations and problem solving.

It will help students reason with numbers, recognize and effectively represent problem-solving situations and approach math with increased confidence and tools to use throughout challenging concepts.

These 5 ideas for open number lines will help your students solve math problems from fluency to word problems. | maneuveringthemiddle.com

The post 5 Ideas for Open Number Lines appeared first on Maneuvering the Middle.

]]>
5 Tips for Implementing Performance Tasks https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/implementing-performance-tasks/ Tue, 16 May 2023 11:00:00 +0000 https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/?p=71678 The first performance task that I ever implemented was district provided and meant to replace the standard benchmark assessment. It did not go well; students felt defeated and I felt frustrated. Here is what I should have done: Before I begin, let’s talk about what a performance task is: “A performance task is any learning […]

The post 5 Tips for Implementing Performance Tasks appeared first on Maneuvering the Middle.

]]>
The first performance task that I ever implemented was district provided and meant to replace the standard benchmark assessment. It did not go well; students felt defeated and I felt frustrated. Here is what I should have done:

Before I begin, let’s talk about what a performance task is:

“A performance task is any learning activity or assessment that asks students to perform to demonstrate their knowledge, understanding and proficiency. Performance tasks yield a tangible product and/or performance that serves as evidence of learning.” (From Defined Learning)

Keep reading to get a free performance task for middle school math + algebra 1.

These 5 tips for Implementing performance tasks will make your job easier and your students feel more successful - check them out here!

1. Prepare Your Students

My first mistake was assuming that I could successfully replace a multiple-choice test with a performance task and act like they are the same. Performance tasks require students to not just recall what they have learned but apply what they have learned to a problem. The effort is more sustained. A student cannot circle an answer and move on to the next problem like they can on a traditional assessment. 

If you plan to use a performance task as an assessment to be completed independently, I recommend you model and complete a performance task together with your class at some point during the unit. Consider it like a test review. 

You will most likely receive higher quality work because students know what the criteria for success is. You can show how you want diagrams labeled, or how thorough their explanations need to be, or whatever your heart desires. 

Performance tasks do not have to be an independent assignment or assessment! Our Maneuvering the Middle performance tasks are designed to be collaborative. Here are some ways you could assign performance tasks:

  • Group Activity  – Provide roles so all group members contribute.
  • Partners – Assign partners. You can have a partner responsible for turning in one performance task that they both contributed to, or each student is still responsible for turning in their own task, but are still able to work collaboratively. 

2. Provide Checkpoints and Opportunities for Feedback

A performance task typically encompasses everything learned in a unit, so the material is still very fresh to students. We want students to do well, right!? That is why I recommend checkpoints. Depending on the performance task, you may want to check students’ work before they proceed. You can do this a variety of ways:

  • Draw a star on the performance tasks or circle a question number – when students reach this point, they raise their hand so you can check before they move on. (Bonus: this is also a great way to grade as you go! Instead of having a stack of paper to grade at the end, you can come up with a system on your clipboard that allows you to add or deduct points.)
  • Circulate and keep circulating – You are probably already doing this, so keep on keeping on! I like to walk and add checkmarks to correct answers to give students confidence and prevent students from raising their hands to ask if the problem is correct. I want raised hands to be for questions, so I can prioritize appropriately.
  • Check based on time elapsed – I also refer to this as chunking. Instead of telling students they have 50 minutes to complete the entire task, tell students they have 10 minutes for Section A, 15 minutes for Section B, and so on. Use these time restraints to circulate and check where students are and check for accuracy. “You should be wrapping up Section A. I am coming around to check while you work on Section B. You have 15 minutes to finish Section B.” *sets timer*

3. Complete the Performance Tasks Yourself Sans Answer Key

I recommend doing this for any assessment, assignment, or activity! Complete the performance tasks on your own without any assistance from a calculator (if students don’t get one) or without the answer key to guide you.

This will do 3 important things: 

  1. This should give you an estimate for how long it will take a student to complete it. It is safe to assume that a student will take around 3 times longer to complete than the teacher.  If this exceeds a class period, you can make plans to spend two class periods on the performance task or shorten the task to accommodate. 
  2. Most importantly, it will help you identify areas where students may feel confused or need extra support. If you hesitate or have to reference something to proceed, your students most likely will too! 
  3. If you created the performance task from scratch, consider asking another teacher to complete it to receive feedback. This might save you a headache later. 

4. Students Who Need Motivation

Performance tasks require sustained effort which can be a challenge for some students. You still want to hold these students accountable for their work, but you can do a variety of tricks to keep them motivated. Students are generally motivated by choice and by learning about things that they care about. Can you alter the performance task to be about something that they love? Even if that means you take a pen and mark up their task on the fly. 

Is the task accessible to them? If not, find an entry point. Perhaps, they need a formula or a filled-in-example . You may have to alter the task a bit for this to happen, but students have different needs and that is ok. 

Last but not least, pulling a small group is a great place for students to feel supported and successful. You don’t have to do the task for them, but you can prompt them and keep a closer eye on them. 

5. When to Implement a Performance Task

I love how Marissa implements a performance task! She assigns performance tasks the day after a test to her students who mastered their unit test. Performance tasks act as a perfect extension for these students who are ready to move on. For the students who did not master concepts from the unit test and need reteaching, she pulls a small group. 

Maneuvering the Middle’s performance tasks are low-prep and also come in Google Slides format.

What tips do you have for implementing performance tasks?

These 5 tips for Implementing performance tasks will make your job easier and your students feel more successful - check them out here!

The post 5 Tips for Implementing Performance Tasks appeared first on Maneuvering the Middle.

]]>
3 Benefits of Math Word Walls https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/3-benefits-of-math-word-walls/ Tue, 09 May 2023 11:00:00 +0000 https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/?p=71667 Word walls contribute function, beauty, and support students’ acquisition of math content. What is not to love?! Let’s chat about why every math classroom can benefit from a word wall. You can also read more tips about implementing a word wall here. What are the benefits of a math word wall? 1. BUILD A COMMON […]

The post 3 Benefits of Math Word Walls appeared first on Maneuvering the Middle.

]]>
Word walls contribute function, beauty, and support students’ acquisition of math content. What is not to love?!

Let’s chat about why every math classroom can benefit from a word wall. You can also read more tips about implementing a word wall here.

Math word walls are beneficial for students - functional, useful, and beautiful to your classroom. Check out more benefits here!

What are the benefits of a math word wall?

1. BUILD A COMMON VOCABULARY BANK

Word walls are a necessity for math. In middle school, each unit introduces (on average) around 5 new vocabulary terms. If new terms are necessary for success in a unit, then your students better know them!

What better way for students to internalize these words than to see them, reference them, and then use them? A word wall makes this process accessible.

When you have trained your students to find new or unfamiliar words on the word wall, then you are setting them up to use their resources and promote independent thinking. 

For the most useful word wall, include the term, the definition, and a visual. It is inevitable that your students will need the occasional brain break and may need to stare off; if that is the case, I find it a good use of time if they can be staring at math words. You can read more about math vocabulary here.

2. SUPPORT BILINGUAL STUDENTS

All students benefit from easy access to frequently used words, their definition, and an image, but for bilingual students, it can be especially helpful! Word walls provide a visual aid for students who are learning English. 

For your Spanish speaking students, our new Middle School Math Word Wall Resource includes the Spanish term and Spanish definition to support your bilingual students even more!

3. INTRODUCE NEW TERMS AND REVIEW PREVIOUSLY LEARNED WORDS

Update 7/28/2023: Maneuvering the Middle now has a Middle School Math + Algebra 1 Word Wall.

As you can see in the video below, our Word Wall includes 190 essential math terms, their clear-cut definitions, and their visual representations.

We’ve included Spanish translations for all terms and definitions, ensuring a supportive and accessible learning experience for English Language Learners.

They were designed to be minimal prep and flexible to customize the formatting to suit your students’ unique needs.

That is a copious amount of words for students to know and use, which makes a word wall even more necessary. While they may only learn around 50 new words each year in math, they also will need to access words from previous grade levels. 

While students may be introduced to the term “product” in elementary school, that term will continue to appear in later grades. This is also true of words like equivalent, volume, area, difference, expression, and well, so on and so on. Math vocabulary terms continue from elementary to high school because math builds with each subsequent year. 

TIP: Don’t start the year with a complete word wall. Either add to your word wall as the vocabulary term is introduced or display terms unit by unit. 

The phrase “out of sight, out of mind” rings true. When students don’t see something every day, they tend to forget it. How does your classroom benefit from a word wall?

Math word walls are beneficial for students - functional, useful, and beautiful to your classroom. Check out more benefits here!

The post 3 Benefits of Math Word Walls appeared first on Maneuvering the Middle.

]]>
Using a Word Wall in Middle School https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/using-word-wall-middle-school/ https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/using-word-wall-middle-school/#comments Tue, 02 May 2023 11:00:00 +0000 https://mtmmigration.flywheelsites.com/?p=1892 Word walls can feel like one more thing to maintain in the classroom, but when I see a student reference the word wall for help, then the word wall is well worth the extra effort. Here are a few tips I have for creating, maintaining, and maximizing the use of a middle school math word […]

The post Using a Word Wall in Middle School appeared first on Maneuvering the Middle.

]]>
Word walls can feel like one more thing to maintain in the classroom, but when I see a student reference the word wall for help, then the word wall is well worth the extra effort.

Here are a few tips I have for creating, maintaining, and maximizing the use of a middle school math word wall.

Keep reading to check out Maneuvering the Middle’s new Middle School Math Word Wall.

Word walls can provide scaffolding, visual reminders, & increase academic vocabulary!  Ideas for setting up & using your word wall in a middle school class.  | maneuveringthemiddle.com

1. Structuring Your Word Wall

A word wall that includes the math term, the definition, and a visual representation will make the most impact.  The text should be visible from across the room, and should be in a place where a majority of students can see it.  I have many English Language Learners in my classes, so word walls are especially helpful for them.  Some of my fellow teachers even use the Spanish translation as additional leverage for students. (Keep reading to learn about a new resource from Maneuvering the Middle!)

I like my words to stay up all year as we learn and review the words.  This helps students use academic vocabulary and make connections between the different units.  I love when a student can see how a proportional relationship and a linear equation are connected!

At the beginning of the year, I only have the categories posted at the top of the wall.  I then include the words as they are introduced, then move on to the next category of words included in the next unit. 

2. WAYS TO USE

Incentivize Academic Vocabulary

While word walls make a classroom beautiful, their ultimate function is to be used.  This means that you need to make students aware of its existence and its usefulness.  

To do this, incentive using vocabulary terms from the word wall by rewarding students who use the vocabulary correctly when answering a question or explaining an answer.  When students are about to begin practicing a new skill, I ask students to point to the word that will help them if I am unavailable. 

During mad minute exercises, I include vocabulary that they can provide a definition with one word (example: quotient=division).  If they don’t know it, they can take an extra second to look up at the word wall.  

Flyswatter Game

If you want students to get familiar with your word wall, use the Fly Swatter Game.  This is a very engaging review game. If you are like me and don’t bother to cover up anything in your room before a test, this will help remind students where to look when they are stuck.  Two students face off with fly swatters in hand.  You give them a prompt such as “2, 4, 6, 8” are examples of ______”  And the first student to swat the word ‘multiples’ earns their team a point.

Non-Content Words

Word walls do not have to be specific to your content area.  I have character terms like tenacity, curiosity, courage, and community on my wall too.  These are our school values, and it is important that these words are referenced by students and me daily.

Flashlight Game

This game is great for those last few minutes of class as a sponge activity.  Turn off the lights and use a flashlight to point to a word on the wall.  Students can then shout out an example, the definition, or even a counterexample. 

3. Making a Word Wall

Knowing that teachers have more to do than hours in the day, creating the word posters is a task easily assigned to students who finish early or those students in your homeroom who are always asking how they can help. 

After a unit test, I would have early finishers complete this as an activity for the next unit.  I would give the word + definition + example + picture that I wanted them to use, and choose the best ones to go on the wall. I did this for several years before I wanted a more uniform look. 

There are also lots of resources on Pinterest or TPT to choose from. My advice is to batch this task during the summer. Print everything you need, laminate, and decide how you will store them. Then you can post the new words for each unit to your growing word wall. 

Update 7/28/2023: Maneuvering the Middle now has a Middle School Math + Algebra 1 Word Wall.

As you can see in the video below, our Word Wall includes 190 essential math terms, their clear-cut definitions, and their visual representations.

We’ve included Spanish translations for all terms and definitions, ensuring a supportive and accessible learning experience for English Language Learners.

They were designed to be minimal prep and flexible to customize the formatting to suit your students’ unique needs.

At first a word wall might seem excessive or more like an “extra” thing to do, but now that I have seen how my students use it, I am sold!  How do you use your word wall in your middle school classroom?  

Maneuvering the Middle has been publishing blog posts for 8 years. This post was originally published in November of 2016. It has been updated for relevance and clarity.

Word walls can provide scaffolding, visual reminders, & increase academic vocabulary!  Ideas for setting up & using your word wall in a middle school class.  | maneuveringthemiddle.com

The post Using a Word Wall in Middle School appeared first on Maneuvering the Middle.

]]>
https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/using-word-wall-middle-school/feed/ 6
Using Test Corrections as a Tool for Mastery https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/using-test-corrections-tool-mastery/ https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/using-test-corrections-tool-mastery/#comments Tue, 11 Apr 2023 21:01:00 +0000 https://mtmmigration.flywheelsites.com/?p=1960 Teaching students to do test corrections doesn’t have to be time consuming or result in a paper pile!  Test corrections are actually one of my favorite tools for pushing students and measuring their progress.   Giving math tests can be equally rewarding and frustrating.  As a teacher, you can see what skills your students really understood […]

The post Using Test Corrections as a Tool for Mastery appeared first on Maneuvering the Middle.

]]>
Teaching students to do test corrections doesn’t have to be time consuming or result in a paper pile!  Test corrections are actually one of my favorite tools for pushing students and measuring their progress.  

Giving math tests can be equally rewarding and frustrating.  As a teacher, you can see what skills your students really understood and what skills you thought your students understood. 


I try to remind myself that the test is not the end goal. My students’ learning and preparedness for the next grade level is the end goal.  So what do you do when you have students who bomb a unit test? 

Test corrections are a great tools for pushing students and measuring their progress.  Why you should offer test corrections in your class! | maneuveringthemiddle.com

Test Corrections vs. Retaking the Test

Test corrections have to happen before students retake a test.  I have fallen into the trap of allowing students retake a test only for them to do the exact same or worse. 

If they didn’t master the material the first time, they will not master it the second time unless you provide additional tutoring and practice.  I actually do not provide retake opportunities – I know my limitations and managing retakes is not for me.  Instead, shortly after students have taken a test, I offer test corrections as an in-class assignment.

My school uses a website (Illuminate) that allows me to see what percent of students mastered each skill, and it allows me to see what percent of students answered each question correctly.  I use this information to guide my teaching as I decide which questions I need to go over with the entire class.

If a majority of my students miss question 10, then maybe I need to go over it and make sure students practice that type of problem on future warm-ups. If a majority of my students miss most of the problems related to a specific skill, then perhaps I need to reteach that skill. (My benchmark is 80% of students will master a skill at around 80% – this post explains this in more detail.)

Model How to Correct Test Questions

Similar to how you would model solving a problem, model how you would like students to complete their test corrections. When you model how you would like students to correct their test questions, you will receive far superior results or work.   When I go over the most missed problem with my whole class, I provide an anonymous incorrect student example for the class to discuss the error that was made.  

I then model exactly how their corrections should look to avoid many students just circling another answer choice and writing down that the mistake they made was that they guessed. I utilize the handful of 100s as student teachers, so they can help their classmates.

Grab this free Test Corrections Printable here!

Utilizing a skill Analysis

I shared about utilizing test analysis and reflection in this post. But, before we correct our tests, I have students complete a test analysis.

Test corrections are a great tools for pushing students and measuring their progress.  Why you should offer test corrections in your class! | maneuveringthemiddle.com

I categorize each test question into the skill that it covers, and students color in the test question box based on whether they got it correct or incorrect.  It provides a visual for students and the teacher to see which skill they need to work on.  Students save the skills in which they did the best for independent practice. 

For the group work portion of class, they can utilize a partner or a student teacher for help on the skills that they missed a significant amount of problems.  

Additionally, I think that it is important for students to set goals and analyze why they missed problems on a test.  The test corrections printable has been updated to include a few reflection questions.

  • Did they make calculation errors?  
  • Did they solve using the wrong operation?  
  • Are they studying?  
  • Are they paying attention in class? 
  • Are they asking questions when they don’t understand?

If you do allow retakes, then you are going to need to make additional tests. If you want that work done for you, try All Access. (All Access is a standards-based curriculum that includes everything you need to teach middle school math + editable unit tests + additional versions of tests perfect for retakes).

Reassessing the same skills

Like I said before, I don’t offer retake opportunities.  I will give points back on their test for quality corrections and reflections. You might think that fosters an environment where students don’t really care about doing well on tests and won’t study.  

However, in my experience, students who really need points for a better grade are not students who will try harder next time if they fail this time.  They will be disappointed in their grade and their progress in math mastery will dissipate as they have not been successful. 

I do, however, like to continue spiraling through material that we have learned in the past.  I remind students that they will see similar test questions on future tests or quizzes.  

This will help me make sure students are retaining what they have learned, and allows me to see if students who did not previously master a skill were able to after corrections and additional practice.

When I was in school, tests were all about grades and making my parents proud.  Now as a teacher, I have a completely different outlook of what tests should and shouldn’t be. 

How do students complete test corrections in your classroom?

Test corrections are a great tools for pushing students and measuring their progress.  Why you should offer test corrections in your class! | maneuveringthemiddle.com

Maneuvering the Middle has been publishing blog posts since 2014. This post was originally published in December 2016. It has been updated for relevance and clarity.

The post Using Test Corrections as a Tool for Mastery appeared first on Maneuvering the Middle.

]]>
https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/using-test-corrections-tool-mastery/feed/ 23
Personal Financial Literacy Activities for Middle School https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/personal-financial-literacy-activities-for-middle-school/ https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/personal-financial-literacy-activities-for-middle-school/#comments Tue, 04 Apr 2023 11:00:00 +0000 https://mtmmigration.flywheelsites.com/?p=3201 It doesn’t get more real-world in math than Personal Financial Literacy! I appreciate that real life concepts that impact growing teens and adults are incorporated into Texas state standards.   Today, I am sharing ideas that support the personal financial literacy standards for middle school. Let’s take a moment to at what is included in the […]

The post Personal Financial Literacy Activities for Middle School appeared first on Maneuvering the Middle.

]]>
It doesn’t get more real-world in math than Personal Financial Literacy! I appreciate that real life concepts that impact growing teens and adults are incorporated into Texas state standards.  

Today, I am sharing ideas that support the personal financial literacy standards for middle school.

Teaching ideas and activities to support the personal financial literacy standards in middle school! maneuveringthemiddle.com

Let’s take a moment to at what is included in the Texas Personal Financial Literacy standards. *The standards below have been edited for conciseness.*

Comprehensive curriculum that is aligned to the TEKS can be a challenge to find. Fortunately, Maneuvering the Middle has already created the student handouts, homework, study guides, and assessments for this very subject.

In addition, Maneuvering the Middle has already created a variety of activities – scavenger hunts, card sorts, solve and color, online exploration activities, stations, and more to provide practice and keep Personal Financial Literacy engaging.

Think Long-Term

Remember that while we do teach the standards, we can emphasize the most long-term concepts.  While sixth grade calls for students to be able to explain the items on a credit report, we really want students to have a great understanding for what a credit report is and how short-term poor decisions can impact us for a long time.  In 8th grade, this concept is driven home with the emphasis on ways to save money with interest over time. To me this is a great takeaway for middle schoolers! 

Make It Relevant

I appreciate the vertical alignment of specific strands, specifically G and H. Sixth graders look at the larger scope of how career fields impact your lifetime income, 7th graders explore just how expensive it is to maintain a household, and lastly 8th graders are asked to devise a savings plan for college. This strand shows how personal this concept is to students’ futures. This is something that you will use in the real world (*gestures wildly*).

Activities to Try

Dollars and Sense – This free activity is similar to the game of Life. While it isn’t ink friendly, you could laminate and have a class set. Students choose a career, and have various opportunities to flip a coin to either incur a costly expense or financial favor. They decide how to spend and save their money on transportation, clothes, and housing. At the end of the game, they have to fill out a budget based on their choices. This is aligned to 6th, 7th, and 8th grade standards.

Financial Football – This computer-based activity requires students to answer financial multiple-choice questions between plays. The football aspect will engage some students, and it isn’t 100% aligned to one grade level’s standards, but overall, I think this would be a great extension for students over the course of the unit.

Comparing Salaries in Various Fields Project – In this project, students will research and compare annual salaries of various careers requiring different levels of education and calculate the effects of different salaries on lifetime income. The project even allows for a career fair! This project is directly aligned to TEKS 6.14G and 6.14H.

Teaching ideas and activities to support the personal financial literacy standards in middle school! maneuveringthemiddle.com

Real-Life Bills – Similar to Price of Right games, give students a category – water, electricity, cable, phone, rent, groceries, etc – and have groups guess what the average or median cost of those types of bills would be. You can use your own bills as a reference or Google averages in your area. 

Household Budgets and Percent Practice – Students will take on the role of an employee working for “Remote Possibilities”,  a company that helps clients who work remotely to determine the best location to live based on the client’s income, financial goals, and lifestyle desires. Students will understand and apply concepts of personal budgets and minimum household budgets. This project is directly aligned to TEKS 7.13B and 7.13D.

Planning and Saving for College Project – Students will take on the role of a financial advisor working for Scholarly Savers, a company that counsels families through various financial situations. Students will research the cost of colleges and create a savings plan for a fictional client. This project is directly aligned to TEKS 8.12G and 8.12C.

EMPHASIZE VOCABULARY

When writing the units and really digging into the standards, I was blown away by the level of new concepts and terms that are introduced.  Ask students to use the academic vocabulary, and spend a few minutes at the beginning of each class reviewing. To spice it up, you could do a quick fly-swatter game, Quizizz, or Kahoot.

The 6th grade standards have 10 new vocabulary words introduced! For comparison, most units average around 5. 

Teaching ideas and activities to support the personal financial literacy standards in middle school! maneuveringthemiddle.com
Word wall labels are from Jamie Roberts on TpT

Common Misconceptions

Overall, I think the biggest challenge is that while these terms are familiar to us as adults, they are foreign to students.  Credit reports? Grants? Work-study? Like I said before, this unit is probably the most vocabulary dense unit in middle school math. 

  • Grants are needs-based, while scholarships are needs- and merit-based
  • Confusing total value with interest in the compound interest formula
  • Confusing the terms “assets” and “liabilities” on a net worth statement
  • A debit card is different that than the verb, “debit”

Anchor Chart

Anchor charts are fabulous ways to showcase the content in a visual manner for students to reference.  They can easily be created before the lesson or as you are teaching, depending on the content.

Teaching ideas and activities to support the personal financial literacy standards in middle school!

Do you have any other great ideas for teaching the personal financial literacy standards?  

Teaching ideas and activities to support the personal financial literacy standards in middle school! maneuveringthemiddle.com

Maneuvering the Middle has been publishing blog posts since 2014. This post was originally published in March 2018. It has been updated for relevance and clarity.

The post Personal Financial Literacy Activities for Middle School appeared first on Maneuvering the Middle.

]]>
https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/personal-financial-literacy-activities-for-middle-school/feed/ 2
Student Data Tracking You Can Keep Up With https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/student-data-tracking/ https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/student-data-tracking/#comments Tue, 21 Mar 2023 11:00:18 +0000 https://mtmmigration.flywheelsites.com/?p=3178 Student data tracking helps drive instructional decisions.  I’ve been using daily exit tickets for years, and they would help me decide if I needed to reteach a skill, but I wasn’t tracking the data in a way that motivated my students and doing it daily seemed impossible when I tried.  This year I have a […]

The post Student Data Tracking You Can Keep Up With appeared first on Maneuvering the Middle.

]]>

Student data tracking helps drive instructional decisions.  I’ve been using daily exit tickets for years, and they would help me decide if I needed to reteach a skill, but I wasn’t tracking the data in a way that motivated my students and doing it daily seemed impossible when I tried.  This year I have a system that I have managed to tweak, maintain, and really push my students and me!

My Data Tracking System

Each week, my students take a 5 question multiple choice quiz over the standard(s) that we learned that week.  When students finish, they show me the done sign and I grade it in front of them.  If students earn a 100, I collect it; if students miss any questions, I mark the problems incorrect, and students must rework the problem.  The goal is that 80% of students earn an 80% or higher.  This tells me that as a class we are ready to move on to another standard.  


I write the percent mastery on the board and use the data from my first class to motivate my second, third and fourth classes to beat the previous classes’ mastery.  There will be a collective cheer if they are able to beat the previous class which is pretty awesome.  It motivates students who rush through their work to slow down and it does not shame individuals who don’t hit the 80% because it is anonymous.  Then I color in a bar graph to track the standard on my mastery wall. Each class has a bar and it takes about two seconds to color in. You can get this freebie below! 

We’ve had teachers ask for this mastery template, so I made one for you! Grab it here. It also includes a small group progress monitoring tracker and assessment analysis. To see how I use those documents, check out my Tips for Organizing Math Intervention.

This year I have implemented student data tracking as one of my primary focuses to drive my instruction. I've learned that with the right system it can be implemented in class with little to no extra work or planning. | maneuveringthemiddle.com

Before a benchmark or before state testing, I can look at the mastery wall to decide what skills need the most practice.  While not individualized to each specific student’s’ need, it gives me a good idea where most students need the most work.

I like this system because I can do almost everything during the class period.  I can grade, track, and motivate before students leave the classroom.  If the data isn’t looking great, falling between 60% and 69%, I can make sure that skill gets some practice in small groups or during the warm-up.

Before a benchmark or before state testing, I can look at the mastery wall to decide what skills need the most practice. While it is not individualized to each specific student’s need, it gives me a good idea of where most students need the most work.

I like this system because I can do almost everything during the class period. I can grade, track, and motivate before students leave the classroom. If the data isn’t looking as great, falling between 60% and 69%, then I ask students for suggestions on how we can improve that data for the next week.  Usually students who did not earn an 80% will reflect on why.

How To Start STUDENT DATA TRACKING

Tracking data can start really small. Here are some ideas:

  • Track class period’s averages on the board.  My gradebook did all of the work, so it was a low lift.
  • You could track homework completion by writing the percent completed on the board after collecting it. 
  • Track averages on unit tests or individual skills on unit tests. I also track how they do on specific skills too, but again, the grading program does all of this work for me.

Whatever you decide to track, make sure it is something you can keep up with. When I tried to track how each individual student did on a daily exit ticket, I kept it up for maybe a week.  

A few of my other amazing coworkers have the goal that 80% of students will earn an 80% or higher but they do track individual student’s progress on a data wall.  They are amazing!  Many of these teachers have the student put the sticker or symbol by their name after scoring an 80 or higher.

This year I have implemented student data tracking as one of my primary focuses to drive my instruction. I've learned that with the right system it can be implemented in class with little to no extra work or planning. | maneuveringthemiddle.com

Data tracking does not have to be an advanced teacher move.  Start small and focus on positive data only!  What student data are you tracking?  What has worked in your classroom?

Maneuvering the Middle has been publishing blog posts since 2014. This post was originally published in March 2018. It has been updated for relevance and clarity.

 

The post Student Data Tracking You Can Keep Up With appeared first on Maneuvering the Middle.

]]>
https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/student-data-tracking/feed/ 18
Ideas for Organizing Math Intervention https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/how-to-organize-math-intervention/ https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/how-to-organize-math-intervention/#comments Tue, 14 Mar 2023 11:00:00 +0000 https://mtmmigration.flywheelsites.com/?p=1371 If you are a classroom teacher, then you are probably very familiar with documenting student data and progress. Documenting the differentiation you are providing for every single student while also teaching said students can feel impossible. Hopefully, these tips for organizing your math intervention documentation will make it all more manageable. Plus, there are a […]

The post Ideas for Organizing Math Intervention appeared first on Maneuvering the Middle.

]]>

If you are a classroom teacher, then you are probably very familiar with documenting student data and progress. Documenting the differentiation you are providing for every single student while also teaching said students can feel impossible. Hopefully, these tips for organizing your math intervention documentation will make it all more manageable. Plus, there are a few freebies to get you started, so keep reading!

TRACKING PROGRESS

Once I became more skilled at pulling a small group while managing a classroom full of other students, I was ready to level up and track data. What was the point of pulling a small group if I couldn’t see if it was making a difference? I created this Small Group Progress Monitoring Printable to document how my small group of students were progressing. 

Differentiating for your students doesn't have to be complicated.  Tips for how to organize math intervention in way that is both simple and effective.  | maneuveringthemiddle.com

I made a ton of blank copies, put them inside a binder, and filled them out whenever I pulled a small group.

If you want a copy for your classroom, you can grab it (along with a few others) here.

KEEP IT SIMPLE

Keep it simple is pretty much my moto!  State testing is right around the corner, and this idea worked really well for my smaller intervention class. This requires some work upfront, but makes the day-to-day, in-class mental load lighter. Here is a solution that worked for me:

Organizing Math Small Groups 1 (1)
  1. Create one page with all of the standards listed in kid-friendly language. This is your cover sheet.
  2. Create a packet of material that students need the most help with. I would use material from our State Testing Units – the 10 question assessments were perfect. Make the exact same packet for all of your intervention students. 
  3. Staple the cover sheet to the packet. The cover sheet is where I differentiated! I highlighted the skills that the individual student needed to work on based on what I saw from their benchmark. For example, Student A might have dividing decimals highlighted amongst other highlighted skills while Student B might have integer operations and creating equivalent fractions highlighted.  Student A could find the section titled dividing decimals and start there.  The next day, they would go to the next highlighted skill.  The cover sheet included a space for me to check off when they mastered the skill.  

Students were practicing exactly what they needed to work on, and I didn’t have to make 15 different worksheets to hand out to 15 different students and try and keep up with who got what.  

Note: Since I took the picture above, Maneuvering the Middle has created an Intervention Binder for both TEKS and CCSS that has a more comprehensive overview of all of the standards. The Student Data Sheet would be perfect to use as a cover sheet. 

MAKE IT VISUAL

After completing a unit, I passed back their unit tests along with a unit test reflection.  The unit test reflection broke down the test into the 3-5 skills that were tested.  Next to the skills, were boxes with the question numbers that aligned to those skills.  Students would go through their test and color in green for questions they got correct and red for problems they got wrong.   This created a great visual for students to see what skills they still needed to develop. 

Differentiating for your students doesn't have to be complicated.  Tips for how to organize math intervention in way that is both simple and effective.  | maneuveringthemiddle.com

Students were then able to reflect more effectively on their strengths and their areas needing growth.  I had students keep these reflections in their notebook, so on days when we used Khan Academy or IXL, they could refer to this page and work on the skills they had not mastered yet.  If students hit below a certain threshold, you could assign a video reteaching the topic – a perfect use of our Maneuvering the Middle Student Video Library. Click here to grab your Test Analysis printable!

This reflection never quite took an entire class period, so I paired it with test corrections.

USING EXIT TICKETS

Exit tickets are another way to decide who needs to go into a small group and what you should reteach or practice in the small group.

When I am looking through the exit tickets, I would sort the exit tickets, not according to their grade, but by what the misconception is.  Let’s say the exit ticket is over adding fractions. 

  • I might have one stack of exit tickets where students did not find a common denominator and just added the numerator and denominator together (conceptual understanding).  
  • Another stack would be for students who made a computation error (procedural fluency).
  • Lastly, I might have a stack of students who couldn’t decode the word problem (application). 

Of course, some exit tickets might fall into all three categories, but these different stacks allowed me to prioritize what students to pull in my small group, who just needs more practice, and who needs to be completely retaught.

I hope that this post provided some easy take-aways on how to organize math intervention in your classroom.  Similar to how we scaffold for students, scaffold some of these organization systems into your daily routine.  Choose the tip that would be the most helpful to you or would be the easiest to implement and give it a try!  

What tips do you have for organizing math intervention?

For more tips on pulling small groups, check out Tips for Small Group Implementation here. Interested in learning more about our Math Intervention Binder? Check out the video below.

Area of Circles – This video may be the best explanation I have ever seen of how the formula for area of a circle is derived. The visuals are not something you can recreate without the help of video editing, so I highly recommend showing it to your students before you cover calculating the area of circles.

Circumference of a Circle – This video explains circumference and solves a few circumference problems. 

Free Activities

Maneuvering the Middle Pi Day Activities – Choose from a variety of activities in this freebie, or use all 3 if you think that pi deserves more than just a day of celebration!

  • Pi Day Discovery Activity – Students can work collaboratively to explore the relationship between the circumference and diameter of circles by measuring mini pies. 
  • Pi Day Two Truths and a Pi – This play on two truths and a lie has students finding which statement is false about various measurements related to circles. 
  • Pi Day Riddle Activity – This self-checking activity asks students to calculate circumference and area of circles. The riddle is a nice touch!

Make Bubbles

Grab a jumbo container of bubble solution, mix in food coloring, and allow students to blow a bubble on paper. Once the bubble pops, students measure the diameter and from there can calculate the area and circumference.

Go Outside and Run Idea

Have an especially active class? This idea is for you! Go outside and form a giant circle with your class. Choose two runners. One runner will be running the diameter of the circle while the other is running the circumference. The idea is to see how many times the diameter runner can go back and forth before the circumference runner makes it back to their original spot. Assuming the runners’ speeds are fairly similar, it should be a little more than 3 times. Repeat with different students to get all of the wiggles out. 😉

Measure Circles

Circles are everywhere! Tops of tupperware lids, paper plates, old CDs, cups, and Hula hoops. Ask students to bring something circular from home to class and now you have 30 hands-on, practice problems for students to complete.

Need more Circle Practice?

Pi day activities are perfect for March 14! Grab 3 free activities and check out our tips for teaching circles. | maneuveringthemiddle.com

The post Pi Day Activities appeared first on Maneuvering the Middle.

]]>
4 Ways to Make Math Relevant https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/make-math-relevant/ https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/make-math-relevant/#comments Tue, 07 Feb 2023 12:00:00 +0000 https://mtmmigration.flywheelsites.com/?p=2873 We encounter math on a daily basis, but it can be a challenge for students to connect what they learn in class to the outside world. Here are 4 (update: 5!) ways teachers can engage students by making math relevant to their lives. LISTEN ON: APPLE PODCAST | SPOTIFY 1. Share Your Enthusiasm The key […]

The post 4 Ways to Make Math Relevant appeared first on Maneuvering the Middle.

]]>

We encounter math on a daily basis, but it can be a challenge for students to connect what they learn in class to the outside world. Here are 4 (update: 5!) ways teachers can engage students by making math relevant to their lives.

LISTEN ON: APPLE PODCAST | SPOTIFY

We use math everyday, but sometimes students struggle to see this. Here are 4 ways to make math relevant in that classroom! | maneuveringthemiddle.com

1. Share Your Enthusiasm

The key to modeling what it looks like to be a math person is to share your excitement! Excitement is contagious. In my classroom, I loved teaching ratios and proportions! As a class, students performed so high on the concepts. While I can’t be certain it was caused by my enthusiasm, it sure did help!

2. Promote Problem Solving

A second way to make math relevant is to promote problem solving in your classroom! (We talk about problem solving more in depth here.)

“When are we ever going to use this?” used to scare me. I used to think students were asking as a ‘gotcha,’ but I think most students genuinely want to know. They are curious how the unfamiliar concept connects to their life.  

So, I love to set the stage at the beginning of the year. I say that math is all about learning to problem solve. Problem solving is a skill that is limitless in where it will take you. Regardless of your future profession, you will be required to problem solve, and persevering through a math problem gives you the confidence and grit to do so in the real world.  

Make this a mantra in your class and continue to reinforce it all year long.

3.  Tailor Curriculum to Students’ Interests

This study shares that when the curriculum (in this case, Algebra 1) is personalized to students’ interests, they are more successful.

“In the study, half of the students chose one of several categories that interested them — things like music, movies, sports, social media — and were given an algebra curriculum based on those topics.  The other half received no interest-based personalization… Walkington found that students who had received interest-based personalization mastered concepts faster.” 

While changing your entire curriculum and/or rewriting problems may not be something you can realistically manage, consider Walkington’s approach. “We picked out the students who seemed to be struggling the most in Algebra I, and we found that for this sub-group of students that were way behind, the personalization was more effective.”

So this may be something that you consider as you write future problems or consider future projects. What are your struggling students genuinely interested in? How can you include that in your math class? Can your classroom economy be related to an interest? What about the names of your groups? 

One quick win comes to mind. When I was teaching small groups, I had 3 students who needed a little extra incentive to stay engaged. They loved soccer, so we made everything soccer related. As they got problems correct, they scored “goals,” counters were soccer balls, and all word problems were changed on the spot to be soccer themed

4.  Teach Students to Ask the Questions

In the book Quality Questioning, the author breaks down the importance of the questions we ask in the classroom and the responses we accept from our students.  One of the key things they mention is teaching students how to ask questions on their own and providing them the opportunity to do so.  

This easy lift is a great way to engage students. 

  • It extends students’ thinking
  • Makes for great math discourse
  • Any student can participate
  • Allows for students to flex their creativity muscles
  • Students make interesting connections

There are a few options here. 

  1. When presenting a word problem, cover up the question. Typically, a world problem gives information and then asks a question. Instead cover up that last question, and ask students to come up with a question. 
  2. Put up a graph, a table, a picture of a price at the grocery store, a receipt, whatever you can find that has some numbers of it, and ask students: “What could the question be?”
We use math everyday, but sometimes students struggle to see this. Here are 4 ways to make math relevant in that classroom! | maneuveringthemiddle.com

Try it with your class at the beginning of your rates or proportionality unit. What could the question be? And then ask again at the end of the unit and see what your students have learned. 

Another idea could be to simply take your receipt from your latest gas purchase, project it, and ask students: what could the question be? 

5. Include Projects to Your Scope and Sequence

Project Based Learning is popular for a reason! Students take more ownership in their learning, and experience first hand how math can help solve real-world problems. Maneuvering the Middle’s projects are perfect for this. 

When students ask, “When will I ever use this?” then it may be time to start a project. Here is a snippet of what our projects ask students to solve:

RATIONAL NUMBERS + LINEAR RELATIONSHIPS

  • 6th graders research and calculate the costs of flying or driving to various destinations. Grab it here.
  • 7th graders will calculate the cost of traveling to various National Parks and calculate the percent change in park and gas prices. Grab it here.
  • 8th graders will plan a vacation and apply discount options to their vacation expenses to explore the effect on the linear relationship. Grab it here.
  • Algebra 1 students will use and represent linear relationships to help them plan a vacation on a budget. Grab it here.

FINANCIAL LITERACY

  • 6th graders plan a career fair and compare the lifetime earnings of various careers. Get it here.
  • 7th graders calculate household incomes and analyze the best cities to live in based on earnings. Get it here.
  • 8th graders calculate and plan saving for college. Get it here.
  • Algebra 1 students find and use an exponential function to predict the rising cost of college. Get it here.

What are some of the ways you make math relevant to your students?

We use math everyday, but sometimes students struggle to see this. Here are 4 ways to make math relevant in that classroom! | maneuveringthemiddle.com

The post 4 Ways to Make Math Relevant appeared first on Maneuvering the Middle.

]]>
https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/make-math-relevant/feed/ 4
Factoring Polynomials with Special Cases https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/factoring-polynomials-with-special-cases/ https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/factoring-polynomials-with-special-cases/#comments Tue, 24 Jan 2023 12:00:00 +0000 https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/?p=66610 If you haven’t had a chance to read part 1 Teaching Factoring Trinomials, then go back and do that before reading anymore. Today we are going to discuss Factoring Polynomials with special cases. Factoring Trinomials When A>1 I hesitated to put a>1 in this blog post since it isn’t necessarily a special case, but I […]

The post Factoring Polynomials with Special Cases appeared first on Maneuvering the Middle.

]]>
If you haven’t had a chance to read part 1 Teaching Factoring Trinomials, then go back and do that before reading anymore. Today we are going to discuss Factoring Polynomials with special cases.

Factoring polynomials with special cases: difference of squares, perfect square trinomials, and a>1. Check out our tips for teaching! | maneuveringthemiddle.com

Factoring Trinomials When A>1

I hesitated to put a>1 in this blog post since it isn’t necessarily a special case, but I considered that you probably would teach this AFTER you teach factoring trinomials when a=1.

Let’s dive in! 

Double check that there isn’t a GCF that can be factored out the a, b, c terms. 

The AC method is a great way to teach your students how to factor. Explaining this method through text is hard to follow (I tried), so again, I am going to pass it to Sara to teach you how to factor trinomials when a>1.

Insert video here

If you love this video, then check out All Access, our curriculum membership that includes ~3 videos for every single lesson! She is also using the Student Handouts that are available in our Factoring Polynomials Unit.

Using the Box Method

The box method is excellent, and if you taught it when factoring trinomials when a=1, then there isn’t much new to cover. This video shows how to do this, but I also included a few graphics for you to reference. 

Factoring polynomials with special cases: difference of squares, perfect square trinomials, and a>1. Check out our tips for teaching! | maneuveringthemiddle.com
Factoring polynomials with special cases: difference of squares, perfect square trinomials, and a>1. Check out our tips for teaching! | maneuveringthemiddle.com

Factoring with Difference of Squares 

I love difference of squares! We like to start by explaining how difference of squares exists. Let’s take x^2 -16. You can still ask your students, “What multiplies to -16 that also adds to 0?” Remember that b=0 in a difference of squares polynomial.

Forgive my repetitiveness, but remember that we still have to check to see if there is a Greatest Common Factor!

Factoring polynomials with special cases: difference of squares, perfect square trinomials, and a>1. Check out our tips for teaching! | maneuveringthemiddle.com

When I taught Algebra 2, we did Around the World or Head to Head Challenges using squares and square roots. I wanted students to internalize squares and square roots (for a multitude of reasons) but it served this skill very well. You may consider putting up an anchor chart so students have a visual.

Perfect Square Trinomials

By the time you are teaching perfect square trinomials, it is likely that students may have already factored a few perfect square trinomials. In fact, you don’t actually have to teach perfect square trinomials as a special case – it is helpful for students to recognize patterns, absolutely! Students can still factor these trinomials using the methods already taught!

Teaching students to recognize the form is helpful and will increase their proficiency in taking the square root of numbers. 

Factoring polynomials with special cases: difference of squares, perfect square trinomials, and a>1. Check out our tips for teaching! | maneuveringthemiddle.com

How do you teach factoring trinomials and polynomials?

Factoring polynomials with special cases: difference of squares, perfect square trinomials, and a>1. Check out our tips for teaching! | maneuveringthemiddle.com

The post Factoring Polynomials with Special Cases appeared first on Maneuvering the Middle.

]]>
https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/factoring-polynomials-with-special-cases/feed/ 1
Teaching Factoring Trinomials https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/teaching-factoring-trinomials/ Tue, 17 Jan 2023 12:00:00 +0000 https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/?p=66608 Factoring trinomials relies on many prerequisite skills (distributing, multiplying polynomials, finding a greatest common factor, exponent rules, and integer operations… I’m sure there are more). It also sets the stage for future success in solving quadratic equations and graphing quadratic functions. This makes factoring polynomials so important for students to conquer. As a student, I […]

The post Teaching Factoring Trinomials appeared first on Maneuvering the Middle.

]]>
Factoring trinomials relies on many prerequisite skills (distributing, multiplying polynomials, finding a greatest common factor, exponent rules, and integer operations… I’m sure there are more). It also sets the stage for future success in solving quadratic equations and graphing quadratic functions.

This makes factoring polynomials so important for students to conquer. As a student, I remember only learning to guess and check, and lucky for us now, there are better ways!

Introducing Factoring with Algebra Tiles

I learned this method from Making Math Moments. You can watch the full video here or read on. Before even introducing factoring polynomials, ask your students to represent a trinomial using Algebra tiles like this one below: 

Factoring trinomials sets the stage for solving and graphing quadratic equations. Check out the best methods for teaching this skill! | maneuveringthemiddle.com

Before proceeding, make sure your students understand that the area of the x tile is x*1. 

Factoring trinomials sets the stage for solving and graphing quadratic equations. Check out the best methods for teaching this skill! | maneuveringthemiddle.com

Then ask your students to arrange the tiles in a rectangle using all of the pieces. Let them solve this puzzle – they may leave pieces out or create a shape that isn’t a rectangle.

Then ask them to figure out what the dimensions (the length and the width) of the rectangle would be. You haven’t explicitly taught factoring at this point. You are letting students explore and come up with their own patterns using hands-on practice. Here is the solution:

Factoring trinomials sets the stage for solving and graphing quadratic equations. Check out the best methods for teaching this skill! | maneuveringthemiddle.com

Maneuvering the Middle’s Factoring Polynomials Modeling Activity is the perfect way to introduce or practice this skill. You can find it in our Factoring Polynomials Activity Bundle.

Factoring trinomials sets the stage for solving and graphing quadratic equations. Check out the best methods for teaching this skill! | maneuveringthemiddle.com

Start with the Greatest Common Factor

Students won’t get far without mastering factoring out the GCF. 

Factoring trinomials sets the stage for solving and graphing quadratic equations. Check out the best methods for teaching this skill! | maneuveringthemiddle.com

Start by teaching students to write all of the factors of each term and circle/highlight the factors that they each have in common. Then whichever factors are not in common, will be the terms that remain.

This idea is from our curriculum writer, Reagan. “When my kids struggled with factoring, it was usually because they didn’t have multiplication facts memorized.  When students struggled with this, we taught them to use their calculator to type y = #/x and look at the table to easily see all the factors.”

Factoring Trinomials When A=1

Keeping students’ work organized is key when teaching this skill, which is why I highly recommend showing students to organize their work using a sum and factors table. In the example above, you can see that the b term is the sum of 4 and 6 while simultaneously, the c term is the product of 4 and 6. Simply put, I would ask my students when trying to factor: 

  • What multiplies to c (24) that also adds up to b (10)?

If we couldn’t think of it off the top of our heads, we would make a table (which is especially helpful when you have a  negative b or negative c term.)

Watch the video to see how Sara teaches this:

If you love this video, check out All Access for more student videos!

Using The Box Method

The box method is also a great tool to familiarize your students with factoring. The same thinking of “what are the factors of c that will also add to b?” is required, but your students will practice more with finding the GCF of two terms which will set them up nicely when a>1. This silent video explains how to do this quite well.

You can also follow the visuals here:

If you are looking for some additional resources to use with your students, then check out the links below:

Make sure to come back next week when we talk about Factoring When a>1 and Difference of Squares and Perfect Square Trinomials.

How do you teach factoring trinomials?

Factoring trinomials sets the stage for solving and graphing quadratic equations. Check out the best methods for teaching this skill! | maneuveringthemiddle.com

The post Teaching Factoring Trinomials appeared first on Maneuvering the Middle.

]]>
Coordinate Plane Activities to Try https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/coordinate-plane-activities-to-try/ Tue, 20 Dec 2022 12:00:00 +0000 https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/?p=65428 The coordinate plane is a personal favorite of mine. It is hands-on, reinforces the ordering of rational numbers, and spans all of secondary education. If there is a unit that I look most forward to – it is this one! Today I will share some tips for teaching the complexities of this grid and some […]

The post Coordinate Plane Activities to Try appeared first on Maneuvering the Middle.

]]>
The coordinate plane is a personal favorite of mine. It is hands-on, reinforces the ordering of rational numbers, and spans all of secondary education. If there is a unit that I look most forward to – it is this one!

Today I will share some tips for teaching the complexities of this grid and some engaging activities that you and your students will love.

Three Tips for Teaching

The most common misconception you will see is students moving up and down on the y-axis before moving right or left on the x-axis. There are many memory tricks like “you have to crawl before you can climb” or “you have to cross the street before you can get on the elevator” to help students plan their steps. Because graphing on the coordinate plane doesn’t require “showing work” like setting up a proportion, I have no problem asking students to annotate the coordinates. I will model and require students to write a tiny right or left arrow over the x-coordinate and a tiny up or down arrow over the y-coordinate every single time they encounter a set of coordinates. I also ask students to label their graphs with “x-axis” and “y-axis.”

These coordinate plane activities are hands-on and engaging. These tips and ideas will help your students master this skill. | maneuveringthemiddle.com

Don’t overestimate students! It can be easy to think your 6th graders can graph on all 4 quadrants on day 1. Start by just graphing in Quadrant I on the first day. Then move to graphing on all 4 quadrants the second day. By the third day, you will be more successful graphing rational numbers.

Graphing on the axes can be particularly challenging. When I saw students mix up coordinates, it was usually because one of the coordinates was 0. Tip: remind students that if there is a 0 for that coordinate, then it won’t show up on that axis. For example, (0, 4) means that it cannot end up on the x-axis because it has a 0 for the x-coordinate. It has to end up in the y-axis. 

Coordinate Plane Activities

Coordinate Plane Unit – This 6th grade unit does an excellent job scaffolding instruction. Plus, student handouts, homework, a study guide, and an assessment are done for you!

Demos Coordinate Plane Activities – Desmos really delivers on this skill. I’ve linked the entire scope of their coordinate plane practice, but this Mini Golf Marble Slide is especially useful in plotting points, while incorporating error analysis. Battleboats is a play on Battleship, and I can visualize the engagement!

Coordinate Plane Digital Activities – Do you need practice for all of the 6th grade CCSS coordinate plane standards – introducing the parts of the graph, graphing, reflections, and distance? These digital activities cover everything, come with a 2-question exit ticket per skill, and include 16 total activities.

Stock the Shelves Online Game – I came across this website from a member of our Maneuvering the Middle VIPs facebook group. This is online practice for graphing integers on all 4 quadrants. I like that if a student is incorrect, they have to keep trying before they can move on to the next problem.

These coordinate plane activities are hands-on and engaging. These tips and ideas will help your students master this skill. | maneuveringthemiddle.com

Design a Dorm Room Performance Task – This Coordinate Plane Performance Task can be a typical assignment, group project, or an extension.  It requires students to think outside of the box as they solve real-word and mathematical problems by graphing on the coordinate plane. 

Create a Coordinate Plane on your Floor – Our MTM team member and current teacher Marissa is a big fan of this activity. She pushes all of the student desks to the edge of her classroom, and uses painters’ tape to create a giant coordinate plane. Students are then asked to walk the graph as they would plot points (start at the origin, walk the x-axis and then move vertically along the y-axis). In this activity, she has students practice reflecting over the axes using a partner to represent their reflection. 

Coordinate Plane Scavenger Hunt – Students will move around a coordinate plane map of the city using the clues provided at each station. Hands-on and interactive!

These coordinate plane activities are hands-on and engaging. These tips and ideas will help your students master this skill. | maneuveringthemiddle.com

Coordinate Plane Battleship – Students just need coordinate planes. Have them mark various points as their battleships. You call out various coordinates. Students say ‘hit’ when you say a coordinate that has one of their battleships on it. The student that still has a battleship at the end of the activity wins!

Flyswatter Game – The flyswatter game was perfect when I ended a lesson early or if I needed to inject some energy into my morning classes. Simply provide 2 students a flyswatter and give them locations to smack like:

  • The origin
  • The y-axis
  • The x-axis
  • The various quadrants
  • (5, -3) and more

What coordinate plane activities do your students love?

These coordinate plane activities are hands-on and engaging. These tips and ideas will help your students master this skill. | maneuveringthemiddle.com

The post Coordinate Plane Activities to Try appeared first on Maneuvering the Middle.

]]>
Math Activities to Survive December https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/math-activities-to-get-you-through-december/ Tue, 06 Dec 2022 12:00:00 +0000 https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/?p=65404 The end of the semester is upon us! While the energy in your classroom may be brimming with anticipation, there is still math to be taught and deadlines that loom. Here are some December math activities that will get you to winter break. Math Activities to Survive December Business as Usual – Perhaps, you have […]

The post Math Activities to Survive December appeared first on Maneuvering the Middle.

]]>
The end of the semester is upon us! While the energy in your classroom may be brimming with anticipation, there is still math to be taught and deadlines that loom. Here are some December math activities that will get you to winter break.

Math Activities to Survive December

Business as Usual – Perhaps, you have timed it perfectly; the end of the unit or your midterm falls on the last day before the break. Bravo! You are a planning wizard. 

1. Projects

If you haven’t heard, Maneuvering the Middle launched projects for 6th, 7th, 8th, and Algebra 1! These projects are flexible in nature and can span 3-7 days. They are purposeful, standards-based and make a great alternative to an assessment.  

Math activities for December are necessary to get you to the end of the semester. Here are 9 ideas plus a freebie! | maneuveringthemiddle.com

RATIONAL NUMBERS + LINEAR RELATIONSHIPS

  • 6th graders research and calculate the costs of flying or driving to various destinations. Grab it here.
  • 7th graders will calculate the cost of traveling to various National Parks and calculate the percent change in park and gas prices. Grab it here.
  • 8th graders will plan a vacation and apply discount options to their vacation expenses to explore the effect on the linear relationship. Grab it here.
  • Algebra 1 students will use and represent linear relationships to help them plan a vacation on a budget. Grab it here.

FINANCIAL LITERACY

  • 6th graders plan a career fair and compare the lifetime earnings of various careers. Get it here.
  • 7th graders calculate household incomes and analyze best cities to live in based on earnings. Get it here.
  • 8th graders calculate and plan saving for college. Get it here.
  • Algebra 1 students find and use an exponential function to predict the rising cost of college. Get it here.

2. Winter Solve and Color Freebie

If you need a day or two for your students to complete something calmly, but also keep it math related, check out our winter solve and color freebie.

Click here to get it!

  • 6th – Ratio Application
  • 7th – Proportional Relationships
  • 8th – Non-Proportional Relationships
  • Algebra 1 – Writing Linear Functions
Math activities for December are necessary to get you to the end of the semester. Here are 9 ideas plus a freebie! | maneuveringthemiddle.com

These concepts are typically taught in the Fall and will be great for review.

*** Fun tip: Project a fireplace, turn on some tunes, provide some colored pencils, and walk around blissfully as the fire hypnotizes your students into a peaceful calm. 

3. Cookie + Dessert Recipe

This is a project that requires little planning and has a festive energy, but also engages students in a unique way. You can also give students a choice! Print off a variety of dessert recipes and allow students to pick what they would like to “make.”

Then students have to determine how much they need to make (ex: enough for the class, enough for the whole school, enough for the staff). Students have to use rational operations to calculate how much of each ingredient they will need.

You can go even further and have them shop for all of the ingredients using the various curbside or delivery options available. Texan here to recommend HEB.com.

4. Shop for Friends and Family

Let students go shopping! Give students a budget for how much they can spend to buy gifts for their friends and family. Give students a specific website to stay on like target.com and have them record their total. To spice it up, provide coupons and BOGO opportunities.

5. Jigsaw to Review

If you are preparing for a midterm, then a jigsaw may be right for your students! If you aren’t familiar with a jigsaw, essentially students become an expert in a specific math skill and then come back together with students who became experts on other math skills. Then, they teach each other their respective skills. If you need more ideas for test review, check out this test review post.

Just For Fun

While these are not December activities that are math specific, there are sometimes opportunities to do something winter themed and festive.

6. Gingerbread Houses

At my last school, we used the last few days of the semester to do celebratory type activities. I would ask students to save their milk cartons (they act as the base) from lunch for the week leading up to the activity, and have  students bring in various candies, frosting, and graham crackers. I would use butcher paper to cover my tables, we would decorate for an hour and then students would take their gingerbread houses home. 

Tip: You need plastic knives for spreading frosting, paper plates as a base, and gallon-sized plastic bags to transport.

7. Holiday Cards

This is the perfect activity for your class after a midterm or on an adjusted bell schedule class period. Students can make holiday cards for custodial staff, cafeteria workers, or administrators. You could also adopt a nearby assisted living facility! 

8. Make Snowflakes

I used this activity for our adjusted bell schedule (30 minute classes) after our benchmarks. Students needed a brain break, and I needed something for them to do. This is the video I used to make colossal snowflakes that were hung in the gym for the winter dance. 

No matter what you choose to do to make it the end of the semester this December, remember that students are jazzed for an upcoming break and to use that energy to create excitement for math. What December math activities are you planning on implementing?

The post Math Activities to Survive December appeared first on Maneuvering the Middle.

]]>
Finding Percents Activities https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/finding-percents-activities/ Tue, 29 Nov 2022 12:00:00 +0000 https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/?p=63990 Finding percents can be difficult for students – they are conceptually rigorous and typically found in a word problem. The solution? Strong instruction and plenty of practice. Here are a few tips and activities for calculating and finding percents. Make Percents Visual Percents are perfect for visual representation! There is no better way to do […]

The post Finding Percents Activities appeared first on Maneuvering the Middle.

]]>
Finding percents can be difficult for students – they are conceptually rigorous and typically found in a word problem. The solution? Strong instruction and plenty of practice. Here are a few tips and activities for calculating and finding percents.

Make Percents Visual

Percents are perfect for visual representation! There is no better way to do this than using a tape diagram. In fact, if you teach your students to set up a part/whole = %/100 proportion, then a tape diagram is just a picture of that exact proportion . The best part of the tape diagram visual is that students instinctively are better able to estimate answers based on using benchmark fractions like 50%. This modeling percent activity is perfect for practicing those tape diagrams!

Finding percents is a skill that requires lots of practice. These 7 activities will help your students success in calculating percentages. | maneuveringthemiddle.com

This Interactive Fraction Model is an awesome tool for exploration! When the numerator and the denominator are manipulated, the model, decimal, and percent are changed. You can also limit the number of denominator options or adjust how the model looks. 

Finding percents is a skill that requires lots of practice. These 7 activities will help your students success in calculating percentages. | maneuveringthemiddle.com

Some questions and ideas for your class: 

  • What do you notice about the percent when the numerator is greater than the denominator?
  • What fractions give you repeating decimals?
  • Give students a percent, and ask them to discover the equivalent fraction.

Bring a king size Hershey bar to class.  Discuss what size it is and then draw the connection to a percent bar (aka tape diagram).  Ask students to describe how many rectangles would be one-half, one-fourth, etc. Then connect this to 50%, 80%, etc.

What percent of Manhattan is Central Park? As an adult, I estimate percents more than I actually calculate or find percents, so I thought this lesson was a great way to get students to begin estimating percents. The video introduces the question, “What percent of Manhattan is made up of Central Park?” Students will have to discuss and ask questions about what information that they still need in order to solve. 

Percent Application

Percents are everywhere. Introducing percents was met with a lot of buy-in from students; they have some prior experience with percents in their grades or at the store. Let’s capitalize on that interest by using as many real-world opportunities as possible. 

Financial Literacy + Percent Project – This project is a homerun! Students are tasked with helping their “clients” who work remotely find the best place to live based on their income, financial goals, and lifestyle. Students will use finding percents to make decisions about the best use of their client’s income. 

Finding percents is a skill that requires lots of practice. These 7 activities will help your students success in calculating percentages. | maneuveringthemiddle.com

Posing Percent Problems on Desmos – “Students apply what they’ve learned about increasing and decreasing by a percentage to generate and answer questions about the society in which we live.” This activity is more paper-based than what we traditionally see from Desmos, but it puts the responsibility on the student to determine the question. For example, a student is provided facts about wage gaps, and then asked to come up with the question and the answer based on that wage gap fact. There is opportunity for some interesting responses.

Percent of Change Class Demonstration – Check out what one of our teachers had to say about this activity:

“Today’s lesson is always one of my absolute favorites. We do the shopping activity for percent change…It not only gives the kids a bunch of practice with percent change, but gets them asking so many big questions! “Why would magazines get so expensive? Don’t they want us to read and learn?” “Why aren’t coffee prices higher? Are the coffee workers making enough money?”

Finding percents is a skill that requires lots of practice. These 7 activities will help your students success in calculating percentages. | maneuveringthemiddle.com

General Tips

There are several ways to determine the percent of a number, including an equation, a proportion, or a tape diagram (percent bar).  I suggest teaching all of the methods to see what clicks the best with your students. Additionally, I would assign some problems to only set up the problem without solving. 

Consider using a similar problem and similar information to show students how to set up problems and solve for different parts of the equation/proportion.

  • Example 1: A carnival is made up of 80 booths. Of those 80 booths, 14 sell food. What percentage of the booths sell food? (finding the percent)
  • Example 2: At a second carnival, food booths make up 40% of the total booths. There are 16 food booths. How many total booths are at this carnival? (finding the total)
  • Example: At a third carnival, there are 75 booths. 30% are food booths. How many food booths are there? (find the part)

When annotating word problems, I would require my students to write a fraction bar with 100 under any percent that they came across. This reminded students that we were going to use 100 in our solving.

FDP Everyday – Students calculate the number of days they have been at school over a total (it could be the month, number of days until the next break, or total number of school days there are) and then calculate the decimal and percent.  It’s a perfect warm-up or extension activity. 

If you have a Flocabulary Account, your students will enjoy this Percent rap

What finding percents activities do your students enjoy? 

The post Finding Percents Activities appeared first on Maneuvering the Middle.

]]>
Mastering Order of Operations https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/mastering-order-of-operations/ https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/mastering-order-of-operations/#comments Tue, 15 Nov 2022 12:30:00 +0000 https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/?p=63701 Order of Operations is a student and teacher favorite! Please Excuse My Dear Aunt Sally might be the most common mnemonic device to ever exist, so let’s chat a little bit about how to make order of operations engaging for your students. What is/are the Order of Operations? Order of Operations is the rule provided […]

The post Mastering Order of Operations appeared first on Maneuvering the Middle.

]]>
Order of Operations is a student and teacher favorite! Please Excuse My Dear Aunt Sally might be the most common mnemonic device to ever exist, so let’s chat a little bit about how to make order of operations engaging for your students.

Order of operations is a student and teacher favorite. Check out our tips for mastering this math skill in your middle school classroom. | maneuveringthemiddle.com

What is/are the Order of Operations?

Order of Operations is the rule provided to standardize how to solve any problem involving multiple operations.

Order of operations is a student and teacher favorite. Check out our tips for mastering this math skill in your middle school classroom. | maneuveringthemiddle.com

You have probably seen popular memes like the one below where you can find a spirited debate in the comments. In fact, showing this to students would be a great hook! “By the end of today, you will be able to tell these people what is ACTUALLY the correct answer!” (Though there are arguments for both!)

Order of operations is a student and teacher favorite. Check out our tips for mastering this math skill in your middle school classroom. | maneuveringthemiddle.com

Start Simple by Scaffolding

Like most (all?) math skills, order of operations benefits from scaffolding. It is actually the perfect skill to scaffold – you are in direct control of how many steps are included in each problem! Start with a two-step problem, move to a three-step problem, then continue until your students have mastered multiple-step problems. 

Depending on the grade level you are teaching, you will either be working with whole numbers, possibly integers, and finally rational numbers. If you teach 7th grade, then you will be covering everything! Start with whole numbers before moving to problems that include integers and rational numbers.

I love this 6th grade Maneuvering the Middle Student Handout 2 problem. Each problem is just asking for what the first step would be. Brilliant!

Order of operations is a student and teacher favorite. Check out our tips for mastering this math skill in your middle school classroom. | maneuveringthemiddle.com

Showing Your Work Tips

I can’t think of a math skill where students want to try to do it all in their heads more than order of operations. Not rewriting the problem after each step makes students prone to error. Here are three ideas that make showing work fundatory (fun + mandatory):

  1. Don’t ask for the final answer.  Instead, ask what would the problem look like after they “insert an operation”
  2. Tell students that you aren’t grading their final answer at all – just their work! This will make students who are okay with losing credit for not showing their work think again since they won’t even get credit for their correct answer. 
  3. Try a round table activity! A group of 2-4 students will work on a problem together rotating through the problem after each step. Teamwork requires every step to be written down.

Make it Visual

As you can see, my PEMDAS poster lived on my wall year around. And you can have it for free! Click here to get your free PEMDAS poster. 

Encourage students to write down the acronym vertically down their page and cross off the letter/operations as they solved the problem. Students can be enormously successful using this strategy! When I modeled order of operations problems, I highlighted or underlined the step I was completing. This helps students too!

Try These Activities

All of these activities were a hit in my classroom! Students really can’t practice a skill too much. 🙂

Order of operations is a student and teacher favorite. Check out our tips for mastering this math skill in your middle school classroom. | maneuveringthemiddle.com

How do you teach order of operations?

The post Mastering Order of Operations appeared first on Maneuvering the Middle.

]]>
https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/mastering-order-of-operations/feed/ 1
Self-Checking Activities in Math https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/self-checking-activities-in-math/ https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/self-checking-activities-in-math/#comments Wed, 09 Nov 2022 00:00:00 +0000 https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/?p=63725 One of the best classroom procedures that you can teach your students is the routine for self-checking work. Self-checking activities and self-checking routines were a game changer for me!  Does this sound familiar? You just sit down with your small group when you see a raised hand. You vacate your small group table to check […]

The post Self-Checking Activities in Math appeared first on Maneuvering the Middle.

]]>
One of the best classroom procedures that you can teach your students is the routine for self-checking work. Self-checking activities and self-checking routines were a game changer for me! 

Self-checking activities and routines are so helpful. Students get the feedback they need to move on. Check out our self-checking tips here! | maneuveringthemiddle.com

Does this sound familiar? You just sit down with your small group when you see a raised hand. You vacate your small group table to check on this student when they point to their first completed problem and ask, “Is this right?” You can’t fault this student for wanting feedback, but there has got to be a better way!

Benefits of Self-Checking

Self-checking procedures and activities will give students the autonomy to take control of their learning. Not only are they taking more ownership of their math understanding, but they are now able to work at their own pace. (Reminder to provide extension opportunities!) They are able to get the feedback they need to move on.

Like in the example above, students just want to know if they are doing it right. Who wants to complete an entire worksheet of problems to find out at the end that they had made a critical error over and over again that could have been corrected after the first problem? On the other hand, there are also students who won’t ask if they are solving correctly, so they could end up in the same boat of making a repeated mistake too.

For the teacher, giving students the ability to check their own work in real-time, gives you the opportunity to circulate to look for common misconceptions, facilitate stations, or host a small group. 

Simple Ideas for Self-Checking

These are a non-exhaustive list of self-checking ideas that I have tried in my own classroom. They are all very tweakable!  Find out what works best for you and your students. 

  • Mixed answer key – This was my go to! I would simply project or write the answers to all of the problems in a random order on the board. Students would solve a problem and look up on the board to make sure that they saw their answer somewhere. To be extra clear, these answers were not numbered with the problem number. 
  • Formative – We have a blog post from 2020 all about Formative that I recommend taking a look at. This technology is gold! You can post an assignment and students can submit answers and receive immediate feedback. Win-win!
  • Hidden answer key – I would create an exemplar answer key with all of the work displayed, make copies of it onto a bright color cardstock, and then put the copies into a folder that each table group shared. After every 2 or so problems, students were able to check their work and answers against my answer key. I found that the answer keys being placed in the folder prevented students from being tempted to copy while also giving them the opportunity to check their work against my work. That way if the student did miss a problem, they were able to look at my work to figure out their mistake which was perfect before a test.
  • Odd answers Only – Similar to textbooks, I would just write the answers to odd problems on the worksheet right next to the corresponding question.
  • Post the answer key to Google Classroom or Schoology for them to check after a certain timeframe. 
  • Mazes or Scavenger Hunts – These activities are self-checking by nature. Scavenger hunts are a student favorite! And we have this incredible self-checking Corn Maze Activity freebie.

Best Practices for Self-Checking

Before you begin implementing this routine, it is important to explain the why to your students. If you can instill the purpose of self-checking their work (see any of the benefits above), students will be less likely to take advantage. 

Remind students that they won’t have the answer keys on assessments or in the real-world, and that the work that they do in class prepares them for both of those times. 

Lastly, give students steps for what to do when they get the answer wrong. Do they move on? Rework the problem? Get help from a neighbor? Mark it wrong? That will be up to you and depend on the assignment. 

One last reminder is that a self-checking routine doesn’t replace teaching students what to do if they do not know how to solve a problem. One of the downsides of providing a self-check is for students who need help to not ask for help or that they just write down the answer. This How to Get Help Flowchart freebie is a great jumping off point. 

Self-checking activities and routines are so helpful. Students get the feedback they need to move on. Check out our self-checking tips here! | maneuveringthemiddle.com

Do you have a self-checking routine in your classroom? What self-checking activities have you tried?

Self-checking activities and routines are so helpful. Students get the feedback they need to move on. Check out our self-checking tips here! | maneuveringthemiddle.com

The post Self-Checking Activities in Math appeared first on Maneuvering the Middle.

]]>
https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/self-checking-activities-in-math/feed/ 2
The Benefits of Math Projects https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/the-benefits-of-math-projects/ Tue, 01 Nov 2022 11:00:00 +0000 https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/?p=63976 In my classroom, students would respond with an emphatic, “YES!” when I announced the start of any type of math project. Despite that unanimous affirmation from students, I found projects were a challenge to plan and implement. Fortunately, Maneuvering the Middle has been hard at work to do this heavy lifting, so teachers and students […]

The post The Benefits of Math Projects appeared first on Maneuvering the Middle.

]]>
In my classroom, students would respond with an emphatic, “YES!” when I announced the start of any type of math project. Despite that unanimous affirmation from students, I found projects were a challenge to plan and implement. Fortunately, Maneuvering the Middle has been hard at work to do this heavy lifting, so teachers and students can enjoy projects!

Math projects have so many benefits to your students. Check out why you should try a math project in your classroom. | maneuveringthemiddle.com

We are so excited to announce our amazing middle school math projects for 6th, 7th, 8th grade math and Algebra 1 are complete and ready for your classroom! 

Math projects have so many benefits to your students. Check out why you should try a math project in your classroom. | maneuveringthemiddle.com

Benefits of Implementing Projects in Math

There are numerous benefits to students working through the open-ended nature of projects in math. This list is non-exhaustive, and I would love to hear additional benefits in the comments below. 

You get to see different students shine – This is exciting to see! The students who may not excel in a traditional math setting can truly step up to really surprise you when given the opportunity to complete a challenge creatively. 

Students are able to use different parts of their brain – Projects, by nature, involve synthesizing and analyzing information in a way that does not always happen in a standard instructional setting. Not only that, but students will practice skills like orally presenting their findings or displaying their work in a visually appealing way.

Students problem solving in real-world scenarios – When students ask, “When will I ever use this?” then it may be time to start a project. Here is a snippet of what our projects ask students to solve:

Rational Numbers + Linear Relationships

  • 6th graders research and calculate the costs of flying or driving to various destinations. Grab it here.
  • 7th graders will calculate the cost of traveling to various National Parks and calculate the percent change in park and gas prices. Grab it here.
  • 8th graders will plan a vacation and apply discount options to their vacation expenses to explore the effect on the linear relationship. Grab it here.
  • Algebra 1 students will use and represent linear relationships to help them plan a vacation on a budget. Grab it here.

Financial Literacy

  • 6th graders plan a career fair and compare the lifetime earnings of various careers. Get it here.
  • 7th graders calculate household incomes and analyze best cities to live in based on earnings. Get it here.
  • 8th graders calculate and plan saving for college. Get it here.
  • Algebra 1 students find and use an exponential function to predict the rising cost of college. Get it here.

All of our projects are jam packed with everything you need to implement a project from start to finish.

Math projects have so many benefits to your students. Check out why you should try a math project in your classroom. | maneuveringthemiddle.com

Projects are an alternative to tests – Students take so many tests in a year. Why not replace an assessment with a project that does the same thing?

Projects are great for that interim time –  Do you have 4 days before winter break that you aren’t sure what to do with? Is Thanksgiving Break coming up, and starting a new unit doesn’t make sense? Projects are your solution!

Projects help create a positive classroom environment – You can read more about how to build a classroom environment conducive to projects here, but in my personal experience, my classroom felt more joyful when projects were taking place.

Have you implemented projects in your classroom? What benefits have you and your students experienced by working on projects in your classroom?

Math projects have so many benefits to your students. Check out why you should try a math project in your classroom. | maneuveringthemiddle.com

The post The Benefits of Math Projects appeared first on Maneuvering the Middle.

]]>
The Flipped Classroom https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/the-flipped-classroom/ Tue, 25 Oct 2022 11:00:00 +0000 https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/?p=25742 A flipped classroom might be the perfect solution for the teacher who has spent the last year making instructional videos. Those videos represent so much time and energy – surely they don’t have to go to waste when everyone is back in the classroom. We interviewed the flipped classroom expert to learn more. Check out […]

The post The Flipped Classroom appeared first on Maneuvering the Middle.

]]>

A flipped classroom might be the perfect solution for the teacher who has spent the last year making instructional videos. Those videos represent so much time and energy – surely they don’t have to go to waste when everyone is back in the classroom. We interviewed the flipped classroom expert to learn more.

The flipped classroom is here to stay, but is the flipped classroom right for you? Find out what the flipped classroom is and its benefits for teachers and for students here. | maneuveringthemiddle.com

Check out the player to hear the interview, or you can read the transcript that has been edited for succinctness below.

Who is our expert on the flipped classroom?

Mandy Rice, high school social studies teacher and mom of three, felt that her pace in the classroom was unsustainable.  In her second year of teaching, she flipped her classroom and began training other teachers on the flipped classroom model. She now hosts The Sustainable Teacher Podcast and is the founder of Teach on a Mission.

Updated 10/2022: Since interviewing Mandy, we have learned some more things about the Flipped Classroom from our teacher community over in our Maneuvering the Middle VIP Facebook group. We have updated this blog post to reflect that.

What is the flipped classroom?

In the traditional classroom model, a teacher presents a lesson from the front of the classroom, students take notes, and typically, students go home and work on problems in isolation. 

The flipped classroom model literally flips that sequence of events. Students listen or watch a lesson the teacher has assigned virtually at home and the practice (the messy part of learning) happens inside the classroom where the teacher is available to help. Students can ask questions and collaborate with their peers.

What are the benefits to the flipped classroom?

You are shifting how you use your time. For example, Mandy taught 4 sections of A.P. Psychology. Before flipping her classroom, she would present the material for about 30 minutes each class period, multiplied by the 4 sections to equal about 2 hours spent teaching. In the flipped classroom model, it takes (approximately) an hour to create the slides, press record, present the lesson, edit, and hit publish. It saves you time and energy! 

But more than that, you are now more available to your students during class time – the entire time. You have taken the content delivery out of the class time.  Teachers can be more effective with the time spent with their students. 

And if you are an All Access member, the instructional videos are already created! The videos cover the student handouts, so students can watch the videos, take notes, and then practice in class. Since the videos do not go over every single problem on the student handouts, you still have problems to go over in a mini-lesson the next day or to assign to students.

Students benefit when their teachers are more available to them. They don’t feel like they are burdening their teacher with questions because their teacher is trying to accomplish 16 different things.

Updated 10/2022: What needs to be in place for the flipped classroom to work?

After a few years of teachers implementing the flipped classroom approach in their classrooms, there appear to be a few starting requirements for the flipped classroom to be successful.

  • Parent and student buy-in – This is key. Parents will be relieved that they aren’t having to play teacher at home, but may not be used to this non-traditional method of teaching. Post Covid, they may be skeptical of more digital learning. That’s ok! Your job is to communicate with parents so they know what to expect. Student buy-in is going to be just as important. Before you decide if this is the route you take, you may want to consider asking your students what their experience with the flipped classroom has been like.
  • Technology and reliable internet access – Internet and a device (in most cases) are 100% necessary for the flipped classroom to work. While some students are fortunate enough to have these things readily available, you cannot make the assumption that all do. One teacher recommended sending home a document that requires a parent to fill out and sign if they have internet or not. This prevents students saying they don’t have internet access when they want to opt out.
  • A plan for when students don’t watch the instructional videos – See below for ideas of what you can do to hold your students accountable.
  • Short videos – This is a MUST! Videos cannot be longer than 10-15 minutes. Without any interruptions, a teacher can cover a topic more succinctly. No one wants to watch a long math video, and you will have class time the next day to make any additional points.
  • Study hall – This isn’t a requirement, but it does provide school time for students to watch your instructional videos if they will not have access at home.
  • Instruction on watching a video with fidelity – In the first week of school, dedicate time to showing students how to watch a video. Play the video for the whole class, pause and take notes like you would expect them to at home. Then have students practice watching a video in class as you circulate. When students have mastered this, then assign a video for homework.

Updated on 10/04/2022: What are some of the drawbacks of the flipped classroom?

No teaching technique is perfect for every student. Digital learning is here to stay, but students may be fatigued from all of the screens. In our small sample, it seems that about half of students prefer the traditional classroom. 

It can be easy to zone out in a video. Unfortunately, many teachers say that the same students who don’t complete traditional homework at home will also opt out of watching the videos. 

Not every student has reliable internet access at home. This inequity is a tough obstacle to navigate, so it does leave room for pause.

What do you do when a student doesn’t watch a video?

Mandy talks more about this in more detail here on her podcast. Check it out because there are so many great, actionable steps!

You have to have a process in place when this happens. It is going to happen. You cannot make that learning optional. And giving a 0 still makes it an option for some students. Decide on a process and that way you don’t have to think about it in the moment. No frustration or emotional judgement. 

What you should NOT do – deliver that missed content in your classroom. For the students who did watch the video for homework, they will feel frustrated, and ultimately you are enabling students to not watch the videos if you redeliver the content in class.

Updated on 10/04/22:  Most teachers use the warm-up to gauge whether students are ready to practice after watching the videos. Teachers may decide that they need to go over a few more problems or that students are ready to practice.  For students who did not watch the videos, you have a couple of options:

  • They cannot do the activity until the video is watched. Teachers say the more fun your activities are, the more likely students will watch the videos in an effort to not miss out. Make sure the activities are done in pairs or with groups. 😉 If your videos are about 15 minutes long, and you have a 45-60 minute class, they are probably missing out on at least half of the practice time which is about what they would have missed out on if they chose not to complete a traditional homework assignment.
  • Create rewards for students who watch the videos. Free time was always a huge motivator – for example, the class at the end of the week with the highest percentage of homework completion would get 15 minutes of free time. 

What do you think of the flipped classroom? What tips would you add?

The flipped classroom is here to stay, but is the flipped classroom right for you? Find out what the flipped classroom is and its benefits for teachers and for students here. | maneuveringthemiddle.com

The post The Flipped Classroom appeared first on Maneuvering the Middle.

]]>
Linear Equations Activity Ideas https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/linear-equations-activity-ideas/ Tue, 18 Oct 2022 11:00:00 +0000 https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/?p=62212 Linear equations require lots of practice as the skill progresses to include more steps and increases in complexity. Any of these activities can be used from the basics of simplifying expressions to solving equations with variables on both sides.  Model by Using Algebra Tiles Are you surprised I am starting with Algebra tiles? They are […]

The post Linear Equations Activity Ideas appeared first on Maneuvering the Middle.

]]>
Linear equations require lots of practice as the skill progresses to include more steps and increases in complexity. Any of these activities can be used from the basics of simplifying expressions to solving equations with variables on both sides. 

Model by Using Algebra Tiles

Are you surprised I am starting with Algebra tiles? They are foundational for concrete understanding! You can learn more about using Algebra tiles in your classroom by grabbing our free Getting Started with Algebra Tiles guide, which can be found by checking out our post on Solving Equations. This Modeling Equations with Variables on Both Sides activity is a great way to practice solving equations with Algebra tiles. You just need some Algebra tiles (or your students can draw them!).

Student Teacher

Put students into pairs and show an equation on the board. Have one student instruct the other on how to solve as the student listening writes each step and solution. Then, show a new equation and have students switch roles. This gives students a chance to teach and reinforce what they remember about linear equations. I love this activity because it is simple and it makes every student explain their thinking. You, as the teacher, can circulate listening to each pair.

Round Table

Give students individual white boards and have them work in teams of 2-4.  With one equation written on the board, the first person will solve step one.  The second person will complete the second step in solving and the third will complete the next step. Keep rotating until the problem is solved and the last person checks the solution.  Have groups hold up their boards when they are finished.  If you want something like this, we have this Solving Equations with Variables on Both Sides Round Table available! 

Linear Equations require lots of practice as the skills continues to increase in difficulty. Keep students engaged with these 5 ideas. | maneuveringthemiddle.com

Board Races

After students have had time to practice, implement “Board Races.” Two students will come up to the board and race to solve an equation shown on the board. The person who solves it correctly first stays up at the board for the next equation with a new competitor. I like to have the students who aren’t at the board working the equations on notebook paper to help check the solutions. An element of competition makes repetitive practice more fun! For race type activities, I like to have teams compete (boys v. girls or one side of the room v. the other side of the room).

Digital Activities 

I love our digital activities! This linear equations set of digital activities includes simplifying expressions, solving one and two-step equations, solving multi-step equations, and equations with variables on both sides, making it the perfect review before a linear equations test. 

Linear Equations require lots of practice as the skills continues to increase in difficulty. Keep students engaged with these 5 ideas. | maneuveringthemiddle.com

What are some fun ways that students practice solving linear equations in your class? You can check out how to turn any worksheet into an activity which can easily be used for linear equations too!

Linear Equations require lots of practice as the skills continues to increase in difficulty. Keep students engaged with these 5 ideas. | maneuveringthemiddle.com

The post Linear Equations Activity Ideas appeared first on Maneuvering the Middle.

]]>
The Distributive Property https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/the-distributive-property/ Tue, 11 Oct 2022 11:00:00 +0000 https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/?p=62199 The distributive property is an important building block for algebraic concepts such as multiplying polynomials, recognizing equivalent expressions, and factoring polynomials. Since it starts as early as 6th grade, let’s talk about how to make this as concrete as possible for students. If you haven’t already, go back and read last week’s post on simplifying […]

The post The Distributive Property appeared first on Maneuvering the Middle.

]]>
The distributive property is an important building block for algebraic concepts such as multiplying polynomials, recognizing equivalent expressions, and factoring polynomials. Since it starts as early as 6th grade, let’s talk about how to make this as concrete as possible for students. If you haven’t already, go back and read last week’s post on simplifying expressions by combining like terms.

The distributive property is a great property for hands-on learning. Check out our tips on making the distributive property concrete. | maneuveringthemiddle.com

Sidenote: I have to admit that when I first taught the distributive property, I focused solely on the procedure. I had students draw two arrows from the term outside of the parentheses to the two terms inside and called it a day. This is how I was taught. I tell you this to remind you that there are more ways to teach a skill than the way you may have learned it. 

Let’s get to it!

Introducing the Distributive Property

By the time you are teaching the distributive property, students are familiar with order of operations. If you give them a problem like 3(8+2), they will jump at the chance to solve. Students will add 8+2 to get 3(10) and then multiply to get 30. 

You can have students discover that the distributive property allows for another way to solve.  3(8+2) = 3(8) + 3(2) = 24+6 = 30. Proving to students that a property works instead of just telling them a property works will always earn a thumbs up from me.

Introduce Variables

Students may be wondering, “Why can’t I just keep following the order of operations? Why do I need to use the distributive property?” This is a fair question, and a perfect opportunity to introduce the distributive property using variables.

Let’s look at: 3(2x+4).

Ask students if 2x+4 can be combined or added together. No, they do not have the same variable.

Combining like terms only applies to addition and subtraction. You can multiply and divide terms that do not have the same variable or exponent, so you can use the distributive property to simplify this expression further. 

3(2x+4) is like having 3 groups of (2x+4). I encourage you to use Algebra tiles as every possible opportunity, so here is a beautiful visual.

The distributive property is a great property for hands-on learning. Check out our tips on making the distributive property concrete. | maneuveringthemiddle.com

Use the CRA Method

Just like I explained in the previous post, Simplifying Expressions by Combining Like Terms, the Concrete, Representational, and Abstract Framework will help your students develop a solid understanding of the distributive property. 

The distributive property is a great property for hands-on learning. Check out our tips on making the distributive property concrete. | maneuveringthemiddle.com

Area Models with the Distributive Property

As you can see in the “representation” column above, teaching and requiring students to use an area model for distribution, especially when you are teaching the distributive property in Algebra 1 can be extremely helpful. An area model will set them up for success when they are multiplying polynomials and factoring trinomials. 

Distributing with a Negative

The most common error you will see regarding the distributive property will be related to signs. Those sneaky little negatives can get lost pretty easily. I have some ideas that I have not used in my classroom (in full transparency), but came to mind when writing this blog post. 

Since multiplying by a negative, always results in the opposite, you can teach students that if there is a negative outside the parentheses, then it will always change the inside signs to the opposite. (Reviewing integer rules will reinforce this, but sometimes economy of language wins). 

I actually think that this is best introduced using a visual. Here is how I would show it and ask students to show their work using this method too.

The distributive property is a great property for hands-on learning. Check out our tips on making the distributive property concrete. | maneuveringthemiddle.com

Other Tips

There are so many ways to introduce this topic! Here is another idea from our Student Handouts below.

 Saying “I want one drink, 2 slices of pizza, and one ice cream cone” 4 separate times isn’t efficient.  “I want 4 drinks, 8 slices of pizza, and 4 ice cream cones” makes a lot more sense.

Angie, our amazing editor (and so much more), found this test problem on a New York 7th grade state assessment. This problem could definitely benefit from sketching a square and labeling each side. This would be an excellent problem to talk about why the wrong answers are wrong.

The distributive property is a great property for hands-on learning. Check out our tips on making the distributive property concrete. | maneuveringthemiddle.com

That about covers it! How do you teach the distributive property?

The distributive property is a great property for hands-on learning. Check out our tips on making the distributive property concrete. | maneuveringthemiddle.com

The post The Distributive Property appeared first on Maneuvering the Middle.

]]>
Tips for Teaching Simplifying Expressions https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/tips-for-teaching-simplifying-expressions/ Tue, 04 Oct 2022 11:00:00 +0000 https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/?p=62181 Simplifying expressions is foundational in Algebra! Clear understanding of this concept will help students solve equations in middle school and high school math. Come back next week when we will expound on this concept with the distributive property. Let’s dig into simplifying expressions by combining like terms. Vertical Alignment As always, I like to take […]

The post Tips for Teaching Simplifying Expressions appeared first on Maneuvering the Middle.

]]>
Simplifying expressions is foundational in Algebra! Clear understanding of this concept will help students solve equations in middle school and high school math. Come back next week when we will expound on this concept with the distributive property. Let’s dig into simplifying expressions by combining like terms.

Simplifying expressions by combining like terms is foundational for algebra and all future math. Check out these great tips! | maneuveringthemiddle.com

Vertical Alignment

As always, I like to take a look at the standards. Simplifying expressions starts as early as 6th grade in some states and continues to be used through… all future math.

Simplifying expressions by combining like terms is foundational for algebra and all future math. Check out these great tips! | maneuveringthemiddle.com

In my experience, students need a thorough review of the basics of simplifying expressions each year, so these tips are for 6th grade teachers, 7th grade teachers, 8th grade teachers, Algebra teachers, and so forth.

Ideas for Hooks

As you introduce or review simplifying expressions, grab your students’ attention with a hook. Help them relate to the content with a real word example! Here are a few ideas for simplifying expressions hooks that I have used or have heard other teachers use.

  • Watch this MadTV clip with your students. Ask them – what would be an easier way to communicate his order? 
  • Ask students to group like items. Display a picture with different objects and ask how they would group them. You can see an example of this on one of our 7th grade student handouts below. Connecting this to ordering food in the drive-thru is a real-life example that students can probably connect. The drinks are usually grouped in a drink carrier, the fries are all in one bag, and the chicken nuggets are typically in another bag. Combining like items is all around us!
  • Write down various animals on notecards (1 animal per notecard). Give each student a notecard and ask them to group themselves accordingly. Don’t give them any additional instructions. After they make groups, ask them why they chose their groups. Ideally, students will have found “like” animals, giving you a perfect segway into like terms.

Instructional Ideas

Anchor Chart  – The basis of simplifying expressions is thoroughly understanding that a “like term” is a term with the same base (or variable) and the same exponent (or power) and that combining like terms is adding and subtracting them. Because this is so important, I recommend creating an anchor chart with some examples and non-examples of like terms. In addition, there are lots of vocabulary terms that will be sticking around for a long time – coefficient, variable, and term – so be sure to have those words and definitions posted for easy reference. 

Use the CRA Framework – It’s no secret that we are fans of the CRA framework (you can see the many posts we have written here and here), and simplifying expressions by combining like terms is another perfect skill that fits into this method. 

  • Abstract – When students are ready, they can combine like terms using the rules that they now have conceptual understanding of.

Simplify the Expressions by Annotation

Once students are working in the abstract part of the framework, you will want students to use a method for grouping to keep their work organized and create barriers for simple errors. Here are some popular ideas:

  • Underline or draw various shapes around like terms including the sign right before the term
  • Highlight using different colors for different like terms
  • Rewrite on different colored sticky notes and then rearrange
Simplifying expressions by combining like terms is foundational for algebra and all future math. Check out these great tips! | maneuveringthemiddle.com
  • Use a T-chart. Personally, this is what I used with my students since I found that sometimes the shapes could make the signs hard to read.
Simplifying expressions by combining like terms is foundational for algebra and all future math. Check out these great tips! | maneuveringthemiddle.com

Other Tips

  • You can have students put an exponent of 1 on terms like x.
  • Physically show your students the difference between 2x and x^2 using algebra tiles. 
  • Easy activity – write a bunch of different terms on your whiteboard and play the flyswatter game! Say a term, and students have to hit a like term. 
  • Integer fluency is pretty key when combining like terms. If it has been a while since they have practiced, go over some of the basics before jumping into combining like terms.

Simplifying expressions is truly the foundation of algebra – you have to simplify before you can solve equations. Make sure to come back next week where we talk about simplifying expressions with the distributive property. 

Simplifying expressions by combining like terms is foundational for algebra and all future math. Check out these great tips! | maneuveringthemiddle.com

The post Tips for Teaching Simplifying Expressions appeared first on Maneuvering the Middle.

]]>
Structuring a 60 Minute Class Period https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/structure-60-minute-class-period/ https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/structure-60-minute-class-period/#comments Tue, 27 Sep 2022 11:00:00 +0000 https://mtmmigration.flywheelsites.com/?p=1436 How long are your class periods?  Let’s discuss ways to structure a 60 minute class period. These of course are guidelines; sometimes albeit often, in a middle school classroom, things do not go according to plan, but it is always a good idea to have a structured routine for both yourself and your students. **Be […]

The post Structuring a 60 Minute Class Period appeared first on Maneuvering the Middle.

]]>
How long are your class periods?  Let’s discuss ways to structure a 60 minute class period.

These of course are guidelines; sometimes albeit often, in a middle school classroom, things do not go according to plan, but it is always a good idea to have a structured routine for both yourself and your students.

**Be sure to check out our posts on structuring a 45 minute lesson and a 100 minute lesson

The biggest challenge with teaching middle school is the race against the clock! Ideas for how to structure a 60 minute class period. | maneuveringthemiddle.com

Do First/Bell Ringer/Warm-Up 5-10 minutes

A bell ringer is a great way to start off your class period! This really sets the stage for a productive class period and communicates every minute is valuable.  No matter if you have 60 minute class period or a 200 minute class period – include a warm-up.

Homework Check (if you assign homework) 2 Minutes

If you assign homework, make sure that students have a moment to receive feedback in some way, so they know if they are practicing correctly.

Instruction 10-15 minutes

Keep direct instruction short and sweet.  The rule of thumb is that notes should not take longer than 1 plus your students’ age, so if you teach 12 year olds, your notes should last no longer than 13 minutes (12+1).  Students are only capable of active listening for so long.

If you need more than that recommended amount of time for direct instruction, that is ok! Give students the opportunity to practice and engage in a meaningful way before returning to direct instruction. Another idea is to assign our student videos, since they adhere to this time recommendation. 

Remember that direct instruction isn’t your only option to teach a lesson. You could:

Lastly, I think it is important to note that if you are using our curriculum, you do not need to go over every single problem on a student  handout. Work the problems ahead of time, decide which are the most important, and then save the rest for small group work time. 

Activity + Small Group Instruction 20 minutes

After the lesson, comes the practice! This can be a card sort, matching activity, scavenger hunt, white board practice, a game, or station work. If you have a worksheet, then be sure to check out these ideas to make any worksheet an engaging activity.

Now that everyone has something to do – let’s start small groups! You can pick the unused problems from the lesson or use the same activity being used by the rest of the class. The key is that students receive immediate feedback, and you can catch those misconceptions in real time.

What is important here is that you have more work than what can get done in the time period or you have an extension activity that students can grab without support.

Independent Practice/Exit Ticket 15 minutes

The goal by the end of class is that students can practice the skill independently. This is the work to check as a formative assessment and decide whether the class needs more practice.

Flex Day

Flex days are a great way to allow students to digest what they have been learning. A minimum of one per week is a good starting point – it allows you as the teacher to button up any misconceptions and for students to explore a skill or topic more fully. Structuring a flex day is very similar in structure to a typical lesson:

  • Warm-up (5 minutes)
  • Mini-lesson (10 minutes)
  • Stations (30 minutes)
    • Station 1: Activity (10 minutes)
    • Station 2: Small Group (10 minutes)
    • Station 3: Technology – Quizizz is great for fluency practice. (10 minutes)
  • Formative Assessment (10 minutes)

Self-Paced Classroom

60 minutes is a great amount of time to implement a self-paced classroom! Students have time for a warm-up, to get out the needed technology, to work at their own pace, and you have time to implement mini-lessons (if needed) and small groups!
We have an entire blog post devoted to the self-paced classroom.

Whew! I hope these suggestions help spice up your weekly routines! How long are your classes?  How do you structure your 60 minute class period?  

The biggest challenge with teaching middle school is the race against the clock! Ideas for how to structure a 60 minute class period. | maneuveringthemiddle.com

The post Structuring a 60 Minute Class Period appeared first on Maneuvering the Middle.

]]>
https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/structure-60-minute-class-period/feed/ 19
Teaching Scientific Notation and Exponents https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/teaching-scientific-notation-and-exponents/ Tue, 20 Sep 2022 11:00:00 +0000 https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/?p=59644 Let’s chat about scientific notation and exponents!  I have found that the simplest skills in math are often the most miscalculated and confusing for students. Exponents and scientific notation can fall into this trap.  Vertical Alignment Exponent Tips It is important with both exponents and scientific notation that students understand that they show a different […]

The post Teaching Scientific Notation and Exponents appeared first on Maneuvering the Middle.

]]>
Let’s chat about scientific notation and exponents!  I have found that the simplest skills in math are often the most miscalculated and confusing for students. Exponents and scientific notation can fall into this trap. 

Vertical Alignment

Scientific Notation and exponents - check out our tips and ideas for covering these 8th grade and Algebra skills! | maneuveringthemiddle.com

Exponent Tips

It is important with both exponents and scientific notation that students understand that they show a different way to represent a value.

Before even showing an exponent, start by showing the expanded form like  7*7*7*7*7. You can start by asking students:

  • Is this the most efficient way to write this?
  • Would 7*5 give you the same result? Why or why not?

Tip: I have learned the hard way to NEVER use 2^2 in any of your early examples because it will just confuse students into thinking you multiply the base and exponent.

Easy, no-plan activity idea: A fun way for students to practice exponents is by using concentric circles. The inside circle is the base and the outside circle is the exponent. Assign students numbers 1-10 and have them rotate to a new partner each round. Students pair up, write down the exponent form, the expanded form, and then calculate the standard form. Keep rotating until your time is up. 

Laws of Exponents

The laws of exponents are so fun! I love how students can build on their previous knowledge to come up with the laws themselves. For example: 

On a Facebook thread, I recently saw a teacher say, “When in doubt, expand it out.” If a student forgets a law, all they need to do is expand it and calculate to discover the law again. That is something a student is more likely to do if you are modeling it consistently.

Because the laws are so accessible, this content really shines as a discovery-based lesson. Your students could also participate in a jigsaw. Each group becomes experts at their assigned law, then they present the law, the proof, and examples to their peers. 

If you go the traditional teaching route, I recommend splitting this skill up over at least 2 days. Maneuvering the Middle 8th grade curriculum covers multiplying/dividing like bases, power to power, and product to power on day one. Negative and zero exponents are covered on day two.

Scientific Notation and exponents - check out our tips and ideas for covering these 8th grade and Algebra skills! | maneuveringthemiddle.com

I highly recommend an anchor chart with all of the laws for easy reference. Sometimes in my last class on a Friday, my brain needed to look at an anchor chart to give it the boost it needed (and I am the teacher).

Scientific Notation

Like I said before, scientific notation is just a different way to represent a value. Here is a great way to introduce why we might use scientific notation. Write down the mass of Earth and Mars on your whiteboard or project it. Make sure students will have to copy it down themselves since that is part of your point. 

Scientific Notation and exponents - check out our tips and ideas for covering these 8th grade and Algebra skills! | maneuveringthemiddle.com

Start by asking students to read the numbers to you. You will get some funny responses. Then ask students to add them or subtract the masses. As students write and count all of the zeros and inevitably miscalculate or miscount the number of zeros, you can introduce why we used scientific notation. (Less room for error, more efficient) Scientific notation is similar to typing TTYL instead of typing “talk to you later.”

Tips for Scientific Notation

Avoid using right or left when describing the direction to move the decimal. Instead, emphasize that smaller numbers will have negative exponents and larger numbers will have positive exponents. This re-enforces the negative exponent law.

Speaking of exponent laws, scientific notation operations reinforce the laws of exponents. If you look at the vertical alignment, scientific notation only shows up in 8th grade (in TEKS and CCSS), so at least, it reinforces other important concepts that students will use in Algebra 1 and 2.

I have never (and will never) teach Science, but it did occur to me to look up the Texas Science standards, and take a look at this chemistry standard – 

“C.2(G)  express and manipulate chemical quantities using scientific conventions and mathematical procedures, including dimensional analysis, scientific notation, and significant figures”

An opportunity for cross curricular?! Wahoo! If this is something that has peaked your interest, here is a NASA themed exploration lesson with resources for practicing scientific notation. This demos activity is also a great science based activity.

What tips do you have for teaching exponents and scientific notation?

Scientific Notation and exponents - check out our tips and ideas for covering these 8th grade and Algebra skills! | maneuveringthemiddle.com

The post Teaching Scientific Notation and Exponents appeared first on Maneuvering the Middle.

]]>
Are Math Pre-Assessments Necessary? https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/are-math-pre-assessments-necessary/ https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/are-math-pre-assessments-necessary/#comments Tue, 13 Sep 2022 11:00:00 +0000 https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/?p=59631 At the beginning of the school year, we are often asked about math pre-assessments:  Does Maneuvering the Middle have pre-assessments? Should teachers give pre-assessments? If yes, what are some best practices? It is likely that your school already has something in place like MAP or benchmark testing. In those cases, I would say that your […]

The post Are Math Pre-Assessments Necessary? appeared first on Maneuvering the Middle.

]]>
At the beginning of the school year, we are often asked about math pre-assessments: 

  • Does Maneuvering the Middle have pre-assessments?
  • Should teachers give pre-assessments?
  • If yes, what are some best practices?

It is likely that your school already has something in place like MAP or benchmark testing. In those cases, I would say that your pre-assessment is good to go. If you’re interested in other approaches to pre-assessments, then keep reading. 

Math pre-assessments are often given at the beginning of the school year, but are pre-assessments necessary for your students? | maneuveringthemiddle.com

What is a Pre-Assessment?

Pre-Assessments are typically a test students take at the beginning of the year or unit. The data can help teachers make decisions about lessons, pacing, and differentiation.

Pros of Math Pre-Assessments

Pre-assessment data can provide teachers with the information they need to make strategic decisions about the support students will require. Perhaps, across the board, students performed low on proportional relationships, a teacher may add extra days to their unit on proportions. 

According to the Tar Heel State Teacher, pre-assessments provide students with evidence of their growth and prime students for their upcoming learning. I completely agree! Keep reading to see this in action. 

Cons of Math Pre-Assessments

Students are over tested. According to the Washington Post, “the average student in America’s big-city public schools takes some 112 mandatory standardized tests between pre-kindergarten and the end of 12th grade – an average of about eight a year.” 

Your school may already require multiple benchmarks in addition to the state tests. Does testing foster a love of learning? A pre-assessment would easily eat up at least one class period. Time is precious! 

If your students are taking one big, comprehensive pre-assessment at the beginning of year, that is an exorbitant amount of data to comb through. A question to ask yourself is, “Will I actually look at this data to make future decisions about instruction?” If I were being 100% honest, this would be overwhelming for me. And is it fair to tailor instruction of a unit covered in the spring based on something students did in August?

If pre-assessments are given at the beginning of the year, then your data will reflect the “summer slump.”

Math Pre-Assessment Recommendations

Ask yourself, “Why do I want to pre-assess?”

If you are pre-assessing because you think this is something you should do or something your students expect to do, then you are likely better off spending that class time in other ways.

Avoid one large pre-assessment. Shoot for a short pre-assessment at the beginning of a unit with content specific to the unit you are about to begin. The timeliness will ensure that you can actually use what you observe. 

  • Marissa McCarthy, an All Access 6th grade teacher, only pre-assesses on 3 units – decimals, fractions, and the coordinate plane because those are covered in 5th grade and built upon in 6th grade. She gives students 4 problems at the beginning of the unit. At the end of the unit, she gives the exact same problems. “Students love seeing that they went from 1/4 to 4/4. You can use Maneuvering the Middle’s editable unit test to do this!” Or our end of year assessments to pull questions from.

Consider only pre-assessing previously taught content – not new to the grade level content! For example, in 7th grade, probability is introduced. If students are assessed on probability, they are more likely to miss questions due to lack of prior knowledge. However, a short fraction assessment that covers simplifying and multiplying fractions would do the trick. This data could tell me if I need to spend an entire lesson reviewing fraction multiplication or if I can jump straight into probability.

Short on time? Perhaps, you have 45 minute class periods, and you do not have the time to devote to extras. You can completely avoid pre-assessments by using existing data. Use the state assessment data that already exists! We work so hard to prepare students for a state assessment that we almost never look at that data. If you can, review the data reports of your incoming students (this may be trickier if your students come from a different school). 

  • Don’t spend too much time on the knitty gritty – look at overall trends. 
  • Find where a misunderstanding may impact your grade level content.
  • You can even use this data to decide if you need to include pre-assessments for future units. 

There is no one right way to pre-assess or collect data from your students. Do you give pre-assessments?

Math pre-assessments are often given at the beginning of the school year, but are pre-assessments necessary for your students? | maneuveringthemiddle.com

The post Are Math Pre-Assessments Necessary? appeared first on Maneuvering the Middle.

]]>
https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/are-math-pre-assessments-necessary/feed/ 1
Structuring a 45 Minute Class Period https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/structuring-a-45-minute-class-period/ Tue, 06 Sep 2022 11:00:00 +0000 https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/?p=59580 Does a perfect class length exist? Let’s talk about structuring a 45 minute class period. 45 minute class periods are what I experienced as a student, but as a teacher, whew – it is a whirlwind! Pros of 45 Minute Periods Students’ attention spans are only so long. 45 minutes means that the pace is […]

The post Structuring a 45 Minute Class Period appeared first on Maneuvering the Middle.

]]>
Does a perfect class length exist? Let’s talk about structuring a 45 minute class period. 45 minute class periods are what I experienced as a student, but as a teacher, whew – it is a whirlwind!

Pros of 45 Minute Periods

Students’ attention spans are only so long. 45 minutes means that the pace is quick, and there is no time to waste. Students can feel that urgency! Ideally, this means that there is less off-task behavior and students can stay focused.

Cons of 45 Minute Class Periods

As much as I tried to make the pros exceed the cons, I just couldn’t do it. Here are the challenges that a teacher faces with such a short amount of time:

  • Makes projects, assessments, performance tasks, or anything else requiring more time challenging to implement
  • Teaching a skill and having students practice it with fidelity in a single class period is tricky
  • Outside class time is necessary for students requiring extra help 
  • The fast pace is exhausting for teachers! (I can attest)

How to Maximize Your Time 

Since 45 minutes goes fast, here is my non-exhaustive list of ways to make your time work for you:

  • Get right to work! Have a short warm-up to get students to start focusing right away!
  • Tighten up those transitions – Transitions are a time suck. Sticking to a routine can help keep those transitions predictable and quick.
  • Be overly prepared – Work the problems ahead of time. Know exactly which problems you are going over to cover the content. Friendly reminder: if you use MTM, you and your students don’t need to go over every single problem on the student handout. 
  • Remove time wasters:
    • Passing out papers/materials – students are grabbing those on their way in or they are already located at the table
    • Using an interactive notebook – anything that requires cutting and gluing, be gone!
  • Set timers! Have one for yourself and one that is visible for students. 

Ideas for a 45 Minute Lesson

Note: These are guidelines; sometimes albeit often, in a middle school classroom, things do not go according to plan, but it is always a good idea to have a structured routine for both yourself and your students.   

Some lessons require more time, and some lessons don’t. Use your judgment! There are also a variety of other factors that impact the day-to-day running of your classroom such as the occasional pep rally, field trip, or fire drill.

45 Minute Class Period Idea #1

45 minute class periods are short and there is much to learn! Check out these tips for structuring your 45 minute class period. | maneuveringthemiddle.com

This structure is great if your students need a slower pace. Your students have adequate time to digest the material. However, you would need to look at your entire year to see if you have time to get through all of the standards. You could always limit two-day lessons for more challenging standards. 

Sample Structure

Day 1

  • Warm up (5 minutes)
  • Lesson (15 minutes)
  • Practice (25 minutes)

Day 2

  • Warm up (5 minutes)
  • Lesson (15 minutes) – Go over material in more depth or address misconceptions from the prior day
  • Practice (20 minutes)
  • Exit Ticket (5 minutes)

45 Minute Class Period Idea #2

45 minute class periods are short and there is much to learn! Check out these tips for structuring your 45 minute class period. | maneuveringthemiddle.com

This structure would be for classrooms that can handle a faster pace. You can still pull small groups – you probably have time for only one group per day. 

Sample Structure

  • Warm up (5 minutes)
  • Check HW (5 minutes) 
  • Lesson (15 minutes)
  • Practice (15 minutes)
  • Exit Ticket (5 minutes)

45 Minute Class Period Idea #3

45 minute class periods are short and there is much to learn! Check out these tips for structuring your 45 minute class period. | maneuveringthemiddle.com

This structure is great for a medium pace. Every two lessons, students have the opportunity to practice or go deeper. You have built-in a potential reteach day, so your pacing can stay on track. 

Sample Structure for a Flex Day

  • Warm up (5 minutes)
  • Mini-lesson/directions/reteach (5-10 minutes)
  • Stations or Rotations (30 minutes)
    • Station 1: Small Groups (10 minutes)
    • Station 2: Activity (10 minutes)
    • Station 3: Tech (10 minutes)

45 Lesson Idea #4 and #5

One of the benefits of Self-Paced Learning is that students are able to learn at their own pace, but we still have to provide a structure within our classroom. This structure is from Jodi, a teacher who uses All Access, and talked about self-paced learning on our podcast. 

  • Warm up (5 minutes)
  • Mini-lesson (5 minutes)
  • Students work on their grids (35 minutes)
    • Teacher conferences/small groups

Flipped classrooms are going to have a similar need for structure. Here is how I would structure a 45 minute class: 

  • HW: Watch Lesson Video
  • Warm Up (5 minutes)
    • Teacher checks student notes to prove videos were watched
  • Mini-lesson for any questions or misunderstandings (5 minutes)
  • Practice (30 minutes)
    • Teacher pulls small groups
    • Stations would work too!
  • Exit Ticket (5)

No matter how you structure your time, those 45 minutes will go quick! How do you structure your 45 minute class period?

45 minute class periods are short and there is much to learn! Check out these tips for structuring your 45 minute class period. | maneuveringthemiddle.com

The post Structuring a 45 Minute Class Period appeared first on Maneuvering the Middle.

]]>
A Plan to Unfinished Learning https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/a-plan-to-unfinished-learning/ Tue, 30 Aug 2022 11:47:00 +0000 https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/?p=57697 In July, Noelle presented an incredible training about what teachers can do to combat unfinished learning in math. Because the information was so relevant and useful, I thought it would be helpful for it to exist in a blog post as well. When your students aren’t where you want them to be, it can be […]

The post A Plan to Unfinished Learning appeared first on Maneuvering the Middle.

]]>
In July, Noelle presented an incredible training about what teachers can do to combat unfinished learning in math. Because the information was so relevant and useful, I thought it would be helpful for it to exist in a blog post as well.

Create a sustainable plan for tackling the unfinished learning in your classroom so you can serve students well. | maneuveringthemiddle.com

When your students aren’t where you want them to be, it can be easy to just keep trucking along. Ignoring the unfinished learning in your classroom is a sure way to be frustrated when your students aren’t making the gains you are hoping for. 

Keep reading if you want to learn more about creating a sustainable plan for tackling the unfinished learning in your classroom so you can serve students well, without sacrificing your sanity and mental health. 

What is unfinished learning?

Concepts or skills that have not yet been mastered – can be from yesterday or years ago.

For example, your students may have never mastered squares and square roots. Where would this unfinished learning be present? Pythagorean theorem.

Unfinished learning can be addressed through planning, formatively assessing, and differentiating. 

Step 1: Planning

Determine what the standard is asking students to do and how they are expected to do it. Consider the potential challenges students may face. If you haven’t taught this content before, you may need to ask a fellow teacher what common misconceptions students may face tackling that specific skill. 

For example, in teaching the Pythagorean Theorem, you may spend much of your lesson on solving for the missing side using the formula, only to realize that students can’t differentiate between the hypotenuse and the legs.

When presenting the concept, provide multiple ways of solving. This is obviously easier said than done. I love the CRA framework, so be sure to check out the linked post for more context. You can provide multiple ways to solve by:

  • Making the math concrete (introduce hands-on opportunities like manipulatives)
  • Giving math context (create some real-world connections)
  • Visualizing the concept (drawing pictures)

Step 2: Observation through Formative Assessments

Formative assessments do not need to be formal. Using what you already have is effective and efficient! Here are some simple ways to assess:

Create a sustainable plan for tackling the unfinished learning in your classroom so you can serve students well. | maneuveringthemiddle.com

White boards are a favorite of mine! By observing through formative assessments, we can use our time and energy to address any misconceptions early on.

Step 3: Adapting using just-in-time supports

What is a Just-in Time support? It is a support provided based on a demonstrated need.

How do we adapt just in time?

When observing your students’ work, there are two outcomes. Either students are correct and can continue working, or students demonstrate a misunderstanding and it is time to act.

Create a sustainable plan for tackling the unfinished learning in your classroom so you can serve students well. | maneuveringthemiddle.com

If you already have task cards on your agenda, you don’t have to change it. The rest of your class works on task cards in groups; the students who demonstrated a misconception join you at your small group table where you have an extra set of task cards already organized from easiest to most difficult. As you work with your students, start by asking guiding questions. 

  • “What do you know?”
  • “What do you need to know?”
  • “What can we do to get started?”

Swapping the values is another quick way to differentiate for students that are demonstrating a misunderstanding. Let’s say that your students are working on surface area. You don’t want to spend lots of time readdressing how to multiply fractions or decimals. You are working on surface area after all. Swap the numbers! That way you can focus on what students need to understand to calculate the surface area of different 3D figures instead.

Error analysis is a great way to create an extension for your students, as well as address misconceptions. For students who got it when formatively assessed, you could push them to analyze how the incorrect answers were constructed. For students who need additional support, you can share the correct answer and scaffold your question in a small group.

Making small adaptations to an activity allows us to support students with unfinished learning, without the pressure to reinvent the wheel. The process outlined is ongoing – daily, weekly, all year long, so don’t get discouraged. 

All Access is a great tool for tackling unfinished learning. Since the stress of planning is done for you, you can use your energy to implement these tips.

How do you combat unfinished learning in your math classroom?

Create a sustainable plan for tackling the unfinished learning in your classroom so you can serve students well. | maneuveringthemiddle.com

The post A Plan to Unfinished Learning appeared first on Maneuvering the Middle.

]]>
Teaching One- and Two-Step Inequalities https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/how-to-teach-one-and-two-step-inequalities/ https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/how-to-teach-one-and-two-step-inequalities/#comments Tue, 23 Aug 2022 11:00:00 +0000 https://mtmmigration.flywheelsites.com/?p=1915 What I love so much about inequalities are the infinite solutions. For so much of students’ previous math experience, there is one exact answer. When it comes to inequalities, it is fun to push students to think of their answers beyond “x<4” and brainstorm all of the infinite solutions that x can be and then […]

The post Teaching One- and Two-Step Inequalities appeared first on Maneuvering the Middle.

]]>
What I love so much about inequalities are the infinite solutions. For so much of students’ previous math experience, there is one exact answer. When it comes to inequalities, it is fun to push students to think of their answers beyond “x<4” and brainstorm all of the infinite solutions that x can be and then connect it to the graph.

  • Can x be 3.9999?
  • Can x be 4?
  • Can x be -100? 

Ideas for teaching one- and two-step inequalities - including activities and common misconceptions to avoid in your math classroom. | maneuveringthemiddle.com

Below, I have outlined a few ideas and things to consider when planning to teach one- and two-step inequalities.  

Let’s take a look at the standards, shall we?

Many of my recommendations for solving one or two-step inequalities are the same as solving one and two-step equations. This post talks about how using algebra tiles is my favorite practice. 

Something I did not learn until I was teaching is the why behind changing the sign when you divide or multiply by a negative number. As

You can do whatever you want to an inequality as long as it is done to both sides, it will remain a true statement.

Ideas for teaching one- and two-step inequalities - including activities and common misconceptions to avoid in your math classroom. | maneuveringthemiddle.com

This is true of inequalities with one exception. If you multiply or divide by a negative number, the inequality becomes untrue.

Ideas for teaching one- and two-step inequalities - including activities and common misconceptions to avoid in your math classroom. | maneuveringthemiddle.com

While this mistake still persisted, I found that my students did much better than previous groups in remembering to flip the sign.

Able to Read an Inequality Statement

Another big misconception that I have found to be true is the “alligator.”  Sure, “the alligator eats the bigger number” works when you are comparing 3 and 7, but what about when it’s 3 and -7 or 4x and 6?   Students need to be able to read an inequality statement and explain what it means in terms of the numbers around it.  They need to feel confident choosing a number for x to test the inequality.  

I have found the students struggle identifying “<” as less than and “>” as greater than, so when they do solve an inequality and they are left with x<4, they don’t actually know what that symbol means. 1<4 is something that a student can say but replace one of the numbers with a variable and the inequality becomes unclear. This is definitely a trick, but showing students how the less than symbol can be slightly rotated to be an L will allow them to actually state, “x is less than 4.”

Using Number Lines

The graph can seem like one more thing to do, but the solution(s) and the thinking lies within the graph.  The number line representation is a perfect visual to actually get students talking about the potential solutions.  Some questions to get students thinking:

  • What is a value of x that is in the solution set?  Is there another?
  • Why is _____ not a solution to inequality?  What other numbers would not be a solution?
  • Describe the process for graphing the solution.
  • Given the graph, what inequality statement best describes it?
Ideas for teaching one- and two-step inequalities - including activities and common misconceptions to avoid in your math classroom. | maneuveringthemiddle.com

When we are given a graph and are trying to figure out what inequality is the match, I avoid the trick that the arrows should match the inequality sign. Instead I might ask:

  • What are the potential solutions? 
  • Are the potential solutions greater than or less than the given amount?
  • When I substitute a solution into X, is the original inequality true?
Ideas for teaching one- and two-step inequalities - including activities and common misconceptions to avoid in your math classroom. | maneuveringthemiddle.com

Common Misconceptions

  1. Forgetting to change the inequality sign when dividing by a negative number
  2. General confusion when the answer is “4 > x” or written with the constant on the left
  3. Unclear of what number is considered a solution
  4. Unable to make connections between the inequality and the actual solution on the number line
  5. Writing inequality statements from situations when the terms “less than” or “greater than” are not included

Anchor Chart Ideas

Anchor charts are fabulous ways to showcase the content in a visual manner for students to reference.  They can easily be created before the lesson or as you are teaching, depending on the content.  This example includes the emphasis on vocabulary, as students tend to struggle with writing inequalities.

Ideas for teaching one- and two-step inequalities - including activities and common misconceptions to avoid in your math classroom.

The real-life example that I think students have the most understanding of is related to movie ratings and/or height requirements for roller coasters. These very real-life experiences will help students understand the terms minimum means greater than or equal to. The minimum height you can be to ride this roller coaster is 48 inches. That means you can be 48, 49, 50 … inches to ride. Similarly, a person must be the minimum age of 17 to purchase an R-rated movie ticket.

Maximum was also another term that confused my students. Again, relating it to something that students experience daily seemed to do the trick. I would use seat belts as an example. I would ask students how many seat belts were typically in a car (or their car). Then I would say that the maximum number of people that could safely ride in said car was, let’s go with 5, which means 5 people or fewer could ride in the car. Maximum meant less than or equal to.

IDEAS FOR STRUGGLING STUDENTS

  1. Bring out the manipulatives – algebra tiles, pattern blocks, etc – have students group like items
  2. Break down the steps into a simple checklist
  3. Go back to positive whole numbers to see if students are struggling with the concept or the mathematical skills
  4. Give students a possible solution and ask them to work backwards

Hopefully, this gives you some ideas for teaching one- and two-step inequalities or even insight as to what knowledge your students are coming with.  I would love to hear other great activities or ideas you have used! Feel free to share in the comments.

Be sure to check out these resources for inequalities:

How do you teach inequalities?

The post Teaching One- and Two-Step Inequalities appeared first on Maneuvering the Middle.

]]>
https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/how-to-teach-one-and-two-step-inequalities/feed/ 1
Back-to-School Round Up https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/back-to-school-round-up/ https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/back-to-school-round-up/#comments Tue, 02 Aug 2022 11:30:00 +0000 https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/?p=11342 If you are already thinking about your classroom and gathering ideas on Pinterest for a classroom management system, this post is for you. We have rounded up some of our favorite back-to-school blog posts and put them in one spot for your ease and enjoyment.  On Preparing your Mindset Prepare yourself to lead your classroom […]

The post Back-to-School Round Up appeared first on Maneuvering the Middle.

]]>
If you are already thinking about your classroom and gathering ideas on Pinterest for a classroom management system, this post is for you. We have rounded up some of our favorite back-to-school blog posts and put them in one spot for your ease and enjoyment. 

Find everything you need to know to prepare for this school year here. All back-to-school tips and tricks for the best school year ever! | maneuveringthemiddle.com

On Preparing your Mindset

Prepare yourself to lead your classroom confidently and effectively. Back to school requires preparation in heart and mind.

On Preparing Your Classroom Environment

Get the biggest bang for your buck finding supplies, decorating on the cheap, and setting up your classroom in a methodical and organized way!

Find everything you need to know to prepare for this school year here. All back-to-school tips and tricks for the best school year ever! | maneuveringthemiddle.com

On Preparing Your Students

Your classroom will not operate smoothly without student buy-in, strong classroom routines, and a mistake-friendly environment. Learn some ways to do that here. 

On Preparing Your Lessons

Start your year strong with an appealing syllabus, a finished substitute binder, and some fun ideas ready to implement in your back pocket. 

Find everything you need to know to prepare for this school year here. All back-to-school tips and tricks for the best school year ever! | maneuveringthemiddle.com

On Becoming Tech Savvy 

How are you feeling about back to school this year? What are you doing this summer to prepare? We hope this post (and the many posts linked) are helpful to you. Let us know if you have any questions in the comments!

Find everything you need to know to prepare for this school year here. All back-to-school tips and tricks for the best school year ever! | maneuveringthemiddle.com

The post Back-to-School Round Up appeared first on Maneuvering the Middle.

]]>
https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/back-to-school-round-up/feed/ 1
Ordering Rational Numbers https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/ordering-rational-numbers/ https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/ordering-rational-numbers/#comments Tue, 14 Jun 2022 11:00:00 +0000 https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/?p=50737 Comparing and ordering rational numbers is a complex skill with many steps, often complicated by the number of ways the problem can be presented. These tips and ideas will help scaffold this skill and make it more hands-on and engaging for your students. Standards Comparing and ordering rational numbers is predominantly a 6th grade skill […]

The post Ordering Rational Numbers appeared first on Maneuvering the Middle.

]]>
Comparing and ordering rational numbers is a complex skill with many steps, often complicated by the number of ways the problem can be presented. These tips and ideas will help scaffold this skill and make it more hands-on and engaging for your students.

Ordering rational numbers is a middle school skill that requires a whole lot of other prerequisite skills. Check out post for tips to help students master. | maneuveringthemiddle.com

Standards

Comparing and ordering rational numbers is predominantly a 6th grade skill in both Common Core and TEKS. It will also support students locating and plotting rational numbers on the coordinate plane.

  1. 6.NS.7 Understand ordering and absolute value of rational numbers.
  2. 6.2D Order a set of rational numbers arising from mathematical and real-world contexts (Readiness Standard)
Ordering rational numbers is a middle school skill that requires a whole lot of other prerequisite skills. Check out post for tips to help students master. | maneuveringthemiddle.com

Released Staar Question

Looking at a test question isn’t a way to “teach to the test,” but rather, a way for me to make sure that I am teaching the complexity of the standard. By looking at the test question above, it helps me to understand that:

  • Students will need to order a set of 5 (or possibly more) rational numbers
  • These rational numbers will vary in type (fractions, mixed numbers, improper fractions, whole numbers, and decimals) so I can assume that test questions can also include percentages
  • It also helps me recognize that I need to make sure students pay attention to the order in which the question is asking
    • Greatest to least – which can also include words like “descending”
    • Least to greatest – which can also include words like “ascending” 

Convert to the Same Form (fraction, decimal, percent)

Before you can jump into ordering rational numbers, you will need to spend a few days on converting between fractions, decimals, and percentages. 

But I wouldn’t start by ordering a set of numbers that include fractions, decimals, and percentages. Start by scaffolding! Order a set of decimals, then a set of percentages, and lastly a set of fractions before introducing a mixed bag of rational numbers. 

For decimals, I suggest asking students to line up the decimal point and compare the digits going from left to right. 

Ordering rational numbers is a middle school skill that requires a whole lot of other prerequisite skills. Check out post for tips to help students master. | maneuveringthemiddle.com

Have students add zeros to numbers after the decimal point so no student confuses a number with more digits as greater.

For percentages, I would use the same method. Remind students where the decimal point is in a percentage if it is not visible.

Ordering rational numbers is a middle school skill that requires a whole lot of other prerequisite skills. Check out post for tips to help students master. | maneuveringthemiddle.com

For fractions, this is where I don’t have strong opinions. Perhaps because I have not seen one method to be more successful than others. Butterfly method, finding a common denominator, converting fractions into a decimal, reasoning through it – I think each student will gravitate toward their favorite based on their past experiences. 

Once students have mastered ordering from the same type of rational numbers, have students order a small set of 3 rational numbers by converting them to the same form. In my experience, students (and me, the teacher) like to convert most rational numbers to decimals. I think this is because they are the easiest to compare and then order.

Use a Number Line

When negative numbers are included, a number line is an absolute must. The number line gives us context! A quick sketch of a number line with a zero in the middle immediately serves as a reminder that the numbers with the least value will be the furthest left and the numbers with the greatest value will be the furthest right!

In fact, a number line was a requirement for work shown when we ordered numbers in class. A dry erase marker and a desk allowed for lots of space for converting between the fractions, decimals, and percentages and placing them on the number line.

Quick Hits

  • Have a half day or need an extension activity? Have students make flashcards of benchmark fractions: ¼, ½, ¾, ⅕, ⅖, ⅗, ⅘. Once my students could ace this in a flyswatter challenge, I would add ⅛, ⅜, ⅝, ⅞. If students had these benchmark fractions memorized, it lightened the mental load for ordering rational numbers.
  • Make ordering numbers hands on! This can be done by using these cards. Print a set, laminate, and then have a living number line using the sticky side of painter’s tape (see the idea here). 

  • Get students moving! Give each student a card with a rational number. Tell them to get into groups of 4 and stand in order from least to greatest. Then tell them to find a new group with 3 people and stand in order from greatest to least. Go around the room and listen to their reasoning. You can do this as many times as you want using a different number of students and in a different order. You can finish the activity by having all the students stand in ascending or descending order.

How do you teach comparing and ordering rational numbers?

Ordering rational numbers is a middle school skill that requires a whole lot of other prerequisite skills. Check out post for tips to help students master. | maneuveringthemiddle.com

The post Ordering Rational Numbers appeared first on Maneuvering the Middle.

]]>
https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/ordering-rational-numbers/feed/ 1
Planning and Designing PBL Projects in Math https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/planning-and-designing-pbl-projects-in-math/ Tue, 07 Jun 2022 15:29:00 +0000 https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/?p=50717 If you are  interested in Project Based Learning, you might be wondering – where do I start? How do I find these projects? All of the ideas in this post come from Project Based Teaching, a book that we are reading to learn more about implementing projects in our math classrooms this year. Click the […]

The post Planning and Designing PBL Projects in Math appeared first on Maneuvering the Middle.

]]>
If you are  interested in Project Based Learning, you might be wondering – where do I start? How do I find these projects?

All of the ideas in this post come from Project Based Teaching, a book that we are reading to learn more about implementing projects in our math classrooms this year. Click the link here to grab your copy – a must for any teacher’s shelf.

Make sure to scroll down to grab a “50 Ways to Use Math in the Real-World” printable!

Planning projects can be tough. Find out WHERE to find projects and WHAT makes a good project for your math classroom. | maneuveringthemiddle.com

And make sure to grab our “50 Ways to Use Math in the Real World” printable for your classroom. This printable can be used as a jumping off point for projects, classroom decoration, or a resource to answer the question, “When are we ever going to use this (math skill)?”

And we are very excited to announce that two projects will be added to All Access in time for Back to School!

Update October 2022Math projects are now available for purchase! You do not have to be an All Access member to implement these standards-based projects in your classroom.

Click here to learn more about each project!

The standards-aligned projects focus on content covered in the fall semester with the second project covering content in the spring semester.

Each project is flexible in nature and includes teaching slides, warm-ups, exit tickets, student recording sheets and a project overview to help you structure class time and implement project components as smoothly as possible. Here is a little sneak peak of the 7th grade project.

Where to Find Good Projects

Borrow and adapt – Don’t start from scratch, especially if this is your first rodeo.  Editing and adjusting an existing project is a great place to start. Check out www.bie.org. This project library allows you to filter by subject and grade level. 

Remodel – Evaluate previously taught units to see which unit may lend itself to being taught using a project instead. Since you are familiar with the content, you will be able to focus on the execution. Consider the units in which students weren’t as engaged; a project may be the perfect way to turn that around.

Listen and codesign with students – “Student questions offer a renewable source of project inspiration.” Consider surveying them about their interest and what they would like to learn to get their ideas. Once you have identified the problem your students want to tackle, you can incorporate the required academic standards. 

Use current events – Headlines in recent events offer perfect examples of using data and statistics in favorable or unfavorable ways. 

Connect to popular culture – What are your students interested in? Is there a movie, book, or video game that has captured their attention that you can capitalize on? 

Respond to real requests – Does the community have needs that your students could meet using your subject matter?

Build on your passions – While students’ passions are important, so are yours! For me, I love architecture, so I always made sure to include a project on designing a home for a client and building a scaled model using what we knew about ratios and scale factor.

All AccessIn each grade level, we’ve added two real-world projects (to our already amazing curriculum and videos) intended to be engaging opportunities for extension and application of skills! Each project can serve as an assessment of students’ understanding while encouraging inquiry and critical thinking amongst your students. Coming in August 2022 – so exciting!

What Makes a High Quality Project

While you are creating or editing an existing project, you may be wondering what makes a good project? What components are necessary to make sure that students are thinking through, analyzing, and solving problems?

  • Challenging problem – The problem needs to grow students’ thinking muscles. Too hard and students won’t sustain; too easy and students will disengage.
  • Sustained inquiry – Students “need to be asking questions, conducting research, carrying out investigations, and weighing evidence to arrive at answers.”
  • Authenticity – The project must connect to the real world. 
  • Student voice and choice – Students are driving the learning. 
  • Critique and revision – Students are constantly giving and receiving (from peers and teachers) feedback to improve their project.
  • Public product – Students will present their project to a public audience – an extension of the classroom. This increases the engagement of the students and the quality of the projects. 

Preparing Your Resources

While you are planning projects, don’t forget to prepare and secure what is needed for students to execute successfully. Don’t forget to reserve items and spaces to keep your students engaged and excited about the project. Here is a non-comprehensive list to get your started:

  • Technology – apps, software, tools
  • Content Experts – mentors, panel members, clients or product users
  • Connecting to other subjects – can you go cross curricular? 
  • Community or school resources – video cameras, science labs, art studios 

Planning projects can be so fun! What projects do you want to try in your math classroom?

Planning projects can be tough. Find out WHERE to find projects and WHAT makes a good project for your math classroom. | maneuveringthemiddle.com

The post Planning and Designing PBL Projects in Math appeared first on Maneuvering the Middle.

]]>
What Makes Maneuvering the Middle Different https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/what-makes-mtm-different/ https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/what-makes-mtm-different/#comments Tue, 31 May 2022 11:00:00 +0000 https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/?p=49384 Maneuvering the Middle resources are used in an estimated 10,000 classrooms all around the world. (Wow!) What is it about our math curriculum that has teachers telling other teachers and their administration about it?  Maneuvering the Middle Curriculum Works The reason we can proudly promote our resources as the best thing for students (and teachers) […]

The post What Makes Maneuvering the Middle Different appeared first on Maneuvering the Middle.

]]>
Maneuvering the Middle resources are used in an estimated 10,000 classrooms all around the world. (Wow!) What is it about our math curriculum that has teachers telling other teachers and their administration about it? 

Maneuvering the Middle is used in over 10K classrooms! Our resources are loved by teachers and students. Find out what makes us special here! | maneuveringthemiddle.com

Maneuvering the Middle Curriculum Works

The reason we can proudly promote our resources as the best thing for students (and teachers) is because we have first hand experience with how effective Maneuvering the Middle curriculum is.  When I used our 6th grade TEKS curriculum, the number of students reaching “Meets Grade Level” increased by 15% from the previous year (when I was using a different resource). 

We receive emails and comments from teachers daily who share that their students are growing. 

I just wanted to email you and thank you and your team for all you do! This year my 8th grade math team and I used your entire curriculum and we saw scores that we have never seen before (93% passing)! I work at a low income Title 1 school where the majority of my kids came to me hating math and over half did not pass the STAAR test the year before. I seriously believe that because of your materials my students started to actually enjoy math. I personally used almost everything in the curriculum and my students grew this year more than I could have imagined! Every student but 1 passed the STAAR test this year and this is coming from the same group of students who came to me with less than half passing during 7th grade! I just want to say THANK YOU! You have truly made a difference in not only my teaching but many others on my campus as well!! -Hayley

I love this testimonial because it shows some celebratory data (93% is amazing), but also because Hayley states that our materials help her students love math. 

Standards Aligned

If you are in a Common Core State or teach in Texas, then you can be confident that by using our curriculum, you will be covering each and every standard. If you are like me, you read a standard and wonder, “What does that even mean?” You can rest assured knowing that our curriculum team (shoutout Kim, Noelle, Ashleigh, and Sara) have done the work to make sure that the standard is taught with the proper scaffolding to reach the depth and complexity that is required.

All of our curriculum teachers were once teaching this material in their own classrooms, so they know that it isn’t simple or easy to get everything covered in a school year.

In addition, schools that use Maneuvering the Middle across all grade levels will see how the content builds upon itself. There are no holes in the content from one grade level to another. 

Saves Your Time and Energy

When you are a teacher who can focus on the teaching part of your job and not the curriculum creation part of your job, you can be more effective. Let’s be real – writing curriculum is its own job! To be a teacher and a curriculum writer means you are working 2 jobs and being a teacher is hard enough!

My favorite principal said she would always prefer a rested and happy teacher over a tired and stressed teacher with a great lesson plan. 

When the curriculum is taken care of, you can use your time and energy for all of the other aspects of the job – building relationships, providing feedback, remediation and intervention, instruction, implementing routines and procedures, running copies and preparing classroom materials, and (insert 1000 more tasks here). 

Consistent Routine + Lots of Variety

Maneuvering the Middle offers student handouts, video lessons, study guides, assessments, digital activities, and more. Not to mention, our hands-on activities include:

  • Solve & Colors and Mazes – for fluency practice
  • He Said, She Said and Find It, Fix Its – for error analysis
  • Card Matching and Cut and Pastes – for tactile learning

We offer a lot! These resources are consistent across the 4 different grade levels, so students know what to expect and can focus on learning the math – not a new routine or activity.

Because there is so much variety, you can truly pick and choose what works best for your students. Personally for me, cut and paste activities were not my jam, so I skipped those. Even without those activities in my rotation, I NEVER lacked for anything. I would turn to a digital activity instead!

When I say that I never lacked for anything, I mean it! Check out everything that is included in All Access.

 

Works for Different Classrooms and Teaching Styles

Maneuvering the Middle works in so many different types of classrooms! If you join our Facebook Group, you can ask how teachers use the curriculum in their classroom and you will find that no two teachers use it the same way.

Teachers use our curriculum in flipped classrooms, with direct instruction, and self-paced learning classrooms. Our materials are used in homeschool settings, hybrid classrooms, virtual classrooms, and in-person classrooms. Teachers who coteach or teach intervention use our materials too. You can find it in public schools, private schools and charter schools! 

Our video library makes all of those different teaching methods even more accessible for teachers and students.  

It may seem like we are tooting our own horn! We are really proud of what we have created. We know our curriculum doesn’t work without amazing teachers, so thank you teachers for all that you do!

Why do you love Maneuvering the Middle curriculum?

Maneuvering the Middle is used in over 10K classrooms! Our resources are loved by teachers and students. Find out what makes us special here! | maneuveringthemiddle.com

 

The post What Makes Maneuvering the Middle Different appeared first on Maneuvering the Middle.

]]>
https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/what-makes-mtm-different/feed/ 1
Teaching Multiplying and Dividing Integers https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/teaching-multiplying-and-dividing-integers/ Tue, 24 May 2022 11:00:00 +0000 https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/?p=49267 Multiplying and dividing integers is the perfect math concept – the computation is relatively simple, there are opportunities for hands-on learning with manipulatives, and there are an abundance of explanations that support the conceptual understanding.  However, it is a little tricky! Be sure to read “How to Teach Integer Operations” where we cover the specifics […]

The post Teaching Multiplying and Dividing Integers appeared first on Maneuvering the Middle.

]]>
Multiplying and dividing integers is the perfect math concept – the computation is relatively simple, there are opportunities for hands-on learning with manipulatives, and there are an abundance of explanations that support the conceptual understanding. 

However, it is a little tricky! Be sure to read “How to Teach Integer Operations” where we cover the specifics on adding and subtracting integers, as well as some common misconceptions to avoid. 

Multiplying and dividing integers is taught as early as 6th grade (in Texas) but primarily introduced in 7th grade. Multiplying and dividing integers extends into rational numbers which means there is a lot to cover!

Multiplying and dividing integers can be confusing to students. Here are our tips for making this concept concrete. Plus, a freebie to help teach the rules! | maneuveringthemiddle.com

Tip #1: Start By Using Models or Manipulatives

“Tricks” definitely have their time and place in math, but building conceptual understanding is key for students to build that mathematical fluency. Since math is always progressing and building on itself, tricks can often be mixed up with other tricks. Anyone who has taught integers or fraction operations probably has experienced this first hand. (Keep, change, flip or keep, change, change?)

Modeling why like signs result in a positive answer and why unlike signs result in a negative answer is more likely to stick than having students only copy down the “rules.” Though I do think it is helpful to do that too! In fact, I kept an anchor chart with all of the rules posted throughout most of the school year.

Here is a helpful Google Slide Deck that I recommend using to introduce WHY a positive times a negative results in a negative product and WHY a negative times a negative results in a positive product. I used a number line to introduce this concept, but counters can work too.

Here is the slide deck for you to copy and use in your classroom! The animations are included, so you just have to click your mouse to make the arrows move.

If you prefer counters, here is how I would teach positive times a negative.

Multiplying and dividing integers can be confusing to students. Here are our tips for making this concept concrete. Plus, a freebie to help teach the rules! | maneuveringthemiddle.com

And a negative times a positive. One thing to note is since you can’t take away 4 groups of 2, you can introduce zero pairs. With the zero pairs, you now have 2s to “take away.”

Multiplying and dividing integers can be confusing to students. Here are our tips for making this concept concrete. Plus, a freebie to help teach the rules! | maneuveringthemiddle.com

And lastly, a negative times a negative.

Multiplying and dividing integers can be confusing to students. Here are our tips for making this concept concrete. Plus, a freebie to help teach the rules! | maneuveringthemiddle.com

Tip #2: Ask them to Come Up With the Rules Using Patterns

The great thing about math is that the rules are always supported by patterns.

When using the above table (a snippet from a student handout), it is important to start in the top left corner where students are familiar with those facts. Allowing students to see the patterns that create the rules really makes the content stick.

You could give students a list of numbers like the one below and ask them to make observations about what they see. If a student can’t remember a rule, they can recreate a list of multiplication facts, and then synthesize the rules on their own.

  • -5*(3)= -15
  • -5*(2)= ?
  • -5*(1)= -5
  • -5*(0)= 0
  • -5*(-1)= 5
  • -5*(-2)= ?
  • -5*(-3)= ?

Tip #3: Other Fun Ideas for Practice

  • Give students a value they are trying to reach.  Provide sticky notes or cards marked with a variety of integers. Students match integers to equal the given value. Similar to using counters, this allows for students to practice their fluency but also to be flexible problem solvers.
  • Our MTM Activities – Entire bundle, speed dating, scavenger hunt and multiplying rational numbers digital activity, dividing rational numbers digital activity
  • Playing War using this idea from Mrs. E Teaches Math.
  • Make sure to include opportunities for real-world situations. Money, football gains and losses, temperature, and sea level are things that give these numbers context. Context provides students with opportunities for application as well as verifying if an answer makes sense. 
  • Make sure to buy and laminate these number lines. I would give my students dry erase markers to write on them.

Tip #4: Putting It All Together

In my experience, students are doing well and seem to really grasp when they are completing operations in isolation. Asking students to complete work where they are switching between the 4 operations or using them together can cause students to confuse what they have learned.

When that happens, ask students to draw a picture of what is happening. Send them back to the models because that is what they are there for – to make sense of the math. Don’t put the counters or number lines away just because you have already taught the models. 

Since many students are resistant to draw models when they think they’ve “got it,” I would remind students that drawing the models accounted for half of the work/grade/completion. Once students mastered the four operations on a summative assignment, I would give them permission to use the algorithm only.

What tips do you have for teaching multiplying and dividing integers?

Multiplying and dividing integers can be confusing to students. Here are our tips for making this concept concrete. Plus, a freebie to help teach the rules! | maneuveringthemiddle.com

The post Teaching Multiplying and Dividing Integers appeared first on Maneuvering the Middle.

]]>
Multiplying Fractions with Models https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/multiplying-fractions-with-models/ https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/multiplying-fractions-with-models/#comments Tue, 17 May 2022 18:16:00 +0000 https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/?p=49367 Multiplying fractions: the good news – the process for teaching modeling fraction multiplication is much more straightforward than teaching dividing fractions with models! But if you are teaching fraction multiplication, then you will most likely be teaching dividing fractions shortly, so be sure to check out our dividing fractions post where you can get a […]

The post Multiplying Fractions with Models appeared first on Maneuvering the Middle.

]]>
Multiplying fractions: the good news – the process for teaching modeling fraction multiplication is much more straightforward than teaching dividing fractions with models! But if you are teaching fraction multiplication, then you will most likely be teaching dividing fractions shortly, so be sure to check out our dividing fractions post where you can get a free guide.

While the standards for middle school math do not include modeling specifically (those can be found in 4th and 5th grade), middle school students can benefit from growing their conceptual understanding.

Teaching multiplying fractions seems easy enough, but have you ever used models? Models build conceptual understanding! Plus, more tips for those tricky mixed numbers! | maneuveringthemiddle.com

Start with Whole Numbers

The basis of modeling fraction multiplication uses arrays. Before you jump into using arrays with fractions, start with modeling multiplication using whole numbers and arrays. Have students create their own arrays too.

Anytime I am introducing a new concept, I connect it to something they already know how to do. This builds students’ confidence and creates more buy-in which means my job as teacher is a lot more enjoyable 🙂 

Build the Conceptual Understanding Using Reasonableness

Before introducing the models, I want students to continue to build their reasonableness. Start with something that students are very familiar with like pizza.  

Asking questions like –

  • “If I have 1 pizza, and I eat ½ of it, did I eat more or less than 1 pizza?”
  • “If I have 3 pizzas, and I burned ⅔ of them, how many pizzas did I burn?”
  • “If I have 1½ of a pizza left and you ate ½ of that half, did you eat more or less than 1 pizza?”

One of the 6th grade TEKS standards is developing the understanding that multiplying a whole number by a fraction less than 1 will result in a product less than the original whole number, and multiplying by a fraction greater than 1 will result in a product greater than the original whole number. Using reasonableness can help support this standard and a conceptual understanding of multiplying fractions.

Modeling a Whole Number by a Fraction

4 times ⅖ can be interpreted as 4 groups of ⅖ or ⅖ + ⅖+ ⅖+ ⅖. This is the easiest to model. Draw a picture or use pattern blocks to demonstrate this concept for students.

It gets a little trickier when you have ⅖ of 4. Sure you will get the same answer, but students do need to understanding that this means taking a ⅖ part of 4 wholes. If you haven’t checked out Mix and Math yet, Brittany is the queen of hand-on teaching in upper elementary math. Check out this video to see how she uses pattern blocks to teach these concepts.

Modeling a Fraction by a Fraction

If you need a refresher (or didn’t learn it this way yourself) this video explains how to multiply a fraction by a fraction using models. Again, this array will be more effective if you have introduced arrays with whole numbers first. 

  • Brownie pans or rice krispie pans are my go-to representations of this skill. 
  • Fraction Multipliers are manipulatives that support this skill. These manipulatives are very  effective in a small group or intervention classroom.

Modeling Multiplying Mixed Numbers

In the past, I have taught students to convert mixed numbers into improper fractions and then to use the algorithm. This totally works! However, there are so many steps and so many places to make mistakes. 

Here are a few tips to make this more manageable. Try using an area model to keep students’ work more organized. 

You can always have students make the problem simpler in order to estimate.

Let’s say the problem is 3 ⅜ times 5 ⅚. You could think of it as 3 ½ times 6. This becomes 3 times 6 plus 1/2 times 6. (Think: 34*5 is the same thing as 30 times 5 plus 4 times 5.) Therefore, 18 + 3 = 21. The answer to 3 ⅜ times 5 ⅚ is going to be verrrryyy close to 21. And since we rounded each factor up, I know my answer should be less than 21. 

At the very least, you could have your students multiply the whole numbers to check that their answers are reasonable. 

Additional Tips

  • Give students the models and ask them to come up with the the number sentence that best represents it
  • Remember that modeling isn’t just an introductory step. If you only use them to introduce the concept and never revisit, neither will your students.
  • There is nothing wrong with the algorithm! Teach it, use it, and model it!

How do you teach multiplying fractions?

Teaching multiplying fractions seems easy enough, but have you ever used models? Models build conceptual understanding! Plus, more tips for those tricky mixed numbers! | maneuveringthemiddle.com

The post Multiplying Fractions with Models appeared first on Maneuvering the Middle.

]]>
https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/multiplying-fractions-with-models/feed/ 1
Strengthening Classroom Culture Through Projects https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/strengthening-classroom-culture-through-projects/ Tue, 26 Apr 2022 11:00:00 +0000 https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/?p=47746 At Maneuvering the Middle, we are all reading Project Based Teaching by Suzie Boss and John Larmers. Throughout the next few months, we will be discussing what we are learning as we read the book. There are 7 best practices for Project Best Teaching, and today we are covering building a strong classroom culture. If […]

The post Strengthening Classroom Culture Through Projects appeared first on Maneuvering the Middle.

]]>
At Maneuvering the Middle, we are all reading Project Based Teaching by Suzie Boss and John Larmers. Throughout the next few months, we will be discussing what we are learning as we read the book. There are 7 best practices for Project Best Teaching, and today we are covering building a strong classroom culture.

Classroom culture can be strengthened by using Project Based Learning! Find out how to build the perfect classroom culture for taking risks, asking questions, and growing in math skills using PBL. | maneuveringthemiddle.com

If you are interested in incorporating more projects in your classroom, then grab the book and follow along.

Update October 2022 – If you want to include projects in your class, but aren’t sure where to start, then grab our Math Projects!

Math projects are now available for purchase! You do not have to be an All Access member to implement these standards-based projects in your classroom.

Click here to learn more about each project!

Why Projects?

The world is turning to collaborative projects. At Maneuvering the Middle, everyone works on teams to complete various projects. None of our work is done in isolation. 

Why Culture Matters

”Positive culture doesn’t get built with a one-day team builder. It’s an ongoing effort to create an inclusive community of learners.”

Classroom culture is necessary in order for students to feel safe making mistakes and asking questions that are required during Project Based Learning. We have a whole post about how to make your classroom feel positive and safe, so be sure to check it out. 

4 Strategies for Building Strong Culture

After reading through the strategies for building strong classroom culture for Project Based Learning, I was so relieved to read nothing brand new. If you are a teacher reading a blog post about teaching, you are probably already doing many of these things!

1. Beliefs and Values

In this section of the book, many teachers that the authors have interviewed share examples of how they show students their core values and beliefs. Examples include: asking students for feedback about what they like or would change about class so students feel like their voice matters, reminding students that they are all capable of solving big problems, and providing projects that are relevant to students’ lives.

2. Shared Norms

“Norms … are shared agreements about how classmates and teachers treat one another and what they value as a community of learners.”

I agree that the most valuable norms are the norms that students have a say in. Creating buy-in is crucial in any classroom! These should be posted and repeated often by both teachers and students. Here are examples of norms I used in my classroom:

  • Everyone contributes
  • Respect each other
  • Share the mic
  • Follow directions 
  • Good attitudes only

I love how Todd Finley establishes norms in his classroom. He has students brainstorm examples of actions that have impeded learning. Here is an example from his classroom:

  • Example: If students laugh when I make a mistake, I don’t want to participate. 
  • Norm to counteract: We learn from mistakes. 

3. Physical Environment

Your classroom environment also contributes to a strong classroom culture. Make sure students have access to technology and other tools that will help support their learning. Here are 4 ideas that Project Based Teaching recommends considering:

  1. Flexible seating and arrangements that support working in partners and groups
  2. A project wall: “By dedicating a bulletin board… to the project currently underway, you create a central location to manage information, highlight upcoming deadlines and milestones, remind students of the driving question, capture need-to-knows, and point to resources.” A digital space could serve this purpose too. 
  3. Sentence starters: Since student voice is so important in project based learning, it is important to provide support for ALL students. These sentence stems can help students engage with each other productively and appropriately. 
Classroom culture can be strengthened by using Project Based Learning! Find out how to build the perfect classroom culture for taking risks, asking questions, and growing in math skills using PBL. | maneuveringthemiddle.com

4. Evidence of the messy middle: Keep rough drafts and unfinished work visible. It provides opportunities for questions, discussion, and feedback.

Routines and Habits for a Student Centered Classroom

We are no stranger to routines and procedures! Routines and procedures increase learning time. Here are the routines and procedures that are necessary for PBL (or truly any classroom):

  • Active listening – all voices in a group are heard and valued
  • Providing feedback – how to give and receive feedback in a way that is helpful and kind
  • Morning meetings – check in time with class that helps strengthen relationships
  • Thinking routines – like “think-pair-share”
  • Closers – ending class with shout outs or to state a class norm

Starting Small

If you are interested in a PBL classroom, start small with a small team building challenge. 

  • Community Counts is a great place to start – it helps building relationships between students and teacher and student to student

“If you build that culture early, students will be ready to tackle longer, more content-heavy projects later in the school year.”

To learn more about incorporating project based learning into your classroom, check out Project Based Teaching

Do you use project based learning in your classroom? What are ways you build your classroom culture?

Classroom culture can be strengthened by using Project Based Learning! Find out how to build the perfect classroom culture for taking risks, asking questions, and growing in math skills using PBL. | maneuveringthemiddle.com

The post Strengthening Classroom Culture Through Projects appeared first on Maneuvering the Middle.

]]>
Volume Activities and 7 Teaching Tips https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/volume-activities-and-7-teaching-tips/ Tue, 19 Apr 2022 11:00:00 +0000 https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/?p=47655 Volume is one of my favorite middle school math skills to teach. The skill is visual and concrete, requires sketching pictures (which is always fun to tease what a great artist I am), and the operations required for solving allow for spiraled practice. A real winner from this teacher’s point of view! Here are my […]

The post Volume Activities and 7 Teaching Tips appeared first on Maneuvering the Middle.

]]>
Volume is one of my favorite middle school math skills to teach. The skill is visual and concrete, requires sketching pictures (which is always fun to tease what a great artist I am), and the operations required for solving allow for spiraled practice. A real winner from this teacher’s point of view!

Here are my 7 tips/ideas for teaching volume in a way that students will get the most from it.

Check out our tips for teaching volume to middle school students. Plus, our recommendations for best hands-on activities. | maneuveringthemiddle.com

Start with Area

While most scope and sequences require mastering area (or surface area) before moving onto volume, the connection between area and volume cannot be ignored.

In fact, in all of the formulas for volume, the area of the base is abbreviated as ‘B’. And while this formula chart does give the formula for the various shapes’ areas, it does that separate from the volume formulas. 

Encourage students to shade the base in every problem and then sketch the base separately with its dimensions. This helps students to actually calculate the area of the base instead of  using only one of it’s measurements, which was often the most common misconception I witnessed. 

This Desmos Activity really helps make the connection between the area of the base and the height.

Write down the Formula + Draw the Shape

You don’t have to provide formulas when you first introduce volume! Have students make observations and predictions. For example, using a rectangular prism and a triangular prism with the same height and base measurements, ask – “how many triangular prisms could fit inside the rectangular prism?” You can do this for a cone and a cylinder too! Unifix cubes are the perfect manipulatives to use for students to understand how volume is measured in a rectangular prism. 

After you have introduced the formula for a shape, require students to write down the formula for the shape as part of their work. This will prevent students from leaving off multiplying by ⅓ for the volume of a cone or 4/3 for a sphere. I would even make this mistake on purpose, so students would shoot up their hands and say, “Ms. Brack, you forgot to multiply by ⅓!”

In addition, if a given problem lacked a figure, I required students to draw the figure and label the sides with the given measurements. 

Use the Exact Formula Chart They Will See on Testing Day

Set your students up for success for testing day! Provide students with the EXACT formula chart they will see when they take their state test. I made a class set on bright neon cardstock that I would laminate. It stayed out throughout the entirety of my Geometry Unit. 

During a geometry lesson,  I would always instruct my students to silently point to the formula we would need on their formula chart.  I would do a quick sweep to make sure students were on the right track. Don’t assume your students will understand how to find what they need from a formula chart. 

Check out our tips for teaching volume to middle school students. Plus, our recommendations for best hands-on activities. | maneuveringthemiddle.com

Start with an Exploratory Activity

This is pretty obvious, but volume is so hands-on! It is physically all around us. 

You can do this in a variety of ways: calculating the volume of various items like – tissue boxes, cereal boxes, oatmeal canisters, saltine boxes etc. A sleeve of crackers is the perfect cylinder and is a perfect way to show how the volume is the area of the base times height.

Our Exploration Activity helps students explore the relationships between cylinders and cones using play dough or dried beans. You can find it in our 8th grade volume activity bundle.

Check out our tips for teaching volume to middle school students. Plus, our recommendations for best hands-on activities. | maneuveringthemiddle.com

This is a free activity that sounds like a perfect way to include a project for rectangular prisms. Students are given a single piece of paper and instructed to create the largest possible box. 

Maneuvering the Middle Activities

Our activity bundles are engaging and hands on! With all of the shapes that are covered in middle school math, it’s nice to know that every prism, cylinder, cone, and sphere will receive practice.

Other Tips

Use fabric measuring tapes over rulers. They are less expensive, take up less space, and students will not be tempted to sword fight. 

If you have access to unifix cubes, give students a specific volume and have them work backwards to create as many rectangular prisms with different measurements that satisfies that volume. 

What tips do you have for teaching volume?

Check out our tips for teaching volume to middle school students. Plus, our recommendations for best hands-on activities. | maneuveringthemiddle.com

The post Volume Activities and 7 Teaching Tips appeared first on Maneuvering the Middle.

]]>
How to Teach Solving for Y https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/how-to-teach-solving-for-y/ Tue, 12 Apr 2022 11:30:00 +0000 https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/?p=47643 Solving for y is necessary for 8th grade math and Algebra 1. It is often a pain point for students and teachers. Let’s talk about how solving for y is important and tips for teaching it. Why Students Need to Solve for Y While “solving for y” is not mentioned in any specific standard, it […]

The post How to Teach Solving for Y appeared first on Maneuvering the Middle.

]]>
Solving for y is necessary for 8th grade math and Algebra 1. It is often a pain point for students and teachers. Let’s talk about how solving for y is important and tips for teaching it.

Solving for y is needed for slope-intercept & systems of equations, but can be tricky for students. Check out our tips to teach this skill. | maneuveringthemiddle.com

Why Students Need to Solve for Y

While “solving for y” is not mentioned in any specific standard, it is necessary for so many other standards: 

  1. A.2(B) write linear equations in two variables in various forms, including y = mx + b, Ax + By = C, and y – y1 = m(x – x1), given one point and the slope and given two points
  2. A.5(C) solve systems of two linear equations with two variables for mathematical and real‐world problems.

First off, slope-intercept form (y=mx+b) makes graphing possible. Slope-intercept form makes identifying your slope and y-intercept instantaneous. This question was pulled from a previous STAAR test:

This problem requires a student to convert standard form 8x+3y=15 to slope-intercept form which means they must solve for y. (They could also use -A/B which supports the steps needed to isolate y anyway!) This problem also requires point-slope form and then converting back to standard form – jeez! 

Slope-intercept form also supports solving systems of equations by graphing. Solving for y will support students using substitution to find a solution too. 

Essentially, students must be flexible in converting between the various types of equations: standard form and slope-intercept form.

Furthermore, in Quadratics, converting standard form to vertex form requires solving for y too. Similar to slope-intercept form, vertex form gives information about the function (like the vertex and the direction it opens) that cannot be determined in standard form. 

Teach Literal Equations First

Literal equations are equations with only letters. Typically, students are solving for an assigned variable. It can be extremely tricky for students to wrap their heads around this which is why I love how our Algebra 1 Solving Equations Unit covers it.

Solving for y is needed for slope-intercept & systems of equations, but can be tricky for students. Check out our tips to teach this skill. | maneuveringthemiddle.com

Maneuvering the Middle’s student handouts set students up to solve various step equations with numbers and then follow the same steps with variables only. (Need more ideas for solving equations?)

Start From Scratch

When students see something foreign, they assume that it is all brand new information, so start at the beginning:

  • Review order of operations backwards
  • Review what the inverse operations are
  • Review what makes something “like terms”
  • Review that if there is not a sign before a number, it is positive
  • Review integer operations rules
  • Review solving for a single variable when there are numbers present

Once this is ingrained in their head, then make the jump to solving for y when the variable x is present. Students get stuck usually because teachers assume that students know and understand more than they do. 

Try the X-citing Move + the Great Divide

If you are teaching converting from standard form to slope-intercept form, the steps will often be the exact same to isolate y. This mnemonic device is a way to help your students remember the steps required. Mrs. Newell’s math blog has other great ideas, so be sure to check it out. “X-citing move” reminds students to move x to the other side of the equal sign using inverse operations. “The great divide” reminds students to divide by y’s coefficient. Sometimes it is the simplest methods that make the biggest impact!

Solving for y is needed for slope-intercept & systems of equations, but can be tricky for students. Check out our tips to teach this skill. | maneuveringthemiddle.com

Substitution, Graphing, and Elimination

With so many ways to solve systems of equations or inequalities, it is important to teach when you apply different methods. Or better yet, have students make observations for what method works best and why. Solving for y supports solving systems by graphing or substituting.

  • Substitution – an equation is already solved for a single variable
  • Elimination – both equations are already in standard form and don’t require lots of manipulation to eliminate both of the x’s or y’s
  • Graphing – one or both of the equations are already in slope-intercept form

What would you teach students regarding this problem?

Solving for y is needed for slope-intercept & systems of equations, but can be tricky for students. Check out our tips to teach this skill. | maneuveringthemiddle.com
  • Students may want to graph – the answer choices have graphs, the numbers are friendly, but the equations are in standard form requiring the extra step of converting to slope-intercept form.
  • You could substitute the answer choices’ solutions into the standard form equations to see whether the solution provides true statements.
  • You could use elimination, but all of these require multiple steps. 

I think that is what makes this a good problem – students will have to weigh the pros and cons of each method with their confidence in solving. 

How do you teach solving for y?

Solving for y is needed for slope-intercept & systems of equations, but can be tricky for students. Check out our tips to teach this skill. | maneuveringthemiddle.com

The post How to Teach Solving for Y appeared first on Maneuvering the Middle.

]]>
Teaching Math Vocabulary that Sticks https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/teaching-math-vocabulary-that-sticks/ Tue, 08 Mar 2022 12:00:00 +0000 https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/?p=46410 For math to be accessible to students, math vocabulary must be taught! Let’s talk about teaching math vocabulary in a way that sticks! Let’s see how important math vocabulary is to understanding and solving this problem. Could you solve this problem? I covered up a vital piece of information needed to solve this problem to […]

The post Teaching Math Vocabulary that Sticks appeared first on Maneuvering the Middle.

]]>
For math to be accessible to students, math vocabulary must be taught! Let’s talk about teaching math vocabulary in a way that sticks!

Teaching math vocabulary helps students engage with math concepts at a deeper level. These tips will help you teach vocabulary that sticks! | maneuveringthemiddle.com

Let’s see how important math vocabulary is to understanding and solving this problem. Could you solve this problem? I covered up a vital piece of information needed to solve this problem to emulate what a student might experience without knowing the vocabulary necessary to solve.

Teaching math vocabulary helps students engage with math concepts at a deeper level. These tips will help you teach vocabulary that sticks! | maneuveringthemiddle.com

Model Using the Math Language

If we want students to use the words we are teaching, we need to practice using it ourselves. Vocabulary requires exposure. Using the words as frequently as possible, students will hear  the words as frequently as possible, increasing their comfort with the words.

If a student uses a vocabulary word incorrectly, then make sure to correct it. “Bottom number” is a “denominator.”

As teachers, we can jump ahead to the solving of a problem, but using the STAAR test question above, we should start by asking students – “What does surface area mean?”

Annotating word problems or questions is also a way to practice math vocabulary. Anytime we read the word “percent,” we wrote “/100” to remember that percent meant “out of 100.”Let’s look at another math vocabulary rich problem: 


Here are some questions you can ask to practice that math vocabulary. 

  • What makes a number an integer?
  • Is -53 an integer?
  • What does absolute value mean?

Get Ahead By Previewing Vocabulary

If you are a Texas teacher, you can use this excellent document that will show you which vocabulary words are new to the grade level as well as words from previous grade levels. This is a great place to start for a word wall. 

Previewing the vocabulary for an upcoming unit is a great place to start when teaching math vocabulary. In my experience, students copying definitions killed the energy in class, but offering students a “kid-friendly” definition that you referenced daily and had them practice (using some of the ideas in this post) was much more successful. 

Display a Word Wall

Update 7/28/2023: Maneuvering the Middle now has a Middle School Math + Algebra 1 Word Wall.

As you can see in the video below, our Word Wall includes 190 essential math terms, their clear-cut definitions, and their visual representations.

We’ve included Spanish translations for all terms and definitions, ensuring a supportive and accessible learning experience for English Language Learners.

They were designed to be minimal prep and flexible to customize the formatting to suit your students’ unique needs.

Word walls are a vital part of any math classroom. You can learn more about word walls in this post.  If students are taking a brain break and staring off into space, they are likely staring at some math content. To have the most useful word wall, make sure words include a short definition, picture, and can be visible from the furthest spot in the classroom.

Teaching math vocabulary helps students engage with math concepts at a deeper level. These tips will help you teach vocabulary that sticks! | maneuveringthemiddle.com

My word wall was constantly building. The wall started with 3 words in unit 1 and eventually built to just under 100 by the end of the school year. I purchased my sixth grade TEKS word wall here

Teaching math vocabulary helps students engage with math concepts at a deeper level. These tips will help you teach vocabulary that sticks! | maneuveringthemiddle.com

Pointing out the addition of new words to the word wall and where students can access help if needed lets students know that the word wall is for their use! It is meant to be used!

Provide Opportunities to Use the Words in Context

When asking students questions, prompt the response to include vocabulary in their answer. This is the lowest lift, but it is so effective! Use a turn and talk and a cold call to get every student responding.

  • Instead of: how do we divide fractions?
  • Try: Using the word reciprocal, explain how we divide fractions.
  • Instead of: What sides of the triangle are congruent?
  • Try: Using the word congruent, describe what you notice about the sides of this triangle.

I read that you need to use a new word about 10 times before you remember it! Teaching math vocabulary is something that you build into your instruction.

Fun Practice for Spiraling Definitions

To keep vocabulary and definitions fresh, use any of these activities in the last few minutes of class:

  • Flyswatter Games – If you want students to get familiar with your word wall, use the Flyswatter Game.  This is a very engaging review game. If you are like me and don’t bother to cover up anything in your room before a test, this will help remind students where to look when they are stuck.  Two students face off with fly swatters in hand.  You give them a prompt such as “2, 4, 6, 8” are examples of ______” And the first student to swat the word ‘multiples’ earns their team a point.
  • Flashlight Game -This game is great for those last few minutes of class as a sponge activity.  Turn off the lights and use a flashlight to point to a word on the wall.  Students can then shout out an example, the definition, or even a counter-example. 
  • Guess the Word – I played this in a PD, and immediately implemented it in my classroom. One student stands with the white board behind them facing the rest of the classroom. You write (or have a slide deck prepared) a vocabulary word behind the student. Students in the classroom take turns giving the students hints to what vocabulary word is written behind them. You see how many words the student can guess in a given amount of time. 
  • Quizziz or Kahoot – Both have a vast library of vocabulary rich games.

How do you teach math vocabulary to your students?

Teaching math vocabulary helps students engage with math concepts at a deeper level. These tips will help you teach vocabulary that sticks! | maneuveringthemiddle.com

The post Teaching Math Vocabulary that Sticks appeared first on Maneuvering the Middle.

]]>
5 Statistics Activities for Middle School https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/5-statistics-activities-for-middle-school/ Tue, 01 Mar 2022 12:00:00 +0000 https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/?p=46394 Data and statistics is such a fun topic to teach in middle school math! The relevance and hands-on nature of analyzing and displaying data made it engaging for my students and myself! Data and statistics usually fell to the very last unit in my scope and sequence which meant I was tired, and the amount […]

The post 5 Statistics Activities for Middle School appeared first on Maneuvering the Middle.

]]>
Data and statistics is such a fun topic to teach in middle school math! The relevance and hands-on nature of analyzing and displaying data made it engaging for my students and myself! Data and statistics usually fell to the very last unit in my scope and sequence which meant I was tired, and the amount of creative energy I had to put into my lessons was waning. Just me? So I thought I would round up some data and statistics activities to end this school year with a bang.

Statistics activities for middle school can be hands-on and make math relevant! Here are 5 ideas to try in your classroom. | maneuveringthemiddle.com

1. Make your own or use MTM

Have students collect data about something they are interested in and put the data in whatever display you are teaching over the course of the unit: dot plots, box plots, histograms, circle graphs, etc.  Here are some ideas: 

  • Sports data – Students pick a team and create a histogram or box plot to represent the data of the athletes’ heights, years playing, or whatever applicable data point students find interesting. Display everyone’s graphs and complete a gallery walk where students use Post-it Notes to write down questions and observations. 
  • Real-time data – Using a similar format, ask students to track their own usage data over different forms of technology over the course of the week. 
  • Data from their own lives – Students can use information from their classmates, friends, or themselves.  Maneuvering the Middle’s performance task is perfect for this. (Find it inside this 6th Grade Statistics bundle.) Students take a survey of the class and calculate the interquartile range, mean, median, and mean absolute deviation. They are then asked to graph this data in various ways. 
Statistics activities for middle school can be hands-on and make math relevant! Here are 5 ideas to try in your classroom. | maneuveringthemiddle.com

2. PBS Learning

If you haven’t had an opportunity to explore PBS Learning Media, check it out! Everything is free and there are many real-world examples and videos complete with lesson plans. Filter by subject, topic, or lesson type. These lessons serve as great application opportunities to whatever you are learning in class.

Here are 3 activities that I found compelling:

3. He Said, She Said Freebie

I love He Said, She Said activities! Our Data & Statistics He Said, She Said activities are a hands-on way for students to analyze others’ work and apply their knowledge about box plots and two-way tables. Students are asked to justify their answers, so it pushes students to use those higher-level thinking skills. He Said, She Said activities are so versatile and can be implemented 100 different ways. 

  • Use them in pairs or in groups of 3-4. With many group activities, I liked to start students off working collaboratively, and then give them 5 or so minutes at the end to work independently. This allows them to test their ability, and for me to see who still needs support.
  • Use them as a review. Box plots were a skill that my students needed lots of practice on, so these activities provided extra opportunities for students to ask questions.
  • Use them as an extension. Students finished early? He Said, She Said cards can easily be hung around the classroom or put on a ring for students to grab when they have completed their assigned work for the day.

4. Desmos

I love how interactive Desmos activities are. There is something for every grade level on a range of statistics skills. 

5. Digital activities

Digital activities have so many pros. Easy to assign to remote learners, scaffolded questions, and complete with a short formative assessment. They also make for a no-brainer station or rotation. 

If you want access to all of the resources shared today, be sure to check our All Access membership!

There you have it! 5 ways for your students to engage with data and statistics. What data and statistics activities do you love?

Statistics activities for middle school can be hands-on and make math relevant! Here are 5 ideas to try in your classroom. | maneuveringthemiddle.com

The post 5 Statistics Activities for Middle School appeared first on Maneuvering the Middle.

]]>
Strategies for Teaching Math Concepts https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/strategies-for-teaching-math-concepts/ Tue, 25 Jan 2022 12:00:00 +0000 https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/?p=44539 Let’s discuss strategies for teaching math concepts using the CRA framework. Remember that the CRA framework has proven to help students grasp difficult math concepts. If you are scratching your head asking yourself, “What is the CRA framework?” be sure to go back and read this post. What is the CRA? I like this definition […]

The post Strategies for Teaching Math Concepts appeared first on Maneuvering the Middle.

]]>
Let’s discuss strategies for teaching math concepts using the CRA framework. Remember that the CRA framework has proven to help students grasp difficult math concepts. If you are scratching your head asking yourself, “What is the CRA framework?” be sure to go back and read this post.

Using manipulatives & models is one of my my favorite strategies for teaching math concepts. Take these strategies to your classroom using these best practices. | maneuveringthemiddle.com

What is the CRA?

I like this definition best. “The CRA is a three-stage learning process where students learn through physical manipulation of concrete objects, followed by learning through pictorial representations of the concrete manipulations, and ending with solving problems using abstract notation.”

ROUTINES AND PROCEDURES

How do we set students up for success when using manipulatives? 

  • Tell students the purpose of using manipulatives. Explain how it is foundational to their success in math and how it is something you want to be able to trust your students with. 
  • Tell students WHAT TO DO. Telling students what to do is better than telling them what not to do. Example: manipulatives stay on the dry erase mat versus don’t throw manipulatives.
  • Have students clear their desks of computers, binders, or anything else that can obscure your view of how the manipulatives are being used.
  • Assign a materials manager as a group role. This student is responsible for making sure their group is using the manipulatives correctly and that they all get returned.
  • Build in time for cleanup! If you are using manipulatives or any extra type of supply, give yourself lots of extra cushion at the end of class for clean up. Make sure to use a timer to encourage speed. 
  • If you want to minimize the number of manipulatives out at a time or you don’t have a whole class set of manipulatives, use a station or small group table for the manipulatives. This will narrow down the materials to manage to one area of the classroom and a smaller set of students.
  • Remember, the more practice students have using manipulatives, the better they will get at cleanup and using them responsibly.

BEST PRACTICE #1: LET STUDENTS EXPLORE

There are 2 things you will have to balance as you model for students – the conceptual understanding piece with the procedures of using the manipulatives, but also I would encourage adequate exploration time. Exploration time can be really meaningful if you have strong and planned questions to guide your students’ thinking. 

In this post, I wrote about not taking opportunities away from students to think. Sometimes demonstrating exactly what to do removes any of the thinking for students. It makes them follow a procedure to the T, which doesn’t allow for flexibility in their thinking. 

Here is an example of how you can give students time to grapple with the content without modeling exactly what to do for them.

Let’s consider adding integers. Conceptually, students will need to understand that one side of the counter and its color represents negative and the other side represents positive. Students will also need to understand negative and positive numbers value in relation to zero. Perhaps, students can discover zero pairs without your explanation?

Using manipulatives & models is one of my my favorite strategies for teaching math concepts. Take these strategies to your classroom using these best practices. | maneuveringthemiddle.com
Using manipulatives & models is one of my my favorite strategies for teaching math concepts. Take these strategies to your classroom using these best practices. | maneuveringthemiddle.com

Now this will not always work with more complex situations, but I think with proper scaffolding and questioning, you should give students the opportunity to try something before showing them the exact procedure for working with the concrete representations.

BEST PRACTICE #2: Pair Manipulatives and Representations with the Abstract

“Explicit instruction that involves the use of manipulatives should also include the presentation of the numerical problem (Miller, Stringfellow, Kaffar, Ferreira, & Mancl, 2011).”

This study makes a great point. Students need to connect the manipulatives to the abstract as they are working, which means as they are working with the manipulatives, they need to be writing down what they are doing as they solve.

For example, when a student is using algebra tiles, connecting that the physical removal of two tiles from each side of the equation is the same thing as writing down “-2” on both sides of the equal sign will build that deeper understanding. We want students to understand WHY they are doing something.

Be sure to grab our freebies for Getting Started with Algebra Tiles.

The best part of the CRA method is how students will internalize the process. Some students will arrive at the abstract and never look back. Other students will draw models to support their thinking, while some students will request using a set of manipulatives well after you have taught the algorithm. That is the beauty!

Continue to spiral these concepts throughout the year using the different parts of the framework. If you go over the concrete and the representational on one day and then spend the entire year using the abstract to solve equations, then chances are your students will do the same thing too. 

WHEN AM I GOING TO HAVE TIME TO DO THIS?

If you are already feeling very stretched with your scope and sequence, here are my thoughts: 

Many times our scope and sequences allow some time for reteaching when the students do not master the concepts. Consider that by spending time building the conceptual understanding using concrete and pictorial representations, that you may not need the extra time for reteaching.

You can teach the concept in tandem using the manipulatives. If you are already going to spend time teaching math, you may as well introduce tools that will support student understanding. 

“Students who use concrete materials develop more precise and more comprehensive mental representation, often show more motivation and on task behavior, understand mathematical ideas, and better apply these ideas to life situations.” 

“Students are more apt to gain and retain an understanding of math concepts when they are taught using CRA.” 

These two quotes from this study are the positives seem to outweigh the negative of being a little bit behind. Developing these foundational skills will only benefit students in the long run.

What are your strategies for teaching math concepts?

Using manipulatives & models is one of my my favorite strategies for teaching math concepts. Take these strategies to your classroom using these best practices. | maneuveringthemiddle.com

The post Strategies for Teaching Math Concepts appeared first on Maneuvering the Middle.

]]>
Concrete Representational Abstract Sequence https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/difficult-math-concepts/ https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/difficult-math-concepts/#comments Tue, 18 Jan 2022 12:00:00 +0000 https://mtmmigration.flywheelsites.com/?p=4257 The CRA framework is an instructional strategy that stands for concrete, representational, and abstract; it is critical to helping students move through their learning of math concepts.  To fully understand the idea behind CRA, or concrete representational abstract, think about a small child learning to count. They may learn counting to 10 by memorizing a […]

The post Concrete Representational Abstract Sequence appeared first on Maneuvering the Middle.

]]>

The CRA framework is an instructional strategy that stands for concrete, representational, and abstract; it is critical to helping students move through their learning of math concepts. 

To fully understand the idea behind CRA, or concrete representational abstract, think about a small child learning to count. They may learn counting to 10 by memorizing a song. Then, these numbers are used to teach them to count. First, they may be counting blocks by pointing or moving the object. Then, they may be able to count dots on a page or something on paper that represents that same concept. Lastly, they may be able to then look at a picture with five dots and not need to count it, they have learned what five “looks like”. This process takes place with all different math concepts and new learning.

Looking for more math intervention ideas?

This is part 3 of our Instructional Design series. We’ve covered how to unpack math standards and how to use questions to push students to think more critically. Make sure to grab our lesson planning freebie down below!

The concrete representational abstract sequence (CRA) helps fill in gaps, teach difficult math concepts, & build a strong math foundation. | maneuveringthemiddle.com

What is the concrete representational abstract framework?

The CRA framework helps us to present this learning in a specific method to help tie all the connections together. There have been numerous studies measuring the effect of using the concrete representational abstract (CRA) sequence for students at risk of failure. You can read more here, here, and here

This teaching method breaks down the concept (examples: multiplication, subtraction with regrouping, subtracting integers) in a methodical process in which students move from one phase to the next.  

Sometimes CRA is referenced as a sequence, so moving from one phase of understanding to the next. But more so, it is called a framework, which shows that all three of the representations can be used simultaneously. If we were teaching solving equations, students would actually use the algebra tiles, draw a picture of the model, and then write it mathematically at the same time.

Concrete

The concrete representational abstract sequence (CRA) helps fill in gaps, teach difficult math concepts, & build a strong math foundation. | maneuveringthemiddle.com

When students have a concrete understanding of a mathematical concept, they are utilizing manipulatives to demonstrate the math.  For example, when my son was learning to count, I wanted him to physically touch or move the items he was counting. In doing this, he was developing one-to-one correspondence.  He was internalizing that each item represents one.

When our middle school students are learning to solve equations, we want them using algebra tiles to physically remove manipulatives from both sides of the equation.  This allows students to internalize that an equation must remain balanced.

There are many reasons why teachers might skip this crucial step:

  • Practice with concrete manipulatives takes time and energy. It is not easy to facilitate with 30+ students.  
  • It can be expensive to purchase manipulatives.
  • It can be frustrating for students who seem to already grasp the concept.  

Why it is beneficial:

  • Students are using their kinesthetic learning style.
  • Students are engaging with the content in a deeper way, and abstract concepts like “isolating the variable” are given meaning.
  • This foundation is formidable so that they can move to conceptual understanding and aren’t just following a list of steps with no meaning.
  • Research shows that it is essential for students who have a shaky math foundation.

Representational

The concrete representational abstract sequence (CRA) helps fill in gaps, teach difficult math concepts, & build a strong math foundation. | maneuveringthemiddle.com

The representational part of the framework refers to students drawing a representation of those concrete materials. 

In the case of my son above, that would be counting dots on a page or drawing eight tally marks to represent the number 8.  

In the case of our middle schoolers and solving equations, this would look like drawing the algebra tiles, creating a key, and demonstrating how the process works by crossing off the tiles or grouping as they solve.  

We see this quite a bit in middle school.  From integer counters being sketched to a graph that represents a linear relationship, our standards include many representational aspects. 

Why We Might Start Here:

  • This is a little easier to execute in a classroom full of students.
  • The standards include the representational language. 
  • It also leaves some gaps for students who need to understand why you are crossing out the positive integer circles.
Maneuvering Math - a skill based math intervention program for grades 6-8 | maneuveringmath.com

Abstract

The concrete representational abstract sequence (CRA) helps fill in gaps, teach difficult math concepts, & build a strong math foundation. | maneuveringthemiddle.com

Math can be a very abstract subject.  When you think about solving an equation and finding the value of x, why are we doing this?  Why do we need to know this? The value of x is abstract. It is always changing. It doesn’t actually mean anything without context.

I think this is where it is really difficult for students who struggle.  When we don’t provide a context for learning and for the application of the abstract, it just seems too confusing.  I think it also warrants the phrase, “I don’t get it.” Many times students don’t even know what to ask because the content means nothing to them.

This is when math becomes too procedural and you risk students understanding the process, going through the motions, and yet lacking number sense.  When I was a student, I was taught solely in the abstract. It wasn’t until I was a teacher trying to make sense of models before I had several AHA! moments. Why didn’t I learn this when I was in school??

Best Practices

Shelley Grey says, “When you teach a math lesson, make it your goal to incorporate concrete, representational and abstract into the same lesson. This way you can be certain that you are differentiating for all your students, regardless of where they are in their understanding.

And it does naturally lend to differentiation — you are scaffolding, using different parts of the brain, and then eventually allowing students to work with a method they feel comfortable with. 

You as the teacher can make sure to use different methods when you are tackling problems. Just because you taught the algorithm for multiplying fractions already doesn’t mean you can’t draw a model to solve at a later date. This ensures that students don’t forget how to use the models themselves.

How do you teach difficult math concepts?

The concrete representational abstract sequence (CRA) helps fill in gaps, teach difficult math concepts, & build a strong math foundation. | maneuveringthemiddle.com

The post Concrete Representational Abstract Sequence appeared first on Maneuvering the Middle.

]]>
https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/difficult-math-concepts/feed/ 1
Higher Level Thinking with Bloom’s Taxonomy https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/higher-level-thinking-with-blooms-taxonomy/ Tue, 11 Jan 2022 12:00:00 +0000 https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/?p=43682 Higher level thinking is a goal for many teachers. Students retain knowledge when they have thought deeply about it. And in order to get our students to think at a deeper level, we have to be asking questions that require them to access those parts of the brain.  Encouraging higher level thinking is so interconnected […]

The post Higher Level Thinking with Bloom’s Taxonomy appeared first on Maneuvering the Middle.

]]>

Higher level thinking is a goal for many teachers. Students retain knowledge when they have thought deeply about it. And in order to get our students to think at a deeper level, we have to be asking questions that require them to access those parts of the brain. 

Encouraging higher level thinking is so interconnected to your classroom culture, the rigor of your content, and then of course the types of questions you are asking. Then we get into the challenges of collecting your students’ thinking – are they answering verbally or on paper? Can you give feedback quickly? 

It makes sense that would be the case. If the whole entire goal of education is to provoke thought, then of course there would be so many facets of instruction connected to it. 

This post is part 2 in our Instructional Design Series. Check out Unpacking Math Standards and the CRA framework. And if you haven’t grabbed our lesson planning template yet, make sure to grab it down below.

LISTEN ON: APPLE PODCAST | SPOTIFY

Pushing students to think critically is a challenge that requires teachers to ask the right questions to elicit that higher level thinking. Find out how to do this in your classroom. | maneuveringthemiddle.com

THE PROBLEM

The purpose of questioning in our classrooms:

  1. Questions give us feedback on what and how our students are processing and internalizing their learning.
  2. Questions also can be used to guide student thinking. 

If you are asking questions throughout class and then students are struggling on the assessment, it’s possible that your questions in class are not aligned to that which a student is expected to do on the assessment.

Peter Lijedahl touches on this a bit in his book Building Thinking Classrooms, where he talks about “studenting”. Doing behaviors that look productive, “filling in notes or mimicking the teacher” but they aren’t actually reasoning their way through the problem.

We can make some small adjustments to the questions and interactions in our classroom to build those thinking muscles. 

Building a Strong Classroom Culture

For students to think and answer questions at a higher level, we want students to be comfortable with making mistakes. 

Phil Daro (co-author of the CCSS) says that teachers put too much emphasis on the answers; answers are part of the process, but they are not the only learning outcome. That wrong answers are part of the learning outcome. 

What if you framed wrong “answers” as “discoveries”? If students reached a wrong answer, you instead talked more about why that approach doesn’t work instead of how to get the right answer.

The Questions You Are Asking

If we are focusing on higher level thinking using higher level questions, we have to focus on the types of questions we are asking. 

To do this, I am going to refer to Bloom’s Taxonomy which is a hierarchy of learning objectives that rank lower order thinking skills to higher order thinking skills. 

Pushing students to think critically is a challenge that requires teachers to ask the right questions to elicit that higher level thinking. Find out how to do this in your classroom. | maneuveringthemiddle.com

Now remember this is a pyramid, so those lower levels have a purpose and provide a foundation. These are the easy questions to ask, the ones that just roll off the tongue and don’t really require much forethought.

In math it sounds like – “What do we do next?” “What is the solution?” “What operation will we use?”

The higher level thinking questions are those that take a little more forethought and planning. These are the questions that require students to analyze the relationships in a process or make an evaluation on how to approach the problem based on given information.


One of the easiest ways to elicit higher level thinking is to teach students multiple approaches to a specific concept and then have students evaluate and justify why one process may be better than another based on given information.

Let’s try a non-example in a typically procedural type of skill – solving equations. 

Teacher: 4x-2=18 What do we need to do first?

Student: Add two to both sides.  [Teacher adds 2 to both sides]

Teacher: 4x=20 And what do we do next?

And here is a way to teach the same problem using a mix of higher and lower order thinking skills.

This is where I would make a plug to use algebra tiles for this concept because students can visualize and explore how solving equations actually works with concrete models. When students move to the algorithm, their responses will be richer because the abstract is now concrete. 

Not every skill or concept warrants a question in the highest order of Bloom’s Taxonomy. As you scaffold instruction, the types of questions you ask in Bloom’s hierarchy will move up. 

You can find many question stems for math with a simple google search, so I took a problem from a He Said, She Said Activity from our Proportional Relationships bundle.

Pushing students to think critically is a challenge that requires teachers to ask the right questions to elicit that higher level thinking. Find out how to do this in your classroom. | maneuveringthemiddle.com

Wait Time & Eliciting Answers

In my fifth year of teaching, our campus read the book Quality Questions which helped me to learn about the technical term of “wait time” and that there were different wait times. 

Wait time is the amount of time we sit in silence after a question has been posed. Then, there is actually a second wait timere which is the amount of time that you wait after a student responds. 

The idea behind wait time is that we are giving time for students to think and that as soon as we accept an answer or acknowledge that the answer is correct, then everyone else stops thinking.

Here are a few ideas to incorporate this into your classroom:

  1. This can be that they have to write something down, show a finger for a multiple choice response, or they share their answer with a partner while you circulate.
  2. I like to give students a little bit of heads up if I want them to share, known as “warm calling”.  You ask a question, give a minute of silent think time, ask students to share with their partner, and then circulate. I listen to things I want the whole class to hear. If I hear a great response from a student, I let them know that I would like for them to share, so they aren’t caught off guard. Then when we come back together as a class, I have that student respond. 
  3. You can do a fist to five. Typically, fist to 5s are used at the end of the lesson for students to gauge how well they feel about the lesson on a scale from 0 (did not understand) to 5 (completely understand). In the case of answering a question, you can require all students to show their fist to five to assess how well they think they can answer the question. It actually gives you some information – which students are completely lost, which students are ok, and which students think they have exemplary responses. I would call on a mixture of 4 and 5s while making sure my fist and 1 students are listening in. Then I will go back to a fist or 1 student and ask for them to put the response in their own words. 

Note: I didn’t do this for every single question I asked. Who has the time? I reserved these techniques 2-3 times a lesson for questions that warranted more time and thought.

Two Quick Hits

This first idea comes straight from Building Thinking Classrooms. Before you model a skill, first give students the problem and ask for them to try it on their own. Give them just enough background knowledge to get them started. 

You can do this for many math skills. Estimating square roots, operations with rational numbers, geometry skills, solving equations. It doesn’t have to be done daily, and use your discretion for when this approach may not benefit students. 

My second quick hit is something that I picked up in a training that made a huge difference in how I ended my lessons.  I adjusted my language from, “Are there any questions?” to “What questions might someone have about what we learned today?” 

  • The former resulted in silence. And made me think as a teacher that I was good to go. 
  • The latter resulted in students trying to think of something that wasn’t covered. In addition, students who may not want to admit that they have a question or don’t understand something, would be more willing to inquire. 

How do you incorporate higher level thinking in your teaching?

Pushing students to think critically is a challenge that requires teachers to ask the right questions to elicit that higher level thinking. Find out how to do this in your classroom. | maneuveringthemiddle.com

The post Higher Level Thinking with Bloom’s Taxonomy appeared first on Maneuvering the Middle.

]]>
Unpacking Math Standards When Lesson Planning https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/how-to-unpack-math-standards/ https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/how-to-unpack-math-standards/#comments Tue, 04 Jan 2022 12:00:00 +0000 https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/?p=43631 Unpacking math standards helps teachers build the foundation for what content they are teaching to students. Subsequently, unpacking math standards provides a framework to create actionable lessons. Essentially, unpacking math standards helps us answer these two questions: What are students learning? How will they learn it? This is part 1 of our Instructional Design series. […]

The post Unpacking Math Standards When Lesson Planning appeared first on Maneuvering the Middle.

]]>

Unpacking math standards helps teachers build the foundation for what content they are teaching to students. Subsequently, unpacking math standards provides a framework to create actionable lessons. Essentially, unpacking math standards helps us answer these two questions:

  1. What are students learning?
  2. How will they learn it?

This is part 1 of our Instructional Design series. Come back to read more about higher level thinking and the CRA framework. And make sure to grab our free lesson planning template down below!

LISTEN ON: APPLE PODCAST | SPOTIFY

Unpacking math standards is necessary to understand what students need to learn,  how they will learn it, and to writing your daily lessons. Find out how we do it. | maneuveringthemiddle.com

WHY DO WE LESSON PLAN?

Much like creating a to-do list to alleviate the mental load of upcoming deadlines, lesson planning keeps all of our thinking about a topic or skill in one place where it can be shared, referenced, and revised. 

When we are prepared intellectually to deliver a lesson, we allow for real-time adjustments and instruction to the depth the standards require. In addition, the physical plan allows a space for collaboration and feedback.

Not ready to lesson plan quite yet? Need the bigger picture?

Grab our FREE Middle School Math + Algebra 1 Pacing Guides.

MISCONCEPTIONS ABOUT MATH STANDARDS

  • Standards do not need to be taught sequentially or in isolation. They do need to be organized with purpose though!
  • Standards are not so rigid that there is only one way for them to be taught. 
  • Standards are not to be interpreted in a vacuum. The more math teachers you can have in the process, the more likely you will have a full picture of the scope of the standard.

HOW TO UNPACK MATH STANDARDS

Let’s talk about how we go about unpacking math standards using a 6th grade TEKS standard

  • 6.7D: generate equivalent expressions using the properties of operations: inverse, identity, commutative, associative, and distributive properties
  • This comes from the strand 6.7 “The student applies mathematical process standards to develop concepts of expressions and equations”
  • There is a related standard that asks students to determine if two expressions are equivalent using concrete models, pictorial models, and algebraic representations. (6.7C) 
  • This is helpful because I can support my instruction of that initial standard with concrete and pictorial models. It gives me more information about how I can teach it.
Unpacking math standards is necessary to understand what students need to learn,  how they will learn it, and to writing your daily lessons. Find out how we do it. | maneuveringthemiddle.com

Step 2 – Create a T chart listing the knows and the dos 

  • The Dos are the verbs. What the student is expected to do.
  • Examples include: apply, solve problems, represent, determine, calculate, predict, write, model, compare, convert, and describe. 
  • Make sure that whatever the student is doing in class is the same as the verb in the standard or that the lesson will eventually support it.
  • It is crucial to understand what the verb means. Oxford dictionary defines generate (in the math context) as producing (a set or sequence of items) by performing specified mathematical or logical operations on an initial set. The lesson should be focused on the student creating equivalent forms of the expression using the properties.
  • The Knows are the content. The knowledge that the student must have to execute the verb.  Typically, this is going to come from the nouns. So in our case, students will need to know how all of the properties function in order to generate equivalent expressions. 
  • One other best practice to unpacking math standards is to determine if the standard is more conceptual, procedural, or application. If the standard is very procedure heavy, I am going to want to make sure that there is some conceptual understanding introduced and application type of problems too. We want our lessons to be well rounded.
  • If you have done this and are still unsure what the standard means, then I recommend looking at a state test question to see how the standard is assessed. 

Step 3 – Look at the vertical alignment

Texas teachers, grab yours here. I like to read the math standards that are connected from the previous year to see what my students should know already or more likely, what I will need to refresh them on before they can be successful with the new standard. 

Step 4 – Write a learning target or lesson objective

Lesson objectives should be measurable and they should be student friendly. Different schools follow different guidelines – your school might use “I CAN statements” or “student will be able to” language. My preference is below:

Remember that whatever question, problem, or activity your students are completing, it should support your learning target or objective.

Step 5 – Write Big Ideas and Essential Questions

Big ideas are the concepts that transcend your unit and connect the content to their real lives and make it relevant. Perhaps students won’t walk away from your data and statistics unit remembering exactly how to find the median, but they will take the big idea that data can be represented graphically in order to solve problems and draw conclusions. 

Essential questions support your unit’s big ideas. These are recurring questions that can be asked all unit long that are designed for students to have that lightbulb moment. They allow open ended discussion from your students and to stretch the thinking of your students. Use them at the beginning of your unit to pique student interest and/or at the end of the unit to summarize or synthesize their learning over the last few weeks. 

How do you unpack math standards? What is your lesson planning process?

Unpacking math standards is necessary to understand what students need to learn,  how they will learn it, and to writing your daily lessons. Find out how we do it. | maneuveringthemiddle.com

The post Unpacking Math Standards When Lesson Planning appeared first on Maneuvering the Middle.

]]>
https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/how-to-unpack-math-standards/feed/ 1
Turn Worksheets into Easy Math Activities https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/turn-any-worksheet-into-an-activity/ https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/turn-any-worksheet-into-an-activity/#comments Tue, 30 Nov 2021 12:00:00 +0000 https://mtmmigration.flywheelsites.com/?p=2344 Easy math activities – is this an oxymoron? It doesn’t have to be. You don’t have to be a teacher long to see that a worksheet full of problems does not incite the excitement and enthusiasm of many of your students.  However, try any of these easy math activities, and you will experience unprecedented levels […]

The post Turn Worksheets into Easy Math Activities appeared first on Maneuvering the Middle.

]]>
Easy math activities – is this an oxymoron? It doesn’t have to be.

You don’t have to be a teacher long to see that a worksheet full of problems does not incite the excitement and enthusiasm of many of your students. 

However, try any of these easy math activities, and you will experience unprecedented levels of excitement from your class.

Now that I am a parent, I see this in my 3 year old. “Let’s go get our shoes on” leads to a slow, distracted exercise where I have to keep reminding her to stay on task. But… “let’s race to see who can get their shoes on first” results in shoes on in about 10 seconds. 

How to Use these Easy Math Activities

  • Use these ideas for test review, or any 20 minute time period too.
  • Use them on the fly. There is little to no prep; I could easily implement them if I noticed students were off task.
  • Most of these activities can be played for as little as 10 minutes all the way to 40 minutes, so they are flexible!
  • Use them when your students request to. Because they will! These activities were often used as an incentive.  

One other thing that I love about these activities is that you can hold students accountable to your standards. You see, students REALLY want to play. You may have those students who refused to show their work. Well, students have to show work in order to move the magnet, or sign their name, or get a tic-tac-toe. You are the gatekeeper!

8 ideas to turn any worksheet into an activity! Perfect for a low prep day to keep students engaged and having fun with a worksheet. 8 easy math activities! | maneuveringthemiddle.com

1.  Tic-Tac-Toe

6 easy math activities - make any worksheet into an activity! Perfect for a low prep day to keep students engaged and having fun with a worksheet. | maneuveringthemiddle.com
  • Project or draw 4-5 tic-tac-toe boards onto your whiteboard
  • Make half of the class Xs and half Os. You could do boys v. girls or split up geographically – window v. door. 
  • Students work in pairs or groups. As soon as a group has completed a certain number of problems, they raise their hands with symbol for done, you go check, and if they did everything correctly and to your standards, they can take an expo marker and play an X or an O. 
  • I instruct students to complete a game board before moving on to another, but you could play multiple boards at once. 

2. Connect Four

  • Prep Time: 30 seconds
  • Materials: whiteboard and sticky notes in different colors
  • You can see that the concept is super simple — be the first team to connect 4 sticky notes in a row horizontally, vertically, or diagonally. My students loved it, especially when they could block! This is similar to tic-tac-toe but it allows for more than two teams. Idea is from Miss 5th.
8 ideas to turn any worksheet into an activity! Perfect for a low prep day to keep students engaged and having fun with a worksheet. 8 easy math activities! | maneuveringthemiddle.com
Image Credit Miss 5th
  • Place students into groups. Draw or project a grid or table of 8 by 5 boxes. Each box needs to be able to fit a single sticky note.
  • Similarly, students work in their groups. As soon as a group has completed a certain number of problems, they raise their hands, you go check, and if they did everything correctly and to your standards, one student is sent to the board with their sticky note and they place it on the grid.
  • To manage the excitement and some of the behavior, I would create barriers for teams who were too rowdy. Example: if more than 1 student left their seat to move a sticky note, then I would remove one of their sticky notes. Using these types of tactics only has to happen once or twice before students internalize the expectations. Before you know it, the students who struggle the most are the ones policing other teams! 

3.  Magnet Race

8 ideas to turn any worksheet into an activity! Perfect for a low prep day to keep students engaged and having fun with a worksheet. 8 easy math activities! | maneuveringthemiddle.com
  • Similar to Connect 4 and Tic-Tac-Toe, the magnet race was my first introduction to engagement by way of racing. 
  • Materials needed: number line on a whiteboard with two or more different colored magnets. You could also do this with clothespins and a string or even a pushpin on a bulletin board.
  • All of the magnets begin at 0 on the number line. Students earn the chance to play after working together to solve problems, then one student from the group would stand and make a move. They could either move their magnet two spaces in the positive directions, or move the opposing team two spaces in the negative direction or split it. Whichever team had their magnet at the greatest value at the end was considered the winner. 

Get a free vertical number line here.

All of those activities have the same type of appeal. Group style, positive peer pressure so everyone tries because you can’t move ahead if someone in your group isn’t working, and high engagement. I will be honest, it can get a little loud! 

A couple of things to consider –

  • Blatant copying – this is going to happen if you aren’t careful. I think spending time upfront about what is helping someone work a problem versus just letting someone copy is a good practice.
  • I wouldn’t use these activities for either brand new concepts or on days where I needed really precise work to be done. For example: I wouldn’t use these when I am asking students to draw and model fraction division. That requires lots of focus and precision. I also know that I will need to be really available to help. 
  • I would use these activities on the day we are covering a skill that most students will excel on. Volume for example.
  • If you are choosing to run one of these activities in class, you will be highly involved with classroom management and answer checking, so you cannot pull a small group during this time.

4. 100s Grid

  • Time: 30 seconds
  • Materials: Either print or project a 100s grid. I found this colorful one here as a free download.

This was my secret to review days! Review days tended to be a struggle for my students (and myself). I had 90 minute blocks, so playing a game for that entire time would get a little wild, but I needed something to keep students engaged the entire time — enter the hundreds grid. 

  • As students complete problems (whatever number you decide), they raise their hands, you check, and then let them know if they need to fix any. If they are all correct, a student can sign the grid. 
  • Students put their initials in one of the numbered boxes. The more problems students complete, the more opportunities they have for their initials to be in more boxes.
  • At the end of class, I would google a random number generator to select 3 or so winners. Those students would get to grab something from my prize box. 
  • For the first half of class, I would allow students to work together. The second half of class would be completely silent as students needed to practice independently (they were having a test the next day after all).  This game worked throughout both collaborative and independent work time. 

5.  Grafitti!

8 ideas to turn any worksheet into an activity! Perfect for a low prep day to keep students engaged and having fun with a worksheet. 8 easy math activities! | maneuveringthemiddle.com

Graffiti is a fun and easy math activity. It requires more preparation than the others mentioned above, but it is great for math problems that need more space to be solved. You could even just give students an expo marker and they could work directly on their desks.

  • This is a great activity if you need extra space. Anything with models – integer operations, fractions, bar models, maybe drawing algebra tiles
  • Give a variety of marker colors and see students incorporate colors into their strategies.
  • Checking work is really easy because their work is large and easier to read.

6. Math Musical Chairs 

  • Prep time: 0 seconds
  • Materials: Chairs
  • Play music and students walk around the room. When the music stops, students must rush to find a seat. While seated, they have to complete 2 problems. When finished, they have to jump up and find another empty seat to do another 2 math problems. 
  • The teacher said that her students love it, and all they are doing is completing math problems.
  • Students work better when they have the opportunity to stretch their legs and this keeps the momentum going.

7. Digital Activities

  • Prep Time: Varies
  • Materials: Devices
  • Our digital activities require little prep too. Assign via your school LMS, make sure your computers are charged, and watch your students work. 
  • Many of the activities are matching, drag and drop, or error analysis.

8. Try our Autumn Freebie

  • If you haven’t had a chance to grab our Autumn freebie, now is the time. These are self-checking, and they have a fun fall riddle that you get the answer to when you unscramble all of the letters. All you have to do is print for these easy math activities.
  • Grab them here.
  • Great for review if you have covered rational number operations or solving equations this semester. 
  • You could actually pair this maze with tic-tac-toe, connect 4 or a magnet race!

Do you have any go to easy math activities?  What are your students’ favorites?  I would love to hear your other ideas for how to turn any worksheet into an activity.

8 ideas to turn any worksheet into an activity! Perfect for a low prep day to keep students engaged and having fun with a worksheet. 8 easy math activities! | maneuveringthemiddle.com

Maneuvering the Middle has been publishing blog posts for 7 years! This post was originally published in May of 2017. It has been revamped for relevancy and accuracy. 

The post Turn Worksheets into Easy Math Activities appeared first on Maneuvering the Middle.

]]>
https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/turn-any-worksheet-into-an-activity/feed/ 18
4 Test Review Tips for Teachers https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/4-test-review-tips-for-teachers/ Tue, 16 Nov 2021 12:00:00 +0000 https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/?p=41493 The end of the semester is upon us. Let’s talk about some best practices for test review. First and foremost, I support best teaching practices, which involve monitoring your students throughout the year, consistently spiraling skills, and striving for high mastery.  USE DATA TO REVIEW STRATEGICALLY Look at collective student data and determine the weak […]

The post 4 Test Review Tips for Teachers appeared first on Maneuvering the Middle.

]]>
The end of the semester is upon us. Let’s talk about some best practices for test review.

First and foremost, I support best teaching practices, which involve monitoring your students throughout the year, consistently spiraling skills, and striving for high mastery

Test review is tricky when it has to cover an entire semester’s worth of content. Check out our tips for making this manageable here. | maneuveringthemiddle.com

USE DATA TO REVIEW STRATEGICALLY

Look at collective student data and determine the weak spots.

What topic or skill did your students perform lowest on? Let’s say it was percentages. I wouldn’t just make sure there were lots of percent problems on the study guide, I would plan a percent mini lesson. Then I would couple the percent mini lesson with related skills – ratio, unit rate, and proportion problems. 

Look at what is covered on the test

Familiarize yourself with the final or the test. You may or may not actually get to see the test or perhaps you, yourself, write the test. There is a spectrum of how teachers and schools execute finals. But, typically, even state standardized tests will tell you how many questions you can expect from topic A or topic B. 

With this knowledge, you can cross reference what you know is covered heavily with what students need more practice on to create the bulk of your test review.

The bright spots 

For the topics and skills that your students performed better on, spiral those types of practice problems into warm ups and homework the weeks leading up to the exam.

You want students to continue to be exposed, so that no one is caught off guard or misses a fairly easy problem because they forgot one small thing. 

Set Goals to Increase Investment

A simple, low-lift, but very effective way to increase investment is to give students a goal! 

  • It can be a score or a certain number of points they will grow. 
  • You could even make it a class goal – 80% of students will earn an 80% or higher on the final for example.
  • Put this goal somewhere where students can see it visually – on their study guide or on the board and mention it daily as you review.
  • You can read the details of how I set goals for my end-of-year test here

After the test, celebrate students who reached their goals! Students appreciate recognition – so it can be as small as their names on a bulletin board or as big as a pizza party.

Provide a Study Guide

Study guides are valuable tools for test review! If you are going to the trouble of creating, printing, and distributing study guides, not to mention, collecting and grading them, then they should provide as much value to the student as possible. You want students to actually work on the study guide. Which is a pretty tall order!

Here are a handful of ideas to make your study guide helpful to students:

  • The study guide should mimic the test. Similar rigor, similar type problems – don’t give students multiple choice study guides for an open response test.
  • Incentivize completing the study guide 
    • You could do this by offering points on a test for completing it, or replacing a missing assignment zero!
    • Give at least 2 days for review. On day 1, students work mostly independently on the study guide with unfinished work for homework. This allowed me time to reteach in small groups. Day 2, play something super fun as a class. A completed study guide was your ticket to play. If your study guide was unfinished, you spent the class period finishing it. 
    • Give students the opportunity to check their answers immediately. Students need to know ASAP whether they are completing skills correctly. You could provide a QR code, a GoFormative type worksheet, or a Google Form.

If you are reviewing a wider range of content, you can utilize our Test Prep Cheat Sheets. Click here to grab them.

Differentiate using Stations and Small Groups

Stations and small groups are perfect for test review days. Here are a few ideas:

Students can rotate using their study guides. Maybe part of their study guide is just a blank box where they show work for what you assigned them on Deltamath or IXL. If your study guide is broken down by skills, the skill where students need the most support is where they rotate to your small group. 

Maneuvering the Middle All Access curriculum has so many hands-on activities that are perfect for stations or small groups – Error analysis, task cards, and actual stations too! 

If I was implementing a test review for midterms tomorrow – I would have one station for skills that most students mastered, a station with me for the lowest performing standards, and one or two stations for students to work collaboratively together either with or without tech. 

How Much Time to Dedicate for the Test Review

There is a sweet spot – look at your scope and sequence and your data. If there are three standards that require a reteach, then you may need 3 review days to cover those mini-lessons. Then ask yourself, what skills can be paired with those reteach skills? 

Feeling overwhelmed about preparing a comprehensive test review unit? We got you. Click below to check out any of our test review units. While these test review units are for the entire year, you can easily pull out what you need for the semester.

How do you review for end-of-semester tests?

Test review is tricky when it has to cover an entire semester’s worth of content. Check out our tips for making this manageable here. | maneuveringthemiddle.com

The post 4 Test Review Tips for Teachers appeared first on Maneuvering the Middle.

]]>
Getting Started with Math Stations https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/getting-started-with-math-stations/ Tue, 19 Oct 2021 11:30:00 +0000 https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/?p=40292 Math Stations, when done correctly, can solve many classroom challenges. Math stations can meet the needs of various learners, provide practice on spiraled concepts, and it puts the responsibility of learning on the students. Seems like a win-win! In addition, technology has made personalized learning easier than ever! You may be eager to try math […]

The post Getting Started with Math Stations appeared first on Maneuvering the Middle.

]]>

Math Stations, when done correctly, can solve many classroom challenges. Math stations can meet the needs of various learners, provide practice on spiraled concepts, and it puts the responsibility of learning on the students. Seems like a win-win! In addition, technology has made personalized learning easier than ever!

You may be eager to try math stations (or math centers), but are unsure of where to start. Hopefully this post will give you a little confidence to try them out.

LISTEN ON: APPLE PODCAST | SPOTIFY

Stations Wouldn’t Work in My Classroom

If you just thought those words to yourself, then let’s get all of the roadblocks to stations out and in the open:

  • You may not think you have the bandwidth to create or find multiple activities for a single lessons
  • Your class periods are too short
  • Your students will be off task
  • You don’t have the space or your class sizes are too big
  • You might not know where to even begin – how do I start this? 

Starting Small with Math Stations

In that case, I will remind you to start small. No teacher should commit to an entirely new approach to teaching without dipping their toes in the water first.

Small Groups: Start with just pulling a small group while the rest of the class works on something else. Get used to the practice of using data to lead small group instruction or intervention to students who need additional support. Not sure where to start with small groups? This post and this post are great places to start.

Weekly Stations: Introduce stations as a once a week activity for the entire class period. For example, every Friday is Station Friday. On that day, students get to practice what they learned that week with stations. Whether you have 40 or 90 minute class periods, students can work on what they learned from Monday to Thursday. Station 1 is Monday’s skill, Station 2 is Tuesday’s skill and so on. You can make your small group one of your stations that every student visits, or pull specific students for small groups while they are participating in stations.

Keep Transitions Easy: Students don’t have to actually move. If students out of their seats or managing a transition sounds overwhelming, then perhaps, the tub or folder rotates instead. 

Keep the Station Group Small: Maybe you have 30 students but only 3 activities for stations. Ten kids in a station will not work, right? Well, you can always have 6 stations with repeated activities. You get to keep the groups small but not double the amount of work to plan. 

Once you and your students are more comfortable with the processes put in place, you can consider these ideas.

Framework for Stations

The framework of M.A.T.H. is a great jumping point for a math teacher. It’s memorable for both students and teachers.  

  • M – Meet the Teacher
  • A – At your Desk or Assignment
  • T – Technology
  • H – Hands On

You may be familiar with student choice boards or playlists that would work in a station setting. In fact, one of our MTM teachers reached out this morning and shared her playlist using our All Access videos and MTM materials. It was phenomenal to see her utilize the All Access resources and allow her to provide small group instruction and support.

Best Practices for Math Stations

  • Visuals and timers are your friend! Set a big, loud timer that all students can see and hear to keep everyone on track. 
  • If you are having students move, practice! Set a timer for one minute and set high expectations for how you want this done. 
  • Simplify your groupings at first. Groups can be homogeneous or heterogeneous learners. The groups can stay the same for an entire unit or few months. Since I had tables, my groups were their table groups. On the other hand, I am reading Building Thinking Classrooms, and the author, Peter Liljedahl, encourages teachers to group students randomly.
  • Change it up, but also keep the routine. For example, there is always a tech station, but what program they use changes each week.
  • Have a plan for students needing help or checking their answers. If necessary, provide students with something self-checking or an answer key that they can look at. Maybe they input their solutions into a Form or scan a QR code to check their work. 
  • Think about the amount of time it will take to complete the activities and try to make them equal or longer than the length of the station. What you don’t want is one station that takes 5 minutes and another station that takes 20 minutes to complete. 
  • The Maneuvering the Middle activities that best lend themselves to stations are: card sorts or card matches, She Said He Said, Find It Fix It, a Maze or a Puzzle Train. You can find our activity bundles here.

All of our hands-on activities, digital activities, student video library, and standards-based curriculum are included in All Access. Implementing Math Stations is attainable when you aren’t creating all of the materials from scratch!

Have you started implementing math stations in your classroom?

Math Stations can solve many classroom challenges! Start small by implementing math stations using our best tips. | maneuveringthemiddle.com

Follow Us: Instagram | Pinterest | Facebook

The post Getting Started with Math Stations appeared first on Maneuvering the Middle.

]]>
Should Teachers Assign Homework? https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/should-teachers-assign-homework/ Tue, 05 Oct 2021 11:30:00 +0000 https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/?p=39166 Should teachers assign homework? Should you assign homework to your students? The answer to that question is dependent on a variety of factors, so let’s dive in.  LISTEN ON: APPLE PODCAST | SPOTIFY What is the purpose of homework? What is your purpose behind assigning homework? Here is a quick brainstorm of how you might […]

The post Should Teachers Assign Homework? appeared first on Maneuvering the Middle.

]]>

Should teachers assign homework? Should you assign homework to your students? The answer to that question is dependent on a variety of factors, so let’s dive in. 

Should you assign homework? We share academic and emotional pros and cons for students and the best practices for assigning homework. | maneuveringthemiddle.com

LISTEN ON: APPLE PODCAST | SPOTIFY

What is the purpose of homework?

What is your purpose behind assigning homework? Here is a quick brainstorm of how you might answer this question:

  • Homework is required.
  • I need a specific number of grades.
  • Students need to practice.
  • You believe homework builds a habit of responsibility.

The next question to ask yourself is: “Is my current situation working well?” For example, if you assign homework daily and only 50% of students complete it, then you may need to reevaluate. 

Academic Pros of Homework

Homework has many benefits. Even as a student, I remember working on my math homework, and having some aha! moments. Many teachers depend on homework because their class periods are so short. Homework allows for students to practice what they learned in class when class time doesn’t allow for it.

Flipped classrooms depend on students watching videos at home. While they aren’t working problems independently, they are still learning at home. This allows them to do the majority of their work in class, removing the barrier of trying to practice something you don’t understand with no assistance.

Lastly, our brain is a muscle that does grow as we continue to use it. If learning an instrument or playing a sport requires practice, then so does math. 

Social-Emotional Pros of Homework

Homework isn’t just about knowledge. Homework can build a variety of other valuable habits – responsibility, ownership of their learning, and time management. 

If my students weren’t taking class work seriously, all I had to say was, “Whatever isn’t completed in class will be homework,” and students QUICKLY got back on track. Incentivizing students to use their time wisely in class can help students stay on task. 

Lastly, in some cases, homework allows parents to see what their kids are learning and their child’s academic strengths/weaknesses. In years that I didn’t assign homework (when I had 90 minute classes), parents reached out often to ask what students were working on since they never saw homework. 

Academic Cons of Homework

You probably don’t need me to list them because you already know! All those amazing homework pros that were listed above become moot if students don’t actually do it. Homework isn’t actually practice or an indicator of what students know because it can be copied from a friend or apps like Photomath make it super easy to cheat. 

Not to mention, some students would rather just take a zero than complete the work, so now you have missing grades to deal with. And for the students who do complete their homework with fidelity, well, they can be practicing it incorrectly without immediate feedback. Which is why I highly recommend something that is self-checking like a riddle or mixed answer key.

Social Emotional Cons of Homework

While research shows that there is a correlation between completing homework and academic success, it does not show that students do better because they do their homework. Cathy Vatterott, an education professor at the University of Missouri-St. Louis, stated “Correlation is not causation. Does homework cause achievement, or do high achievers do more homework?”

Some parents and teachers argue that students have already spent 8+ hours at school. Students benefit from resting, playing, and spending time with their families. The whole child should be considered. 

Assign Homework, but Do It Purposefully

According to this recommendation, homework should follow the 10 minute rule.  Multiply the grade level you teach by 10 and that is how many total minutes a student should have of homework of all subjects for one night. If you teach 6th grade, students should have 60 total minutes of homework a night. 

With this recommendation in mind, you have to consider the varying abilities of your students. A 10 question assignment may take one student 10 minutes to complete while it may take another student 1 hour to complete.

Which leads to my next point, it has to meet students’ needs.  Online math homework, which can be designed to adapt to students’ levels of understanding, can significantly boost test scores according to this study

These 5 questions from Edutopia give a great framework to help guide what type of homework you assign to your students. 

  1. How long will it take to complete?
  2. Have all learners been considered?
  3. Will an assignment encourage future success?
  4. Will an assignment place material in a context the classroom cannot?
  5. Does an assignment offer support when a teacher is not there?

If you decide that homework is beneficial to your students, here are 5 best practices for implementation:

  1. Give less homework more frequently
  2. Ensure that students are practicing what they just learned
  3. Provide feedback as quickly as possible
  4. Explain to students the purpose of homework and how it will be evaluated

If you need Independent Practice (whether that is homework or in class practice), All Access has you covered! Each lesson comes with an aligned Independent Practice.


Many middle schools specifically are moving towards a model (or already have) that allows for a tutorial or advisory period. Utilize that time period and teach students to do the same. 

Hopefully, some of these thoughts will help you to weigh your options and come to a conclusion that meets both your students’ needs and your philosophy and approach to teaching. Let us know in the comments – do you assign homework?

Follow Us: Instagram | Pinterest | Facebook

Should you assign homework? We share academic and emotional pros and cons for students and the best practices for assigning homework. | maneuveringthemiddle.com

The post Should Teachers Assign Homework? appeared first on Maneuvering the Middle.

]]>
4 Time Wasters to Stop as a Teacher https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/4-time-wasters-to-stop-as-a-teacher/ Tue, 31 Aug 2021 11:00:00 +0000 https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/?p=35833 The beginning of the school year is when we have the best intentions for how the school year will go. Let’s keep this energy up by committing to stop doing these 4 time wasters. These time wasters lead to stress and burn out – I can personally attest! LISTEN ON: APPLE PODCAST | SPOTIFY Point […]

The post 4 Time Wasters to Stop as a Teacher appeared first on Maneuvering the Middle.

]]>

The beginning of the school year is when we have the best intentions for how the school year will go. Let’s keep this energy up by committing to stop doing these 4 time wasters. These time wasters lead to stress and burn out – I can personally attest!

LISTEN ON: APPLE PODCAST | SPOTIFY

Point 1: Stop Bringing Your Work Home

This may seem like the opposite of a time waster since you are trying to get more work done, but hear me out.

You are going to have to prioritize what needs to happen each and every day during your planning time. Not everything is equally important. We have to prioritize the important things and let go of some of the smaller things. 

Maybe you take work home, but leave it on the table only to bring it back to school the next day. All this does is add a mental burden to the time you should be resting, and you feel like you failed at something you wanted to accomplish. 

Here are some ways to turn this ineffective and exhaustive practice into something productive and sustainable. 

Choose one night to stay late at school. I would stay on Thursday nights to get everything prepared for the week ahead. Throughout the week, I would lesson plan very briefly so that I had a start on what we were doing and what I needed to accomplish on Thursdays. I would then delve into any creation of activities and lesson plans. By Thursday, most of the other staff members were tired, and I wouldn’t have any interruptions. 

When I left on Thursdays, I had all of my pages ready for copying, my keys worked for the next week, all of my bell ringers, and any assessments needed. I felt ready for the next week.

If you don’t have the capacity to stay late, then I would suggest batching by day of the week. Example: Mondays are for grading, Tuesdays are for lesson planning, Wednesday are for copies, and so on. 

Point 2: Stop Trying to Grade Everything

While students need feedback and grades, they do not need you to personally grade every single assignment that they touch. But, just like anything in life, they also need practice…practice for the sake of practice. 

So here are a few ideas that don’t require a lot of time spent grading. I go into more detail here.

  • Choose a single problem to grade — place it on a slip 
  • Roll a dice — my high school teacher rolled a dice every day with whether she would take up a homework assignment for a grade.
  • A Friday activity that allows you to grade and circulate for feedback
  • Trade and grade

Point 3: Stop Trying to Do It All Alone

Working with colleagues is a privilege, so if you are able to work with someone, find a way to work together, so that you can stop trying to do it all alone. I was the only 6th grade math teacher at my school, so I reached out to other teachers in my district to split up some of the planning workload.

Additionally, utilizing ready-to-go resources like our All Access Membership or other resources instead of reinventing the wheel is going to be something that frees up your time for other things — remember your time is valuable and finite!

Another few suggestions for you to consider:

  • Ask for help from parents — copies, cutting lamination, extra supplies
  • Ask an instructional coach — their job is to help, so try and give them plenty of time to help develop the lesson — but be specific about what you need — “I am looking for a bank of 10 questions on standard _____ that I can use in a class activity”. If you aren’t specific, then you may end up with something that you don’t necessarily want to use. 

Point 4: Stop Checking Your Email Frequently Throughout the Day

If you do not have the time and energy to respond to an email at that exact moment, then do not check or read the email.  If you receive a negative email, it can throw you off. If you are in the middle of being productive, an incoming email can mess with your rhythm.  Turn off email notifications. Notifications are such a distraction and your phone is a huge time waster.

This also works similarly in the evenings. So I have a few very practical tips.

  1. Set up an out of office response — If you aren’t going to respond to email after a specific time, set an out of office with a positive message, and a link to your LMS or wherever else a student/parent could access the needed work. This could be set in the evenings, on the weekends, or whenever else. It prevents parents from sending 6 emails because you haven’t responded, and establishes a boundary of when you respond to the emails.
  2. Set a timer when checking emails. Set a 15-30 minute timer and focus solely on that task.
  3. Create a Google Doc with common questions and responses. This seems like a lot of work up front but if you keep adding to it, you could save yourself hours over the period of the school year and even be able to update it for the next school year! Take the time to go slow now so you can go fast later. Copy and paste is your friend!

What time wasters are you trying to avoid this school year?

The post 4 Time Wasters to Stop as a Teacher appeared first on Maneuvering the Middle.

]]>
Making Changes vs Staying the Course https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/making-changes-vs-staying-the-course/ Tue, 27 Jul 2021 11:00:00 +0000 https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/?p=30586 If you are a teacher who is seeing the online teacher community buzzing with words like “grids” or “centers” and feel a little overwhelmed, then this post is for you. Oftentimes, we see other teachers implement new strategies or techniques, and think to ourselves, “Should I be doing that too?” Making changes in your classroom […]

The post Making Changes vs Staying the Course appeared first on Maneuvering the Middle.

]]>

If you are a teacher who is seeing the online teacher community buzzing with words like “grids” or “centers” and feel a little overwhelmed, then this post is for you. Oftentimes, we see other teachers implement new strategies or techniques, and think to ourselves, “Should I be doing that too?” Making changes in your classroom needs to approached with thoughtful consideration.

LISTEN ON: APPLE PODCAST | SPOTIFY

When is it time to make changes and when is it time to stay the course in your classroom?  Learn what to ask yourself before you make changes.  | maneuveringthemiddle.com

What is the Flywheel Effect?

In its simplest form, the Flywheel Effect is what happens when an organization knows its mission and is committed to making small tweaks to reach greatness. You can learn more about it Jim Collins’ book, Good to Great.

The Flywheel Effect is “A quiet, deliberate process of figuring out what needed to be done and then simply doing it.” 

In contrast, the Doom Loop is when you try something for a little while, you hope for big results, and then change course when the desired result doesn’t happen quickly. In schools, this might look like a new principal, a new teaching practice that the entire school is going to implement, or some other new initiative. 

How is this done well in schools and classrooms?

We want the Flywheel Effect in our classrooms and schools, and we want to avoid the Doom Loop. 

To achieve the Flywheel Effect, ask yourself:

  • Was there something that went pretty well this year that I can keep implementing with some minor modifications?

Example: Maybe you liked hosting everything on a Learning Management System.  It kept you and your students organized. Keep doing it! Just because you are back to in-person teaching doesn’t mean you have to abandon it. 

The key to the Flywheel Effect is knowing what needs a small change in the same direction and what needs a new direction completely.

For example, when I first started incorporating hands-on activities in my classroom, I noticed that the benefits were numerous: students were engaged, motivated, retaining the information, and I felt less tired. Here is what I could do to improve upon it:

  • I could plan to include more activities when I made my unit plan
  • I could plan different activities that might meet a different need
  • I could be more intentional in my grouping structures 

The Doom Loop would have me eliminate all other classroom structures to do as many hands-on activities as possible. This is like one big experiment, and if you change too many variables, then you won’t have a true test.

Why is the doom loop common in education?

The Doom Loop is common in education because you start over each year with a new group of students. You can fall into the trap of thinking a fresh start is the time to change everything you did the year prior. Even the structures or practices that were working well. 

The education world tends to be on either end of the swinging pendulum. This happens because there is such a wide variety of students with different needs, backgrounds, and experiences that need a good mix of a lot of things!  

Have you ever taught somewhere where you have a big initiative for one year and then it fizzles out after September? 

Trust yourself and your judgement to do what is best for you and your students. If it is time to change course, do it! If you are feeling pressured to abandon what works for something trending, pause and think about whether you may be falling into the Doom Loop.

How do you know if it is time to make a change?

First, we acknowledge that something is not working well. 

So ask yourself: 

  • Is this a pain point that is worth my time and energy to improve? 
  • Can I commit to changing it?

Change is a result of consistency and if you try to change too many things at one time, your likelihood of being consistent decreases tremendously.

Years ago, Noelle wanted to stop staying at school until 6 pm everyday, so she compromised with staying late only once a week. If it wasn’t Thursday, then she made a plan with her time after school, so she would leave at a reasonable time.  The plan wouldn’t have worked if she decided to leave by 3:30pm everyday.  Noelle made a small change in the right direction instead. Set a timer and keep pushing that flywheel forward, so that eventually you gain traction.  

Maybe that means a change in the way you plan, or a more concerted effort to divide and conquer with your team. Maybe it means that you are going to invest in something to support you with your goals. Maybe it means you are going to ask your administrators for support.

Whatever your goals are, I am confident with small steps towards them you will be able to gain momentum and harness the Flywheel Effect in your classroom.

When is it time to make changes and when is it time to stay the course in your classroom?  Learn what to ask yourself before you make changes.  | maneuveringthemiddle.com

The post Making Changes vs Staying the Course appeared first on Maneuvering the Middle.

]]>
How to Differentiate in Middle School Math https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/how-to-differentiate-middle-school-math/ Tue, 20 Jul 2021 11:00:00 +0000 https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/?p=29408 Today on the blog (and podcast), we have Marissa McCarthy! She is an amazing teacher who uses Maneuvering the Middle resources to teach and differentiate for her 6th grade students. She is a whiz at small groups and a wealth of knowledge. Marissa has just wrapped up her 13th year of teaching math in Ohio. […]

The post How to Differentiate in Middle School Math appeared first on Maneuvering the Middle.

]]>

Today on the blog (and podcast), we have Marissa McCarthy! She is an amazing teacher who uses Maneuvering the Middle resources to teach and differentiate for her 6th grade students. She is a whiz at small groups and a wealth of knowledge.

Marissa has just wrapped up her 13th year of teaching math in Ohio. She has earned her masters in gifted education, previously coached her MathCounts Team, and has previously taught 6th through 8th grade, Algebra 1, and Geometry.

We interview a teacher who is an expert in small groups and differentiating for her middle school math students. | maneuveringthemiddle.com

LISTEN ON: APPLE PODCAST | SPOTIFY

The interview has been edited for succinctness below.

How do you differentiate in your classroom?

My favorite way to differentiate is utilizing small groups, providing enrichment activities (6th graders are still excited to embrace a challenge), using formative data to reassess my students in small groups, and providing student choice. 

What are some of the ways you provide student choice?

One of the ways is pretty simple. I give students a choice on how they practice, whether that be paper based or a digital activity.  Or I give them a choice when completing a project. For example, if we are doing a statistics project comparing weather, I allow them to pick the locations. 

What tips do you have for someone who needs help differentiating? 

  1. Remember that differentiation gets easier as the year progresses. Use your formative assessments to help you determine how you want to differentiate.
  2. There are a couple of units that I pretest because students come in with so much knowledge, so I am able to determine if there are things that I don’t need to cover or skills that I can enrich.
  3. Do not reinvent the wheel. Use resources that are already written. Pick one way to differentiate per unit if you aren’t sure where to start.

To learn more about Maneuvering the Middle resources, click here.

Can you tell me about your small group routine?

Before the pandemic, I divided the class into 5 groups based on student needs. To help with the routine, each group was named a color, so I could just say “I need to meet with the purple group” today. Some other helpful background information: my classes are 58 minutes and I would spend about 15 minutes per group. 

The goal of small groups could be any of the following:

  1. Introduce new content
  2. Practice previously taught skills
  3. Reteach after an assessment. 

One of the easy ways to differentiate was how much time I spent with my different groups. Some groups received more time and some less time. 

When I had a co-teacher and a student teacher, the groups were more supported, but when it was just me it might take 2 class periods to get through all of the groups, but it is totally worth it.

What is everyone else doing when you are working in a small group?

That is a struggle! It can be hard to manage, but the face time I get with my students is important.  Students might be working on a paper or digital activity, or a related performance task. 

Everyone gets better with practice. If small groups didn’t go well the first few times, keep trying!

Let’s talk about vertical alignment! How has your background helped prepare you for teaching 6th grade?

I have taught all of the middle school standards plus Algebra 1 and Geometry, so I know where all of the standards are going. For example, in sixth grade, students write algebraic expressions. Because I have taught Algebra, I was able to pull systems of equations problems and talk with students that what they were learning as sixth graders were preparing them for Algebra. Many students were able to write these two variable equations, and a few students figured out how to solve. I was able to do the same thing with GCF and polynomials. Students were excited to see where they were headed in math!

On the flip side, I observed a fifth grade class and learned so much about where my students were coming from. If you get a chance to do this, you should!

[Check out this link to hear more or read more about 4th and 5th grade Math from Brittany Hege of Mix and Math]

What does a typical planning period look like for you?

My planning period looks different every day. Maneuvering the Middle resources have definitely helped streamline things.

Some planning periods are focused on planning for my small groups.  I start by asking: what am I trying to accomplish in my small group? Introduce a new concept, remediate, practice a previously taught skill? I might be deciding on the set of problems I want to use for practice with them or I might decide to use the student handout and make it a mini lesson at the small group table instead of the whole group. I sift through the activities and use them for students in the small group or students not in the small group.

I update my Google Slides with the agenda for the day to keep students on track and put materials on schoology for the day. [Note from the editor: this is just a small fraction of what any teacher does in a given planning period.]

What other tips do you have?

For the digital activity exit tickets, I add a question in Google Forms asking for their class period so I can sort them quickly for my gradebook. I also change the settings, so students know which problems they got wrong, but not the correct answer, so they can try again if they didn’t get a perfect score.

For the digital activities, I grade one page for accuracy. If a student doesn’t master it, I print off that slide and use it in my small group with those students. No need to start over with a brand new set of problems that I have to write or search for.

Thank you, Marissa, for sharing your tips for using Maneuvering the Middle resources to differentiate and help your students!

We interview a teacher who is an expert in small groups and differentiating for her middle school math students. | maneuveringthemiddle.com

The post How to Differentiate in Middle School Math appeared first on Maneuvering the Middle.

]]>
What is All Access Math Curriculum? https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/what-is-all-access-math-curriculum/ https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/what-is-all-access-math-curriculum/#comments Tue, 13 Jul 2021 11:00:00 +0000 https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/?p=28973 We are so excited to announce the launch of our All Access membership community for middle school math and algebra 1 teachers! Our math curriculum is receiving some fun changes! LISTEN ON: APPLE PODCAST | SPOTIFY Some Context Our MTM team worked hard to create resources that would be helpful for teachers and students when […]

The post What is All Access Math Curriculum? appeared first on Maneuvering the Middle.

]]>

We are so excited to announce the launch of our All Access membership community for middle school math and algebra 1 teachers! Our math curriculum is receiving some fun changes!

LISTEN ON: APPLE PODCAST | SPOTIFY

We are excited to launch our all-inclusive membership for middle school math teachers: All Access Math Curriculum. Find out what it is here. | maneuveringthemiddle.com

Some Context

Our MTM team worked hard to create resources that would be helpful for teachers and students when the education world changed in an instant.

  • In the immediate shutdown, we put together 13 free videos for any math teacher to use in their classroom. Thousands of teachers used these videos. 🙂
  • We then created additional videos and practice pages that we thought would be useful in a pinch. 
  • Then, last fall we worked to transition many of our paper-based activities into activities that could be used digitally. 

However, we knew that we wanted to be able to offer something all-inclusive.

Teachers Don’t Need to do it all

Let’s disregard the myth that teachers have to do (and be excellent at) everything in order to be considered a great teacher. There are so many different facets of teaching (organizing, planning, execution, relationship building, and at least 100 more); it is unrealistic to think that a teacher should be excellent in all of them. 

What if you could be the best teacher you can be and make an impact on students because your energy is focused on execution, intervention, and student relationships?  Not constantly lesson planning and spinning your wheels trying to pull parts of a lesson from various websites and textbooks.

What is All Access?

That is where we want to help! What exactly is All Access

All Access is an all-inclusive membership for middle school math teachers. We have resources for grades 6-Algebra 1 and one of the facets is our standards-based math curriculum. All Access is replacing the math curricula in our shop.

It is ready-to-go math resources with our new growing student video library! 

Let me break that down for you:

  • Ready-to-go math resources: that includes our units (guided notes, independent practice, and assessments), our hands-on collaborative activities — like scavenger hunts, task cards, our find it and fix it activities, all of those fun things, and our digital resources that are designed for use with Google Slides and PPT. 
  • New growing student video library: We are working on a comprehensive video library that will begin rolling out in September of 2021. I wish I could say they will roll out immediately but we really want feedback from you and want to take our time to get them right. We know that video lessons allow classrooms to be more flexible, create opportunities for teachers to flip their classrooms, and generally allow teachers to be in more than one place at a time – but who has time to create these on their own? Let us do it for you!
  • We will continue to expand our offerings based on your feedback.

i want to find out more

We would love to invite you to become a founding member of All Access! You can become a member by clicking here. We will drop in a video demo soon!

If you have questions, feel free to reach out to our MTM team by clicking here. Rachel will take care of you!

What if I already own the math curriculum? If you would like to give All Access a try, we are excited to offer all existing curriculum customers the opportunity to transition to MTM All Access for 50% off for the life of your membership. This discount will automatically apply in your cart. All you need to do is log in to your account and add the membership to your cart! If you choose to upgrade to All Grades, then the discount will vary based on the number of curricula you own.

We hope to see you in All Access and look forward to supporting you this year!

We are excited to launch our all-inclusive membership for middle school math teachers: All Access Math Curriculum. Find out what it is here. | maneuveringthemiddle.com

The post What is All Access Math Curriculum? appeared first on Maneuvering the Middle.

]]>
https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/what-is-all-access-math-curriculum/feed/ 2
How to Juggle Multiple Preps https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/multiple-preps/ https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/multiple-preps/#comments Tue, 29 Jun 2021 11:00:00 +0000 https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/?p=27837 Most teachers juggle multiple preps. No matter your content or grade level, if you have been teaching for any length of time, it is inevitable. We asked our Facebook group how many preps they taught, and one teacher said 7! Wow! Let’s talk about some of the ways we can manage teaching multiple preps. Keep […]

The post How to Juggle Multiple Preps appeared first on Maneuvering the Middle.

]]>

Most teachers juggle multiple preps. No matter your content or grade level, if you have been teaching for any length of time, it is inevitable. We asked our Facebook group how many preps they taught, and one teacher said 7! Wow! Let’s talk about some of the ways we can manage teaching multiple preps.

Keep scrolling to learn about something HUGE that Maneuvering the Middle is launching!

Most teachers manage multiple preps in their teaching career. Check out our 6 tips for making the most of your time/energy while juggling multiple preps. | maneuveringthemiddle.com

LISTEN ON: APPLE PODCAST | SPOTIFY

1. Stagger Hard Things + Batch Easy Things

When I was teaching multiple preps, one of the best things I learned was to stagger hard things and batch easy things.

For example, a science teacher is going to stagger labs. Running two or more different labs on the same day will cause obvious confusion with supplies and instructions. Not to mention that it sounds exhausting. A writing teacher might stagger due dates (by a few weeks) for essays to allow plenty of time for grading. Personally, as a math teacher, I staggered using manipulatives because it helped me keep my supplies organized.

For batching the easy stuff, I liked to run all the same types of activities on the same days when there were few supplies needed. If we were doing stations or a scavenger hunt, it was easier for me to do that with all of my classes. I could easily put the stations on different colored card stock, and let my students work while I pulled a small group.

2. Create an Organizational Zone for Each Class

One of our MTM teachers shared that she color codes EVERYTHING. She showed me a cut and paste activity where the pieces were color coded so that unit 1 was blue and everything in unit 1 was going to be blue – scavenger hunts, task cards, everything. It made me think about doing that across your preps. 6th grade is always green. If I find a green task card, I know it’s 6th grade. My students know to use the green scavenger hunts around the room, etc. I think if I could go back and do this, I would utilize color coding to the extreme. 

This could be part of the organizational zone for each class. If you can clearly label a certain part of your room for each prep, then that can help to cue your students. Anchor charts on the green bulletin board are for 6th grade. 7th grade material is always pink or on the right side of the classroom. 

3. Share the Workload

In most cases, if you are teaching multiple preps, it is usually because you are at a smaller school with a smaller student population and staff, so there usually isn’t another math teacher to share planning with, but you could reach out to other teachers outside your school. 

Think: in your district or even someone you meet in a Facebook group. Though you may have different teaching styles, or different lesson planning requirements, it should help to cut down on the workload.

4. Ask for Help

Which leads me to my next idea, ask for help. The worst thing that can happen is they say no, right? And if you don’t ask, you don’t even give the opportunity to be told yes!

You may consider asking for a student aid or an extra prep period or no duty — anything that might help balance the time required to prep for multiple different classes. One year, I was the only teacher at my school to teach multiple preps, so I asked my admin if I could not be assigned lunch duty – and guess what?  My admin said no problem!

5. Streamline Everything Else

If you have multiple preps, you will inevitably have to devote more time to planning, so look at everything else you have to do as a teacher, and see where you can optimize your time.

  • Self-grading assignments
  • Utilizing student jobs to complete some of those tasks that a student could easily do – update trackers, file papers, prep activities
  • Utilize technology for lower prep activities
  • Come up with a plan on how to batch various parts of your workload
  • Use every single second of your planning period effectively by having a plan for your planning period

6. Try Maneuvering the Middle All-Access

While that has been the primary project for the spring of 2021….we couldn’t be more excited for our project for the fall of 2021…Maneuvering the Middle All Access!

This beta program will allow you to get the resources you need and want! Plus, it will allow our curriculum team to think outside the box of student handouts and activities.

Instructional videos for students, professional development videos for you, and ready-to-use math resources that are beyond the scope of a PDF.

We are excited to share more details with you and welcome you into our MTM All Access.

Click here to Sign Up For All Access Notifications

Most teachers manage multiple preps in their teaching career. Check out our 6 tips for making the most of your time/energy while juggling multiple preps. | maneuveringthemiddle.com

The post How to Juggle Multiple Preps appeared first on Maneuvering the Middle.

]]>
https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/multiple-preps/feed/ 2
The Self-Paced Classroom https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/the-self-paced-classroom/ https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/the-self-paced-classroom/#comments Tue, 22 Jun 2021 11:02:00 +0000 https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/?p=27539 We are diving deep into the Grid Method with Jodi Rookhuizen. She runs a self-paced classroom using our Maneuvering the Middle resources and the Grid Method.  Scroll down to grab a Grid freebie to get yourself started with the Grid Method. LISTEN ON: APPLE PODCAST | SPOTIFY Who is our expert on the self-paced classroom? […]

The post The Self-Paced Classroom appeared first on Maneuvering the Middle.

]]>

We are diving deep into the Grid Method with Jodi Rookhuizen. She runs a self-paced classroom using our Maneuvering the Middle resources and the Grid Method.  Scroll down to grab a Grid freebie to get yourself started with the Grid Method.

LISTEN ON: APPLE PODCAST | SPOTIFY

Who is our expert on the self-paced classroom?

Jodi lives in Billings, Montana. She taught middle school for ten years, took ten years off to raise her kiddos, and is now back and going into her fourteenth year. She teaches both 6th and 7th grade math.

Note: This interview has been edited for succinctness.

What is the Grid Method?

The Grid Method is a mastery learning framework that allows students to work in a self-paced manner. It gives students the opportunity and time to master all of the standards. Jodi discovered the Grid Method during the spring of 2020, and liked it so much that she continued to use it for the 2020-2021 school year.

Why did Jodi choose the Grid Method?

Jodi wanted to reach more of her students. She wanted to have more one-on-one time with her classroom. The Grid Method allowed her to give more attention to some learners while not holding back the students who were ready to move on.

Grab a Grid Template freebie here!

The self-paced classroom benefits students and teachers!  We share how to make it a reality in your classroom using the Grid Method. | maneuveringthemiddle.com

How does Jodi use the Grid Method with Maneuvering the Middle curricula?

Maneuvering the Middle materials fit seamlessly into the Grid Method. It depends on the unit, but sometimes a level is dedicated to one standard, or a level is dedicated to a section of the Maneuvering the Middle curricula. The performance tasks and digital activities are great to sprinkle in the Grid to either review or provide extensions.

How does Jodi manage students being at different places?

Students have more buy-in because they are in control of how quickly they can move on – either they are getting the support they need, or they are able to move on when they are ready.

In the beginning, Jodi gave students their Grid, allowed them to work completely at their own pace, and told them when the final assessment would be. As the year progressed, she had to put some small deadlines in place to keep students on track. For the students that were not meeting those deadlines, she would conference with them to either encourage them to stay on task, or more often, provide the intervention that they needed. Jodi provided extensions for the students who were mastering the content quickly. By providing intervention for some students and providing extensions for others, everyone was able to end the unit at the same time.

What is mastery learning?

A baby must learn how to walk before they can run; that analogy is key for our students. Everyone learns at different paces, so telling a student who did not master a skill that it is time to move on because of what a scope and sequence says does that student a disservice. Hoping the student will pick it up later is not a good teaching strategy. 

Jodi likes students to score 80-85% as a good measurement of mastery.

What does a typical class look like for a student?

For Jodi, this changed because of the pandemic. They were in person all year, but they were masked and required to social distance. 

At first, students were working exclusively through their grids. When she was receiving content questions from her top students, she realized she needed to adjust. She later introduced a ten minute mini-lesson at the beginning of the class period to help students move forward successfully.

Because she wasn’t able to do group work or any kind of collaboration, Jodi felt like the mini-lesson (or warm up) encouraged whole class collaboration. 

How does Jodi keep track of her students’ progress?

Jodi has perfected technology to help her help her students. She projects a color coded tracker. Students have real-time ability to edit the tracker. Students can change their tracker to red to signal that they need something immediately. Another color means that they need her to sign off on something so they can move on to the next part of the Grid. If she finds a group of students moving slower or in the same place on the Grid, she would pull them for a small group. (Jodi couldn’t do this at the beginning of the year, but was allowed to toward the end.)

At the end of each Grid level or section, there is conferencing built in, and students take a short assessment. Jodi uses a pen and paper checklist to keep track. 

What are my next steps if I want to try self-paced classroom?

Complete the free course on Teach Better or complete the paid course.

TO SAVE 25% ON THE GRID METHOD COURSE, USE CODE: GOODMORNINGTEACHER @ CHECKOUT

Search “the grid method” on Facebook. There are many Facebook groups where teachers post their Grids. Talk to a teacher who uses the Grid Method because teachers are our best resource. What do you think of the self-paced classroom?

The self-paced classroom benefits students and teachers!  We share how to make it a reality in your classroom using the Grid Method. | maneuveringthemiddle.com

The post The Self-Paced Classroom appeared first on Maneuvering the Middle.

]]>
https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/the-self-paced-classroom/feed/ 2
Teaching the Real Number System https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/teaching-the-real-number-system/ Fri, 11 Jun 2021 15:00:00 +0000 https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/?p=27016 The real number system can really confuse students. I will admit, at times, I felt confused too! Let’s check out 4 strategies that will help you teach classifying real numbers, and will help your students master the concept. Vertical Alignment Before we jump to that, let’s take a look at the standard and how it […]

The post Teaching the Real Number System appeared first on Maneuvering the Middle.

]]>
The real number system can really confuse students. I will admit, at times, I felt confused too! Let’s check out 4 strategies that will help you teach classifying real numbers, and will help your students master the concept.

Vertical Alignment

Before we jump to that, let’s take a look at the standard and how it progresses through middle school, and then take a look at some STAAR test question examples. I have highlighted some helpful pieces.

The classifying numbers in the real number system can be an engaging skill! Check out these 4 strategies for teaching the real number system this fall. | maneuveringthemiddle.com

Real Number System Test Questions

Strategy #1 – Vocabulary

Vocabulary is crucial when teaching the real number system. Luckily, the content scaffolds by grade level.

  • 6th Grade: whole, integer, rational
  • 7th Grade: natural, whole, integer, rational
  • 8th Grade: natural, whole, integer, rational, irrational

Since the progression of standards is pretty clear, each subsequent year a student must learn one brand new word. Although the vocabulary is important, I think students need to see examples more than they need to memorize the exact definition. 

Bright idea! One way to push students’ learning is to ask them to come up with definitions based on observing numbers that have already been classified. Check out the example below.

The classifying numbers in the real number system can be an engaging skill! Check out these 4 strategies for teaching the real number system this fall. | maneuveringthemiddle.com

Some thought provoking questions might be:

  • What differences do you see between the numbers inside integers and whole numbers? 
  • What is different about the fractions classified as whole numbers versus the fractions classified as rational numbers?

Strategy #2 – Visuals

Notice that in each grade level standard, the term “visual representation” is used. In addition, in each test question example, there is a venn diagram of sorts. This means that students will not be expected to classify a number in the real number system without a venn diagram present to guide them, so make sure you are modeling with one, and students are practicing with one.

Check out the one I made! Hint: Washi tape helps with straight lines.  If you use Post-it Notes, the anchor chart can be interactive and reused each class period.

The classifying numbers in the real number system can be an engaging skill! Check out these 4 strategies for teaching the real number system this fall. | maneuveringthemiddle.com

Students need to be taught how to use the venn diagram. Don’t assume (like me) that it is intuitive. I would start by using a similar venn diagram that is not related to math. You can steal this example if you would like. (Warning: You may be concerned about students’ geography if you use this example.) 

You can ask these types of questions:

  • If someone is from Texas, can you assume they are also from the United States?
  • If someone lives in Oklahoma, where would you place them on the diagram? 

If students are struggling to use the venn diagram to understand the relationships between sets of numbers, then try exposing them to the funnel example. Using the number 17: 17 would be dropped into the natural number funnel thus falling through the whole, integer, rational, and real number funnels. The number -17 would be dropped into the integer funnel and thus continue into rational and real numbers. Then you would explain that -17 is an integer, a rational number, and a real number, but you typically call numbers by the funnel that it is dropped in.

The classifying numbers in the real number system can be an engaging skill! Check out these 4 strategies for teaching the real number system this fall. | maneuveringthemiddle.com

Strategy #3 – Simplify Before You Classify

I saw this idea on a Middle School Math Facebook group, and it is so clever and catchy! Teach students to simplify before they classify in the real number system. Fractions like 16/4 are a great example of this. If students are familiar with the definition of rational numbers, they may think, “16/4 must only be a rational number because rational numbers are numbers that can be written as fractions.” That student is technically right, 16/4 is rational, but that is not all. If you teach students to simplify before you classify, a student would simplify this to 4, thus changing its classification.

You see this with square roots too. Many irrational number definitions include the phrase “square roots,” so a student might incorrectly classify the square root of 100 as irrational. Simplify before you classify!

Strategy #4 – Make It Interactive

Since this skill requires very little computation, this is an opportunity to engage students in something hands-on. Here is what I have done:

  • Flyswatter Game (ideally after students have shown mastery, so they aren’t just swatting uncontrollably)
  • Card sort
  • Post-it Notes – have students write down a bunch of different types of numbers on individual Post-it Notes and then swap with a partner. Then they have to categorize the numbers from their partner.
  • Grab a 6th grade or 8th grade activity bundle that includes classifying the real number activities.

Classifying numbers in the real number system can be really engaging. It also would provide a math-win for some of my struggling students. How do you make classifying numbers engaging?

The post Teaching the Real Number System appeared first on Maneuvering the Middle.

]]>
Professional Development & Online Collaboration https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/professional-development-online-collaboration/ Tue, 25 May 2021 11:04:00 +0000 https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/?p=26042 Professional development – let’s talk about it!  Since so many events have moved online, there really are quite a few opportunities available for teachers without the cost of traveling or hotels. Why You Should Attend One thing we know about summer is that we are in a completely different mindset than we are during the […]

The post Professional Development & Online Collaboration appeared first on Maneuvering the Middle.

]]>

Professional development – let’s talk about it!  Since so many events have moved online, there really are quite a few opportunities available for teachers without the cost of traveling or hotels.

Why You Should Attend

One thing we know about summer is that we are in a completely different mindset than we are during the school year. When we are rejuvenated and well rested, our brains are more willing to learn and consider new ideas.  Teachers are the types of people who love to improve, optimize, and learn new techniques. Anything to help our students… and it is usually required. 🙂

Choose one or two focus areas. You could go to many different professional development sessions and not really implement anything new, simply because you are on information overload. Or, you can pick a focus area and use your energy to implement some of those ideas. 

Summer professional development isn’t all formal sessions in conference settings. There are also Facebook groups, online courses, and Youtube Channels with a wealth of knowledge.  

Facebook Groups

Facebook groups have many benefits to collaboration. When I taught, I was the only 6th grade math teacher, so I had to reach out online when I had a question specific to my grade level’s content. I find that the more specific my question is, the better answers I receive. I also learned so much just reading other teachers’ questions and answers. It’s where I learned about Blooket and Go Formative! If you aren’t in a Facebook group and you teach middle school math, take a second and go join our Facebook group

Speaking of which, this summer in our Maneuvering the Middle VIP Facebook group, we have a professional learning series planned for the summer using Facebook Live. Each week, we will share on a different topic that you can join in on the conversation. You can participate live by grabbing a cup of coffee and chatting along, or you can watch later when it’s convenient for your schedule. Mark your calendars for our summer learning series beginning in June.  

The YouCubed Facebook group hosted by Jo Boaler provides out of the box ideas for developing a mathematical mindset. 

I love the conversations in both of these groups because they are encouraging, uplifting, and helpful to better your craft as a math teacher.

There are also groups to help troubleshoot specific software like Nearpod, Flipgrid, or Canvas.  You will be surprised by all the assistance you can receive from strangers on the internet. 

When you find a useful post, click the 3 little dots, then click on “save post,” so you can access it quickly at a later date. 

Online Professional Development

Online courses and workshops are another option to try.  Our team will be participating in these three:

CAMT (Conference for the Advancement of Mathematic Teaching) is usually held in Texas each summer. This year they are hosting it virtually and it is great for the wide variety of topics presented. You can probably find a handful of sessions that meet your specific needs. There are literally hundreds!

YouTube Channels

Mix and Math – Brittany shared her expertise on fractions and divisions on this post. Her Youtube channel has ideas for upper elementary math, but many of her ideas are transferable to middle school. 

Shake Up Learning – Kasey is a technology, specifically Google, expert. If you have a question about Google, she has an answer.

Books

I actually love books about teaching because you can easily reference them, and they often provide visual examples. You can find my favorite below: 

About Teaching Mathematics  |  Mathematical Mindsets | Building Numerical Fluency | 5 Practices for Orchestrating Mathematics Discussions | Building Thinking Classrooms in Mathematics

What are you doing this summer to strengthen your teaching muscles?

Follow Us: Instagram | Pinterest | Facebook

The post Professional Development & Online Collaboration appeared first on Maneuvering the Middle.

]]>
What is The Grid Method? https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/what-is-the-grid-method/ https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/what-is-the-grid-method/#comments Mon, 29 Mar 2021 09:00:19 +0000 https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/?p=23877 On today’s podcast, Noelle had the opportunity to chat with Chad Ostowski about The Grid Method. Chad is the CEO of Teach Better and a former 7th grade Science teacher. He developed The Grid Method after the hardest teaching year of his life. Can you relate? If your students lack ownership of their learning, or […]

The post What is The Grid Method? appeared first on Maneuvering the Middle.

]]>

On today’s podcast, Noelle had the opportunity to chat with Chad Ostowski about The Grid Method. Chad is the CEO of Teach Better and a former 7th grade Science teacher. He developed The Grid Method after the hardest teaching year of his life. Can you relate? If your students lack ownership of their learning, or if you are struggling to reach all of your learners, then The Grid Method might be for you.

TO SAVE 25% OF THE GRID METHOD COURSE, USE CODE: GOODMORNINGTEACHER @ CHECKOUT

The Grid Method is an amazing tool for teachers and students. If your students lack ownership of their learning, or if you are struggling to reach all of your learners, then the Grid Method might be for you. | maneuveringthemiddle.com

LISTEN ON: APPLE PODCAST | SPOTIFY

What is the Grid Method?

The Grid Method is a framework that helps teachers break up curriculum into bite-sized chunks. These chunks are tiered and scaffolded, so students can work through a mastery-based learning pathway at their own pace. 

It allows students to learn, grow, and progress at their own pace while the teacher monitors progress and provides intervention, formative assessments, and feedback.

What is mastery learning?

In a traditional classroom, a student learns material over 5 days and then is assessed. Because a student gets lost or behind on day 1, they bomb the assessment. Mastery learning requires students to show mastery at around 80% before progressing to the next lesson.

The Grid Method keeps students at the place (Google: zone of proximal development) where they learn at their maximum potential most often. More students reach their maximum learning potential even though they are at different places in the curriculum.

Does IT work with any curriculum?

Yes! What goes into The Grid is up to the instructor. It takes the best practices we often hear in professional development – differentiation, self-paced learning, formative assessments, standards-based grading – and puts them into a structure that allows all of these practices to happen simultaneously.

How does a teacher manage this?

The execution and the classroom management of a self-paced classroom is no small feat. Strong routines and procedures will be necessary. Students will need to know what they are working on, where and how they can access the material, and what to do if they need help. Teachers will need to track student mastery and use data to plan small groups. In The Grid Method Course, Chad has a few modules dedicated to this very question. 

How can I learn more about The Grid Method?

If you are interested in learning how to use this method in your classroom, check out The Grid Method Course. It has 11 modules that will teach you everything you need to know to successfully implement this self-paced learning framework. See why teachers are loving this approach to teaching!

And don’t forget to save 25% off of The Grid Method Course, use code: GoodMorningTeacher.

The Grid Method is an amazing tool for teachers and students. If your students lack ownership of their learning, or if you are struggling to reach all of your learners, then the Grid Method might be for you. | maneuveringthemiddle.com

The post What is The Grid Method? appeared first on Maneuvering the Middle.

]]>
https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/what-is-the-grid-method/feed/ 1
4 Things I Always Do When Lesson Planning https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/4-things-i-always-do-when-lesson-planning/ https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/4-things-i-always-do-when-lesson-planning/#comments Mon, 15 Mar 2021 05:10:00 +0000 https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/?p=23136   Lesson planning is like cleaning the kitchen. You are never done. As teachers, we are both proactive and reactive in planning lessons. We plan ahead, then execute, then go back to our plans to edit when students are not mastering concepts. We. are. always. lesson. planning. It might sound like a complaint, but it […]

The post 4 Things I Always Do When Lesson Planning appeared first on Maneuvering the Middle.

]]>
 

Lesson planning is like cleaning the kitchen. You are never done. As teachers, we are both proactive and reactive in planning lessons. We plan ahead, then execute, then go back to our plans to edit when students are not mastering concepts. We. are. always. lesson. planning. It might sound like a complaint, but it is just a reality of instruction – you must always have a plan. A plan for your lesson, a plan for your students, a plan for your planning period

The purpose of this post is to give you my four step planning process. Ideally, when you plan… you are making a plan for many lessons at once. You are not planning a lesson from top to bottom and then starting over again to start on lesson 2, but I am getting ahead of myself.

Does lesson planning take up too much of your valuable time? The 4 things I always do when lesson planning helps me stay streamlined, organized, and ready for anything to be thrown at me. Get more lessons planned in less time by looking at the big picture and finalizing the small details. Plus, grab some free digital performance tasks designed for middle school and Algebra students.  | maneuveringthemiddle.com

LISTEN ON: APPLE PODCAST | SPOTIFY

Why should you lesson plan?

First, a horror story to teach us a lesson, ha! I was in my third year teaching, but it was my first year teaching 6th grade math. The 6th grade teacher I replaced was considered a legend. I received a flash drive with all of her lessons and materials that my A.P. instructed me to use. I thought I was set. I treated the materials as print-and-go. My district provided a summative assessment that we were required to use at the end of the unit. Fast forward to the week of the test. I am making copies of the test when I realize there were many skills I had not taught! After some digging, I realized that the 6th grade standards had been updated. I was teaching students the old, outdated standards! 

So let’s talk about what I should have done and what I changed moving forward.

Step 1: Backwards Plan AKA Understanding by Design

Lesson planning starts with the standards. Do you ever read a standard and go, “huh?” Standards are a helpful guide, but they can be vague and unclear. To better understand the standards, I like to look at examples of how these standards are tested.  This helps me see what is required by a student to show mastery of a concept AND it helps me see the rigor in which the standard is tested. If you teach in Texas, I highly recommend Lead4ward and Achieve the Core for teachers in other states.

6.7(A) generate equivalent numerical expressions using order of operations, including whole number exponents, and prime factorization

This standard says that I need students to create equivalent expressions using order of operations, right? But it doesn’t indicate just how complex these problems are. When I look at past STAAR tests, I see that the problems include all rational numbers, so I need to make sure that I teach this with negative numbers, with fractions, and with decimals. 

I look at the test questions and ask myself, “What does a student need to be able to do to solve this problem?” I make a list and then start on step 2.

Step 2: 30,000 Foot View AKA The Unit Plan

Either create a calendar in Google Sheets or print a calendar with space to write. It helps to use a calendar of the grading period, so your major assignments can fall in line when your grades are due. Also, reference any scope and sequence that has been provided to you or do some research to see a natural progression of skills. Don’t expect to teach an entire standard in one day.

Don’t forget to include the following in your unit plan:

  • A flex day — there will be kids out, there will be a field trip, or an alternative schedule, or a pep rally, so the flex day keeps me on track and I don’t have to rework everything when a change happens.
  • At least 1 reteach day – they are inevitable, so you might as well plan for one.
  • Your grading requirements — whatever your school requirements are, keep them in mind. If you are supposed to have two tests, then make sure they are on the calendar. While you are at it, make sure there is not an assessment in the last week of grading. It will literally save you so many hours of scurrying around trying to get absent students to take an assessment. Last thing, if you test students on a Friday, you will have more missing tests due to absences to manage.

Step 3: Start with a Reliable Curriculum AKA Maneuvering the Middle

If you are the type of teacher who likes to write problems and plan lessons from scratch, that is incredible! I was not that type of teacher. Teaching was already SO all-consuming that I could not imagine adding the role of curriculum writer to my workload. That is why I encourage you to find a reliable resource to use.  Obviously, I recommend Maneuvering the Middle curriculum because it is standards-aligned, student-friendly, and constantly being updated. I used the resource daily, and while I did need to make tweaks to benefit my students, most of the prep work was off my shoulders which allowed me to use my energy differentiating, pulling small groups, scaffolding, and giving feedback.

Or maybe your district has something for you…great! Try to make tweaks and changes without starting from scratch.

Step 4: Batch AKA Be Efficient

Once you start batching, you never go back! Instead of planning everything required for Monday – warm up, hook, questions for your lesson, an activity, answer key, putting it on your LMS or make copies – only to repeat the cycle for Tuesday, batch! While you are looking for, or writing Monday’s warm up, go ahead and plan the whole week’s warm ups.  While you are already online finding an activity for Monday’s lesson, go ahead and find the activities for Wednesday’s and Friday’s lessons too. Remember batching saves us time because our brains aren’t having to change what it is doing over and over again. And let us celebrate that we can reuse problems over and over again! Don’t expect for an entire unit to be planned in 20 minutes, but expect batching to make you more efficient with your time.

Lesson planning can be easier. Not easy, but easier. What do you do when you lesson plan? 

Does lesson planning take up too much of your valuable time? The 4 things I always do when lesson planning helps me stay streamlined, organized, and ready for anything to be thrown at me. Get more lessons planned in less time by looking at the big picture and finalizing the small details. Plus, grab some free digital performance tasks designed for middle school and Algebra students.  | maneuveringthemiddle.com

The post 4 Things I Always Do When Lesson Planning appeared first on Maneuvering the Middle.

]]>
https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/4-things-i-always-do-when-lesson-planning/feed/ 2
10 Ways to Use Task Cards in Your Classroom https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/10-ways-to-use-task-cards/ Sat, 17 Oct 2020 11:00:47 +0000 https://mtmmigration.flywheelsites.com/?p=3269 There seems to be no shortage of task cards out there as a resource for students and teachers.  The question is how to incorporate these tools as meaningful and engaging work in your classroom.  Here are some ways to get you started! 10 Ways to Use Task Cards 1. Extension This is a no-brainer. Print, […]

The post 10 Ways to Use Task Cards in Your Classroom appeared first on Maneuvering the Middle.

]]>

There seems to be no shortage of task cards out there as a resource for students and teachers.  The question is how to incorporate these tools as meaningful and engaging work in your classroom.  Here are some ways to get you started!

10 Ways to Use Task Cards

Task cards are awesome! Here are 10 ways to incorporate task cards as meaningful work for your students in your classroom. | maneuveringthemiddle.com

1. Extension

This is a no-brainer. Print, cut, laminate, and put task cards on a ring. Store them somewhere in your classroom for early finishers. I suggest front loading this task before the school year starts by utilizing parent and student volunteers.

Another tip: If you want task cards available for the first month of school, then use the previous grade level standards to determine what skills they should have.

2. Speed dating

Speed dating is great for partner work time and forces students who do not typically participate in the whole group to discuss their work.  Each student has a task card that they complete. I come around to check and clarify any misunderstandings. Students become the “expert” on that problem. You will partner up students (either by having them find a new partner or rotating seats) and they will swap task cards with their partner. The “experts” are there to check each other’s work and correct any mistakes.

3. Scoot

Scoot can be played 2 ways: either the task card can scoot or the student can scoot.  You need one task card for each student. Set a timer and periodically say, “Scoot!”  When that happens, either students will move seats to the next card or the card can be passed to the next student.  I like this because it gives students exposure to many problems and prevents students from getting stuck on one problem for an extended period of time.

4. Stations

Incorporate task cards into your station rotations by utilizing a few cards at various stations. This would be an excellent place to spiral review. As long as you have some task cards handy, you always have a station ready!

We have so many task cards resources in our All Access membership. Click the button to learn more! 


5. SMALL GROUPS

Task card sets usually provide you with a wide range of problems with varying difficulty. This makes them perfect for scaffolding in a small group setting. In addition, whiteboards make small groups feel more special than working with pencil on paper.

6. Warm Up + Bell Ringers

Here is an additional way to save on making copies: Project a task card as students enter the classroom, and have students complete the warm up in an interactive notebook. Praise students who get started on the warm up before class even starts.

7. Four corners for Multiple choice task cards

When you get closer to state testing time, practicing multiple choice questions is an important testing strategy.  State testing practice can feel monotonous, so getting students out of their seats to answer questions and defend their answers is a must.  Project a task card, give students time to work it out independently or in pairs, and then assign a corner of the room either A, B, C, D.  When you prompt them, students move to the corner of the room with the answer they got.  For additional practice, you could also ask questions like, “Which answer choice can we eliminate before even working out the problem?” and have students move to the corresponding corners and discuss.

8. USING TASKS CARDS WHILE SOCIAL DISTANCING

  • Project a task card that students answer using individual whiteboards or scratch paper
  • Use one for an exit ticket or entrance ticket – either digitally by Google Forms or Go Formative
  • Boom Cards is an app that turns them into a digital game with instant feedback

9. Connect 4

Divide your classroom into two teams. Purchase a Connect 4 game or project this online version.  As teams complete problems (with thorough strategies and units), you can hand a student a game piece or give them permission to play one piece online. This will encourage complete and accurate work because playing a turn only happens when everyone on each team has done the work properly. #positivepeerpressure

10. Spiraled review

If you have the time, printing task cards on card stock, laminating them, and organizing them will make reviewing at the end of the year a breeze. You will have sets from different units ready to be reused for state testing or for finals. No student will notice if you repeat cards from October in April, and you will not have to make up additional problems.

This is not an exhaustive list. In fact, I know that many of our readers use task cards in a variety of ways. How do you use them with your students?

Task cards are awesome! Here are 10 ways to incorporate task cards as meaningful work for your students in your classroom. | maneuveringthemiddle.com

Editor’s Note: Maneuvering the Middle has been publishing blog posts for almost 6 years! This post was originally published in April of 2018; it has been revamped for accuracy and relevancy.

page2image22560

The post 10 Ways to Use Task Cards in Your Classroom appeared first on Maneuvering the Middle.

]]>
Rookie Mistakes: Grading All Student Work https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/grading-all-student-work/ Sat, 03 Oct 2020 11:00:50 +0000 https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/?p=16796 Grading student work can give you valuable feedback concerning your teaching and your students’ progress.  However, I don’t want to give you the impression that everything that students touch should be auto-graded or hand graded in order for this to happen. Let’s talk about a common pitfall that teachers fall into: grading everything.  Note: Rookie […]

The post Rookie Mistakes: Grading All Student Work appeared first on Maneuvering the Middle.

]]>
Grading student work can give you valuable feedback concerning your teaching and your students’ progress.  However, I don’t want to give you the impression that everything that students touch should be auto-graded or hand graded in order for this to happen. Let’s talk about a common pitfall that teachers fall into: grading everything.  Note: Rookie Mistakes is a series of common pitfalls that we make as teachers, and tips to rectify and/or prevent them from happening.  No judgement here; the reason we know these pitfalls exist is we have fallen into the proverbial pit.  We have made each and every one of these mistakes, and sometimes we still make them.  

Rookie Mistake: Grading ALL STUDENT WORK

 

What is wrong with grading everything?

The problem with grading everything is twofold. On one hand, it is tedious and time consuming to grade 150+ papers/day, but let’s not forget that even after you grade the assignments, the real work is just beginning.

  • You have to manage the files or papers for students who need a redo or who were absent
  • You have to return the assignment to students quickly enough that the assignment is still relevant
  • You have to enter them in the grade book.
  • Let’s not forget grading all of the make-up/redo work and putting those loose assignments into the grade book.

It feels like cleaning the kitchen – it is never finished! On the second hand, grading everything does not further motivate students who would already lack motivation to do the work. Students who are highly motivated are going to complete their assignments regardless of whether or not the assignments are graded. While grades are meant to hold students accountable for completing their work, for some students, it creates numerous “incompletes” that are overwhelming for both student and teacher. 

Grades = Most Valued Work

My first year teaching, a veteran teacher told me – only grade what is important to you. That seemed like great advice, but I didn’t know what was considered important. I was just trying to survive each day. I took cues from other teachers — Ms. Horton was grading students’ interactive notebooks, so maybe I should too?  Ms. Mattingly didn’t grade homework, so maybe I shouldn’t either? My assistant principal made the decision for me. Grade what is standards-based for accuracy. Graded work is demonstrating their proficiency with what they have already learned. Students should not be graded for something that they are still learning. I took one grade a week on a short quiz that covered the week’s material. Then I would typically take another grade on a spiraled standard that students would complete during the bell ringer. Sometimes I took a grade on a test or a performance task. You can find more alternate assessments here and a link to some free performance tasks for middle school here

Giving Feedback on Practice Work or Homework

I think the most valuable feedback is the kind that is immediate. After students complete an assignment (or even if it isn’t completely finished), here are some ways they can get feedback on the work they did without you having to collect and grade it.

  • Ask students to share answers as a class.
  • Project the answer key on the board for students to check their own or a teammate’s assignment. Give students the time to ask questions.
  • Have students write their answers on white boards and raise them up – check for any common misconceptions.
  • Use a platform like GoFormative that will give students feedback after they enter each answer.
  • Check answers as you play any of these activities found in this post: How to Turn Any Worksheet into an Activity (with almost no prep).
  • Check answers as you circulate. Make a note on your clipboard/mobile device if you would like to enter it in your grade book.
  • Teach students how to use a student accessible answer key as they work on problems (these can be at table groups or on a wall). Mine were inside manilla folders.
  • For homework, students can check their homework as part of their warm-up.

If you are an All Access member, then Unit Test and Unit Quizzes have a Google Forms version to make grading quick!

Learn more all about All Access here.

Exit Tickets

Exit tickets were a requirement at my school, so I implemented them every day. I didn’t take them for a grade, but I gave them a quick look during the passing period or had students check their own before dismissal. This helped me inform my content delivery for my next classes and gave me valuable data on which students were completely lost.  You can read more about how I use exit tickets here I am so curious… What assignments do you grade? How many grades do you take per week? Is there anything else you would add? You can see our other rookie mistakes here:  Rookie Mistakes: Talking over Students 

The post Rookie Mistakes: Grading All Student Work appeared first on Maneuvering the Middle.

]]>
How to Teach Slope https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/how-to-teach-slope/ Sat, 05 Sep 2020 11:30:12 +0000 https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/?p=16745 Slope is a heavily emphasized standard in high school math, but its origins (like all math really) predate high school by years. In fact, students are already seeing the precursor to slope in 6th grade — rates, unit rates, and graphing an independent and dependent variable on a graph.  Today, we are going to explore […]

The post How to Teach Slope appeared first on Maneuvering the Middle.

]]>
Slope is a heavily emphasized standard in high school math, but its origins (like all math really) predate high school by years. In fact, students are already seeing the precursor to slope in 6th grade — rates, unit rates, and graphing an independent and dependent variable on a graph.  Today, we are going to explore slope in all of its math glory.

Teaching slope starts as early as 6th grade. Make sure your students are ready to tackle slope in Algebra by introducing slope in a meaningful way. Check out our best tips here. | maneuveringthemiddle.com

HOW TO TEACH SLOPE

Here are a few TEKS to show you some of the vertical alignment of this skill(s). 

Teaching slope starts as early as 6th grade. Make sure your students are ready to tackle slope in Algebra by introducing slope in a meaningful way. Check out our best tips here. | maneuveringthemiddle.com Teaching slope starts as early as 6th grade. Make sure your students are ready to tackle slope in Algebra by introducing slope in a meaningful way. Check out our best tips here. | maneuveringthemiddle.comIt is always more helpful for me to see a test question than a standard, so I pulled a few questions from the 2019 STAAR to show the progression of slope from middle school to algebra. This is a great method to exercise when thinking about vertical alignment. For today’s purposes, I focused on proportional relationships.

6th GRADE

7th GRADE

8th GRADE

Algebra 1

Strategy #1: Vocabulary and Types of Slope are Key

Each grade level will focus on a different vocabulary word according to the standards, but it is important to connect these concepts to what students have already been taught in previous years. Whether it is unit rate, constant of proportionality, slope, or rate of change, it is important to articulate that all of these terms essentially mean the same thing and to remind students that they can and will see these words used interchangeably. 

As 7th graders are expected to begin graphing slope using slope intercept form, I found this idea particularly brilliant (from one of the amazing teachers in our Facebook group):

y = mx + b —> b is where you begin (y-intercept) and m is what moves (the slope)

I would also like to add that while I was never shown Slope Dude or Mr. Slope Man, it would have been incredibly helpful to help me remember the difference between an undefined slope and a zero slope. Ms. Gertson, the Algebra teacher at my school, had a huge anchor chart of Mr. Slope Guy in her classroom.  Teaching slope starts as early as 6th grade. Make sure your students are ready to tackle slope in Algebra by introducing slope in a meaningful way. Check out our best tips here. | maneuveringthemiddle.com

Strategy #2: Scaffold

As teachers, we can look at math concepts through the lens of full understanding and underestimate how challenging it can be for a student who is seeing the concept for the first time.  

Identifying the type of slope, calculating slope from two points or a line on the graph, and graphing an equation all require multiple days on your scope and sequence.  My recommendation is to:

  • Day 1: Start with graphing unit rates as y=mx and introduce the different types of slopes – positive, negative, undefined and zero.
  • Day 2: Have students practice finding slope from the graph of the line using rise over run.
  • Day 2 or 3: Introduce the slope formula. Have students determine the slope from two points and/or from the graph. 
  • Day 4: Use real-life applications (like salary + commission or a cell phone plan with a data usage rate + processing fee) to connect to slope-intercept form. A teacher in our Facebook group said she makes the connection to transformations of functions since slope intercept form is a translation of y=mx. 

Another teacher said, “I do the same, making sure they understand the relationship between tables, graphs, and equations with unit rates and then extending it with an initial/starting value. (We practice) a lot of word problems and applications before we introduce slope and formulas…. to (improve) conceptual understanding.”

 

 

 

 

 

 

The best part is that we have done this for you – check out our Linear Functions Unit  for Algebra 1.

Are you an 8th grade teacher? Grab Linear Relationships Unit for 8th Grade.

Strategy #3 Use Technology for Real-World Application

There is something that helps math click when students can see how manipulating the equation of the graph will impact the actual line of the graph itself in real-time.  We love and recommend Desmos all of the time. Here are two activities that are sure to help students make those connections. 

Marble Slides: “In this delightful and challenging activity, students will transform lines so that the marbles go through the stars. Students will test their ideas by launching the marbles and will have a chance to revise before trying the next challenge.”

Land the Plane: “In this activity, students practice finding equations of lines in order to land a plane on a runway. Most of the challenges are well-suited to slope-intercept form, but they are easily adapted to other forms of linear equations depending on the goals of an individual class or a student.”

Grab these Winter Solve and Color freebies that include rate of change and slope!

What are some ways you teach slope? Tell us what grade you teach and how you discuss slope with your students. 

Looking for more great content? Maneuvering the Middle resources are now for Algebra 1 TEKS. Check it out here.

Teaching slope starts as early as 6th grade. Make sure your students are ready to tackle slope in Algebra by introducing slope in a meaningful way. Check out our best tips here. | maneuveringthemiddle.com

The post How to Teach Slope appeared first on Maneuvering the Middle.

]]>
Teaching Functions in Algebra 1 https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/teaching-functions-in-algebra-1/ https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/teaching-functions-in-algebra-1/#comments Sat, 29 Aug 2020 11:00:28 +0000 https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/?p=17120 Not only are functions fun, they are the basis of all of Algebra 1 – linear, quadratic, and exponential. Out of 49 Texas standards in Algebra 1, 20 involve functions — that is over 40%!  It is important that students have a firm grasp on understanding how to identify, evaluate, and graph a function to […]

The post Teaching Functions in Algebra 1 appeared first on Maneuvering the Middle.

]]>
Not only are functions fun, they are the basis of all of Algebra 1 – linear, quadratic, and exponential. Out of 49 Texas standards in Algebra 1, 20 involve functions — that is over 40%!  It is important that students have a firm grasp on understanding how to identify, evaluate, and graph a function to prepare them for more complex problems.

Teaching properties of functions is foundational in Algebra 1. Read some of our tips and tricks for having students master this concept. | maneuveringthemiddle.com

Teaching Functions in Algebra 1

Standards

Here are the standards that best describe what we are going to focus our time on today. 

  • A.12(B) evaluate functions, expressed in function notation, given one or more elements in their domains
  • A.12(A) decide whether relations represented verbally, tabularly, graphically, and symbolically define a function

Here’s what those standards look like as 2019 and 2018 STAAR test questions.

Teaching properties of functions is foundational in Algebra 1. Read some of our tips and tricks for having students master this concept. | maneuveringthemiddle.com

Vertical Alignment

In 8th grade, students will begin to identify functions in ordered pairs and with graphs; it is a readiness standard, so it is tested more heavily in 8th grade than in Algebra 1. You can see an example of am 8th grade STAAR test question below.

Teaching properties of functions is foundational in Algebra 1. Read some of our tips and tricks for having students master this concept. | maneuveringthemiddle.com

I think vertical alignment is one of the things teachers can overlook the most when lesson planning. If you are unsure, look up what students have already been exposed to before introducing a topic. I like using this document here.

Teaching properties of functions is foundational in Algebra 1. Read some of our tips and tricks for having students master this concept. | maneuveringthemiddle.com

Identifying Functions

If you have taught how to identify a function before, you are probably familiar with the definition of a function —

“A function is a rule that assigns each input exactly one output. They occur when every x-value is associated with exactly one y-value.”

You are also probably very familiar with the vertical line test.

When I was a student, I learned to just use the vertical line test. If given a set of ordered pairs, I would quickly sketch it to see if it passed the vertical line test. I had NO understanding of why this worked and what made a function an actual function. 

Teaching properties of functions is foundational in Algebra 1. Read some of our tips and tricks for having students master this concept. | maneuveringthemiddle.com

It wasn’t until I taught functions that I came across a concept that helped me understand the WHY behind the vertical line test. If you have a graph with time on the x axis and distance on the y axis, a vertical line would represent someone or something at a particular moment in time being in more than one place at once, which is not possible. A horizontal line would represent someone or something not moving over a period of time which is possible.

Here are other strategies to help students conceptually understand:

  • Vending machine example: Buttons are the input. Drink is the output. A1 will give you a coke. A2 could give you a coke. But A3, can’t give you a Sprite or a Coke. 
  • Speed dialing on a phone example: X is the number you push, and y is the person that is called. Your phone is functioning when you hit a 3 and it calls your mom only, or if you pressed 4 and it called your brother. The phone is NOT functioning if you would hit a 3 and it sometimes goes to your mom and sometimes goes to your brother. However, you can program two numbers to go to the same person. 
  • Multiple students can be the same height but one student cannot be multiple heights.

Evaluating and Graphing Functions

Once students have a firm grasp on functions and relations, evaluating and graphing functions come a little more naturally. Students have been substituting and graphing in all four quadrants since 6th grade.  Spend time reviewing the order of operations and how to graph on a coordinate plane. Never assume students already know how to do that – you will be surprised by the misconceptions! However, function notation will be new to students. From my experience, students pick up that f(x) is the new y fairly well!

Use Technology for Real-World Application

And because nothing makes math come to life more than our favorite web-based program, here are a few Desmos links.

  • Guess My Rule: Students are introduced to the concept of a function by using input-output pairs in a table. They explore different rules, some of which are functions and some of which are not.
  • Card Sort – Functions: In this activity, students sort graphs, equations, and contexts according to whether each one represents a function.

Pacing

Properties of functions – identifying, evaluating, and graphing are big skills that need their own day. Each of these skills requires a myriad of formats for students to comprehend — set of ordered pairs, mapping diagrams, a graph, a table, or a real life example.  Students need exposure, so do not plan on flying through these standards in a few days. Since functions are foundational in Algebra, extra time spent setting the stage will not go to waste. 

What I also love about this particular skill is that it softly introduces all of the types of functions students will be exposed to over the course of the year — linear, quadratic, and exponential. If students feel comfortable evaluating or describing these types of functions early on, they will be more inclined to find the axis of symmetry (for example) later in the year. 

Further reading for Algebra 1: How to Teach Domain and Range | How to Teach Solving Equations

UPDATE: ALGEBRA I DIGITAL ACTIVITIES ARE NOW AVAILABLE!

Algebra 1 Digital Activity Cover
Teaching properties of functions is foundational in Algebra 1. Read some of our tips and tricks for having students master this concept. | maneuveringthemiddle.com

The post Teaching Functions in Algebra 1 appeared first on Maneuvering the Middle.

]]>
https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/teaching-functions-in-algebra-1/feed/ 4
15 Remote Teaching Videos to Get You Started https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/15-remote-teaching-videos-to-get-you-started/ Sat, 15 Aug 2020 11:30:39 +0000 https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/?p=16078 The school year has either started or is about to start. No time to waste! Here are 15 remote teaching videos that will hopefully help you make some of this technology transition a little bit easier.  Note: We receive questions about “how to do _____?” so frequently. Below are our most popular. We also have […]

The post 15 Remote Teaching Videos to Get You Started appeared first on Maneuvering the Middle.

]]>
The school year has either started or is about to start. No time to waste! Here are 15 remote teaching videos that will hopefully help you make some of this technology transition a little bit easier. 

Note: We receive questions about “how to do _____?” so frequently. Below are our most popular. We also have a video library for any other FAQs related to using our resources that you can check out here.

We compiled helpful videos for remote teaching! These 15 remote teaching videos will provide tips for various LMS & digital tricks to save time/energy. | maneuveringthemiddle.com

15 Remote Teaching Videos to Get You Started

  1. How to Split Screen on Chromebook
  2. How to Split Screen on iPad
  3. How to Split Screen on Macbook
  4. How to Write/Record on an iPad
  5. How to Write/Record on a Desktop
  6. How to Record and Write With Your Cell Phone acting as a Doc Camera
  7. How to Record/Teach Live Using the Hue Doc Cam
  8. Using Interactive Whiteboards in Google Meets
  9. Using Interactive Whiteboards in Zoom
  10. What is the difference between Nearpod and Pear Deck (both Google add-ons)
  11. Teaching Remotely Using Canvas
  12. Getting Started with Schoology
  13. Getting Started with Google Classroom
  14. How to Use Microsoft Teams for Remote Teaching
  15. How to Create an Interactive Notebook

How to Do a Split Screen

Teach your students how to split their screen so they can watch a video or be on Zoom while taking notes at the same time.

1. On Chromebook

2. On iPad

3. On Macbook

4. How to Record and Write on an iPad

5. How to Record and Write on a Desktop

6. How to Record and Write With Your Cell Phone acting as a Doc Camera

7. How to Record/Teach Live Using the Hue Doc Cam

8. Using Interactive Whiteboards in Google Meets

9. Using Interactive Whiteboards in Zoom

10. What is the difference between Nearpod and Pear Deck (both Google add-ons)

Getting Started with Your LMS

Many districts are opting in to various Learning Management Systems which can be stressful for a teacher that used something different until now, or who has never used one before. There are so many features and ways to use them; I could never become an expert in every LMS. Thankfully, there are some amazing experts who have already figured it out.

11. Teaching Remotely Using Canvas

                 

Mallory Camera’s YouTube channel covers so much more of what Canvas has to offer. I would check it out here.

12. Getting Started with Schoology

                   

Tech Teach and Transform has a very comprehensive YouTube channel on Schoology. If you have a very specific Schoology need, I would check out her channel here.

13. Getting Started with Google Classroom

                   

14. How to Use Microsoft Teams for Remote Teaching

                   

15. How to Create an Interactive Notebook

Many teachers are excited to create a digital interactive notebook for their students. Here is a helpful resource we found, but just a friendly reminder that you do not have to create one for remote learning to be successful!

What are we missing? What haven’t you quite figured out? If you need videos to help with math instruction, check out our Remote Learning Packs here.

 

We compiled helpful videos for remote teaching! These 15 remote teaching videos will provide tips for various LMS & digital tricks to save time/energy. | maneuveringthemiddle.com

The post 15 Remote Teaching Videos to Get You Started appeared first on Maneuvering the Middle.

]]>
Why You Should Use Exit Tickets https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/why-you-should-use-exit-tickets/ https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/why-you-should-use-exit-tickets/#comments Tue, 23 Jun 2020 19:36:43 +0000 https://mtmmigration.flywheelsites.com/?p=2707 “You can’t correct what you can’t detect.” Have you ever been shocked by the results after a quiz or test? Was this also the first time you had gathered data from students on the given topic? Usually, that was the case for me. Teachers need to monitor how students are progressing daily to have a […]

The post Why You Should Use Exit Tickets appeared first on Maneuvering the Middle.

]]>

“You can’t correct what you can’t detect.” Have you ever been shocked by the results after a quiz or test? Was this also the first time you had gathered data from students on the given topic? Usually, that was the case for me.

Teachers need to monitor how students are progressing daily to have a real understanding of whether or not they are ready to move on. I would fall into the trap of calling on raised hands, those students answering correctly, and me feeling like I was crushing it as a teacher. Too often I would forget about my shy or struggling students and move through a class period thinking every student was “getting it.”Exit tickets are a great way to gauge students' understanding, drive instruction, and invest students in mastering the content that same day. | maneuveringthemiddle.com

why you should use exit tickets

What is an Exit Ticket?

An exit ticket is a 2-5 question formative assessment that allows students to demonstrate the skill they learned that day.  It is usually given at the end of the class period as a ticket out of the door. (Many teachers have students complete an entrance ticket as they have had more time to synthesize what they had learned.) It allows teachers to evaluate their students’ understanding of the day’s lesson and make decisions based on that evaluation.

For Reteaching

Exit tickets serve as a check-in for how students grasped the content I taught that day. After teaching a lesson, I look through the exit tickets and decide if I need to reteach the skill in a different way the following day or the day after. I usually decide based on a couple of questions:

  1. Did the students master the concept but maybe not the computation?  If the answer is yes, I do not reteach.  Example: Were they able to set up a percent proportion correctly, but made an error dividing? Then no reteaching is necessary. (Even if everyone made a division mistake – it means we need to practice division not relearn percent proportions.)
  2. Did the majority of students get the easiest problems correct? Usually, my exit tickets would go from easiest question to hardest question. I would not look at the hardest problems to gauge understanding. Remember this is the first day a student has seen this material. It will take time and exposure before students are rocking the more rigorous problems. The more challenging problems would serve the purpose of keeping fast workers from finishing early and to see any additional misconceptions. (The percent of students mastering a concept before moving on is going to depend on your students. My goal was usually around 75%.)
  3. How have students done on this skill historically?  The longer you have been teaching, the more you understand how long it takes students to master certain skills. Multiplying fractions – one day. Dividing decimals – forever.

For a Quick Hit

Sometimes exit tickets that do not demonstrate mastery don’t actually necessitate reteaching the entire lesson. It might mean that I have one quick key point to clarify before moving on. The best part is that I don’t have to wait until the end of the day to fix my delivery. 

Exit tickets show me where students have misconceptions or where I was unclear before I teach my next class period. 

It gives me an action step: I need to model one more example before students move to group or independent work time. Furthermore, if my first period students all made the same type of error that I am able to address in my other classes, I can use one of their exit tickets as an error analysis the next day to address the misconception with them.

Challenge Students to Synthesize What They Learned

Exit tickets hold students accountable to produce work by the end of the class period that they know you will collect and look at.  It sends the message that what students learned that day is important; they need to pay attention for the entirety of the class, so they can synthesize what they have learned. When students are dismissing, I will be flipping through their exit tickets and stopping students at the door if I need to clarify something with them.

In addition, it allows students to communicate their needs with you.  This idea comes from Erica Stewart who has students evaluate their understanding at the bottom of their exit ticket.  

Exit tickets are a great way to gauge students' understanding, drive instruction, and invest students in mastering the content that same day. | maneuveringthemiddle.com

Students simply circle their understanding. Sometimes students leave me notes like, “This was so easy!” and sometimes, “I don’t understand anything.”

Should I Grade Exit Tickets?

I do not grade exit tickets if it is the first day that I have taught a skill.  Occasionally, I do take a grade (if I need it) on subsequent days where students are not learning new material, but practicing material that has already been taught. Exit tickets are not a primary source of grades, but I do use the data they give me to drive instruction.

Exit tickets serve no purpose if you are not looking at them to determine where your students need additional instruction. The easiest way to get timely feedback (for students and teachers) is to use technology to gather that information. Google Forms allows for self-grading. Students can receive immediate feedback without you having to check and pass back. There are many tech tools that allow for self-grading. You can find our comprehensive list of them here

We offer digital (via Google Forms) and printable exit tickets (pictured) in our Digital Activities. You can read more about them here or check them out to purchase here.

Do you use exit tickets in your classroom?

Exit tickets are a great way to gauge students' understanding, drive instruction, and invest students in mastering the content that same day. | maneuveringthemiddle.com

Editor’s Note: We have been publishing content for the Maneuvering the Middle blog for over 6 years! This post was originally published in September of 2017 and has been revamped for accuracy and relevancy.

The post Why You Should Use Exit Tickets appeared first on Maneuvering the Middle.

]]>
https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/why-you-should-use-exit-tickets/feed/ 8
6 Ideas for Bell Ringers https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/6-ideas-for-bell-ringers/ https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/6-ideas-for-bell-ringers/#comments Wed, 03 Jun 2020 07:05:56 +0000 https://mtmmigration.flywheelsites.com/?p=1480 Bell ringers, warm ups, or do firsts — whatever you or your school might call them, they all serve the same purpose: to get students working at the start of class.   This helps communicate to students that every single minute of class time is valuable.  I have found that when the first five minutes […]

The post 6 Ideas for Bell Ringers appeared first on Maneuvering the Middle.

]]>
Bell ringers, warm ups, or do firsts — whatever you or your school might call them, they all serve the same purpose: to get students working at the start of class.   This helps communicate to students that every single minute of class time is valuable.  I have found that when the first five minutes of class run smoothly, the rest of class time will run smoothly (and I can actually take attendance!).  Make your life easier and have a plan for the first five minutes of class with these 6 ideas for bell ringers. 

6 IDEAS FOR Bell RingerS

Skill Drills + NUMBER SENSE FLUENCY

The length of a bell ringer caters perfectly for math fact drills.  Think multiplication facts, division facts, fraction-decimal-percent conversions, geometry formulas, and other skills that will strengthen students’ automaticity in math.  Why does it work?  Students can feel successful completing problems that they already know how to do and can do quickly.  Skill drills make it near impossible for students to sit there blankly or complain that they don’t get it.  Set a timer, tell students to try to beat that time, and watch them go to work.  I usually use skill drills every day for the first 4-6 weeks of school.  While practicing number operations is valuable, it can be even more impactful when a quick discussion of strategies takes place.  Our Number Sense Starters provide discussion questions for each slide to prompt student thinking. The goal is to facilitate a quick discussion where students are able to articulate their thinking process. 

Spiraling Content

Some of the best teachers don’t require “review days”.  Why?  Because they are reviewing every day by making it a part of their routine.  I hope to reach that status soon, but in the meantime, I use bell ringer time to practice previously taught skills.  I have found this to be most successful by working on the same content for an entire week.  Due to the repetitive nature of the same skill for 5 straight days, students at varying levels have several opportunities to relearn or practice the material.  

For example, in my 6th grade classroom, I teach order of operations, prime factorization, greatest common factor, and integer operations in our first unit.  While we are in the midst of unit two, I would spiral in at least one order of operations problem for a whole week on the warm ups.  The next week, students would solve a prime factorization problem in the same manner.  Monday and Tuesday, I might go over the skill to provide a refresh for  my struggling students.  By Wednesday, I would have a higher level student teach the class how to solve the problem.  At the end of the week, most students can practice the skill correctly and independently.  These math warm ups are easy to implement, ready to print, and aligned to CCSS or TEKS. They include a paper version for the student, a daily slide for your projector, and a standards guide.

Daily Math Warm-Ups7th grade ccss daily math warm-ups8th grade ccss daily math warm-ups

They are also included in our All Access membership! Click the button below to learn more about joining All Access.

Logging Onto Tech

Are you amazed at how long it takes students to grab a computer, log in, and get started on an online assignment? Yes, me too! If you plan on using technology for any part of your lesson, you can make logging in their bell ringer. While it might not seem as purposeful, it still has to get done. If you don’t want a huge group at your Chromecart, I would stand at the door and only let students into class as space around the Chromecart opens up. Then I would challenge each class period to beat the previous class period’s log in time.. Students loved the challenge and their competitive nature made logging in take only a couple of minutes. Teacher win.

Previewing Material

Previewing material helps many different types of learners and there is literally no better time to preview than the very beginning of class.  Because students should be completing the warm up with little assistance, this should be the type of skills that students have practiced before, but additional steps are going to be required to complete the objective for that day.  For example, on a day when students are going to be simplifying fractions, the warm up might be listing factor pairs of a number or finding the greatest common factor of two numbers.  I have found that incorporating vocabulary can be another way to preview material through bell ringers.

Daily Math Warm-Ups 7th Grade TEKS

HOMEWORK PROBLEMS

When I was in 8th grade, my Algebra teacher had an area on her board where students could write down problem numbers they had trouble with from the previous night’s homework. Sometimes Ms. Eckles would not go over any of the problems and jumped straight into the lesson. Other times she reviewed many, many problems. I don’t do this myself, but it did seem to work.  We were engaged because we wanted a good homework grade, and since classes were only 40 minutes, it combined the warm up and the homework check. If I could call this teacher up right now, I would ask her when she took attendance. (She was probably like me and forgot). This is how Noelle grades homework.

Error Analysis

Error analysis allows students to think critically and reflect on mistakes.  It promotes a culture that allows students to feel okay making mistakes because they are then able to learn from those mistakes.  If I see a common error on an assessment or homework, I will use a student example or recreate the error myself, and ask students to work out the problem on their own, identifying where the mistake happened.  Positive culture idea: have students correct the mistake of a celebrity.  Example: Miley Cyrus was working with Ms. Brack on adding fractions.  Did she solve this problem correctly?  If not, explain to Miley how to fix her mistake.

Editor’s Note: We have been publishing content for the Maneuvering the Middle blog for over 6 years! This post was originally published in June of 2016 and has been revamped for accuracy and relevancy. 

The post 6 Ideas for Bell Ringers appeared first on Maneuvering the Middle.

]]>
https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/6-ideas-for-bell-ringers/feed/ 12
3 Tips for Teaching Algebra 1 https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/3-tips-for-teaching-algebra-1/ Sat, 07 Mar 2020 12:30:31 +0000 https://mtmmigration.flywheelsites.com/?p=8037 If this is your first year teaching Algebra 1, or even your first year in a math classroom,  this post is for you. I remember the stress of being responsible for students’ future success in high school. If they didn’t pass Algebra 1, then students would have to double up math classes in future grades […]

The post 3 Tips for Teaching Algebra 1 appeared first on Maneuvering the Middle.

]]>
If this is your first year teaching Algebra 1, or even your first year in a math classroom,  this post is for you. I remember the stress of being responsible for students’ future success in high school. If they didn’t pass Algebra 1, then students would have to double up math classes in future grades or take summer school. The stakes were much higher than when I taught middle school!

In addition, most of my students were repeating Algebra 1. The feeder middle school required all students to take Algebra 1 in 8th grade.  Any students that did not pass their final exam in 8th grade had to retake Algebra 1, which gave me classes full of students that thought they knew everything since they had learned it the year before. Here are 3 things that I wish I would have started my year knowing.

Algebra 1 is a foundational course and teaching Algebra 1 is full of unique challenges. Here are 3 tips to help you help your students succeed in Algebra 1. | maneuveringthemiddle.com

1. Classroom Management Matters

You might be thinking … obviously! And I think that I thought that too, but I also thought, “These students are high schoolers, they should be able to (insert obvious statement here).” 

I felt so frustrated a few months into the school year because my 9th graders were acting like 6th graders. After winter break, I spent 2 days reteaching classroom expectations with the mindset that they were 11 instead of 15, and behavior did improve! 

Every little thing must be taught. You can read more about every routine and procedure that should be reviewed here and here.

Also, don’t forget that building relationships is foundational! Take an interest in them as people, not just students. I talk more about building relationships within my classroom here.

2. Explain the WHY before teaching the HOW

This is a good practice for all types of teaching, but teaching the WHY before teaching the HOW benefitted my students taking Algebra 1 for the second time. 

For example: before introducing how to solve systems of equations, I gave students the problem —

A + B = 5.

I would ask my students, “What is the value of A and B?” Students agreed that there could be a combination of various numbers (4 and 1 or 3 and 2 or 5 and 0 or etc) that would make the equation true. Then I would add another equation —

A – B = 3. 

Students would then see that only A=4 and B=1 would satisfy both equations. I would do this before introducing substitution or elimination. (Thank you Education World for that idea.)

Lastly, ever wonder why the inequality symbol flips when you multiply or divide by a negative number? I had never questioned it or even thought about it in my entire math career. One of my students always asked WHY as a tactic to stall, which drove me crazy, but then I realized that he was forcing me to be a better teacher! I learned that preparing my lessons with the WHY in mind was better for everyone, including me!

3. Get Familiar with your calculator

Calculators are a powerful tool that I underutilized in my Algebra 1 and 2 classes. My school used the TI -Nspire, which was different than what I had grown up using, so I felt uncomfortable teaching my students what value they possessed. There was so much potential conceptual understanding lost just because I didn’t step out of my comfort zone to learn something new.   

In order to keep you from falling victim to your comfort zone, I compiled some resources that can help teachers familiarize themselves with their school’s calculators.

  • This Texas Instrument website has specific Algebra 1 activities and lessons to support use of the TI-84
  • This Texas Instrument website has specific Algebra 1 lessons to support the use of TI-Nspire CX.
  • And there are so many Youtube videos that walk you through how to do everything on your calculator. Just type the name of your calculator + the skill you want to learn.

A tip from an Algebra 1 teacher from our Facebook group – 

“Google is your friend. Start a chart with the [calculator] basics. Add to it as you figure out new things you can do. If you have Google classroom, you can create a living document and post it there, so the students can access it and add to it too.”

Algebra 1 teachers, what would you add to this list? What is important to remember when teaching algebra?

UPDATE: ALGEBRA I DIGITAL ACTIVITIES ARE NOW AVAILABLE!Algebra 1 Digital Activity Cover

P.S. Making Algebra Relevant and Teaching Domain and Range

Algebra 1 is a foundational course and teaching Algebra 1 is full of unique challenges. Here are 3 tips to help you help your students succeed in Algebra 1. | maneuveringthemiddle.com

The post 3 Tips for Teaching Algebra 1 appeared first on Maneuvering the Middle.

]]>
Getting Started with Algebra Tiles https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/getting-started-with-algebra-tiles/ Mon, 17 Feb 2020 19:51:25 +0000 https://mtmmigration.flywheelsites.com/?p=7662 The more concrete we can make algebra, the better students will understand abstract concepts. Algebra tiles provide students a hands-on approach to learning algebraic thinking and concepts of algebra. If you are brand new to algebra tiles, these pointers will help get you started. 1. Make a Plan for Managing Algebra Tiles Routines and procedures […]

The post Getting Started with Algebra Tiles appeared first on Maneuvering the Middle.

]]>
The more concrete we can make algebra, the better students will understand abstract concepts. Algebra tiles provide students a hands-on approach to learning algebraic thinking and concepts of algebra. If you are brand new to algebra tiles, these pointers will help get you started.

Learn how to implement algebra tiles in your algebra, high school, or middle school classroom. Download your free Getting Started with Algebra Tiles Guide! | maneuveringthemiddle.com

1. Make a Plan for Managing Algebra Tiles

Routines and procedures are king! Algebra tiles are tiny pieces of plastic that are bound to end up on the floor or mixed with other sets, even with the most well-intentioned students. These series of questions will help you prepare answers and procedures for your students as you set the stage for managing algebra tiles.

  • What is the procedure for grabbing a new set of algebra tiles? Can I use them without permission or do I need to ask first?
  • Where do I get them from? Do I get them for my whole table? Can my set be mixed up with others? 
  • When can I use them? Can I use them for homework? Can I take a set home?
  • What are the consequences for using the tiles inappropriately, leaving them on the floor, and/or throwing them in the air?
  • When do I clean up? Where do I return them? 

By thinking through these questions and explicitly instructing your students, you will be much more likely to experience success!  Your future self will thank you. 

2. Get Familiar with How to Use THEM

If you are like me, you didn’t learn math concepts with algebra tiles when you were in school, and might have taught for several years before giving them a try. Before implementing them with students, familiarize yourself with them. Play with them on your own.  Without a pencil or paper, solve problems from your curriculum using only the manipulative. 

Whenever I needed to practice teaching a lesson I wasn’t confident in, I would pop into my coworker’s classroom and ask if I could explain the concept to her. My coworker was a self proclaimed “not a math person,” and would ask excellent questions that helped me clarify my lesson and prepare for student misconceptions. 

Download our Algebra Tiles Starter Guide to see how you can use them to teach simplifying expressions, distributive property, solving linear equations, adding and subtracting polynomials, multiplying and dividing polynomials, and factoring polynomials. 

3. Don’t Just Use THEM for One Day

I love manipulatives, but they can be hard to manage on a daily basis.  Sometimes, I found that I would introduce a topic with a manipulative, check the “used manipulatives” box, and then wonder why it wasn’t as beneficial as I had hoped. While I had good intentions, I wasn’t serving the students who could benefit from more concrete learning and practice on a more regular basis.

The purpose of using tiles (or any manipulative) is that it allows for conceptual math to become concrete. If you are not familiar with the concrete representational abstract sequence, we wrote a blog post about it here.

Essentially, in the case of solving equations, the concrete representational abstract sequence would look like this:

  • Use the tiles (concrete) to build their conceptual understanding
  • Draw the tiles (representational) to show the process of solving an equation
  • Solve an equation (abstract)

While some students might love using algebra tiles and want to continue using them indefinitely, there will be problems where they are not the best choice (example: rational numbers). However, if algebra tiles support the students’ processing of the problem, then I think students should be able to use them whenever they would like. Allow tiles to be a method for solving at any point in the unit or school year.

Are algebra tiles new to you? Do you have them in your math closet but don’t see the value in using them? Do you need a few examples of how to use them?  We have you covered!

Our Getting Started with Algebra Tiles Guide is going to walk you through the process step-by-step with the different ways you can use algebra tiles along with some of the language you can use with your students. 

Learn how to implement algebra tiles in your algebra, high school, or middle school classroom. Download your free Getting Started with Algebra Tiles Guide! | maneuveringthemiddle.com

Interested in more about algebra tiles? Check out our post on how to solve equations using algebra tiles. 

UPDATE: ALGEBRA I DIGITAL ACTIVITIES ARE NOW AVAILABLE!Algebra 1 Digital Activity Cover

Learn how to implement algebra tiles in your algebra, high school, or middle school classroom. Download your free Getting Started with Algebra Tiles Guide! | maneuveringthemiddle.com

The post Getting Started with Algebra Tiles appeared first on Maneuvering the Middle.

]]>
6 Instructional Strategies to Try in Algebra 1 https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/6-instructional-strategies-to-try-in-algebra-1/ Sat, 15 Feb 2020 12:05:23 +0000 https://mtmmigration.flywheelsites.com/?p=7427 When I started teaching high school, I taught how I was primarily taught: lecturing followed by time to work on homework.  However, my students were off task and not mastering concepts like I had hoped. After discussing this problem with my assistant principal, she encouraged me to channel my previous middle school experience and engage […]

The post 6 Instructional Strategies to Try in Algebra 1 appeared first on Maneuvering the Middle.

]]>
When I started teaching high school, I taught how I was primarily taught: lecturing followed by time to work on homework.  However, my students were off task and not mastering concepts like I had hoped. After discussing this problem with my assistant principal, she encouraged me to channel my previous middle school experience and engage high school students in similar ways. Students want to have fun regardless of age.  Some of my favorite high school instructional strategies are below. 

If your algebra students are acting a little bored, try spicing things up with these 6 instructional strategies. Some are complex but some you could implement tomorrow. Check out the blog post for more details. | maneuveringthemiddle.com

1. Flipped Classroom Model

I relied on the flipped classroom model in my remediation Algebra 1 class. It allowed me to pull small groups while the other students completed assignments on Khan Academy. Many teachers use screencasts to teach individual lessons and post assignments on Google Classroom, Pear Deck, Nearpod, or Canvas.  This instructional strategy is great because students can work at their own pace, rewind lessons, and receive immediate feedback.

2. Head-to-Head Challenges

In middle school, I relied on head-to-head challenges for students to internalize multiplication facts. In high school, I used the same strategy for students to internalize squaring and cubing numbers, square roots, cubed roots, and logs. Students would beg to play head-to-head challenges, which made it a handy instructional strategy to use in my classroom.

(Basic premise — students form two lines facing you.  You ask a math fact, the student who responds correctly and the quickest goes to the back of the line for another turn. The student who loses, sits down. Last person standing wins.)

UPDATE: ALGEBRA I DIGITAL ACTIVITIES ARE NOW AVAILABLE!Algebra 1 Digital Activity Cover

3. The Jigsaw Method

I thought Jigsaws were just for English and Social Studies. Turns out, Jigsaws are great for math too.  I used them on review days, breaking students into groups based on the number of concepts I taught in a unit. Each student became an expert and reviewed their skill with other students. To learn how to implement the Jigsaw Method, watch this video.

4. Experiment – 3 ACT Lessons

Who said experiments were just for Science? I tried this stacking cups activity from Math=Love (adapted from Dan Meyer) with my Algebra 1 students. While it felt like craziness at times, it was hands on and brought the math to life. I posed the question, “How many cups tall am I?” and put students to work using actual cups. Ultimately, I led the students to solve the problem with a linear equation.

Here are some other experiments:

If you haven’t checked out this Ted Talk by Dan Meyer, I highly recommend it.

5. Interactive Notebook Activities

Interactive notebooks are not just for elementary and middle school. I used “foldables” whenever I had a vocabulary rich lesson – graphing quadratics is a great example with vertex, axis of symmetry, zeros, minimum, maximum, domain, and range.  Students’ faces light up when colored paper is involved, and I never see my girls quite as happy as when they get to use their 20 flair pens. My favorite, complicated foldable. If you are interested in learning more about foldables, I would encourage you to check out this book.

6. Twist on Think-Pair-Share

I often fall into the rut of relying on raised hands to answer my questions. Think-Pair-Share is an easy remedy, but to spice things up, I would make it a competition. Each table group’s individual chairs were labeled 1, 2, 3, or 4. After students shared with their table, I called out a number. The student in that spot who stood up the fastest would share their answer. To combat students who deliberately stand slowly, we would have secret slow rounds, where the slowest person was called on.

What games, activities, or instructional strategies do your students enjoy? 

If your algebra students are acting a little bored, try spicing things up with these 6 instructional strategies. Some are complex but some you could implement tomorrow. Check out the blog post for more details. | maneuveringthemiddle.com

The post 6 Instructional Strategies to Try in Algebra 1 appeared first on Maneuvering the Middle.

]]>
Making Algebra Relevant https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/making-algebra-relevant/ https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/making-algebra-relevant/#comments Sat, 18 Jan 2020 12:30:38 +0000 https://mtmmigration.flywheelsites.com/?p=6992 In my years of teaching, I had the opportunity to teach Algebra 1 as an on-level course for 9th grade freshman and as a pre-AP course to 8th grade students.  While the two ages and settings (middle school vs. high school) differed, the content remained much the same. As a math teacher, Algebra 1 is […]

The post Making Algebra Relevant appeared first on Maneuvering the Middle.

]]>
In my years of teaching, I had the opportunity to teach Algebra 1 as an on-level course for 9th grade freshman and as a pre-AP course to 8th grade students.  While the two ages and settings (middle school vs. high school) differed, the content remained much the same. As a math teacher, Algebra 1 is the definition of fun!  For me, all of the pieces come together, and you have the opportunity to see it “click” for your students. For some students, they can begin to see a disconnect between algebra and the “real world” — enter the question, “When are we going to use this?” 

They have a point.  Not everything that you learn in Algebra 1 is going to directly translate to your career — you may not graph systems to determine the solution, but you may be comparing two different services and want to know which one is a better value.  Algebra 1 does teach you how to reason, how to think abstractly, and how to apply problem solving skills. So, how can we as teachers go about making algebra relevant?

I also want to note that often Algebra 1 is not the gateway subject; it’s the gatekeeper.  Future success in math (and arguably the rest of a student’s education) is reliant on success in the foundation of algebra.  Statistics are not friendly to those who fail Algebra 1.  By making it more relevant and by showing the connections to the real world, students are more likely to be engaged and participatory and, thus, are more likely to be successful!

Struggling with students asking "when are we ever going to use this?" Here are 4 Ideas for Making Algebra Relevant to Students | maneuveringthemiddle.com

1. Make Connections to the Real World

We’ve all seen this meme before.  Real-world math problems can be a little silly.  I personally believe that the sillier it is, the better.  (Click to see how I liked to handle funny word problems in my classroom.)

However, when we can connect using algebra to solve interesting, REAL real-world problems that are happening right now, we engage students who wouldn’t otherwise be engaged.  This is a great website with different and interesting problems for students to consider. They are sorted by grade level, and I found myself clicking each one just out of sheer interest for the topic (not the math!).

Here are just a few of the examples — 

Struggling with students asking "when are we ever going to use this?" Here are 4 Ideas for Making Algebra Relevant to Students | maneuveringthemiddle.com

2. Tailor curriculum to students’ interests

This article is fascinating. Essentially, studies show that students are more successful in math when the curriculum factors in their personal interest. 

“In the study, half of the students chose one of several categories that interested them — things like music, movies, sports, social media — and were given an algebra curriculum based on those topics.  The other half received no interest-based personalization… Walkington found that students who had received interest-based personalization mastered concepts faster.” 

Later in the study, she removed the interest-based personalization to see if the concepts were retained over time.

“‘Students that had previously received personalization, even though it was gone, were doing better on these more difficult problems as well,’ said Walkington.”

And for the students who were already struggling with algebra? Making algebra relevant will serve your struggling students the most.

“‘We picked out the students who seemed to be struggling the most in Algebra I, and we found that for this sub-group of students that were way behind, the personalization was more effective,’ Walkington said.”

UPDATE: ALGEBRA I DIGITAL ACTIVITIES ARE NOW AVAILABLE!Algebra 1 Digital Activity Cover

3. Incorporate Project-Based Learning

When students engage in a process to solve a real-world problem or to answer a complex question, they are taking ownership of their learning.  Project-based learning supports my last two points, but more than that, it makes the topic’s relevance more tangible than the typical worksheet.  Organizing information, solving a problem, and presenting a solution to peers are things that many students will need to be able to do in the real world, even if they don’t involve math.

4. Focus on the thinking, not just the process

Conceptual learning vs. procedural learning: For too long I focused on communicating what steps to take solving problems rather than having students explore what steps to take and WHY those steps are taken.  Let’s take solving systems of equations. There can be MANY steps to solve a systems problem by graphing, elimination, or substitution, and MANY students will solve these problems without really understanding what these types of problems represent.  If students do not understand that the purpose of a systems problem is to find the break-even point in two situations, then there was a missed opportunity to connect algebra’s relevance to their lives.

Struggling with students asking "when are we ever going to use this?" Here are 4 Ideas for Making Algebra Relevant to Students | maneuveringthemiddle.com

What are some of the ways you make algebra or math relevant in your classroom? 

The post Making Algebra Relevant appeared first on Maneuvering the Middle.

]]>
https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/making-algebra-relevant/feed/ 3
Digital Activities in the Math Classroom https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/digital-activities-in-the-math-classroom/ https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/digital-activities-in-the-math-classroom/#comments Sat, 19 Oct 2019 23:00:13 +0000 https://mtmmigration.flywheelsites.com/?p=6626 Update 5/13/2020: Since remote learning has taken effect, our digital activities have been wildly popular to support teachers as well as students. Here are a few things teachers have said about using our digital activities: “This resource was wonderful for distance learning! The students found it easy to use and I had a great turn-in […]

The post Digital Activities in the Math Classroom appeared first on Maneuvering the Middle.

]]>
Update 5/13/2020: Since remote learning has taken effect, our digital activities have been wildly popular to support teachers as well as students. Here are a few things teachers have said about using our digital activities:

“This resource was wonderful for distance learning! The students found it easy to use and I had a great turn-in rate! Thank you!” — Cynthia M.

“Total lifesaver during this time of distance learning. Bright, colorful. Easy to use both for students and the teacher. Love that it includes both activities and exit tickets.”

“This resource helped me provide aligned practice for my students. I used it for distance learning this year, but plan on using it in the classroom next year. It is easy to use in Google Classroom and I love being able to give my students feedback slide by slide.” –Kasandra C.

These interactive slides are more engaging than traditional worksheets and can be done completely online. No printing, uploading, or emailing necessary! And you can break up the activities to cover multiple online lessons which gives you less to plan. These activities can supplement any virtual lesson.


We don’t jump on the blog very often to talk specifically about Maneuvering the Middle curriculum.  When we do, it is because we created something that has been requested by teachers all over the country! 

Let’s hear it for Math Digital Activities!  You might have seen our post on some ideas for going paperless here, but we have spent the last few months creating our own resources for those who are going more digital. 

WHAT ARE PAPERLESS ACTIVITIES?

Paperless activities are a supplemental digital resource supported by Google Classroom™.  You will be able to engage students with interactive slides.  Each set includes 16 total slides that will support the practice of four related but different skills.  Students will enjoy dragging and matching, as well as using the typing and shape tools. You will love that you don’t have to make a visit to the copy room.  

Digital activities are a great way to engage students! Read about our new resource and how to use them in your math classroom. | maneuveringthemiddle.com

What technology do I need to facilitate them?

You and your students will need access to Google Slides™ and Google Forms™. If you have Google Classroom™, then it will be easier to share and schedule the files. We have included tutorial videos to help you get started.

“I am so ALL IN for these digital resources!!  …this was not only a great way to practice and assess a math skill, it was also great Google Classroom practice,” said one teacher.

And for anyone new to using Google Classroom, this teacher wrote, “I’m just getting started using Google Classroom.  This was a great item for a newbie!”

Digital activities are a great way to engage students! Read about our new resource and how to use them in your math classroom. | maneuveringthemiddle.com

How should I use them in class?

Like any resource, it is up to you how you can execute their use in your classroom. Here are some ideas as a jumping-off point. 

Supplemental resources:

These digital activities can supplement your daily curriculum.  Provide these to students when they need a little extra practice with a concept or when you need something to offer during centers or tutoring.

If you have any students who finish their work super quickly, then the digital activities can serve as their extension.  

Because these activities are organized into units that are aligned with the CCSS Maneuvering the Middle curriculum, you could use them as a test review resource. 

Retakes and missing work:

I often hear teachers asking how they should manage retakes and/or missing work.  You could assign these math digital activities as a replacement to whatever paperwork they did not master or did not turn in.  This would prevent you from keeping up with hundreds of pieces of paper and from students losing yet another piece of paper.

Flipped classroom model:

One teacher shared, “These are very well-done, and I’m excited to use them in my classroom.  I run a flipped classroom (my lessons are done on video, and students watch them as homework), so students can use these activities as classwork while I’m there to guide them.”

Incorporating technology:

It can be challenging to incorporate technology in a way that is meaningful, so we have tried to provide an easy entry point for you and your students.

Sick day:

Another teacher shared, “This is AMAZING!  I returned from being out with sick kids yesterday and needed something to help my students review for a test later this week.  I had used Google classroom one time, but I was able to quickly get it set up and running for class today. My students LOVED these activities and are already begging for more! :)” 

You could offer these digital activities as practice work for when you are out on a sick day* or for the day when you return (since you were out, you couldn’t make copies). 

*Use your discretion when assigning work on computers when students have a substitute

How do you grade THE Digital MATH ACTIVITIES?

Great question!  This is one of the most frequently asked questions that we receive.  These were designed to be a form of practice — so I would first start by asking the question, “What is the purpose in grading them?”

We have included two exit ticket questions for each topic so that you can assess how students are doing and have them apply their practice.  These are made with Google Forms, so it auto-grades! 

If you are dying to grade the actual activities, then you can always have students share the slide deck back with you or use the “turn it in” feature with Google Classroom.

Digital activities are a great way to engage students! Read about our new resource and how to use them in your math classroom. | maneuveringthemiddle.com

ARE THESE A GOOD FIT FOR ME?

We always want you to find the best fit for you and your students and we recognize that everyone has different needs.  We went ahead and created a video with more details about how the digital activities work and ideas for use so that you can decide for yourself.  This video also answers many frequently asked questions.

Shop Digital Activities BY SKILLS for Grades 6-8

SHOP DIGITAL ACTIVITIES BY GRADE LEVEL BUNDLE

UPDATE: ALGEBRA I DIGITAL ACTIVITIES ARE NOW AVAILABLE!

Digital activities are a great way to engage students! Read about our new resource and how to use them in your math classroom. | maneuveringthemiddle.com

The post Digital Activities in the Math Classroom appeared first on Maneuvering the Middle.

]]>
https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/digital-activities-in-the-math-classroom/feed/ 2
4 Ways to Use Nearpod in the Classroom https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/4-ways-to-use-nearpod-in-the-classroom/ https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/4-ways-to-use-nearpod-in-the-classroom/#comments Fri, 14 Jun 2019 13:41:36 +0000 https://mtmmigration.flywheelsites.com/?p=5809 As teachers, we want to meet all of our students’ needs. But in a classroom of 30 or more students, it can feel overwhelming. EdTech tools like Nearpod make meeting your students’ needs a little bit easier. Not only is the website easy to use, but creating lessons is simple, and there are many built-in […]

The post 4 Ways to Use Nearpod in the Classroom appeared first on Maneuvering the Middle.

]]>
As teachers, we want to meet all of our students’ needs. But in a classroom of 30 or more students, it can feel overwhelming. EdTech tools like Nearpod make meeting your students’ needs a little bit easier. Not only is the website easy to use, but creating lessons is simple, and there are many built-in tools available within Nearpod to use to differentiate instruction in your classroom. Today, I am sharing 4 ways to use Nearpod in your classroom!

Teachers want to meet all students’ needs, but with many students, it can be overwhelming. Nearpod make meeting your students’ needs doable! | maneuveringthemiddle.com

1. Interactive Lessons

One of Nearpod’s best features is the interactive lessons. You can use pre-existing lessons that you can upload to Nearpod, or you can create lessons within the web browser. If you want to ask a question for the students to respond to, then embed one into the slides! Students are drawn into the lesson by participating on their own device with the lesson on their screen. Some of the interactive features include:

1. Open-Ended Questions 
2. Matching Pairs
3. Quiz
4. Draw It
5. Collaborate
6. Poll
7. Fill in the Blank
8. Memory Test

Teachers want to meet all students’ needs, but with many students, it can be overwhelming. Nearpod make meeting your students’ needs doable! | maneuveringthemiddle.com

These interactive slides allow you to check for understanding immediately during the lesson. One of my favorite features is the collaborate option. Students can share text and pictures with the class in real time. It would be a great tool when brainstorming or introducing a topic. You can also embed websites directly into your presentation! If you are teaching students how to research, or if you want them to complete a reflection on another website, then you can have them go directly to it from the Nearpod slide. You can also embed YouTube videos, PDFs, images, Twitter feeds, virtual field trips, and more!

Teachers want to meet all students’ needs, but with many students, it can be overwhelming. Nearpod make meeting your students’ needs doable! | maneuveringthemiddle.com

2. STUDENT PACED MODE

In your classroom, you may have a few gifted students who are ready to move on, some students who are on level, and some students who need reinforcement on a topic. How do you reach all of their needs and different educational levels? Nearpod has the option to present the lesson live or to turn each presentation on “student-paced” so students can work at their own pace, at home or in the classroom. This is a great tool to differentiate your instruction. Here are some ideas where student-paced mode can come in handy!

  1. Set up stations and have students work on different lessons, depending on their needs.
  2. Have students pair up and work together on student-paced mode, encouraging discussion and teamwork.
  3. Let students and parents work together at home. This keeps parents involved in the student’s learning and creates valuable discussion and reinforcement at home.
  4. Create a flipped classroom. Students need to preview the information before coming to class to allow greater time for discussion and hands-on practice in class.Teachers want to meet all students’ needs, but with many students, it can be overwhelming. Nearpod make meeting your students’ needs doable! | maneuveringthemiddle.com

3. Lessons and Virtual Field Trips

Nearpod has a vast collection of lessons and virtual field trips that are easily shared with your students. Looking for a lesson on linear functions? Desmos has created lessons within Nearpod that can be used in your classroom with a touch of a button! Need to show seniors a college tour? The virtual field trips are ready to go with interactive questions already embedded into the slides. Nearpod has collaborated with Flocabulary, Desmos, iCivics, Newsela, and others to create amazing resources and lessons!*

Teachers want to meet all students’ needs, but with many students, it can be overwhelming. Nearpod make meeting your students’ needs doable! | maneuveringthemiddle.com

*Some of these lessons cost money, but there are plenty of free ones available.

4. Student Insight and Data

As you are presenting your Nearpod lesson, you can immediately see student responses and get feedback. If you are presenting in Live Mode, one of the features allows you to highlight and share a student’s answer with everybody in the class. This would make for great classroom discussion. After you have presented a lesson, you can see your session in the Reports tab. This makes the data easy to break down and see exactly where your students are so you can meet all of their educational needs.

Teachers want to meet all students’ needs, but with many students, it can be overwhelming. Nearpod make meeting your students’ needs doable! | maneuveringthemiddle.com

Nearpod is a great resource to try out this summer and into the fall!  There are three different types of accounts with different features: free Silver, Gold, or Platinum. Have you used Nearpod?  I would love to hear how you use it in the classroom

If you are interested in more ways to use technology in your classroom, check out our posts on Pear Deck, Khan Academy, or check out all of our technology posts.

Samantha Cast has her Masters in Digital Learning and is a Texas History teacher.  As a digital enthusiast, she is always finding new ways to incorporate EdTech into her classroom.  You can find her on Twitter at @mrscast.

SHOP DIGITAL ACTIVITY BUNDLES

Teachers want to meet all students’ needs, but with many students, it can be overwhelming. Nearpod make meeting your students’ needs doable! | maneuveringthemiddle.com

https://pokiefilter.com

Why Brits Rate us Number 1 for Casino Reviews

Bonus and Free Spins expire 7 days after issue. Game weighting, game, country, currency, player restrictions and terms apply. Read Review. Claim test1.ru which countries can I use Neteller online casino deposits?masterclass best online slots according to the data Using Neteller at New Zealand Online Casinos. Neteller is one of the most popular payment methods used by players from New Zealand who enjoy accessing.These are considered to Neteller casino reviews well within industry standards. Full terms apply. For one thing, native apps tend to have a swifter interface optimised for your Neteller casino Australia and not https://pokiefilter.com casinos/neteller to use remote web Neteller casino Australia to access data. The bonuses for using Neteller at online casinos often persuade https://pokiefilter.com casinos/neteller that they are the best payment method though. Inform you in advance about possible Neteller fees, so you still have the opportunity to make payments in another online Neteller casino reviews with Neteller. NETeller, which is accepted in over countries, allows you to fund your account through a credit card or via your bank account.

Our Top Rated UK Online Casinos

Many football fans pokiefilter.com it as the former shirt sponsor of Premier League side Crystal Palace, but it is also a household name among casino players. Casino Lab. We try to highlight the sites that provide Neteller betting offers, but terms and conditions change frequently, so read through the list of accepted payment methods when claiming a welcome https://pokiefilter.com. Betting with Neteller is really convenient for anyone that loves Neteller casino reviews. Download as PDF Neteller casino reviews version.

Deposit with Neteller in online casinos

Go To. Playfortuna casino have Huge welcome offer for new players! Many casinos Pokiefilter.com not offer a bonus when making a Neteller deposit, as they want to prevent any bonus abuse. Https://pokiefilter.com does Https://pokiefilter.com casinos/neteller compare to other banking options? Betfair Rating: Inform you in advance about possible Neteller fees, so you still have the opportunity to make Neteller casino reviews in another online casino with Neteller. Play Now Read Review.

Cryptocurrency – A-Z Directory

BITCOIN CASINO FEATURES

Besides the rates. Interestingly, and ratings for btc in-and-out transactions made public and want to. Receive an important wager the platform is professional live.online slots Canada Join Bitcasino Today ☆ Play with 24/7 LIVE Dealers, Slots, Dice and Table Games ☆ Register Anonymously.All games are allowed except for Jackpot Bitcoin casino pro. We may Bitcoin casino pro compensation if you apply through our links. And if you roll a prime number, we’ll give you a bonus, and you can earn another bonus for logging in and spinning the faucet every day. Visit Oshi Casino now. Minimum Deposit: 0. Here, you get access to tailored offers and rewards as well as a dedicated VIP manager.

Search form

It, therefore, is imperative that you look beyond the bonus rates and games available and into the most important aspects of bitcoin casino online. No need to download, just Enter your Bitcoin address to start. Satoshi is a smallest fraction of a bitcoin. You can read our newcasinos-za review of the Bybit app before getting the bonus should you so wish. Visit Fortune Jack Now. Gambling information, articles,South African casino news and bonuses for poker and casino players. Highly versatile as it welcomes both newcasinos-za and crypto deposit and withdrawals Some of their games observe the provably fair gaming protocol.

On this Page:

These two sites are Coinbase. Miners ensure security and confirm Bitcoin transactions for you and many other interested parties. Have you interacted with any of these bitcoin casinos before? Newcasinos-za bonus is deposited on the following month after deposit. Any and all information and advice proffered is for informational and entertainment purposes NewCasinos-ZA.com – it is not legal advice. Bonus Bitcoin.

NewCasinos-NZ

Casinos Listed ➤ NEW CASINOS with NZD ✓ ➤ Welcome to newcasinos-nz.com! Find your perfect New Zealand casino! best roulette real money sites Do not miss out on the latest online casinos for Kiwis ⚡ Deposit in crypto or NZD via convenient banking ✓ See the roadmap to online gambling laws in New.Also, the latter may only be run by a society, not by individuals. Sports to bet on include soccer, american football, basketball and tennis, as well as sports more specific newcasinos-nz the area such a surfing. Player from certain countries are not allowed use bonuses due to regular bonus abuse, check the casino’s NewCasinos-NZ for the ever changing up to date list. Nevertheless, Kiwis should not see this limitation as a problem as there are many international online casinos who offer their services to players from New Zealand. Below are some of the organisations that are there to help you or your loved one.

Most registrations ask players to provide personal information before verifying their identity, choosing a deposit method and making their first deposit. The games must have low house edges and high payout percentages such as blackjack. Nevertheless, when choosing the most convenient online casino, we New Zealand casino be able to select among the best options. Player from certain countries are not allowed use bonuses due to regular bonus abuse, check the casino’s website for the ever changing up to date list. Once safety is verified, the New Zealand casino roulette sites in NZ can be rated by comparing games, bonuses, mobile appsand other such https://newcasinos-nz.com. Before I comment on the laws players are most interested in, first note that the bulk of New Zealand gambling law focuses entirely on operators. Take a look at how gambling developed both on and offline within New Zealand:.

The game-play at our recommended and trusted online casino guarantees security, player privacy and a platform where online gambling players can enjoy top-tier games in both free-play and real money mode. Take a look at how gambling developed both on and offline within New Zealand:. Most casinos have mobile apps Everyone loves the convenience of playing games and placing bets https://newcasinos-nz.com on the go. All public NewCasinos-NZ is expected to return a portion of profits to the community. In newcasinos-nz, the categories of gambling can be defined as follows:. While playing on your smartphone gives you the mobility that a desktop can simply not offer, you may notice that the mobile game catalogue is much smaller than the desktop one.

The post 4 Ways to Use Nearpod in the Classroom appeared first on Maneuvering the Middle.

]]>
https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/4-ways-to-use-nearpod-in-the-classroom/feed/ 2
GimKit: Up Your Student Engagement https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/gimkit-student-engagement/ Sat, 18 May 2019 18:00:40 +0000 https://mtmmigration.flywheelsites.com/?p=5763 Kahoot, Quizizz, Quizlet… Have you tried them all?  When the weather turns nicer and your students are dreaming of summertime, their attention starts to wane. Whew, it is hard to keep students engaged! It is the perfect time to introduce something new into your classroom. One of my favorite new games to play in class […]

The post GimKit: Up Your Student Engagement appeared first on Maneuvering the Middle.

]]>
Kahoot, Quizizz, Quizlet… Have you tried them all?  When the weather turns nicer and your students are dreaming of summertime, their attention starts to wane. Whew, it is hard to keep students engaged! It is the perfect time to introduce something new into your classroom. One of my favorite new games to play in class is Gimkit!

Gimkit was created by a high school student for students. Using multiple choice questions, students have to answer correctly to make money. With the money they make, they can spend it on power-ups and upgrades to make them the dominant player in the class.


GimKIt has generously offered readers a discount on the premium account. Please read to the end for more details. 


GIMKIT: UP YOUR STUDENT ENGAGEMENT

Gimkit is a fun, engaging way to spice up your review and keep students engaged to the very end! Ideas for how to incorporate Gimkit in your classroom! |maneuveringthemiddle.com

SETTING UP GIMKIT FOR YOUR CLASS

To get started with Gimkit, you will need to set up an account. There is a free version and a paid version.

Free account:

You have access to five free kits and all core features. Unlike other paid subscriptions, this is not a 14-day or 30-day free trial. You can access your five free kits at any time!

Premium account:

You have access to unlimited kits and all core features. You can choose to pay monthly or be billed annually, and they also have a bulk discount option for an entire campus.

To create a kit, you can choose to make one from scratch, or you can import from Quizlet or a CSV file. When you create a kit from scratch, you can upload an image to go along with your question.

If you don’t want to reinvent the wheel, Gimkit makes it very easy to import the questions and answers that are already in Quizlet. You can also search for Quizlets from other teachers and import a premade Quizlet! Once you have made your questions or imported from Quizlet or a CVS file, add a fun .gif for your title page, and your kit is created!

Gimkit is a fun, engaging way to spice up your review and keep students engaged to the very end! Ideas for how to incorporate Gimkit in your classroom! |maneuveringthemiddle.com

PLAYING GIMKIT

Students have to answer the questions correctly to earn “money.”  Each right answer equals $1 in their bank. As the students answer more and more questions, their money starts to accumulate.

They can spend their money in the shop on power ups and upgrades.  The upgrades help multiply their money at a faster rate, while the power ups can be used to slow down other players.

To be successful at this game, not only does the student need to answer the questions correctly, but they also need to multiply their money as quickly as possible.

Gimkit is a fun, engaging way to spice up your review and keep students engaged to the very end! Ideas for how to incorporate Gimkit in your classroom! |maneuveringthemiddle.com

VARIATIONS OF THE GAME

What I love about Gimkit is that you can set parameters to meet your needs.

  • If you only have 10 minutes to play?  No problem! Create a time limit on the game.
  • Have the class to work together!  Create a class goal to reach a certain amount of “money.”
  • Have the students compete against one another and race to make the most money!

Gimkit is a fun, engaging way to spice up your review and keep students engaged to the very end! Ideas for how to incorporate Gimkit in your classroom! |maneuveringthemiddle.com

FUN TIPS with Gimkit

  • You can give students money to start with so they can spend it at the shop right away. Or, you can have them earn every dollar they need!  I typically give the students $50 starting cash and watch those numbers grow as they gain upgrades and answer questions correctly.
  • Try starting the game with $1,000 cash.  It’s fun to see how high the students can get that number!  One of my students reached one million dollars after 15 minutes!
  • Play the game in Team Mode.  Students have to work together as a team to accumulate money.
  • Play with your students! They will love to see your name on the board as you earn and spend money.  It’s not as easy as you think to get first place!
  • Set up a class in Gimkit and assign it for homework.  Students will be able to study at home on their own time as many times as they need!

Gimkit is a fun, engaging way to spice up your review and keep students engaged to the very end! Ideas for how to incorporate Gimkit in your classroom! |maneuveringthemiddle.com

Instead of dreaming of summer, your students will love to play Gimkit!  Give it a try and turn your classroom into a fun game show review game!  

We reached out to Gimkit and they graciously offered a 10% discount on a premium account. In order to take advantage of the discount:

  1. Sign up for a free account
  2. Email hello@gimkit.com with the code MIDDLE in subject line
  3. Upgrade after discount has been applied

Samantha Cast has her masters in Digital Learning and is a Texas History teacher.  As a digital enthusiast, she is always finding new ways to incorporate Ed Tech into her classroom.  You can find her on Twitter at @mrscast.

SHOP DIGITAL ACTIVITY BUNDLES

Gimkit is a fun, engaging way to spice up your review and keep students engaged to the very end! Ideas for how to incorporate Gimkit in your classroom! |maneuveringthemiddle.com

 

Live Casino

Getting to Grips with Roulette

Online Roulette | Live Roulette. Online Roulette is at the forefront of online casino gaming in Europe. With the classic table game leading the pack, here at .live casinos south Africa BCLC – your home for legal gambling in BC! Sports betting, lottery tickets, online casino gaming, and more! Every lottery ticket that’s purchased helps.Casinos offer huge https://pokiefilter.com bonuses and amazing VIP incentives https://pokiefilter.com new players. Jackpot City is a virtual casino that is known for https://pokiefilter.com very high energy vibe. Some casinos will offer a restricted list of withdrawal methods compared to their Deposits list, so it’s worth doing some homework first. Already registered? One of the positives at Club S. The best roulette online casinos offer amazing roulette online Australia to real money players.

Why Play Casino Table Games Online

In La Partage, if you place an even-money bet and the ball lands on 0, roulette online Australia only lose half your original bet. Players should expect the same quality of experience on their phone as on their desktop with OnlineGambling. pokiefilter.com variety is drastically reduced. What difference does Pokiefilter.com extra zero slot make? If roulette online Australia player loses, they rapidly deplete their bankroll. Minimum Deposit .

Best online roulette sites for the UK 2021

What is the best bet in roulette online Australia Most online casinos will only have one or two roulette options for mobile, more than likely European. Https://pokiefilter.com, you certainly can. Our innovative gaming platform pokiefilter.com watertight security features and complete Pokiefilter.com of results, courtesy of the finest RNGs random https://pokiefilter.com generators. All our recommended casinos offer the online game of roulette for real money. To figure out what works for you, we recommend assessing your bankroll first. And payent for the freight was wired from a third party, they Pokiefilter.com a bonus that ensures that deposit goes a long way and helps them win big.

NewCasinos-IE.com

Are online casinos legal in the US?

Instantly play the best free online casino games -no downloads, installs, or traveling required! Play online for free at Arkadium today! paysafe casinos Instantly play the best free online casino games -no downloads, installs, or traveling required! Play online for free at Arkadium today!Can I NewCasinos-IE.com free games online? One of the most exciting features of this game is the Starburst Wilds, which appear on reels two, three or four, where they stay in place for up to three re-spins at NewCasinos-IE additional cost. Online casino Ireland Green is a mobile friendly casino and most of our games are available to play on smart phones. Originally developed by Australian software studio Big Time Gaming inMegaways slots feature an innovative random reel modifier that creates an incredible twist on traditional online slot games. The history of gambling in the USA is long and its status remains confusing thanks to numerous pieces of state and federal legislation that have been introduced over the years.

Best Games to Win Real Money

Before gambling with any online newcasinos-ie, do some background research first. The game offers exquisite graphics to complement another exciting theme. Featured 5th May pm 0. Not only that, but gamblers can still win real money playing casino games on mobile gambling NewCasinos-IE.com and sites. When this happens, the machine continues to spin for free.

100% Deposit Match Bonus up to £100

Starburst Starburst is a fast and colourful game https://newcasinos-ie.com five reels and ten pay lines. Variety Whether you want to play slots online or live dealer blackjackcheck which online casinos have the best selection of real money games. And with awesome features such as cascading reels, extra win lines and bonus features available to be found across our collection of games, MEGAWAYS Casino offers the most exciting Megaways slot machines for players to enjoy. Take the excitement of our collection of online slot machines with you wherever you are with our mobile app! All regulated casinos must segment player funds from the casino business funds. These NewCasinos-IE.com help increase your chances to win real cash online. The bonus feature with the Book of Dead is in the form of bonus spins.

newcasinos-ca.com

Play Free Online Casino Games

Casino State|While there has been an unprecedented explosion of legalized gambling in Canada – particularly in the form of casinos and electronic games – the.best bitcoin casinos in australia Get your exclusive welcome offer when you join Betway today. Experience pre-game and in-play sports betting markets, the latest casino games and more.Jackpot City 4. Why Royal Vegas is ranked 4 out of casinos:. You can even find specific mobile casino bonuses, so we will always be sure to highlight them. Super Gems 2 at 4StarsGames October 6, Power of Gods Egypt. LeoVegas 4. That said, there https://newcasinos-ca.com a big difference between having these two main game types and a full suite of roulette table variants.

Find Your Perfect Casino

When a new casino bonus is active, we add it to the list below, where you can easily compare casino reviews for best Canada casino promotions. All of these bonuses are readily available to our players. How did we manage to get a real following, which keeps on betting on Spinia? The withdrawal limits generally vary depending on the method you choose. What else have we got to say at this online casino Canada Diamond Newcasinos-ca Gertie’s Gambling Hall.

TOP SLOT GAMES

Until the s, Canada was considered to be an anti-gambling country, although once legal rights were granted to gambling activities newcasinos-ca its borders, this attitude was completely reversed and soon after lotteries and land-based casinos established. Wednesday Free Spins: This bonus will be appreciated by all of the slot game lovers! Wild Flower. River Cree Resort And Casino. Probably the most effective way of minimizing any possible damage from excessive gambling is by imposing limits. When we claim that we online casino Canada one of the best online casinos, we actually have a lot of facts to speak for it.

The post GimKit: Up Your Student Engagement appeared first on Maneuvering the Middle.

]]>
Tips for Managing Small Group Instruction https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/managing-small-group-instruction/ Wed, 23 Jan 2019 16:26:53 +0000 https://mtmmigration.flywheelsites.com/?p=4886 One of the biggest hindrances to pulling students into small groups is the big question of, “What are the other kids doing while I am working with my small group?”  About half of the questions I get about small group instruction revolve around the idea of how to keep students who are not at the […]

The post Tips for Managing Small Group Instruction appeared first on Maneuvering the Middle.

]]>
One of the biggest hindrances to pulling students into small groups is the big question of, “What are the other kids doing while I am working with my small group?”  About half of the questions I get about small group instruction revolve around the idea of how to keep students who are not at the small group table engaged and working.  Here are a few tips on managing small group instruction. 

TIPS FOR MANAGING SMALL GROUP INSTRUCTION

Tips and ideas for managing small group instruction to keep your students engaged while you are working with a small group!

We all know what happens when they aren’t engaged.  Students begin wandering around the room with off-task behavior, the room quickly becomes loud, and we begin redirecting students.  This means that the time at the small group table is less efficient and productive.

I think there are many factors that play into this situation.

  • The relationship you have with your students
  • The structure of your classroom
  • The number of students
  • The dynamics of the students in your class
  • The consistency in which you pull small groups and your students’ familiarity with the routine of working independently

So, I am going to say that the list above is something to consider when you are planning to use small groups.  Just like anything else in your classroom, setting a procedure will minimize the number of interruptions and distractions.  If you are getting started, then here are some questions to ponder and plan for:

  • What would you like students to do when they have a question?
  • How would you like students to move from groups?
  • What voice level are you comfortable with from students not at the small group table?
  • Where are the materials located that they need, and how would you like students to obtain them?

To minimize interruptions, I recommend providing students with work that is self-checking, accessible to all, and provide extension opportunities for students who will finish early.

Ideas for students who are not at the small group table

1.  Technology

There is a wide gamut of math programs that can be used from skill drills to more prescriptive programs.  While technology is an awesome tool, I would suggest trying to ensure that students are actually doing useful things.  I have seen way too many softwares that are either well below the level of the students or way too complicated.

Some apps to consider:

Maneuvering Math™ has digital activities using Google Slides and Google Forms. The digital activities are aligned with what students at the small group table are working on.

  2.  Number Sense

I have written about how to develop number sense and some strategies for incorporating number sense on the blog.  I think that any activity that supports number sense can be really powerful during this time.

  • Fraction, decimal, and percent matching cards
  • Matching multiple representation cards of tables, graphs, and equations
  • Utilizing fraction bars to practice equivalency
  • Math puzzles that incorporate integers
  3.  Math Games and Math Stations

The benefit to incorporating math games and math stations is that engagement is generally higher than a worksheet.  Students are more likely to participate and less likely to become frustrated and give up.

From task cards to cut-and-paste activities, there is generally a plethora of math games and stations to choose from.  

While this does seem to be “high-prep” (is that a thing?), it does lead to high engagement.  Yes, there is more cutting and planning. The good news is that they can be used throughout the year and even throughout the semester.  Once they are prepped, they are ready to go and can be utilized again and again.

I would start by incorporating one math game or math center and seeing how it goes.  You don’t have to go all out. Actually, I would recommend starting small and then growing your number of groups and repertoire of games and stations.    

  4.  Math Journal

Another great option is a math journal.  This journal can be reflective in nature while incorporating problem solving skills.  It is an awesome way to have open-ended questions where students are expected to use multiple strategies to demonstrate their understanding.

When we were brainstorming Maneuvering Math™, we knew that we needed to incorporate problem solving and number sense.  We decided that a math journal might be the best of both worlds. Our number sense journal can be utilized as a class number talk or in a more independent setting.  We planned for each page of the journal to have an accessible entry point so that students who struggle can get started and contribute. We then incorporated questions that build number sense and require out-of-the-box thinking skills.  These follow a similar format so that students can get into the routine of things. These are NOT timed but still practice math facts that are essential to middle school and beyond.

Click to find out more about Maneuvering Math™.

Maneuvering Math - a skill based math intervention program for grades 6-8 | maneuveringmath.com

What other things do your students do while you are pulling small groups?  What tips do you have for managing small group instruction? Please share all the ideas in the comments.

Tips and ideas for managing small group instruction to keep your students engaged while you are working with a small group!

 

The post Tips for Managing Small Group Instruction appeared first on Maneuvering the Middle.

]]>
Why Intervention Should be Skill Based https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/skill-based-math-intervention/ Sat, 05 Jan 2019 12:00:31 +0000 https://mtmmigration.flywheelsites.com/?p=4581 Over the past several months, I have been sharing quite a bit about best practices that surround the concept of math intervention.  We have discussed strategies for improving number sense, getting started, and what to do when your students are all on different pages.  Today, I want to discuss why I believe that a skill-based […]

The post Why Intervention Should be Skill Based appeared first on Maneuvering the Middle.

]]>
Over the past several months, I have been sharing quite a bit about best practices that surround the concept of math intervention.  We have discussed strategies for improving number sense, getting started, and what to do when your students are all on different pages.  Today, I want to discuss why I believe that a skill-based math intervention approach is the best one to take.

SKILL-BASED MATH INTERVENTION

Why you should use a skill-based math intervention program to fill in gaps and meet the needs of your students.  

When we set out to write our Maneuvering the Middle math curriculum, the first non-negotiable for us was that everything we wrote would be standards-based.  That means that we would use the standards (CCSS and TEKS) as the backbone for our resources. We would develop resources that met the depth and complexity of the standards.  

We did this because, as a teacher, it is important.  At the end of the year, there is a set of standards that the state says your students must master.  

When we began working on Maneuvering Math™, we knew that we couldn’t take the same approach.    

What is RTI?

If you are new to teaching or just need a little refresher, RTI (response to intervention) is a formal process in which a team (parents, teachers, campus staff, and the student) works toward finding the level of support needed for a student to succeed.  

There are three levels to the RTI process in which all students fall.  
  • Tier 1:  This is high-quality instruction in an on-level classroom; generally 85% of your student population will be in Tier 1.
  • Tier 2:  When a student is unsuccessful with Tier 1 instruction, there are additional supports that are put in place.  Generally about 10% of your student population will be in Tier 2
  • Tier 3:  When a student is unsuccessful with the supports from Tier 2, students are moved to tier 3.  Generally about 5% of your student population will be in Tier 3.

The level of support in each Tier is determined by the team – the goal is to provide the least amount of support necessary while allowing a student to be successful.  

Math intervention is targeted for students who are unsuccessful in a Tier 1 classroom.  These students need additional support in the form of extended time, explicit instruction, and small group instruction.  

Why a skill-based approach?

One of the reasons I so passionately believe in the skill-based approach is because of how math builds upon itself.  Students in 8th grade are using skills that they learned in 4th grade.

Take the standards:

  • CCSS 7.NS.3   Solve real-world and mathematical problems involving the four operations with rational numbers.
  • TEKS 7.3B  Apply and extend previous understandings of operations to solve problems using addition, subtraction, multiplication, and division of rational numbers

When you look at these standards, you see a huge list of things students should be able to do.  

  • Add rational numbers to solve problems
  • Subtract rational numbers to solve problems
  • Multiply rational numbers to solve problems
  • Divide rational numbers to solve problems

But what if a student is struggling?  

Where do you start?

If you are remediating the standard, then you are going to continue to work on those four concepts above, over and over.  But what if they really only struggle with applying integer operations to rational numbers? Or what if they only struggle with fractions?

A skill-based approach is the only way to systematically target the needed gaps in an efficient manner.  Not so sure? Check out this NCTM article.

What I like about a skill-based approach

I like to equate a skill-based approach to math intervention like visiting the doctor for a sick visit.  The doctor is going to ask you questions about how you are feeling (assessing the problem), they are going to use their knowledge and understanding of your symptoms to best diagnose the problem, and then they are going to create a personalized road to recovery.  

Math intervention can look a lot like this.  We get a group of students who have some gaps in their math content.  As the teacher, you know them well; you know their mistakes, their tendencies, and their motivations.  You use the data you are given to help personalize a plan.

A skill-based approach lends itself to filling in gaps and meeting the needs of your students.  

Click to find out more about Maneuvering Math™.

Maneuvering Math - a skill based math intervention program for grades 6-8 | maneuveringmath.com

Why you should use a skill-based math intervention program to fill in gaps and meet the needs of your students.  | maneuveringthemiddle.com

The post Why Intervention Should be Skill Based appeared first on Maneuvering the Middle.

]]>
5 Steps to Effective Small Group Instruction https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/5-steps-to-effective-small-group-instruction/ https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/5-steps-to-effective-small-group-instruction/#comments Sat, 15 Dec 2018 12:00:58 +0000 https://mtmmigration.flywheelsites.com/?p=4510 Anyone who has taught a day or two can tell you that it is a rare event that you might teach a new concept and 100% of your students master said concept.  I would say that 99.99% of the time, there is a student or a group of students who are not ready for mastery. […]

The post 5 Steps to Effective Small Group Instruction appeared first on Maneuvering the Middle.

]]>
Anyone who has taught a day or two can tell you that it is a rare event that you might teach a new concept and 100% of your students master said concept.  I would say that 99.99% of the time, there is a student or a group of students who are not ready for mastery. Potentially they have gaps in the skills needed to master the concept, or maybe they just need more time.  Today, I am sharing 5 steps to effective small group instruction. 

The best principal I ever worked for used to say that, “Everyone can learn: some just need more time.”  

While we do have on-level classes, and pre-AP classes, and intervention classes, we still have individual students in our classrooms with individual needs, and so we will all face the same question at one time or another.

What do we do when our students are not on the same level?

Small group instruction can seem complicated and like a lot of work. Read these 5 steps to simple and effective small group instruction.

5 steps to effective small group instruction

Oftentimes, there are large discrepancies.  Perhaps a 7th grader is lacking a foundational understanding of fractional concepts, so when it comes to multiplying and dividing fractions, they are lost.  More often than not, I hear that students are lacking number sense and basic number operations.

I would love to outline a simple yet powerful plan.

1. Quickly assess who is struggling

This can be as simple as an exit ticket or as formal as a pre-assessment.  You can use the data that you already have to determine who needs your support.

2. Pull a small group of students

Now that you know who needs your support (and also who could benefit from enrichment), you can create a small group of students who generally need the same level of support.  Obviously, this isn’t going to be perfect, but do the best you can.

3. Keep it quick

Remember that you want them to be doing the work.  Don’t try to reteach a lesson verbatim. Do a quick 1-2 minute review, and then begin scaffolding the skills, looking for misconceptions and stumbling blocks.  

4. Scaffold the skills

For example, with percent proportions it might look like this:

“Let’s quickly review the parts of a percent proportion” (while sketching on a dry erase board)

“Awesome!  So, if I say to find 25% of 50, what would your proportion look like?  Don’t solve it.”

I suggest using friendly numbers to minimize confusion and focus on the skills.

Practice a few more like that.

Practice the different variations of setting up the proportion.  Still no solving.

Give students an opportunity to set up the proportions on their own.  At this point, you have targeted the skill of setting up a percent proportion.  Jot down this skill and their mastery of it in any recording documentation you may keep.

[Depending on time and the number of groups you want to meet with, you might stop here and pick up the next time.]

“Now, let’s practice setting up percent proportions from a real-life situation.”

Give an example, and be sure that everyone can see and read the example.  I would recommend a task card-size example for each student to be able to read and mark (if laminated).  

“Read the question to yourself quietly.”

“Isabelle, will you please read it for our group?”

“What is happening in the problem?”

“What information do we know?”

“How can we take the information we know and apply it to a percent proportion?”

“Show me how you would set this up as a percent proportion, but don’t solve it.”

Check and individually correct any misconceptions.  Look for patterns. If a student is doing well, then give them another problem to try.  Let them move ahead.

At this point, you have targeted the skill of setting up a percent proportion in a real-life situation.  Jot down this skill and their mastery of it in any recording documentation you may keep.

[I would personally stop here for the sake of time and moving to another group.  I also believe that you have targeted the biggest misconception when solving percent problems: the set-up.]

Your students have felt successful.  They have worked on two specific skills.  They have not spent the entire time trying to do the multiplication and division required to solve.  Everyone is winning! You have built confidence in them. Your group was quick enough that “hopefully” only a few students got off task.  

5. Record and repeat

I mentioned making any required notes above, but in reality I do think it’s important to keep notes on your students and/or groups.  This is beneficial for many people:

  • You:  the more things you are not trying to remember in your head, the better
  • Your students:  you can better direct them, better advocate for them, and better communicate with parents and any team members about their progress

I have an entire post with ideas for documenting intervention (including a video), as well as a math intervention binder that you might find useful. I also have a Progress Monitoring freebie for you to grab if you need a way to record your students’ small group progress.

I would love to know your thoughts on effective small group instruction and how you facilitate it.  Please share your thoughts in the comments.

Click to find out more about Maneuvering Math™.

Maneuvering Math - a skill based math intervention program for grades 6-8 | maneuveringmath.com

Small group instruction can seem complicated and like a lot of work. Read these 5 steps to simple and effective small group instruction. | maneuveringthemiddle.com

The post 5 Steps to Effective Small Group Instruction appeared first on Maneuvering the Middle.

]]>
https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/5-steps-to-effective-small-group-instruction/feed/ 6
Using the Guided Math Framework in Math Intervention https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/guided-math-framework-in-math-intervention/ Sat, 24 Nov 2018 12:00:11 +0000 https://mtmmigration.flywheelsites.com/?p=4449 When we first started working on a resource for math intervention, I picked up #allthebooks.  I was quickly becoming Amazon’s favorite customer! Guided math: A framework for mathematics instruction, was the first one that I dug into.  I liked its very step-by-step approach to small groups and the various sample schedules and routines. Looking for more […]

The post Using the Guided Math Framework in Math Intervention appeared first on Maneuvering the Middle.

]]>
When we first started working on a resource for math intervention, I picked up #allthebooks.  I was quickly becoming Amazon’s favorite customer! Guided math: A framework for mathematics instruction, was the first one that I dug into.  I liked its very step-by-step approach to small groups and the various sample schedules and routines.


Looking for more ideas for math intervention?  Check out this page. 


UTILIZING THE GUIDED MATH FRAMEWORK IN MATH INTERVENTION

The guided math framework can work in both on-level math classes and math intervention classes. See a few thoughts on how to make it work for you! maneuveringthemiddle.com

What is guided math?

“Guided math instruction is a method of teaching in which teachers assess their students formally or informally, and then group them according to their proficiencies at a given skill.” (Guided Math Instruction, p. 21)

Guided math is not a curriculum or a strategy.  It is a framework in which the responsibility of the learning is shifted from the teacher to the student.  For more on that, read our post on the gradual release model. Guided math is one way to formally utilize the gradual release model.

It is made up of specific components that are intertwined to teach a concept.

What are the components of guided math?

Guided math: A framework for mathematics instruction, clearly states the various components.  

  • A classroom environment of numeracy
  • Morning math warm-ups
  • Whole-class instruction
  • Guided math instruction with small groups of students
  • Math workshop
  • Individual conferences
  • An ongoing system of assessment

This model is flexible so that teachers can best meet the needs of their individual students.  Students in small groups are able to focus on their specific understanding ask questions, and teachers are able to target their instruction while correcting misconceptions.

Does guided math work in middle school?

I would say yes, with some modifications.  These modifications will depend on the size and length of your class.  Will you be able to implement it with 100% fidelity as the book recommends?  I think that would be a greater challenge.

However, the basic understanding that we as teachers better meet the needs of our students by meeting with them in small groups is 100% applicable to the middle school classroom.  

Advantages of a small group

  • More focused instruction
  • Able to meet the needs of specific students
  • You can actually hear them verbalize their thought process.
  • You can encourage mathematical conversations and using appropriate math vocabulary.
  • You build the relationship quicker.
  • Introverted students are more likely to ask questions.
  • Students will not continue to make the same error over and over again.
  • You can correct a misconception quickly.

What are the challenges of meeting with a small group

  • The lack of time in the classroom
  • The work required to plan more differentiated lessons
  • The challenge of finding engaging activities for students to complete when they are not at the small group table
  • Setting up routines and procedures to allow for smooth transitions and few interruptions

What if I have a math intervention class?

A math intervention class might be the ideal place to incorporate small groups and parts of the guided math model. Students in the class already need differentiation and have gaps to fill, so this is a great solution!

Click to find out more about Maneuvering Math™.

Maneuvering Math - a skill based math intervention program for grades 6-8 | maneuveringmath.com

The guided math framework can work in both on-level math classes and math intervention classes. See a few thoughts on how to make it work for you! maneuveringthemiddle.com

References

Sammons, L. (2010). Guided math: A framework for mathematics instruction. Huntington Beach, CA: Shell Education.

The post Using the Guided Math Framework in Math Intervention appeared first on Maneuvering the Middle.

]]>
5 Strategies for Building Number Sense https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/strategies-for-building-number-sense/ Sat, 03 Nov 2018 11:00:53 +0000 https://mtmmigration.flywheelsites.com/?p=4197 Last week, I shared my love for the book Developing Numerical Fluency and broke down the idea of number sense.  This week, I wanted to share five strategies for building number sense in the middle school classroom.  Upon preparing for this blog post, I did quite a bit of research and was disappointed to see […]

The post 5 Strategies for Building Number Sense appeared first on Maneuvering the Middle.

]]>
Last week, I shared my love for the book Developing Numerical Fluency and broke down the idea of number sense.  This week, I wanted to share five strategies for building number sense in the middle school classroom.  Upon preparing for this blog post, I did quite a bit of research and was disappointed to see that the vast majority of books on numerical fluency are geared towards K-5 educators.  While I see the importance of a strong foundation, I do see the need for teachers to fill gaps and bring students up to the grade-level standards.


Looking for more math intervention ideas?  Check out this page.


5 Strategies for building Number sense in Middle School Math

Maneuvering Math - a skill based intervention program for grades 6-8

1.  Utilizing Fraction Bars

Fractional parts can be such a tough concept for kids.  They really need to “see” the pieces and understand how they work together.  I love this set of fraction bars because they are large and can be seen across the room.  Your math department needs to have a set of fraction bars, fraction circles, etc. so that each math class has one.  This will be impactful as students learn to visualize each problem and use the most efficient method of solving.

2.  Doubling and Halving

When students are able to quickly double and half a number, they are more successful with various operations and less likely to get bogged down in the details of the algorithm.  

For example, when a student knows that 1.75 can be doubled to 3.5 and then doubled again to become 7, they are more likely to see the relationship in the table and the constant of proportionality.  

When a table begins with an x-value of 2, they are more likely to find y when x=1 efficiently if they are able to halve the y-value.

3.  Visualizing ½

One-half is a huge benchmark value for middle school students.  Is the value greater than or less than ½? Is the value closer to ½ or 1?  By simply being able to answer those questions, often students are able to eliminate wrong answers and problem-solve using estimation and reasonableness.  

When given a number line are they able to identify ½ of the number line?  One-half of the two numbers given? Or even just see the number line in various parts?  If you can find ½, then you can also find ¼ and ¾.

4.  Incorporating Area Models

It wasn’t until I watched Jo Boaler’s video on number sense that I truly understood the value of the area model.  Sure, it makes sense in elementary school as an array, but it has so many applications in middle school!

  • multiplication of whole numbers
  • multiplication of fractions and decimals
  • area of a two-dimensional object
  • the distributive property

I love how the area model is fluid and open-ended with various correct answers.

5.  Utilizing Friendly Numbers

When students struggle, I really try to incorporate the use of friendly numbers.  I cannot tell you how many times I have seen a struggling student try to find 35% of $24.99.  Let’s go with 35% of $25…it is sooo close! I am sure I am not the only one who has seen students struggle with 3.14 as pi.  There is a time and a place for accuracy and precision, but when students are struggling, it is difficult to determine if they are struggling with finding the percent of a number or if they are getting lost in their math.  

Let me know what other strategies for building number sense that you have found useful in the comments below

Click to find out more about Maneuvering Math™.

Maneuvering Math - a skill based math intervention program for grades 6-8 | maneuveringmath.com

Are your students lacking number sense? 5 strategies for building number sense in middle school math | maneuveringthemiddle.com

The post 5 Strategies for Building Number Sense appeared first on Maneuvering the Middle.

]]>
Number Sense in Middle School https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/number-sense-in-middle-school/ Sat, 27 Oct 2018 13:00:09 +0000 https://mtmmigration.flywheelsites.com/?p=4165   “I struggle with finding activities to do with all levels of intervention in the classroom. For example, this year in 7th grade math, I had students who couldn’t do multi-digit addition and subtraction, while a few others were flying through it. I try to always review some 6th grade skills in the beginning and […]

The post Number Sense in Middle School appeared first on Maneuvering the Middle.

]]>
 

“I struggle with finding activities to do with all levels of intervention in the classroom. For example, this year in 7th grade math, I had students who couldn’t do multi-digit addition and subtraction, while a few others were flying through it. I try to always review some 6th grade skills in the beginning and then review and reteach 7th grade skills I’ve covered, but they haven’t mastered. It’s hard finding a good medium, and daily centers are hard to find without spending a TON of time and/or money.”


Developing number sense in middle school can be a struggle! What is numerical fluency? How can you incorporate number sense into grades 6-8?NUmber sense in middle school

Does this sound like you?  It surely sounded like me.

We have been doing quite a bit of research on number sense and numerical fluency, and I couldn’t help but share some of my learning with you.  I especially struggle with finding resources and research to support it in the middle school classroom.

I reference a book called Developing Numerical Fluency by Patsy Kanter and Steven Leinwand below.  This book is written with an emphasis on K-5 math content.   I want to share some excellent points that they make and then provide an application for middle school math content.

What is number sense?

Number sense, also more recently known as numerical fluency is the ability to use numbers in a fluid and flexible manner.  According to Kanter and Leinwand, “Fluency is not a simple idea.  Being fluent means that students are able to choose flexibly among methods and strategies to solve contextual and mathematical problems, they understand and are able to explain their approaches, and they are able to produce accurate answers efficiently.  Fluency builds from initial exploration and discussion of number concepts to using informal reasoning strategies based on meaning and properties of the operations.”  (Developing Numerical Fluency, p. ix)

I can really resonate with this concept of flexibility and use of strategies.  Have you ever had a student ask you a question and you see that they have gone through the motion of the problem, made a mistake, and their answer is out of this world unreasonable?  They are lacking number sense.

Likely you have a student who, when subtracting, tries to borrow when there isn’t a need to borrow.  

These students are moving through the procedures but don’t conceptually understand what they are doing.  This is called having a procedural understanding rather than a conceptual understanding.

Numerical fluency promotes conceptual understanding of numbers and how they relate to one another.  

What are the key understandings of numerical fluency?

In the book, Developing Numerical Fluency, Kanter and Leinwand share nine pivotal understandings.  I strongly encourage you to read the book, so I won’t share them here.  However, I will share my opinions on the key understandings for a middle school student.  

1.  All Quantities are Composed of Parts and Wholes

Can I get an Amen?  Fractional parts may be the most difficult concept for students who struggle with number sense.  The idea that something can be broken into parts, the parts can be added and subtracted, the parts can represent something greater than the whole, the parts can be compared, etc. — all of this is requires extremely abstract thinking.  

For example, “Why does ⅕ times 5 result in a number less than 5 but 5 divided by ⅕ result in a number greater than 5?”

2.  Acquiring the Language of Operations Before Learning Facts

By middle school, students have been exposed to math facts.  However, I was really intrigued by how the authors point out how students often jump to the math and lose the context of the problem.  This is why we see students who struggle with word problems. By emphasizing the process in which a student obtained the solution and why they chose the process, we are building a foundation of numerical fluency.

3.  The Concept of one-half

The book references multiplication by 2, 3, 5, and 10 as a pivotal understanding for K-5 students.  In middle school, I see this as the key understanding of multiplication by ½. Can a student quickly take ½ of a number?  Can they visualize where ½ is on the number line? Do they see that multiplying by ½ and dividing by 2 results in the same value?  Do they know that one-half of an even number is going to result in a whole number, but one-half of an odd number is not?

So they age-old question continues…

How do you build number sense?

First, let’s note that multiplication tables, straight rote memorization, and timed procedures do not build numerical fluency.  They may be one way to assess numerical fluency, but they do not build number sense.

“Numerical fluency develops over time as students engage in active thinking and doing.  They must strategize, reason, justify, and record and report on their thinking.” (Developing Numerical Fluency, p. 19)

Again, Developing Numerical Fluency shares six different processes that can be used to help build numerical fluency.  These strategies are likely ones you incorporate in your classroom. I think the key is ensuring that students are aware of all of the strategies and can utilize them in context.  We can model these strategies using think-alouds, during any direct instruction, during small group instruction, by asking questions that point to these strategies, and provide prompts to encourage students to utilize them in mathematical discourse.

  1. Contextualizing – integrating mathematics in a real-world context
  2. Constructing – utilizing manipulatives and hands-on materials to make connections
  3. Representing graphically or symbolically – sketching or drawing
  4. Visualizing – seeing the math in their brain
  5. Verbalizing – describe thought processes with mathematical vocabulary
  6. Justifying – answering the question of why

Why is number sense important?

As math teachers, we can go on and on and on about the importance of numerical fluency and a strong foundation.  However, I think it’s also important to articulate the real-life application of problem solving and critical thinking.  In an article last year, Dr. Keith Devlin shared the importance of number sense in the 21st century.

I would love to know your thoughts on number sense and how you build number fluency in your classroom.   I am working on a post for next week with various ideas and tips to integrate in your classroom.

Click to find out more about Maneuvering Math™.

Maneuvering Math - a skill based math intervention program for grades 6-8 | maneuveringmath.com

 

Developing number sense in middle school can be a struggle! What is numerical fluency? How can you incorporate number sense into grades 6-8? | maneuveringthemiddle.com

References

Kanter, P. F., & Leinwand, S. (2018). Developing numerical fluency: Making numbers, facts, and computation meaningful.

The post Number Sense in Middle School appeared first on Maneuvering the Middle.

]]>
The Gradual Release of Responsibility Model https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/the-gradual-release-of-responsibility-model/ Sat, 15 Sep 2018 17:56:37 +0000 https://mtmmigration.flywheelsites.com/?p=4102 You may already be familiar with the gradual release of responsibility model for teaching and learning: “I do, we do, you do it together, you do it alone.”  You may be incorporating it on your campus, in your classroom, or with your small group. Today, I want to share a little bit about what the […]

The post The Gradual Release of Responsibility Model appeared first on Maneuvering the Middle.

]]>
You may already be familiar with the gradual release of responsibility model for teaching and learning: “I do, we do, you do it together, you do it alone.”  You may be incorporating it on your campus, in your classroom, or with your small group. Today, I want to share a little bit about what the gradual release of responsibility model is, different activities that support it, how to implement it in a whole group structure, and how to implement it in a small group structure.


My son got a new puzzle for his birthday.  It was super complex for a four-year-old. There were 16 cubes, all with different pictures on each side, to make 6 different puzzles.  When he sat down to work on it, at first he was frustrated. He didn’t fully understand how to put the puzzle together and couldn’t seem to understand what parts of the puzzle to use.  Together, we sat down, and I modeled my thinking: “Maybe we should find the corners first.” Then, we went on to find the edges and talk through where they could go. We created a process that he slowly was able to think through on his own.  Aren’t our students like that? 


There are several differing theories on how much information to give up front and how much to let students explore and struggle with on their own.  I tend to be in the camp that says, “There is a great time and great content in which both can be applied.”

What is the gradual release of responsibility model?

The gradual release of responsibility model allows for students to take more and more ownership of the content. Here are some tips and ideas for how and when to implement it.

In brief, the gradual release of responsibility model is that in which over the progression of the lesson, the teacher becomes less and less involved and the student takes more and more ownership over the content.  I think this can be incredibly powerful in a math classroom and even more specifically when working with struggling students.

One of the biggest things to note is that this is not a formula with step 1, step 2, etc.  The overall concept is that the student takes more and more ownership over the content, and the teacher is less and less involved.  When designing the lesson, you might plan for students to explore the content together first and then share as a class, where you could summarize and demonstrate your thinking.  

I wanted to share a few different ideas that can be incorporated within each part of the teaching model.

“I Do”

This is also known as the focused instruction portion of the lesson.  In this section, you might see a model being presented or the teacher modeling their thinking with a think-aloud or a direct explanation.  

“We Do”

This is also known as guided practice or guided instruction.  In this section, you might hear the teacher facilitating questions and discussion, and you might see students answering questions and asking questions of each other.  This is a collaboration of everyone in the classroom.

“You Do It Together”

This is also known as “y’all do it” here in Texas, or collaborative learning.  In this section, you would see students working together, dialoguing, communicating their thinking, and problem solving.  As a teacher, we should try not to intervene too quickly. We are questioning students through their struggles and then allowing them to come to the solution.

Based on the conversations and dialogues that I have with teachers, I would venture to guess that this is the first step to “go” when we are rushed for time, running behind in the calendar planning, or have shorter class periods.  

I would propose that this is one of the most critical components of the gradual release model.

“You Do It”

This is also known as independent practice.  In this section, you might see students working independently in some form of practice (homework, worksheets, computer-based practice, etc).  This is an opportunity for students to see that they are capable and self sufficient, or that they are struggling and ask for help.  This is also a great time for teachers to be meeting with students and correcting any small misconceptions.  

Is the gradual release model always in whole group?

It doesn’t have to apply to only whole group settings.  You could do a bit of modeling and then move into small groups while students work collaboratively.  

You could allow students to work together on a new concept and work backwards with a more “You Do It Together, We Do It, I Do It” pacing.  

The students in your class and the content should help you to determine what components of the gradual release model can be utilized.  

Do you have a GT, Pre-AP, or Enrichment class? Then, it is likely you can allow your students to struggle together before you debrief the process as a class.  Is your content more of a review? Start with the “You do” as a pre-assessment and then plan your activities based on those results.

How can the gradual release model be incorporated into small groups?

If you have been reading for long, then you know that I am a huge fan of small group instruction.  You can accomplish so much, correct many misconceptions, provide specific feedback and encouragement, and build relationships with your students all within the context of a small group.  You can also incorporate the gradual release model.

1.  Model your thinking: Struggling students benefit tremendously from hearing how you are problem solving and thinking through the problem.

  • “When I see a problem like this, I ___.”
  • “I noticed that the fractions both have a denominator that _____.”
  • “I know that 4 is divisible by 2, so ____.”
  • “I see that the line goes through the origin, so that make me think ______.”

2.  Question students through the process: There is much power is questioning students rather than telling students.

  • “What do you notice about ______?”
  • “I notice that something isn’t working out right here; what do you see?”
  • “Is there another way to get to the same conclusion?”

3.  Work in groups at the small group table: Even at the small group table, you can incorporate collaboration.

  • Provide questioning prompts.
  • Teach students how to coach each other.
  • Have students check each other’s work before you look at it.
  • Have students work together on the same problem, taking turns on each step.

The gradual release of responsibility model can be flexible to meet the needs of your students and classrooms.  I would love to hear your thoughts in the comments below!

The gradual release of responsibility model allows for students to take more and more ownership of the content. Here are some tips and ideas for how and when to implement it. | maneuveringthemiddle.com

 

The post The Gradual Release of Responsibility Model appeared first on Maneuvering the Middle.

]]>
Math TEKS Resources for Middle School Teachers https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/math-teks-resources-for-middle-school-teachers/ Fri, 13 Jul 2018 11:00:31 +0000 https://mtmmigration.flywheelsites.com/?p=3947 Over the past two years, we have developed a math curriculum that is engaging, student-centered, easy to implement for teachers, and aligned to the TEKS! Hooray! As a Texas teacher, it can be difficult to find resources that truly meet the rigor and depth of our Texas Math Standards. One of the things that I […]

The post Math TEKS Resources for Middle School Teachers appeared first on Maneuvering the Middle.

]]>
Over the past two years, we have developed a math curriculum that is engaging, student-centered, easy to implement for teachers, and aligned to the TEKS! Hooray! As a Texas teacher, it can be difficult to find resources that truly meet the rigor and depth of our Texas Math Standards.

One of the things that I am passionate about is the alignment to the standards and alignment between the grade levels, which is why we created the unit overviews.  After many requests for the vertical alignment documents that are included in our units, I am happy to be able to deliver them to you. 

Be sure to grab our math TEKS resources by clicking the yellow box below.  

Math TEKS resources can be hard to find! Use our key concept vertical alignment and at-a-glance standards pages to ease your planning! | maneuveringthemiddle.com

MATH TEKS RESOURCES

AT-A-GLANCE

The At-a-Glance pages are a simple way to read and reference the standards.  This is not specific to the STAAR because we teach standards, not the test. I would totally suggest printing them on card stock or laminating them and adding them to your planning binder.  If you own our curriculum, then I am going to include these, as well.

KEY CONCEPT VERTICAL ALIGNMENT

Have you ever looked at a vertical alignment document and wanted to poke your eyes out?  The answer is likely yes! There are just soooo many standards between the different middle school grade levels; it gets tooo muddied.  However, I do think there is great value in knowing what your students are coming to you with and where they need to go.

Thus, we created our Key Concept Vertical Alignment.  We focused on the bigger, overarching themes and concepts and left the small details out.  The standards have been summarized, so if you want a more thorough review, then reference those At-a-Glance pages. 🙂

MANEUVERING THE MIDDLE STANDARDS-BASED CURRICULUM

If you like what you see and you or your school is looking for excellent TEKS-aligned resources, then I would love to invite you to learn more about All Access

Math TEKS resources can be hard to find! Use our key concept vertical alignment and at-a-glance standards pages to ease your planning! | maneuveringthemiddle.com

The post Math TEKS Resources for Middle School Teachers appeared first on Maneuvering the Middle.

]]>
Using Scholastic Magazines to Reach Reluctant Readers https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/reluctant-readers/ https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/reluctant-readers/#comments Fri, 15 Jun 2018 13:00:36 +0000 https://mtmmigration.flywheelsites.com/?p=3749 Last summer, Scholastic Magazines reached out and graciously offered to partner with the blog for the school year.  It was a unique opportunity to get an incredible resource in the hands of students, and we wanted to share about the experience. Teacher Takeaways from a Year with Scholastic By far, the biggest takeaway was my […]

The post Using Scholastic Magazines to Reach Reluctant Readers appeared first on Maneuvering the Middle.

]]>
Last summer, Scholastic Magazines reached out and graciously offered to partner with the blog for the school year.  It was a unique opportunity to get an incredible resource in the hands of students, and we wanted to share about the experience.

Teacher Takeaways from a Year with Scholastic

By far, the biggest takeaway was my ability to reach reluctant readers.

We have all had reluctant readers.  No matter the subject matter, these students are nervous to read aloud and if they’re not being monitored, will stare at the same page just hoping to “look” like they are reading.  But as adults we know the advantage, joy, and creativity that comes from loving to read.  So, when Scholastic offered to send our grade level team a classroom subscription (30 copies), the answer was a clear, “YES!”

We have all had reluctant readers.  No matter the subject matter, these students are nervous to read aloud and if they’re not being monitored, will stare at the same page just hoping to “look” like they are reading.

Using Scholastic Magazines to Reach Reluctant Readers

My middle schoolers loved the relevant articles and engaging topics.  From Junior Scholastic article titled You Are Being Watched (students read about how marketers track what consumers do online so they can create specific ads tailored to them) to Choices article Not Fit for Human Consumption (students learned about the dangers of synthetic drugs), students enjoyed reading full-color articles with interesting graphs, images, and puzzles.  The topics were relevant to preteens, and the reading level was a great fit for my classes!

Here are a few ways that my colleagues used the magazines in their classrooms to reach reluctant readers and as part of their lessons.


“I used an article from Junior Scholastic when teaching my End-of-Unit Writing Tasks about the right to bear arms. The students were able to successfully cite two major pieces of evidence in their papers taken from the article. You could tell the magazine gave them the confidence boost they needed to make their essays sound and appear stronger. I was very grateful to have such an interesting tool to share with my students.”

-7th Grade Writing Teacher


“Scholastic Magazines were a perfect solution during my school’s campus wide Drop Everything and Read time. Once a week for thirty minutes, students were expected to read. For reluctant readers, this was a very challenging time. Then, I started using Scholastic Choices magazines for the students who were pretending to read or who didn’t have a book. Those students became some of my most invested readers. They devoured the magazines and then had questions for me about the content. I loved how the teacher guide provided questions and discussion topics for the different articles.

I think the best part was that the Choices magazines addressed issues that were specific to their lives, which kept them invested in reading. I was thrilled to see students read for pleasure with so much enthusiasm.”

-6th Grade Math Teacher


Science World magazines were engaging for my students – they were so excited to receive new issues!  The articles sparked many interesting conversations, and I loved seeing students making connections between the current events featured in the articles and our classroom content.

-6th Grade Science Teacher


As the year went on, students became familiar with the structure of the magazines, learned from the colorful infographics, and became much more comfortable with non-fiction text.  In a day and age when many non-fiction sources are biased or are on topics that don’t appeal to a preteen, it was awesome to see students engaged (and learning) from a reliable source.

If you want more information on all that is included in a classroom subscription, then check out this post! 

We have all had reluctant readers.  No matter the subject matter, these students are nervous to read aloud and if they’re not being monitored, will stare at the same page just hoping to “look” like they are reading. | maneuveringthemiddle.com

We have all had reluctant readers.  No matter the subject matter, these students are nervous to read aloud and if they’re not being monitored, will stare at the same page just hoping to “look” like they are reading. | maneuveringthemiddle.com

 

The post Using Scholastic Magazines to Reach Reluctant Readers appeared first on Maneuvering the Middle.

]]>
https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/reluctant-readers/feed/ 2
How to Teach Part, Whole, and Percent https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/how-to-teach-part-whole-percent-problems/ https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/how-to-teach-part-whole-percent-problems/#comments Sat, 23 Dec 2017 15:43:47 +0000 https://mtmmigration.flywheelsites.com/?p=2833 When I begin to teach part, whole, and percent problems, I explain to my students that there is nothing that I teach in my class that I use more often in my real life.  Students reflect on where they see percents: the grocery store, sales and discounts, and their grades. 6.RP.A.3.C Find a percent of a […]

The post How to Teach Part, Whole, and Percent appeared first on Maneuvering the Middle.

]]>
When I begin to teach part, whole, and percent problems, I explain to my students that there is nothing that I teach in my class that I use more often in my real life.  Students reflect on where they see percents: the grocery store, sales and discounts, and their grades.

6.RP.A.3.C Find a percent of a quantity as a rate per 100 (e.g., 30% of a quantity means 30/100 times the quantity); solve problems involving finding the whole, given a part and the percent.

6.5(B) Solve real‐world problems to find the whole given a part and the percent, to find the part given the whole and the percent, and to find the percent given the part and the whole, including the use of concrete and pictorial models.

HOW TO TEACH PART, WHOLE, AND PERCENT PROBLEMS

Part, whole, and percent problems can be a problem for teachers to teach! Here are ideas for implementation and tips to help every student master the skill. | maneuveringthemiddle.com

FIRM FOUNDATION OF PROPORTIONS

Before I teach finding part, whole, and percent, students have already practiced and been tested on proportional relationships and unit rates. They are proficient at reading a word problem and setting up a proportion.  What I finally got correct this year is the importance of setting up the labels. I am not talking about writing part/whole; I am referring to describing what the part is in relation to describing the whole.  Example: number of girls/total students.  If students understand that the part is related to the percent by means of the label, then they will be so much more successful in setting up the percent proportion correctly and with more confidence.

Part, whole, and percent problems can be a problem for teachers to teach! Here are ideas for implementation and tips to help every student master the skill. | maneuveringthemiddle.com
SEQUENCE OF TEACHING THE SKILL

Since this is a TEKS readiness skill and a skill with heavy real-world application, I think that it is important to spend several days covering it. Here is an example of how I would sequence the skill over the course of a couple of days.

  • Day 1: Percent of a Quantity – Finding the Percent
  • Day 2: Percent of a Quantity – Finding the Part
  • Day 3: Percent of a Quantity – Finding the Whole
  • Day 4: Percent of a Quantity – Mixed

Once students are comfortable solving for each piece in isolation, they need to practice determining which piece they are solving for when the problem type is mixed up. Typically, I give students three problems that are very similar and ask them, “Are we solving for the part, for the whole, or for the percent?” Allow students to grapple with the three different problems and ask them how they know.  This really is key!  If a student can decipher what they are solving for and what the given information is, then it just becomes a multiplication and division problem.  Consider using my prefered problem solving model here.  

1. Mrs. Brack has just set up her Christmas tree.  50 percent of her ornaments are red.  If she has 30 ornaments, then how many are red?

2. Mrs. Brack is setting up her second Christmas tree.  Her tree consists of  30% red and 70% gold ornaments.  If there are 40 red ornaments, then how many ornaments are on the tree?

3. Mrs. Brack is setting up her third Christmas tree.  If there are 25 red ornaments and 35 gold ornaments, then what percent of ornaments are red?

IDEAS FOR STRUGGLING STUDENTS

I teach students to think of “out of 100” when they see the word percent in the word problem. Students are used to having at least three numbers and solving for an unknown fourth when solving proportion word problems.  This can be a bit of a slippery slope as they get older and the problems get more complex, or if there is a table involved.   

In addition, when they see 60%, they are to immediately write it as a fraction – 60 over 100.

Strip diagrams (or percent bars) play a pivotal role in demonstrating the relationship of the percent to the part and whole.  This conceptual understanding helps your visual learners especially and will also show students how you can use benchmark percents (25%, 50%, and 75%) to estimate the answer. 

Part, whole, and percent problems can be a problem for teachers to teach! Here are ideas for implementation and tips to help every student master the skill. | maneuveringthemiddle.com

Lastly, use the friendliest numbers you can when introducing the skill!

ANCHOR CHARTS IDEAS

The percent proportion is a helpful tool for students to reference.  I point to it often and I leave it up throughout the year since it is a skill I heavily spiral. In addition, an anchor chart that lists all of the factor pairs of 100 can really help students who struggle solving the proportion using a scale factor.

Part, whole, and percent problems can be a problem for teachers to teach! Here are ideas for implementation and tips to help every student master the skill. | maneuveringthemiddle.com

COMMON MISCONCEPTIONS

  • Students placing a percent number over another number besides 100
  • Unclear if solving for part or whole
  • Not fully answering the question; students find the percent but then do not go back and ensure that is what the question is asking for
  • Working with percents that are greater than 100 can sometimes throw students for a loop

Do you need resources for teaching percentages to your middle school students? Try All Access!

 

You can see tips on how to teach inequalities, proportional reasoning, ratios, and fractions/decimals/percents.  What are some ways you teach part, whole, percent?  What other middle school math concepts would you like for us to write about?

Part, whole, and percent problems can be a problem for teachers to teach! Here are ideas for implementation and tips to help every student master the skill. | maneuveringthemiddle.com

The post How to Teach Part, Whole, and Percent appeared first on Maneuvering the Middle.

]]>
https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/how-to-teach-part-whole-percent-problems/feed/ 4
Scholastic Magazines for Middle School https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/scholastic-magazines-for-middle-school/ https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/scholastic-magazines-for-middle-school/#comments Sat, 23 Sep 2017 11:52:57 +0000 https://mtmmigration.flywheelsites.com/?p=2692 Anyone who teaches middle schoolers is probably familiar with the question, “When are we going to use this?”  It’s something about being 12-years -old that produces this ever-growing need to know.  And we all know that good teaching practices include making real-world connections.  Even many of the standards add that phrase.  The truth of the […]

The post Scholastic Magazines for Middle School appeared first on Maneuvering the Middle.

]]>
Anyone who teaches middle schoolers is probably familiar with the question, “When are we going to use this?”  It’s something about being 12-years -old that produces this ever-growing need to know.  And we all know that good teaching practices include making real-world connections.  Even many of the standards add that phrase.  The truth of the matter is that sometimes those real-life connections can seem a bit contrived.  Thus, Scholastic Magazines for middle school make perfect sense!


Read more to find out how to enter to win a Scholastic Magazine classroom subscription to the magazine of your choice for the 2017/18 school year!   Update:  The winner is Nancy S.  Thanks so much for participating!


Scholastic Magazines for Middle School

Make real-world connections and utilize current events with Scholastic Magazines for middle school. | maneuveringthemiddle.com

This post is sponsored by Scholastic Magazines. When they reached out to partner for the school year, I was thrilled! All thoughts and opinions are my own.

At the end of the summer, Scholastic generously offered a full year magazine subscription to one of my readers.  It was incredible to see the interest in the classroom subscriptions, as well as to see how many readers have used the magazines in the past.  Many commented that students were engaged and enjoyed the real-world connection.  From firsthand experience, I have seen students read about current events and ask questions about what is going on in the news, which, for a 12-year-old, is pretty awesome!

To Which Content Areas Does This Apply?

I think most teachers are surprised to hear that Scholastic Magazines not only cover all content areas but that they also have resources for middle school.

Make real-world connections and utilize current events with Scholastic Magazines for middle school. | maneuveringthemiddle.com

Mrs. Brack allowed students to read the classroom magazines as an incentive to early finishers.

Scholastic Choices

There are two unique magazines that I can see having great benefit in middle school.  The first of these is Scholastic Choices, which is a health, social-emotional learning, and life skills magazine for teens.  Middle school students are facing more and more pressure, stress, and social situations that they are not necessarily well equipped to handle.

As teachers, we teach the whole student, not just the curriculum.  Oftentimes, this means addressing character – from treating others with kindness, to stepping away from situations, to managing time and responsibilities.

The Scholastic Choices magazine is a great way to introduce these hard topics in an empowering way.  I see this being beneficial in an advisory/homeroom period to provide a balance to academics.

Scholastic Action

My ELA counterparts would often struggle to find reading material for lower-level readers.  The text was either too young-looking or written at too high of a level, or it was just plain boring.  Scholastic Action is the second magazine that I think has a great benefit for middle school, and it is a great solution for engaging struggling readers.  This would be a great way to differentiate for English Language Learners, as well.

Print Features

When your Scholastic Magazines arrive on campus, they will be delivered straight to your classroom as a class set of magazines and a teacher’s guide.

Make real-world connections and utilize current events with Scholastic Magazines for middle school. | maneuveringthemiddle.com

The teacher’s guide provides alignment to standards, guiding questions, and even shows you the online resources that correspond with each article.  I love how Scholastic Scope provides a Lexile reading level, essential questions, and learning objectives.  Who doesn’t love a well-thought-out lesson that is ready to go?

Make real-world connections and utilize current events with Scholastic Magazines for middle school. | maneuveringthemiddle.com

Online Features

When I learned that Scholastic offers online features, I was super impressed!  It seems like a hidden gem that is a great toolbox from which to pull ideas and resources.

  • Back Issues – I love how the online resource provides backdated articles! It acts as a library of resources that are then organized by topic/standard.Make real-world connections and utilize current events with Scholastic Magazines for middle school. | maneuveringthemiddle.com
  • Videos – There are highly engaging videos that could act as a hook or even as a discussion starter.
  • Online Articles – If your classroom is 1:1, or if you are looking for ways to incorporate technology, then the articles are available in a digital format, where students can open the magazine view and see everything on their screen. The features even include annotations, like highlighting and adding notes.  I totally see this working as a whole-class discussion, as well!Make real-world connections and utilize current events with Scholastic Magazines for middle school. | maneuveringthemiddle.com
  • Skill Sheets – In the math library, there are quick one-page skill sheets that correspond with topics. I see this being a great resource for parents and students at home.

Ideas for Using Scholastic Magazines

1. Homeroom

I already talked about this a bit, but homeroom can be a struggle. Sometimes it is intended to be a study hall; sometimes it becomes just a time for students to socialize. More often than not, if you don’t have a plan for homeroom, then you are going to be up a creek by October.  Scholastic Magazines can provide an engaging alternative to homeroom.

2. Lesson Hooks

In math it can be difficult to find super relevant hooks/videos that show how the math that students are learning is applied later. I really love how Scholastic MATH has brought that to life.  In a recent issue, they discussed rate and speed of a zip line – talk about creative!

3. Informational Text

This week I was chatting with my friend Kristen about all the incredible things she is doing in her classroom. Because, when teachers get together, it’s inevitable.  One of the things she mentioned was her team’s desire to incorporate more and more non-fiction texts.  It can be challenging to find non-fiction texts that are on the right level and that are interesting.  I love that each issue provides students that opportunity to engage with non-fiction text.

Hopefully, this gave you a good idea of what to expect from a Scholastic Magazines subscription.  I would love to hear from those of you who have benefited from using them in your classroom.


Scholastic has generously offered another classroom subscription to one of our readers.  Simply comment below sharing an idea for how you might utilize the magazine in your classroom.  Update:  The winner is Nancy S.  Thanks so much for participating!   You can still sign up here to receive a free 30 day trial for the Choices magazine!

Make real-world connections and utilize current events with Scholastic Magazines for middle school. | maneuveringthemiddle.com

The post Scholastic Magazines for Middle School appeared first on Maneuvering the Middle.

]]>
https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/scholastic-magazines-for-middle-school/feed/ 52
Step-by-Step Vertical Alignment https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/vertical-alignment/ https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/vertical-alignment/#comments Sun, 10 Sep 2017 11:00:37 +0000 https://mtmmigration.flywheelsites.com/?p=2683 Today, I am breaking down vertical alignment and its importance in our curriculum.   STEP-BY-STEP VERTICAL ALIGNMENT VERTICAL ALIGNMENT FIRSTHAND It was 2008, almost every female student was reading Twilight, and I was beginning my second year of teaching and my first year in sixth grade.  I clearly remember thinking, “I should do a warm […]

The post Step-by-Step Vertical Alignment appeared first on Maneuvering the Middle.

]]>
Today, I am breaking down vertical alignment and its importance in our curriculum.  

STEP-BY-STEP VERTICAL ALIGNMENT

What does vertical alignment really mean? Breaking down the concept of vertical alignment and ideas for working together as a PLC to ensure your curriculum is aligned.

VERTICAL ALIGNMENT FIRSTHAND

It was 2008, almost every female student was reading Twilight, and I was beginning my second year of teaching and my first year in sixth grade.  I clearly remember thinking, “I should do a warm up to practice division so I can see where they are at.”  Well, what I thought would be a quick warm up turned into a great lesson for me in vertical alignment, when a student shared that the answer was “six remainder five.”  

What on earth?  Who uses remainders?  Are those even a real thing?  

Well, apparently eleven year-olds still use remainders.

You see, the year prior I had taught seventh grade, and students were required to multiply and divide decimals, so it only seemed natural that a student would know to add a decimal and zero in the event the quotient didn’t go in evenly.  My lack of experience with the curriculum led to a small detour in the lesson and a big learning moment for me.  

I had to understand where my students were when they left fifth grade.         

WHAT IS VERTICAL ALIGNMENT?

According to Dr. Jason Perez, “Vertical alignment is the process of organizing curriculum from one grade level or content area to the next.”

The standards are a great place to begin, though not flawless.  Vertical alignment includes combing through the standards and determining where a student is coming from and where they need to be at the end of the year.  This ensures that you are adequately prepared to introduce the concept with some sort of familiarity for the students and that you have taught the full extent of the standard.  

Additionally, I would suggest that it also includes a bit more discussion amongst your team and department.  How will you teach long division?  Will students be taught partial quotients the year prior?  Are you familiar with partial quotients so that you can connect that to the standard algorithm?  

In general, this helps with brain development when we can help students make those connections.

WHY IS VERTICAL ALIGNMENT IMPORTANT?

First, you are less likely to be caught off guard when your students are doing some strategy you aren’t familiar with or to end up in my warm up situation, where your plan has gone awry.  More importantly, though, your students are going to be more successful!  They are going to be prepared to move seamlessly (okay, maybe not seamless) from one grade level to the next.  There will be fewer gaps in the curriculum and students will be able to see how the content builds.  

I also think that the time and work required to vertically align the curriculum is valuable in team building and really working together as a PLC.  I think it opens up the doors for collaboration, which is good for students and teachers.  

IDEAS FOR VERTICALLY ALIGNING CURRICULUM

1.  Set aside a chunk of time

If your curriculum is lacking in this area or if you have a large department, then you really should expect this to take a while.  Do not attempt to accomplish this within a PLC.  I would suggest a half day to get started.  Some principals have professional development dollars to hire subs or perhaps you could use a staff development day to accomplish this.  

2.  Don’t start from square one

There are already great resources so that you are not starting from zero.  If you use Maneuvering the Middle Curriculum, there is a small vertical alignment component within each unit overview.  

This will give you a great starting point so that you can see the grouping of content.

 
3.  Attack each unit one at a time

Now that the standards have been grouped into like content or a unit, then this is where the fun comes in.  Discuss within collaboration what students are responsible for at that grade level.  A fun way to do this is to have each grade level summarize the content and then share out.  Use a timer to keep everyone on track and moving through the content.  

4.  Jot ideas down on chart paper

Next, you might consider placing a piece of chart paper for each unit with the standards around the room.  Using various colored markers teachers, can jot down the different ways they teach content.  This gives a very non-threatening way to share ideas, which can be discussed as time allows.  It keeps one person from dominating the conversation and keeps everyone on task.  A facilitator could then share out, and if clarification is needed, a specific team member could contribute more details.

5.  Build on it each year

Remember that this doesn’t have to be perfect helps everyone to feel accomplished and to take steps in the right direction without feeling overwhelmed.  

This process will not only improve the vertical alignment on your campus, but it will also provide a time to sharpen content knowledge in a collaborative environment.  #winning

How does your campus ensure your curriculum is vertically aligned?  What benefits do you see from vertical alignment?

What does vertical alignment really mean? Breaking down the concept of vertical alignment and ideas for working together as a PLC to ensure your curriculum is aligned. | maneuveringthemiddle.com

The post Step-by-Step Vertical Alignment appeared first on Maneuvering the Middle.

]]>
https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/vertical-alignment/feed/ 2
Donor’s Choose Ideas for Middle School https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/donors-choose-ideas-middle-school/ Sat, 12 Aug 2017 12:34:31 +0000 https://mtmmigration.flywheelsites.com/?p=2631 Occasionally, I will see in my personal Facebook page a post from a teacher sharing their Donor’s Choose project.  I love to see how creative teachers are with their requests and how they plan to use them in the classroom.  For those of you who are unfamiliar with Donor’s Choose it is essentially a crowd […]

The post Donor’s Choose Ideas for Middle School appeared first on Maneuvering the Middle.

]]>
Occasionally, I will see in my personal Facebook page a post from a teacher sharing their Donor’s Choose project.  I love to see how creative teachers are with their requests and how they plan to use them in the classroom.  For those of you who are unfamiliar with Donor’s Choose it is essentially a crowd funding website where people and companies can fund projects for a specific classroom.  Today, I am sharing 6 Donor’s Choose Ideas for Middle School.

6 Donor's choose ideas for middle school teachers - an awesome way to get resources for your classroom, as well as involving family, friends, and your community

DONOR’S CHOOSE IDEAS FOR MIDDLE SCHOOL

1. Scholastic Magazines

Scholastic magazines are the gift that keeps on giving!  You might be familiar with their book fairs or the incredible “trinkets” they come up with each year, but you might not know that Scholastic offers resources for middle school students, too!  Their Classroom Magazines are engaging, high-interest, and relevant for middle school students. Each magazine will be delivered to your classroom alongside teacher guides to help you integrate the content into your classroom.  They also provide online tools like videos that could be used as lesson hooks, texts with multiple reading levels (or the audio read-alouds version) and engaging review games.  I never taught ELA, but I totally see this as a huge win for differentiating.

6 Donor's choose ideas for middle school teachers - an awesome way to get resources for your classroom, as well as involving family, friends, and your community

I personally love how each content area has its own magazine!  I mean no more searching for math graphs or real-life application.  No more, “will I ever use this” questions.  #winning

These magazines are perfect for Donor’s Choose because they are a great price point and often can be matched with various codes.  I am also so excited because Scholastic is giving away one free classroom subscription to the magazine of your choice for the 2017/18 school year!  Go to my Facebook page to take part in the giveaway!

6 Donor's choose ideas for middle school teachers - an awesome way to get resources for your classroom, as well as involving family, friends, and your community

This post is sponsored by Scholastic Magazines.  When they reached out to partner for the school year, I was thrilled!  All thoughts and opinions are my own.

2. Classroom Library

When you first think about a classroom library, you might think about an English class.  But, what if every classroom had a library?  What if students could go from room to room and see a variety of books?  That would be awesome!

I will admit that I had a very modest library which consisted of some donated books.  In retrospect, I would love to have had a cozy corner with some popular books or magazines for students to read during tutorials, homeroom, or as an early finisher activity.  Donor’s Choose is a great way to make that cozy area happen.  From bookshelves on Amazon to physical books to book bins for organization, I think we can all agree that making reading accessible and interesting is a win-win.

3. Games

Board games might be a lost art!  Middle schoolers love technology so much that it is possible that they have lost the art of basic problem solving and competition while playing board games.  Let’s bring back the board games!

Teamwork, collaboration, problem solving, and fun are all benefits of board games.  I used “problem solving days” as class rewards, thanks to Mrs. Bennet’s awesome idea!  A few favorites and easy to finish within a class period include:

  • Hedbanz – hilarious
  • Bananagrams – good for older kids
  • Connect Four – always a favorite
  • Monopoly Deal – not to be confused with the never-ending Monopoly
  • Jenga – this one is always the first to be picked, warning: its loud
  • Uno – great for larger groups
  • Sorry – oldie but goodie

4. Technology

A popular choice for Donor’s Choose projects are technology related.  I will warn you that sometimes this can get tricky with schools and districts.  For example, the technology might not be upgraded later or they may not be able to provide tech support.  So, proceed with caution.

Just from browsing the site, I can see that iPads and Chromebooks seem to be a favorite request.  But don’t forget to think outside of the box!  Don’t have an interactive whiteboard?  A Mimeo is an affordable alternative.  Looking to promote a healthy lifestyle?  Consider a class set of Fitbits.  Wanting to incorporate technology as a station?  You might benefit from headphones.

Also, don’t forget there are helpful technology storage options that will make your life easier and provide a way to keep the technology safe and long-lasting.

5. Field Trips

In middle school, it is a rare occurrence that students can attend field trips.  They can be costly and conflict with standardized testing.  However, an experience is something we remember and can impact our life for years to come.  Also, while the tickets to said experience might be decently affordable, often it is the transportation costs that can really add up.

A few ideas to consider:

  • A local museum
  • A movie to see a novel that the class read
  • A trip to volunteer at a local food bank
  • A tour of a local community college

6. Small Group Materials

If you have been reading the blog for any number of months, you know how much I am a fan of small groups.  So, think about how you can use Donor’s Choose to fund some of those small group materials.  It might be that kidney bean or dry erase table you have been eyeing, or sets of manipulatives to use during small group time.

Donor’s Choose is an awesome way to get other people invested in your classroom, both monetarily (because they donate), but also because they get to see what you are doing and how you are impacting students.

Don’t forget, if you want to win a Scholastic Magazines Subscription be sure to check out my Facebook page and enter before 8/18.

If you are looking to get a project funded, don’t forget to share on Facebook, share on Instagram, send an email to the parents in your classroom, and watch for matching codes.

Finally, if you have any other Donor’s Choose Ideas for Middle School, I would love to hear about it in the comments!

6 Donor's choose ideas for middle school teachers - an awesome way to get resources for your classroom, as well as involving family, friends, and your community | maneuveringthemiddle.com

The post Donor’s Choose Ideas for Middle School appeared first on Maneuvering the Middle.

]]>
Engaging Websites for Middle School Math https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/websites-for-middle-school-math/ https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/websites-for-middle-school-math/#comments Tue, 04 Jul 2017 11:00:34 +0000 https://mtmmigration.flywheelsites.com/?p=2521 Students love technology, so why not use it as often as possible to engage students in the best subject in the world, math? It can be used as a regular means of daily practice, as an incentive, and as a way to track data easier than pen and paper. Here are some of the websites […]

The post Engaging Websites for Middle School Math appeared first on Maneuvering the Middle.

]]>

Students love technology, so why not use it as often as possible to engage students in the best subject in the world, math? It can be used as a regular means of daily practice, as an incentive, and as a way to track data easier than pen and paper. Here are some of the websites for middle school math that I have used or plan to use in my classroom.

 

ENgAGING WEBSITES FOR MIDDLE SCHOOL MATH

1. Khan Academy 

Free

If you have read this blog for any length of time, you know that I use Khan Academy frequently and to differentiate. I have compiled a list of tips and tricks here.

Khan Academy covers all math topics in all grades with videos, practice, and formative assessments. Students can earn badges — #middleschoolwin. Not only that, but you can also assign specific skills to specific students, so all students can be working on something different at the same time — #differentiationwin. (All Khan Academy content is available for free at www.khanacademy.org.)

2. Zeal 

Not Free – $1000 per classroom annually

Zeal is a website that my students got a free trial in this year. The price tag is pretty steep, but we used it for our highest need students weeks prior to our state assessment.

Here is how it works: A student takes a pretest. The website decides what skills need the most practice. As students work on problems, Zeal tracks their progress. If a student continues to make the same mistake or miss a few problems in a row, a real-person tutor pops up and begins to explain the problem to the student. They use a screen share tool, and the tutor will write the work on the screen. The tutors will ask students questions. You will need a computer that has its microphone enabled, and they will need to wear ear buds.

Using Zeal is like having a ratio of 1:1 in the classroom. If your school has a large budget, this would be perfect for an intervention class.

3. Kahoot 

Free

Kahoot is my students’ absolute favorite website to use in our classroom! I even get excited playing it! Here is how it works: as a teacher, you can create your own multiple choice questions or choose from searchable public quizzes to use. Your students will use the code to log in to a quiz. The question projects on the whiteboard, and students choose an answer on their own device. After the answer is revealed, Kahoot ranks students according to their accuracy and the speed with which they answered. On their own devices, Kahoot will tell them their ranking, and on the whiteboard, it will show a leaderboard with the top five students.

Students love making it to the leaderboard and seeing where they are ranked. The only pitfall is that students will make mistakes since they are trying to answer fast. I repeat that accuracy is more important than speed.

Update: You can now assign Kahoots as homework assignments!

4. Quizizz

Free

Quizizz syncs with Google Classroom, so if you are familiar with Google Classroom, then you should definitely try Quizizz. If you don’t use Google Classroom, then Quizizz is still a great resource. Ms. Henry, the 5th grade teacher at my school, used Quizizz for her students who had passed the state assessment in the first round so they could practice 6th grade topics. While students who passed worked on Quizizz, she instructed a small group of students who were preparing for the second round of the state assessment.

Similar to Kahoot, teachers can create their own quizzes or choose from already created quizzes and students are ranked after each question. Here is what makes it different: memes! As a teacher, you can choose from a bank of memes to flash after students complete each question. Try a demo game by clicking here.

5. Xtra math

Free

This is a website that allows a few minutes of math fluency practice. One of our readers, Pamela, shared that she uses it for 5-7 minutes each day in her intervention class. She rewards the student who has completed the most problems correctly and uses it as a fun way to practice number sense and operations, while providing incentives.

6. Slides Q&A

Free

Google Slides now has a feature that allows audience participation. According to Google’s blog, “With a simple link displayed on a Slides presentation, audience members can submit questions from their phones, laptops, and tablets — and vote on those they want answered the most.” I have not used this as a presenter, but I have used this as an audience member in PD. As someone who rarely asks questions, this feature allowed me to participate with less reservation. I imagine this would be helpful for shy students, too!

7. Cardstock Translation

Free Trial + Cost for Additional Use

I have not used this personally yet. My school is adopting it next year, and I am thrilled. This website allows you to communicate with parents in an organized fashion. Cardstock keeps track of all communication between parent and teacher. It sends the messages straight to the parents’ phones via text so they do not have to download any special app. The best feature is that if you teach at a school where many families speak another language, Cardstock will translate your outgoing and incoming messages. This is going to change my life next school year!

Update: After using Cardstock for two years, I am not sure I could teach without it!

8. Google Forms + Flubaroo

Free

Google Forms is a way for students to complete quizzes or assignments electronically. Flubaroo is a Google Add On that will save you so much time! Some of its features include: grading your Google Forms, allowing you to assign different point values to each question, and creating a spreadsheet that determines the percentage of students who answered each question correctly. Lastly, you can email individual students their results by the press of a button. As someone who forgets to pass back graded assignments, that is excellent news! (We are not affiliated with Flubaroo, we just really like it.) Now that Maneuvering the Middle’s assessments are on Google Forms, we have to admit that we so excited to be going paperless.

Have you tried any of these websites for middle school math in your classroom? What websites do you enjoy using in your class and would recommend to others?

SHOP DIGITAL ACTIVITY BUNDLES

The post Engaging Websites for Middle School Math appeared first on Maneuvering the Middle.

]]>
https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/websites-for-middle-school-math/feed/ 3
Alternative Assessments in Math https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/alternative-assessments-math/ https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/alternative-assessments-math/#comments Tue, 13 Jun 2017 11:00:28 +0000 https://mtmmigration.flywheelsites.com/?p=2416 Test days are equally as exciting as they are dread inducing.  I communicate to students that it is their opportunity to show me what they know, but then I begin to feel doubtful.  Today, I am going to share four alternative assessments in math that you might consider using. What if they all fail?  Did […]

The post Alternative Assessments in Math appeared first on Maneuvering the Middle.

]]>
Test days are equally as exciting as they are dread inducing.  I communicate to students that it is their opportunity to show me what they know, but then I begin to feel doubtful.  Today, I am going to share four alternative assessments in math that you might consider using.

What if they all fail?  Did I review this concept enough? Did they study? Is the test too hard?  Is the test too easy?  What if they don’t use their strategies?  

I also feel frustrated when students who were really excelling the entire unit end up with a grade that did not reflect what they knew.  We all have those learners in our classroom who can perfectly articulate how to solve a variety of problems, but when it comes to a test, they underperform.  

Sometimes a multiple choice or free response test is not the best way to assess what our students know and what they have learned.  As teachers, we use a variety of strategies to reach our students–and we can do the same when it comes to the assessment!

Students learn in a variety of ways and teachers should assess their learning in a variety of ways. Check out 4 alternative assessments in math to spice up the way you gauge student understanding. | maneuveringthemiddle.com

ALTERNATIVE ASSESSMENTS IN MATH

1. Mini Quizzes

Quizzes are like the little sister of the summative test, but they can be useful in units that are really long, and with topics that really build on themselves.  I typically like to use mini quizzes when I cover a standard like 6.3(E) multiply and divide positive rational numbers fluently.  Positive rational numbers include numbers with decimals, fractions, and mixed numbers; division with decimals includes the decimal in both the divisor and the dividend.  This standard alone might take up to three weeks to teach, so I would prefer 3-4 quizzes along the way.  Another benefit to using multiple quizzes instead of one test is that you do not lose an entire class period to testing, and your grade book will be full. #teacherwin

Consider allowing students to attend tutorials and re-quiz as the unit progresses.  This min quiz style also enables you to pinpoint exactly where the misconception lies and address it quickly.

2. Projects

Whenever I give students surveys to assess how my class is going, the most frequent response I receive is that students would like to complete more projects in class.  I love projects too, and I find that projects as an alternative assessment allow creative students to shine!  Although students can be more invested in projects, it is important to set up a clear rubric with a clear criteria for success.  It will make grading more efficient and organized.  I typically use a project to assess understanding in geometric concepts.  

3. Performance Tasks

Performance tasks as an alternative assessment answers the question, “When are we ever going to use this?”  Performance tasks allow students to think critically and apply their content understanding to solve real world problems.  Similar to projects, grading can be challenging without a rubric and criteria for success.  I have used a performance task to assess understanding in percents with tax, tip, and discount.  

A great tip is to make this a task that can take no more than one or two days.  One year I made the mistake of handing out markers only to find out that there were several students who were spending too much time “decorating”. 🙂  Now, students can complete the performance task as a rough draft and earn supplies if they would like to extend the assessment further.

4. Google Forms

Google forms isn’t necessarily an alternative assessment, but it can be an alternative way to collect the information that is assessed.  There are two ways to utilize Google Forms based on your familiarity.  

Basic

The easiest would be to create a form that acts as a scantron.  The students would still show their work on paper and the responses would still be there.  Students would then just submit the answer for question 1, 2, 3, etc.  As a teacher this means that you are going to create a form with the questions and then click “settings” and “turn on form”.  This will allow you create a key and assign points to each question.

Advanced

You can take your assessments and actually type them into Google Forms, so it’s more like a true online assessment with the question and answer choices on the computer.  This is more time consuming but if you are a 1:1 school or have computer access, it might be nice to have year after year.

BONUS: Students create the assessment

To be honest, this is not my favorite option.  However, I know that many teachers rave about allowing their students to create an assessment.  When students create the test it provides buy-in to the content and ownership over their assessments.  I would suggest asking students for test-like questions and then compiling them.  This would allow you some final oversight to ensure all of the material was tested and weighted appropriately.   

What are some of the alternative assessments in math that you already use?  Which alternative assessments are you willing to try this next school year?

Students learn in a variety of ways and teachers should assess their learning in a variety of ways. Check out 4 alternative assessments in math to spice up the way you gauge student understanding. | maneuveringthemiddle.com

The post Alternative Assessments in Math appeared first on Maneuvering the Middle.

]]>
https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/alternative-assessments-math/feed/ 2
5 Tips for a Successful STAAR Review https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/staar-review-ideas/ Sat, 18 Feb 2017 12:00:41 +0000 https://mtmmigration.flywheelsites.com/?p=2242 Every year at this time, the pressure of the the spring, the lack of breaks, and then the lingering of the standardized test starts to set in.  Here in Texas, students take the STAAR test in March, April, and May.  Today, I wanted to share 6 STAAR review ideas to help get you geared up […]

The post 5 Tips for a Successful STAAR Review appeared first on Maneuvering the Middle.

]]>
Every year at this time, the pressure of the the spring, the lack of breaks, and then the lingering of the standardized test starts to set in.  Here in Texas, students take the STAAR test in March, April, and May.  Today, I wanted to share 6 STAAR review ideas to help get you geared up and to help prepare your students.


This is the last of three posts about test prep, so be sure to read about How to Make Test Prep Fun and Setting Goals to Keep Students Engaged.


Ideas to for organizing and implementing a successful STAAR review - Make test prep something your students look forward to participating in. 5 STAAR review ideas

1. Emphasize the Readiness Standards

Time is limited and so is your students’ attention.  Though it might be tempting to think that reviewing for a longer period of time is better, I would venture to guess that students lose interest and energy.  I personally found a 10-day review to be just right.

Because time is limited, I would suggest focusing your time and energy on the readiness standards.  On the middle school math STAAR tests, the readiness standards account for about two-thirds of the exam.  So when planning, think about how you can allocate each of the 10 STAAR review days and organize like standards.  For example, if you are going to focus on a readiness standard about similar figures, then it makes sense to include a supporting standard like scale factor.  

2. Utilize Multiple Choice for Discussion

Most teachers try to incorporate multiple choice questions throughout their STAAR review so that students can practice test-taking strategies. Yay! I would encourage you to take it a little further and have students discuss the various answer choices and how one would come to that conclusion.  It practices the higher-level thinking skill of error analysis, as well as lets students explain their thinking and see the problem in a new way.

I was able to do this by utilizing my e-instruction clicker technology and having students input their homework answers at the beginning of class.  We would then quickly analyze any questions that caused students to struggle.  If you don’t have a class set of clickers, socrative.com is perfect for gathering data from phones or iPads.

3. Mix It Up by Providing Variety

Students can easily check out during standardized test review, especially if they are reviewing in several other classes.  When I taught eighth grade, we were reviewing simultaneously between all four content areas.  So, anytime you can offer an activity with partners or groups, that is a win!  Consider incorporating activities that get students up and moving, even if it’s just a few times a week.  

4. Incorporate Small Groups

In my post about goal setting and organization, I mentioned that I would focus my small groups down to about 3-4 students per class period.  I think this made the biggest difference because, for about 10 minutes a day, they were getting my undivided attention.  I was able to question them through various strategies and encourage them to persevere and work through the problems.  And finally, I was able to provide encouragement and build their confidence, which is what they really needed right before the test.  I firmly believe this paid off and personally wouldn’t consider reviewing without small groups.  

Sidenote/Soapbox: I know sometimes it is common practice within schools to have tutors come in and work with students or pull from their electives, etc, to give them more time and review.  I would really encourage you to try and keep your own students, especially if they struggle.  They have been with you all year and that relationship goes a long way.

5. Use Teamwork

Tyne shared her ideas about football frenzy and how to promote collaboration and teamwork throughout your STAAR review.  I also like to just encourage and support teamwork with a talk at the beginning of the review period and a handful of incentives.  I think it’s good to remind students that this is an opportunity to show all that they have learned.  Most students put enough pressure on themselves, so they don’t need any additional pressure.  

I hope these ideas give you a good starting place for organizing your review and thinking through not only the content but also the activities that will be incorporated.

If you are looking for a ready-to-go review of the TEKS, then you have come to the right place. I created a Complete 10+ Day Math TEKS Review for Grades 6-8.  I took all of my past review experiences and things that I know are super helpful to have and put together a comprehensive review pack to take the prep off your hands.

Ideas to for organizing and implementing a successful STAAR review - Make test prep something your students look forward to participating in. | maneuveringthemiddle.com

The post 5 Tips for a Successful STAAR Review appeared first on Maneuvering the Middle.

]]>
Goal Setting and Test Prep: Helping Students Achieve More https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/goal-setting-and-test-prep/ Sun, 05 Feb 2017 12:00:15 +0000 https://mtmmigration.flywheelsites.com/?p=2141 One of the realities that teachers face today is the prevalence of assessments.  We assess at the school level, at the district level, and at the state level.  I won’t go into the politics of assessment, but I will address the fact that we as teachers want our students to be successful on these assessments. […]

The post Goal Setting and Test Prep: Helping Students Achieve More appeared first on Maneuvering the Middle.

]]>
One of the realities that teachers face today is the prevalence of assessments.  We assess at the school level, at the district level, and at the state level.  I won’t go into the politics of assessment, but I will address the fact that we as teachers want our students to be successful on these assessments.  If you haven’t checked on the first test prep post on how to keep it fun and lively, be sure to read that!

Today, I am sharing a few ideas to keep students working hard and diligently by using goal setting throughout test prep.


This is the second of three posts about test prep, so be sure to read about How to Make Test Prep Fun and How to Differentiate Test Prep to Reach More Students.


How to use goal setting and test prep to help students achieve more throughout the review process. Keeping students engaged and persevering with goals.

Helping Students Achieve More: Goal setting and test prep

Benefits of Goal Setting and test prep

  1. It pushes every student to improve and do their best while reviewing.
  2. It encourages students to work together collaboratively, rather than competitively.
  3. It provides a bit of buy-in to keep students showing their work.  

This all originally came about because I knew that test prep would be daunting.  It can be frustrating for kids who do really well and it can be demoralizing for students who struggle.  I really wanted to provide a way for everyone to get what they needed out of the review and to keep everyone working together for the 10 review days.

How to set goals for test prep

Throughout the review, I gave a handful of mini-assessments, as well as various class activities.  Once I had planned the number of activities that I would be checking, I created a scale and decided to use stickers.  Because, well, stickers are fun!

3 stickers – showed work and achieved 90% mastery

2 stickers – showed work and achieved between 75% and 89% mastery

1 sticker – showed work and put in effort

Here was my rationale – either way I wanted to incentivize showing work and giving best effort.  I also wanted to incentivize everyone to strive, even my top students, who might rush through their work or be careless.  

Based on my scale and the number of assignments, I created a rough goal for each student.  I wanted to be reasonable with the goal, yet push others who might not push themselves.  I quickly typed up the the goals and printed them on labels and created a card for them to keep their stickers.  Then, I hole punched the card so they could keep it in their folders.

Explaining the Goals

When I passed out the goals for every student I talked about the importance of setting goals and gave every student the opportunity to increase their goal.  This allowed them to be a part of the goal setting without writing down something ridiculous like 1 or 4,000.  #middleschoolers

Working Towards the Goal

Students then worked on various activities and mini-assessments throughout the test review.  

While they worked, I pulled groups of students who needed extra support and worked with them.  I tried to focus on the same groups of students to make a larger impact and really only pulled 2-4 students per class period.

I focused on students who were very close, as well as those who just needed some confidence.  They would do the same activities and mini-assessments but with support from me.  For example, I corrected small misconceptions or would remind them of steps.  I didn’t want to be a crutch but also didn’t want them sitting quietly stumped.  

Checking Their Work

If we were doing an activity, then I trusted students to work with their groups.  We would go over questions and the answers and I trusted students to get the appropriate amount of stickers.

If we were doing a mini-assessment, then students would bring their assignment to my small group and I would quickly mark their answers and they would get their stickers.  

Striving to Achieve Their Goals

Some of your students are going to have a bad day and some are going to make silly mistakes on their assignment or are your high achievers, who won’t settle for less than a 100.  Students who are all about reaching goals are going to get my full support!  So, I did create a few extra activities that students could do on their own time and bring back to earn additional stickers towards their goal.

At the end of the test review, we would celebrate as a class when everyone achieved their goals.  This often involved board games, popcorn, and other treats.  Because lets be real, the key to a middle schoolers heart is food.  It really is quite impressive to see students work against themselves, which is an incredible life lesson in and of itself.  Goals are a great example of perseverance and grit.  

This system is something I used in my own classroom for four years and found great success!  It is simple, streamlined, and easy to engage.  I spent several weeks creating the various activities and reviews and then practically an entire Saturday getting the copies prepared, the activities print and cut, and everything organized by day into file folders. It was totally worth it because when test prep time came, I was ready to go and ready for the next day.  

Now, it’s a little more simplified than the football game that Tyne shared last week, so if you are looking for something with more specific incentives and competition, be sure to check that out.

If you are looking for a high-quality, student-centered test prep, then I have one for you!  Right now, I have test prep units for grades 6-8 aligned to the TEKS.  

Check it out here: 6th Grade, 7th Grade, 8th GradeMath TEKS Review for Middle SchoolCCSS Teacher? 6th Grade, 7th Grade, 8th GradeMath CCSS aligned review for grades 6, 7, and 8. 

How to use goal setting and test prep to help students achieve more throughout the review process. Keeping students engaged and persevering with goals.

The post Goal Setting and Test Prep: Helping Students Achieve More appeared first on Maneuvering the Middle.

]]>
Making Test Prep Fun for Students and Teachers https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/making-test-prep-fun/ https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/making-test-prep-fun/#comments Sun, 29 Jan 2017 03:28:02 +0000 https://mtmmigration.flywheelsites.com/?p=2100 Preparation for any standardized test is a daunting task.  Preparing 100+ students for a standardized test is quite a feat!  You want students to buy-in to the content, even though they will claim they “already learned” it!  You can accomplish this by making test prep fun! It is a challenging job, but as a teacher, […]

The post Making Test Prep Fun for Students and Teachers appeared first on Maneuvering the Middle.

]]>
Preparation for any standardized test is a daunting task.  Preparing 100+ students for a standardized test is quite a feat!  You want students to buy-in to the content, even though they will claim they “already learned” it!  You can accomplish this by making test prep fun!

It is a challenging job, but as a teacher, it is exactly what we have to do.


This is the first of three posts about test prep, be sure to check back to read about How to Help Your Students Achieve More with Goal Setting, and 5 Tips for a Successful STAAR Review


One of the ways I kept test review fun over the span of two weeks was Football Frenzy.  Football Frenzy was successful because students competed, there was a measurable daily win, and finally, a grand prize. Middle schoolers love to compete.  

Preparation for any standardized test is a daunting task. But, making test prep fun for your students increases their buy-in and achievement!

MAKING TEST PREP FUN

The Prep Work

Before I began, I made a unit plan of what I needed to cover over the next two weeks.  I broke up the standards and grouped them accordingly and created a variety of practice problems.  

  1. Examples that I would go over whole group ranging from easy to expert
  2. Around 10 practice problems for students to complete in their teams – this took several forms from activities to handouts
  3. An exit ticket with at least 4 multiple choice questions

All students received a test prep folder where they kept all of their work.  I also made a tracker for them to keep track of their mastery on each topic.  The tracker also stated what individual prizes they could earn.

Next, I created heterogeneous groups of students so that they could all work together and help each other.  These teams created a name for themselves and wrote their names on a helmet that I printed for them.

The final and most exciting part of the prep work was the football field. I took up an entire wall with green paper.

Preparation for any standardized test is a daunting task. But, making test prep fun for your students increases their buy-in and achievement! maneuveringthemiddle.com

During Class

I would start class by going over a few practice problems to jog everyone’s memory.   In the perfect world, students would be familiar because I have been spiraling content in homework and warm ups for most of the year.  

Then, I would release students to work on their teams.  Teams were responsible for completing the practice problems while I pulled a small group or circulated.

The catch was that in order for students to get to move yards on the football field everyone’s practice problems would need to be complete and accurate.  When the time was over, I drew a letter that corresponded to one person in each group.  I would go around and check that person’s practice problems for accuracy at each table.  That way I was only checking 8 papers instead of 30.  

I would assign the number of yards they moved based on how many problems were correct. One person was responsible for moving their team helmet 5 or 10 yards.  (They used a push pin to move the helmet which did leave my wall with hundreds of holes.  I imagine that this would work better with magnets on a whiteboard.)

This worked because it forced the students who moved quickly to slow down for the students who might struggle with the questions.  Plus,  they couldn’t just copy each other because I could potentially draw their name and ask questions that they would have to be able to answer in order to earn yards.  If you haven’t modeled for students what a successful student-to-student teaching looks like, I would definitely make that a priority.

When a team landed on the 25 yard, 50 yard or 75 yard marker, they had the option to kick a field goal.  I created a small paper football, and a tiny field goal.  This was the very best part and where most of the excitement came from! If they did make it through the field goal, they could move an additional 5 more yards.  Not crafty?  It’s okay, I am 100% certain there is a young man in your class that would love to make you a paper football. 🙂

Preparation for any standardized test is a daunting task. But, making test prep fun for your students increases their buy-in and achievement! maneuveringthemiddle.com

At the End of Practice

After students worked with their groups, they completed 3-4 multiple choice problems by themselves.  If students met the state passing rate, they earned one sticker.  If they earned a state commended score, they earned two stickers.

Students placed these stickers on their trackers.  Every 5 or so spots, they earned a prize. Sometimes, passing out stickers was cumbersome, so I would instruct students to color in box of their tracker.  The prize could be as small as a piece of candy to sitting in a rolling chair for the next class.  It’s really up to you!  This incentivized each individual’s achievement.

The Grand Prize

The team that made it into the end zone first earned a touchdown for their class period.  I kept track of touchdowns and total yards earned in the hallway for all students to see.  Students would come into class excited to earn yards to compete with other class periods.  The class period who had the most touchdowns or yards at the end of test prep (but after the standardized test) earned a free day of recess instead of class.  The group of four from each class that earned the most yards earned an invitation to a pizza and movie night.

Football Frenzy was one of the most fun and engaging activities that I used last year for both the students and myself.  Everyday students were excited to practice!  That is music to a teacher’s ear!

In the next month, Noelle and I will be discussing ways to engage students by making test prep fun, how to help your students achieve more with goal setting, and 5 tips for a successful STAAR or CCSS review.  What incentives or strategies do you use to invest students in review?

Check it out here: 6th Grade, 7th Grade, 8th GradeMath TEKS Review for Middle SchoolCCSS Teacher? 6th Grade, 7th Grade, 8th GradeMath CCSS aligned review for grades 6, 7, and 8.

Preparation for any standardized test is a daunting task. But, making test prep fun for your students increases their buy-in and achievement! maneuveringthemiddle.com

The post Making Test Prep Fun for Students and Teachers appeared first on Maneuvering the Middle.

]]>
https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/making-test-prep-fun/feed/ 4
5 Classroom Management Books for Middle School https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/5-classroom-management-books-for-middle-school/ https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/5-classroom-management-books-for-middle-school/#comments Sat, 17 Dec 2016 12:00:55 +0000 https://mtmmigration.flywheelsites.com/?p=1972 Earlier in the year, we talked about the various different routines and procedures that are beneficial within the middle school classroom.  I mentioned the essential classroom management book, The First Days of School, as a resource and reference of the post.  I know that classroom management can be a point of tension, especially at this […]

The post 5 Classroom Management Books for Middle School appeared first on Maneuvering the Middle.

]]>
Earlier in the year, we talked about the various different routines and procedures that are beneficial within the middle school classroom.  I mentioned the essential classroom management book, The First Days of School, as a resource and reference of the post. 

I know that classroom management can be a point of tension, especially at this point in the year. So, I wanted to seek out some books that might be a helpful resource for those of you looking to shake up your classroom management.  Or at least provide a few new ideas to browse and try in your classroom.

I love recommending and reading books. Charlie Jones says, “You will be the same person in five years as you are today except for the people you meet and the books you read.”  True confession, I actually struggle to actually sit down and read books but I love listening! I subscribe to Audible and am able to listen to several books while I drive, do laundry, cook dinner, etc.

5 classroom management books for middle school

Classroom management books for middle school teachers to ensure your students are learning and on-task.

Better Than Carrots and Sticks

Longtime educators and best-selling authors Dominique Smith, Douglas Fisher, and Nancy Frey provide a practical blueprint for creating a cooperative and respectful classroom climate in which students and teachers work through behavioral issues together. After a comprehensive overview of the roots of the restorative practices movement in schools, the authors explain how to:

  • Establish procedures and expectations for student behavior that encourage the development of positive interpersonal skills;
  • Develop a nonconfrontational rapport with even the most challenging students; and
  • Implement conflict resolution strategies that prioritize relationship building and mutual understanding.

Classroom Management in the Digital AgeClassroom management books for middle school teachers to ensure your students are learning and on-task.

Don’t fear the devices! In the willing teacher’s hands, this is a new and welcome age to harness for exponential learning.

Update your own operating system for the digital age by:

  • Getting attention from those device focused faces
  • Establishing procedures for daily class routines that harness the power of technology tools
  • Cultivating a culture of student ownership and responsibility
  • Developing routines that increase on-task behavior and lessen teacher anxiety
  • Communicating with parents on best practices and consistent school to home behaviors
  • Decreasing distraction with simple, helpful tips
  • Letting go of being the expert and taking charge by partnering in learning
In Tools for Teaching, Dr. Jones describes the skills by which exceptional teachers make the classroom a place of success and enjoyment for both themselves and their students. Tools for Teaching integrates the management of discipline, instruction and motivation into a system that allows you to reduce the stress of teaching by preventing most management headaches. Dr. Jones helps you reduce student disruptions, backtalk, helpless handraising and dawdling while helping you increase responsible behavior, motivation and independent learning. These skills are made accessable by practical, down-to-earth language and many examples and illustrations that provide the next best thing to attending one of Dr. Jones’ workshops. The second edition also includes an Overview DVD of Dr. Jones entire program; including how to use the Study Group Activity Guide, workshops, and parent videos.

This award-winning book gives beginning educators everything they need to survive and thrive in the classroom. The third edition covers new material including working as a part of a professional learning community (PLC), teaching media literacy and social responsibility, incorporating Common Core State Standards, handling “homework push-back” from parents, changes in classroom technology, techniques for motivating students, seeking feedback, and much more.

 

  • A fully revised edition of a trusted resource, offering solutions to challenges and typical scenarios encountered by new teachers
  • Bonus CD features downloadable versions of the book’s checklists, forms, worksheets, and self-assessments

This popular resource offers teachers an essential guide for knowing what to expect when they begin their career and ideas for solving classroom problems.


Classroom management books for middle school teachers to ensure your students are learning and on-task. Teach Like a Champion 2.0

The first edition of Teach Like a Champion influenced thousands of educators because author Doug Lemov’s teaching strategies are simple and powerful. Now, updated techniques and tools make it even easier to put students on the path to college readiness. Here are just a few of the brand new resources available in the 2.0 edition:

  • Over 70 new video clips of real teachers modeling the techniques in the classroom
  • A selection of never before seen techniques inspired by top teachers around the world
  • Brand new structure emphasizing the most important techniques and step by step teaching guidelines
  • Updated content reflecting the latest best practices from outstanding educators

With the sample lesson plans, videos, and teachlikeachampion.com online community, you will be teaching like a champion in no time. The classroom techniques you’ll learn in this book can be adapted to suit any context. Find out why Teach Like a Champion is a “teaching Bible” for so many educators worldwide.


I would love to hear what other classroom management books you have read and enjoyed.  It seems as though finding ideas specific to middle school can be tricky.

Classroom management books for middle school teachers to ensure your students are learning and on-task. | maneuveringthemiddle.com

The post 5 Classroom Management Books for Middle School appeared first on Maneuvering the Middle.

]]>
https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/5-classroom-management-books-for-middle-school/feed/ 3
7 Ways to Use Khan Academy https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/7-ways-use-khan-academy/ https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/7-ways-use-khan-academy/#comments Thu, 17 Nov 2016 16:55:11 +0000 https://mtmmigration.flywheelsites.com/?p=1931 Khan Academy is an incredible resource for your classroom!  You can see how some tips for starting Khan Academy in your classroom, and I have outlined ways to use Khan Academy for differentiating instruction.  If you aren’t ready to take the full plunge into the world of Khan, dip your metaphorical toes into the shallow […]

The post 7 Ways to Use Khan Academy appeared first on Maneuvering the Middle.

]]>
Khan Academy is an incredible resource for your classroom!  You can see how some tips for starting Khan Academy in your classroom, and I have outlined ways to use Khan Academy for differentiating instruction.  If you aren’t ready to take the full plunge into the world of Khan, dip your metaphorical toes into the shallow end with these ideas.

NOTE: All Khan Academy content is available for free at www.khanacademy.org

Save time and energy by using Khan Academy to simplify your day - 7 ways to implement Khan Academy as a resource for students and math teachers. | maneuveringthemiddle.com

7 Ways to Use Khan Academy in the Classroom

1. MAKE UP WORK

There are times when you cannot find missing work for a student, and running another copy is just not going to happen.  In the past, I have assigned Khan Academy to students who are missing work.  They would complete a skill, I would grade it based on how many they got correct, and I did not have to prepare 15 different assignments for the 9 different students who didn’t turn it in.  Seriously, game changer.

2. TUTORING

Similarly, I had a student that was really struggling with some foundational skills.  I made an arrangement with her mom that she could come to my classroom before school at 6:30 am and work on some of these skills.  I did not always have something prepared, and truth be told, there were many mornings I forgot she was coming.  No big deal!  I assigned her recommendations on Khan, and she got to work.  If she was stuck or needed help, I was there to assist, but Khan allowed me to run last minute trips to the office or check in with the other math teacher before the day started.

3. STATIONS

Using Khan Academy as a station is perfect for classrooms that only have access to a handful of computers everyday.  Khan Academy also has an app that can be used on a tablet.  For students who struggled to stay on the correct website, I use an iPad and the guided access setting to make sure that students do not leave Khan Academy to surf the internet.

4. EXTENSION WORK

If you have the same students who complete work fairly quickly and with quality, Khan is a great resource to keep students working on math (and not distracting their teammates).  Though I usually don’t like students working ahead of their partners during practice time, independent practice is a time that I have used Khan as extension work.

5. A RESOURCE FOR PARENTS

Many parents ask me how they can help their students at home.  I point them to Khan.  Every skill is connected to a video, so if students or parents do not know how to complete a homework problem, they can type the topic into Khan Academy and watch a video that teaches the skill.  It also helps me answer the question, “can you give my child more practice problems that we can work on at home?”  Yes.  Khan Academy.

6. WHEN THERE IS A SUB

I give this idea with caution.  My school does not allow the use of technology with substitutes, but I think with the right substitute and with very clear expectations, students would benefit from a day of practicing skills in an engaging way. You can also hold students accountable when you come back by using the ‘time on task’ feature to see how much time your students were actually working.

7. SUMMATIVE TEST REVIEW

Before our end of the year state test, STAAR, Khan is a life-saver for review.  Too many students have misconceptions about too many skills.  I could never cover all of the different material effectively.  One way I differentiate the review is to take a look at my data, and assign recommendations to the students who didn’t master the skills the first time around. This way 28 students can be working on 8 different skills, and they can get immediate feedback.  This leaves me free to pull a small group or conference with individual students.  (The same idea can apply to any test review.)

Sidenote: Khan Academy still requires some prep work before getting started.  Students must create an account and you have to give them the code that connects them to you as their coach.  While this requires some front loading, it will save you time in the long run. You can find more information on how to set up accounts here.

What ways do you use Khan Academy in your classroom?  Before teaching middle school, I taught Algebra II, and I used Khan to teach me concepts all the time.  Don’t forget that it isn’t just for students!  I have also had friends use it to study for the GRE.

SHOP DIGITAL ACTIVITY BUNDLES

Save time and energy by using Khan Academy to simplify your day - 7 ways to implement Khan Academy as a resource for students and math teachers. | maneuveringthemiddle.com

 

 

The post 7 Ways to Use Khan Academy appeared first on Maneuvering the Middle.

]]>
https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/7-ways-use-khan-academy/feed/ 4
How to Teach a Multi-Level Class https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/teach-multi-level-class/ https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/teach-multi-level-class/#comments Sat, 27 Aug 2016 11:00:40 +0000 https://mtmmigration.flywheelsites.com/?p=1739 Each year, my students take the MAP (measure of academic progress) test in the fall and then again in the spring.  While the test does many fancy things, I use it to determine what grade level my students are coming to me on and tailor my instruction before I learn about their struggles organically.  This […]

The post How to Teach a Multi-Level Class appeared first on Maneuvering the Middle.

]]>
Each year, my students take the MAP (measure of academic progress) test in the fall and then again in the spring.  While the test does many fancy things, I use it to determine what grade level my students are coming to me on and tailor my instruction before I learn about their struggles organically.  This year, I had students who fell in the second grade range.  As a sixth grade teacher, this …ahem … is not so great.  This takes the idea of a multi-level class to a whole new level.

Though not ideal, as teachers, we play the hand we’re dealt which means it is now my job to make sure that these students are successful.  You cannot control where they came from, but you can control where they are going.  

The question now is: how do we teach a class of students who are on such different levels in their math journey?  I have outlined a couple of ways to teach in a multi-level class.  I mention Khan Academy several times, so if you are looking to start using it in the classroom check out these tips.

*Note – This is not an exhaustive list of ways to scaffold or differentiate instruction.  These ideas also apply to working with above level students with some minor modifications.  

How to Teach a Multi-Level Class

Students come to us on all different levels, which can be a challenge. 3 great ideas on how to teach a multi-level class.

Idea 1 – Reteaching to Below Level Students

Break students into two groups.  Create homogeneous groups – one group of students who are on level or close to being on level and one group of students who are below grade level.  

*Note 2 : Anytime you are splitting middle school age students up, make sure you have the groups already decided.  In addition, make sure the names of students and which group they are in is visible to the students – I would create a slide to project.  There is no need to read them off.  This will save you time and from answering “which group am I in?” approximately 987 times.

*Note 3: If you are not a math teacher, I have seen teachers use these same rotations with iStation or quizlet instead of Khan academy.

Rotation 1: On level students are on Khan academy or work that they can complete without any help from you. You might even assign them a skill (on Khan Academy) that they have not learned, but is coming up in the coursework, so that by previewing the material, they will be more prepared and even helpful to other students.

Below level students are receiving instruction either in an entirely new way, or by using models to make the math more concrete.  I usually pick a topic that I think would benefit the most students since I am not able to do rotations every day.  

I ask myself questions like:

  • What is imperative that they understand in real life?  
  • What will help them the most when they go on to the next grade level?  
  • What skills are readiness standards verses supporting standards for my state test?  

For example, if we have been working on integer operations (they will use this skill for the rest of math/ it definitely is something that you will use in the real world/and it is major work in sixth grade), we might use counters or number line strips. I would also make the lesson super bite sized, so I would break down integer operations to just adding integers.

Rotation 2: On level students will move to an extension activity– like hands-on activities, performance tasks, or creating assessment questions. I usually pick an activity that they are familiar with, thus minimizing the need for more directions.

Below level students will move to Khan academy where they will practice the skill that I just retaught.  If I don’t have access to computers that day, then students will continue working on that skill using the manipulatives from rotation 1, but with less help from me. They will complete a 4 question exit ticket before leaving class that day, so I can see the progress that is being made.  Before the exit ticket though and if the class is still functioning with little chaos, I might pull a small group for students who are still struggling.

Why It Works:  Sometimes when I am reteaching material, I will still only call on the students with their hands in the air.  These students got it the first time!  These students will also look bored, and I feel like I need to move on.  Not only am I not serving the students who needed to be retaught, I am wasting class time.  This idea forces me to slow down and just teach the students who need it.

Idea 2 – Use Push In Assistance

Coordinate with your SPED teacher.  If you have a class of students, most likely you have a couple of students who are in special education.  Typically, these students IEP’s require some push in time by their SPED teacher, so use rotations on a day you know she/he will be available to you.  

This is great because it is awesome to have additional teacher presence, but also because you can group your SPED students together, and the SPED teacher can travel with them to every activity.  This will make you more available to students who struggle but are not in Special Education.  When there are two teachers in the room, 3 rotations are doable.  I would do 3 rotations: skill practice (on or off technology), reteach or mini lesson, and game/activity in partners.

Idea 3 – Utilize a Block Class Period

This idea is pretty perfect for a block class period.  You need at least 90 minutes to execute this rotation.  My coteacher taught me this method when I taught high school students in California.  Shout out, Ms. Mease!  This rotation is a normal lesson cycle – new learning, activity, and exit ticket.  We would split the class in two groups.  We were flexible on how we did the groups.  Sometimes, if we thought the material was going to be really challenging then we created homogeneous groups so that we could go slower with one group, but you could also create heterogeneous groups too since the material is new.

Rotation 1: Half of the students are working on Khan academy. This group needs to know exactly what they are working on, so make sure that you assign them recommendations.  Because desks were in rows, students would turn their desks around, so you can see their computer screen from the front of the classroom.  Half of the students are learning new material from you.  The half that is with you will transition to classwork and eventually to an exit ticket.  We would spend about 45 minutes in a group.

Rotation 2: Students will switch.  Make sure to allow time for the group of computers to move desks back to the proper position and put away computers before dismissal.

Why It Works:  It allows for a smaller students to teacher ratio.  With only half of the class receiving instruction, students are able to ask more questions and you are able to tailor your instruction to fewer students.  Students like technology, so they are invested, and allowing students to listen to music is a great incentive that they can earn.  Lastly, it breaks up a block class period and it will go by faster for both you and the students.

Differentiating instruction for multi level students is a practice that many experienced teachers are still working on.  And remember, rotations are only effective if you have establish strong routines and procedures for them.  Have students practice getting up and moving to the next rotation silently and quickly.  Also, make sure to utilize a timer!  Time WILL get away from you.

Students come to us on all different levels, which can be a challenge. 3 great ideas on how to teach a multi-level class. | maneuveringthemiddle.com

 

The post How to Teach a Multi-Level Class appeared first on Maneuvering the Middle.

]]>
https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/teach-multi-level-class/feed/ 11
6 Instructional Strategies for Middle School https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/instructional-strategies-middle-school/ https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/instructional-strategies-middle-school/#comments Sat, 16 Jul 2016 19:04:02 +0000 https://mtmmigration.flywheelsites.com/?p=1482 This summer, I have shared various instructional strategies and ideas on the Maneuvering the Middle Facebook Page.  Many readers have enjoyed the ideas and mentioned that they would love to implement some next school year.  I know I was always looking for new ideas and fresh ways to engage my students and have complied a few […]

The post 6 Instructional Strategies for Middle School appeared first on Maneuvering the Middle.

]]>
This summer, I have shared various instructional strategies and ideas on the Maneuvering the Middle Facebook Page.  Many readers have enjoyed the ideas and mentioned that they would love to implement some next school year.  I know I was always looking for new ideas and fresh ways to engage my students and have complied a few below.  These clips are provided by The Teaching Channel, are all anywhere from 2-7 minutes long, and perfect for middle school.

Looking to try a few new things in your classroom? These six instructional strategies are simple to implement and helpful in engaging your students. | maneuveringthemiddle.com

6 instructional strategies for middle school

1.  PARTICIPATION QUIZ

Aims to focus and provide accountability during group work. Check it out in action here.

2.  HIGHLIGHTING MISTAKES

Teaches students use critical thinking skills to analyze each others work. Click here.

3.  MY FAVORITE NO

This was shared by a reader, thanks Abi.  It highlights the things students are doing correctly within an incorrect answer. See it here.

4.  GROUP WORK IDEAS

Two different teachers use different strategies to set up their group work. Click here to see students set up for success.

5.  CONVER-STATIONS

This video is of an ELA class, but I think this would be perfect for math, too!

6.  THE STAND UP GAME

A great way to get those sleepy students up and participating. This is a personal favorite; I rely on this strategy specifically on Monday mornings.

Hopefully these give you a new idea or two to try out this school year!  Has anyone tried these in their classroom?

Looking to try a few new things in your classroom? These six instructional strategies are simple to implement and helpful in engaging your students. | maneuveringthemiddle.com

The post 6 Instructional Strategies for Middle School appeared first on Maneuvering the Middle.

]]>
https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/instructional-strategies-middle-school/feed/ 2
Tips for Implementing Math Small Group Instruction https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/implementing-math-small-group-instruction/ https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/implementing-math-small-group-instruction/#comments Tue, 07 Jun 2016 11:29:14 +0000 https://mtmmigration.flywheelsites.com/?p=1299 What do you do with the kids that “don’t get it”?  I think this is a constant battle that we face as teachers.  Sometimes it even keeps us up at night.  Today I wanted to share tips for implementing math small group instruction. If your classroom functions like mine, a typical class period might consist of […]

The post Tips for Implementing Math Small Group Instruction appeared first on Maneuvering the Middle.

]]>
What do you do with the kids that “don’t get it”?  I think this is a constant battle that we face as teachers.  Sometimes it even keeps us up at night.  Today I wanted to share tips for implementing math small group instruction.

It is possible to use math small group instruction in middle school with a bit of upfront planning! Tips for implementation and ideas to get your math small groups running smoothly.

If your classroom functions like mine, a typical class period might consist of a warm up, guided notes, a class activity that is simultaneously accessible and engaging, and finally, an exit ticket for students to demonstrate mastery.  Whew!   That is a lot for 60 minutes.

TIPS FOR IMPLEMENTING MATH SMALL GROUP INSTRUCTION

In my first year of teaching, math small group instruction wasn’t even on my radar, yet the longer I have spent in the classroom, the more comfortable I am making small groups part of my daily routine.  Like any classroom routine, you must train yourself as much as you must train your students.  Today, I am going to give you some tips I have learned along the way, so you can set up your math small groups to be as successful as possible.

Before SMALL GROUP INSTRUCTION

Know Who You Are Pulling
  • This might seem like a no brainer, but there were several days that I would get to the time in class for a small group, and then I would not do it because I was not prepared.  Sure, I knew who my strugglers were, but I did not have a plan on who to pull or even why I would pull them.  Either make a list based on class groups ahead of time, or take mental notes on which students are struggling as you circulate while teaching.
  • Consider the personalities of your students as well as their academic needs when making small groups.  You will most likely pull the same students on a consistent basis, so create standard small groups that will make your job easier.  Typically, I had around 8 students who I would pull, so I split those 8 students into 2 groups of 4.  Group 1 might be those students who need a little more guidance to reinforce the new concept  while group 2 might be the students who need significantly more support and be pulled more frequently.  I also split up any behavioral needs amongst the two groups.  You can even give your groups names, so that when you transition from notes to classwork, you can just say, “Gryffindor, meet me at the horseshoe table” or “Ravenclaw, you will need a highlighter for small group.”
Set Expectations for Rest of Class
  • What is the rest of your class doing during this time?  How much time do they have to do it?  Are they allowed out of their seat?  What do they do if they need help?  Your students should know the answers to all of these questions before you pull a small group.  You will end up frustrated and annoyed if you’re spending your time correcting students or getting up to answer questions from other students.  At the beginning of the year, I explain to my whole class why I pull small groups and how important it is for us to support our teammates who need extra help.  One way they can support those students is to maintain a reasonable volume and to complete their work regardless of who is watching them.  During a small group, there is a 100% chance that students in your class will have a question, so assign a responsible student to field questions for you.  You can also set the expectation that students may only ask a question if no one else at their table knows the answer and they have looked at their notes.

During SMALL GROUP INSTRUCTION

Gauge Understanding Before You Start
  • Before you begin, find out where your students are.  You can do this a couple different ways.  Informally, you can ask students on a scale of 1 to 5, how well do they understand what they just learned. Side note: make sure to explain how the scale works (1 = no clue and 5 = you could teach the class).  I have found that most students are great at evaluating their needs.  If a student has no idea what is going on, they will tell you 1.  More formally, you can have students start a problem on their own, and watch to see where or if they begin to make a mistake. And on a rare occasion, be amazed that they can do it all by themselves, give yourself a pat on the back because you are the BEST teacher ever, and send them back to work on their own.
Keep It Simple
  • You have enough to do as a teacher.  You do not have to create different material for your small group.  Students can work on what the rest of the class is completing.  If you need to make the material more accessible, ask yourself ‘what skill are we practicing?’  If the objective is to calculate volume, perhaps you can change the classwork to include only whole numbers while the rest of the class is finding volume with decimals and fractions.  Sometimes, different material is appropriate, but remember to not bite off more than you can chew.  When you are first starting, keep it simple.
Whiteboards Are Your Friend
  • Students love to write on whiteboards!  Whiteboards keep students engaged, and as the teacher, allow you to easily see what the students are doing.  This will enable you to correct misconceptions on the spot and provide immediate feedback.  Plus, they are just so much more fun than paper and pencil. Personally, I used these whiteboard clipboards.

After SMALL GROUP INSTRUCTION

Watch ‘Em Work
  • Provide a problem for students to complete independently.  Watch them as they work.  Don’t ask any questions and just allow them to show you what they have learned in your small group.  If there are still misunderstandings after the student has finished, give another student from your small group who did it correctly an opportunity to explain what they did to the struggling student.  Sometimes, students explain better than us teachers. 😉
Determine Next Steps

Remember, one small group pull out will not fix every math misconception, and some students need more time and more attention.  Baby steps are still steps after all, and your students are lucky to have a teacher that cares so much.  If you are looking for a way to track their progress, you can check out these forms I use here.  Stay positive and make sure these students know that you, as their teacher, believe in them!

For more ideas and specifics on math small group instruction check out Guided Math Instruction.  It is aimed towards elementary students, but has some great tips that transfer to middle school.  Teachers, what other tips do you have?

For even more tips on organizing data and small group instruction, check out this follow up post.

It is possible to use math small group instruction in middle school with a bit of upfront planning! Tips for implementation and ideas to get your math small groups running smoothly. | maneuveringthemiddle.com

Click to find out more about Maneuvering Math™.

Maneuvering Math - a skill based math intervention program for grades 6-8 | maneuveringmath.com


Mrs. Brack is a sixth grade math teacher in Texas and my sister.  She is super creative, yet practical and loves her students so well.  She will be periodically posting on the blog this summer because she is the best sister and because she has great ideas that I know you will love. 😉

The post Tips for Implementing Math Small Group Instruction appeared first on Maneuvering the Middle.

]]>
https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/implementing-math-small-group-instruction/feed/ 13
How to Create a Unit Plan https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/how-to-create-a-unit-plan/ https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/how-to-create-a-unit-plan/#comments Sat, 19 Mar 2016 21:26:01 +0000 https://mtmmigration.flywheelsites.com/?p=1020 Unit plans are one of those things that we often consider nice to have if the district provides it.  Unfortunately, not all districts provide this, especially with the frequent change in standards.  Today, I am sharing how to create a unit plan that is both useful and practical for you and your students. Benefits of […]

The post How to Create a Unit Plan appeared first on Maneuvering the Middle.

]]>
Unit plans are one of those things that we often consider nice to have if the district provides it.  Unfortunately, not all districts provide this, especially with the frequent change in standards.  Today, I am sharing how to create a unit plan that is both useful and practical for you and your students.

Benefits of Creating a Unit Plan

  • Content gets adequate time upfront
  • Gives direction for planning time
  • Prevents standards from being left off or forgotten
  • Plan for spiraling in content
  • Clear direction for assessments
  • Provides a varied approach to activities and teaching strategies

What Does a Unit Plan Consist of?

  1. Standards
  2. Mathematical practices or process standards
  3. Scope and sequence of what is taught each day
  4. Teaching strategies and models to be incorporated
  5. Assessments

Unit plans are beneficial in the lesson planning process. A step-by-step approach on how to create a unit plan and its various components.

Keeping Unit Plans Practical

Planning is time-consuming; I think we are all aware of that.  It seems that a unit plan is just more work on top of actual lesson plans, but I really like to think of this as front-loading the work.

What is the difference between watching a cooking show and actually cooking?  It’s the prep work.  You rarely see Rachael Ray or The Pioneer Woman chop anything.  The ingredients are all set out and ready to go.  When I cook, it looks much different.  I am reading the recipe, trying to grab the ingredients, and realizing that it takes much longer to chop all of the vegetables than I have allotted.  Frequently, I am missing a spice and improvising.  Why?  Well, I haven’t given myself enough time to prep.  Everyone is usually hungry and irritable as I am willing the food to cook faster.

A unit plan is like cutting the veggies, measuring the portions, and preheating the oven.  It makes for the actual lesson planning to be faster and more efficient.  However, don’t go over board and spend too much time on this unit plan.  Keep it practical, by going through the process I outline below.  Some official education articles will extend unit plans to include additional pieces, but we all know that there are only so many hours in a day. Let’s keep it real.

How To Create a Unit Plan

Sometimes school districts will provide a detailed unit plan, but other times they provide something more vague, like the title of a unit and the number of days you have to teach the content within the unit.  I have found unit plans to be incredibly effective in maximizing my planning and scaffolding the learning for my students.

1. Break Down the Standards

I like to begin with the standards and break down the various skills and concepts.  Some districts require these to be written as “I Can” statements and used as daily objectives. Even if you are not required to have them, it’s a great idea to post them and share the daily objective with your students throughout the lesson.  The idea here is to pinpoint what students should be able to do at the end of the unit.

2. Determine a Summative Assessment

Whether you enjoy giving performance tasks or a written test, determine which way you will assess students.  Once you have determined the type of assessment, it is a good idea to write the questions or task.  Obviously, this is sometimes impractical.  I would love to say that this happened before each unit, but the reality is that it was always a goal.  When I did, I was always pleased and more prepared to teach the unit.

If you can’t muster getting a test together at this phase in unit planning, it would be beneficial to have an idea of the types of questions you would like to use or to have looked at an example test or released assessment. In Texas, they release the state exam every few years.

The main point here is that by understanding what the assessment will look like, you as the teacher will be able to better prepare your students.  You may be familiar with the lesson planning framework, Understanding By Design, to which this is the core concept.

Unit plans are beneficial in the lesson planning process. A step-by-step approach on how to create a unit plan and its various components. | maneuveringthemiddle.com
3.  Scaffold the skills from basic to complex

At this point, I grab a calendar and a pencil and begin putting skills on paper.  Consider what skills have been learned in prior years and where gaps may exist, so that you can place emphasis and additional time on those areas.  Make note of lessons that may be more difficult so that you allow adequate opportunities for students to become familiar with the content.  I also include summative and formative assessments on the calendar.

4.  Incorporate Mathematical Practices

At this point, I really like to look at the different objectives and skills and brainstorm how I can incorporate the mathematical practices (in Texas we call them process standards) through activities.  This might mean stations where students are analyzing for the error or a lab on constructing triangles.

Tip- I really love incorporating one flex day per unit if possible.  If not, many teachers shoot for one flex day per month.  This helps when an unexpected assembly occurs and the schedule is thrown off or when a concept is really a struggle and you need more time.  It allows you to have a little breathing room and gives permission to take the time necessary without ruining the plan.

If this all seems overwhelming, then you can easily pick and choose a few of the things mentioned and work towards incorporating those.  If you are short on time, you might be interested in my middle school math curriculum units which incorporate the things mentioned in the post.


 

 

The post How to Create a Unit Plan appeared first on Maneuvering the Middle.

]]>
https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/how-to-create-a-unit-plan/feed/ 22
My Math Intervention Schedule https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/math-intervention-schedule/ https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/math-intervention-schedule/#comments Sat, 27 Feb 2016 12:00:18 +0000 https://mtmmigration.flywheelsites.com/?p=976 Math Intervention is a class or a period of time devoted to helping students who have been unsuccessful (typically on standardized tests) by providing additional time and resources. Oftentimes, a math intervention class is smaller in size or might include a co-teacher. In my experience, there is not a lot of structure, direction, or resources […]

The post My Math Intervention Schedule appeared first on Maneuvering the Middle.

]]>

Math Intervention is a class or a period of time devoted to helping students who have been unsuccessful (typically on standardized tests) by providing additional time and resources. Oftentimes, a math intervention class is smaller in size or might include a co-teacher. In my experience, there is not a lot of structure, direction, or resources to support math intervention.  Today, I am sharing my favorite math intervention schedule.

Many schools are implementing math intervention classes geared to help students master the math content. I am sharing my favorite math intervention schedule.

My Math Intervention Schedule

In my second year of math intervention, students were assigned to a math block class for 100 minutes.  It was my role to teach the on-level content, as well as to set aside time for intervention. My co-teacher would join me for the second 50 minutes.  This allowed for me to take a bit of extra time with the on-level lesson before switching gears for the intervention portion of the class.  It was challenging because all of the students in the class struggled with math and had high needs.

After that year, my principal met with us, and we brainstormed other options.  This quickly became my favorite math intervention schedule. Students attended an on-level math class and then would return to their math teacher at the end of the day for intervention class.  In my case, we met during 8th period.  Here is why I enjoyed this:

  1. Math intervention students were spread across on-level classes throughout the day.
  2. All of my students had already attended my on-level math class.  This could also work if you met in the morning and had on-level classes in the afternoon.
  3. My co-teacher came during math intervention time to allow for more small group instruction.
  4. Two 50 minute blocks are more impactful that one 100 minute block, in my opinion.

IDEAS FOR Daily Activities

In order to build fluency with math skills, there were quite a few things that were a part of our daily rhythm.  I have also done quite a bit of research since my original post and have included several suggestions below:

Math skills

We would do timed math skills to build fluency.  I started the year with a 12-by-12 multiplication table that had empty squares.  Each day, the missing squares changed. The goal was to build confidence, as well as mathematical fluency.  As time went on, I moved to fraction, decimal, and percent conversions, and other fluency-related concepts.

Research shows that requiring students to do things that are timed doesn’t necessarily improve their fluency and can cause anxiety.  This is something I wasn’t aware of at the time, and I wanted to be upfront as to the fact that I wouldn’t recommend it now.

What would I recommend now instead…

Number Sense Building

We still want students to build their number sense and numerical fluency, plus we want them to gain confidence at the same time.  This can be accomplished with the same topics as above but can be more discussion- and strategy-based so that students are focused on the thinking and not just on the correct answers.  I share more ideas on number sense building here.

Quick Debrief of On-Level Class

I would check in with my intervention kiddos to see how they felt about the lesson and what questions they still had.  This was informal, but it was useful when we had a difficult lesson. It also helped to create a safe place, because some students might not feel comfortable asking in a larger class.

Homework

Depending on the assignment from the on-level class, I liked to provide about 10 minutes for students to work on homework.  This did not always happen, but 10 minutes is the goal.

Weekly MATH INTERVENTION Activities

Center Rotations

We typically had four center options in my class: small group with me, computers, and two activity stations.  The activities varied, but my requirements were that they had to be fairly self-sufficient, and I had an incentive tied to a recording sheet.

Small Group Instruction

I think small group instruction can be incredibly impactful in this type of setting.  Often, students in math intervention lack motivation and grit.  Small group was my opportunity to correct misconceptions, to encourage successes, and mostly to question them through the process.  You can find how I was able to track data here.

Pre-Teaching or Review

About once a week, we would focus on a new concept that was coming up in our on-level curriculum.  This allowed me to break it down in bite-sized pieces and helped students to see it prior to their on-level class.

MATH INTERVENTION Weekly Schedule

Monday: Centers
Tuesday: Pre-teaching
Wednesday: Centers
Thursday: Centers

Friday: Review and Weekly Conversations

UTILIZING Co-TeacherS

Another reason this schedule was incredible was the fact that my co-teacher came during intervention time.  It was difficult to give her up during my larger on-level classes, but I think she was better utilized during intervention time.  Oftentimes, she would circulate the room to help students while I pulled small groups.  Other times, she would pull small groups.  It was nice to have her in a class that was so hands on!

GRAB a MANEUVERING MATH DEMO BY ENTERING YOUR EMAIL BELOW

The post My Math Intervention Schedule appeared first on Maneuvering the Middle.

]]>
https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/math-intervention-schedule/feed/ 27
Grading Math Homework Made Easy https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/grading-math-homework/ https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/grading-math-homework/#comments Thu, 28 Jan 2016 10:00:00 +0000 https://mtmmigration.flywheelsites.com/2016/01/28/grading-math-homework/ Grading math homework doesn’t have to be a hassle!  It is hard to believe when you have a 150+ students, but I am sharing an organization system that will make grading math homework much more efficient.  This is a follow up to my Minimalist Approach to Homework post. The title was inspired by the Marie […]

The post Grading Math Homework Made Easy appeared first on Maneuvering the Middle.

]]>
Grading math homework doesn’t have to be a hassle!  It is hard to believe when you have a 150+ students, but I am sharing an organization system that will make grading math homework much more efficient.  This is a follow up to my Minimalist Approach to Homework post. The title was inspired by the Marie Kondo book, The Life Changing Magic of Tidying Up.  Though I utilized the homework agenda for many years prior to the book, it fits right in to the idea of only keeping things that bring you joy.

One thing is for sure, papers do not bring a teacher joy.

For further reading, check out these posts about homework:

Grading math homework doesn't have to be a hassle.  Read how to grade and organize it efficiently with a homework agenda.  | maneuveringthemiddle.com

I am also aware that homework brings on another conversation:

  • grading
  • what to do if it is not complete AKA missing assignments

Any teacher will tell you that a missing assignment is a giant pain.  No one enjoys seeing the blank space in the grade book, especially a middle school teacher with 125+ students. (Side note, my first year I had 157.  Pretty much insane.)

Grading Homework, Yes or No?

Goodness, this is a decision you have to make for you and the best interest of your students. In my experience, I would say I graded 85% of assignments for some type of accuracy.  I am not a fan of completion grades.  The purpose of homework is to practice, but we don’t want to practice incorrectly.  Completion grades didn’t work for me, because I didn’t want students to produce low quality work.  

Students had a “tutorial” class period (much like homeroom) in which they were allowed 20 minutes a day to work on assignments.  I always encouraged students to work on math or come to my room for homework help.  Yes, this often led to 40+ students in my room.  But, that means 40 students were doing math practice.  I love that.

I also believe that many students worked on it during that time because they knew it was for a grade.  This helps to build intrinsic motivation.  

Grading math homework:  USING THE HOMEWORK AGENDA

During the warm up, I circulated and checked for homework completion. Students would receive a stamp or my initials on their Homework Agenda. Essentially, the Homework Agenda (freebie offered later in this post) is a one-pager that kept students homework organized. As a class, we quickly graded the homework assignment. Then, I briefly would answer or discuss a difficult question or two.  To avoid cheating, any student who did not have their homework that day were required to clear their desk while we graded.

I would then present a grading scale.  This is where I might make math teachers crazy, but I would be generous.  Eight questions, ten points each.  Missing two problems would result in an 80.  I tried to make it advantageous to those who showed work and attempted, yet not just a “gimme” grade. 

Students would record their grade on their Homework Agenda. They would repeat this for every homework assignment that week. A completed Homework Agenda would have 4 assignments’ names, with 4 teacher completion signatures, and 4 grades for each day of the week that I assigned homework.

Later in the class or the following day as I circulated, I was able to see on the front of the Homework Agenda how students were doing and discuss personally with them whether or not they needed to see me in tutorials.  I was able to give specific praise to students who were giving 110% effort or making improvements. 

This is why I love the Homework Agenda.

“There is no possible way, I could collect the assignments individually and return them in a timely fashion. I tried that my first year and there was no hope. Since using it, I am quickly able to provide individual and specific feedback in a timely manner. It opens up conversations and helps be to encourage and be a champion for my students. ”

On Friday, I would collect the Homework Agenda.  If during the week you were absent, had an incomplete assignment, or didn’t complete one, Friday was D day.  It was going in the grade book on Friday.

Here is my weekly process:

Friday:
  1. Collect homework agendas
  2. Have frank conversation with students who did not have it
  3. Record grades on paper (mostly to make putting it in the computer faster because they were ordered)
  4. Record grades in computer
  5. Send the same email to parents of students that did not turn in the agenda – write one email, then BCC names.
  6. List names of missing assignments on post-it note next to desk (official, I know)
Monday:
  1. Pull students from tutorial time (homeroom) who owed me the homework
  2. Follow up with any students who were absent Friday and still needed to turn in their homework to me

All Access is complete with Independent Practice (which can be used for homework) for every single lesson. If you want your time and energy back, then check out All Access for your math curriculum needs.

What About the Missing Assignments?

Yes, there will be missing assignments.  Yes, students will come to Thursday and have lost their precious agenda.  However, it won’t happen often to the same kiddo.  My least organized student, who carried everything in their pocket, could fold that agenda up and hang onto it for a week.  It was too valuable.  Too many grades, too many assignments to redo.

We all know that it is much more work when students don’t complete their assignments.  It would be a dream world if everyone turned in their work everyday.  Unfortunately, we all live in reality.

We can vent our frustrations over students not doing work, which is legitimate.  We can also work towards solutions. 

The reality is that not every student has a support system at home.  I would love for us to be that voice of inspiration and encouragement.  Sometimes that voice sounds like tough love and a hounding for assignments and just being consistent that you value their education and you are not willing to let them give up on it.

They will appreciate it one day and you will be happy you did the extra work.

This post is part 2 in a two part series.  To read part 1, click here.

Grading math homework doesn't have to be a hassle.  Read how to grade and organize it efficiently with a homework agenda.  | maneuveringthemiddle.com

 

 

The post Grading Math Homework Made Easy appeared first on Maneuvering the Middle.

]]>
https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/grading-math-homework/feed/ 32
Practical Math Homework https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/math-homework/ https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/math-homework/#comments Tue, 26 Jan 2016 19:42:57 +0000 https://mtmmigration.flywheelsites.com/2016/01/26/math-homework/ Math homework is quite the debated topic these days. Some teachers and even schools have given up the idea of homework. I even worked at a school that attempted to standardize homework by assigning a different content area to each day of the week. On my Facebook page, I have shared a few various viewpoints […]

The post Practical Math Homework appeared first on Maneuvering the Middle.

]]>
Math homework is quite the debated topic these days. Some teachers and even schools have given up the idea of homework. I even worked at a school that attempted to standardize homework by assigning a different content area to each day of the week.

On my Facebook page, I have shared a few various viewpoints to homework: homework vs. no homework and a parent’s perspective.

Today, I am sharing a few tips for  math homework and how I have utilized it in the past at various different schools. I like to call it practical or the “minimalist approach”.

Math homework is quite the debated topic, but it CAN be practical and useful. Quick tips on organizing homework using an agenda. | maneuveringthemiddle.com

What is the purpose of Math Homework?

I view homework as math practice. I make this illustration frequently to my students. Much like anything we want to succeed in, it requires practice. Basketball practice, football practice, video games, drawing, theater, even babysitting requires practice. As an adult I practice cooking, reading, blogging, exercising, teaching and parenting. There is always room for practice.

Homework is one way we practice; it keeps it fresh in our minds after a new lesson and helps us to keep it in our memory, so we don’t forget.

What is a Practical Amount of math Homework?

This is definitely up to you to choose what is best for your students.  I personally limited homework to a maximum of 10 questions that students were capable of accomplishing within a 15-minute window. Depending on the concept, I would include roughly 6 skill-based problems and 4 or so word problems.

I firmly believe that consistency is key.  Students should not have to think about whether or not they have homework; they should think about how much they have or what is yet to be accomplished.  If you can train students to expect homework, then you have already worked to fight the struggle of getting it back completed.

How to Communicate Homework?

Communication is essential, it goes back to that famous saying, “it’s not what you say, but how you say it”! At the beginning of the year, you want to communicate the homework expectations to both parents and students. Students are provided with a weekly homework agenda and the corresponding handouts attached. I send a sample one home in my parent packet for parents to review, as well.

Then I give the same spiel for several weeks. “Homework is math practice just like any other sport. I care about your success in this class and your future success in life and believe that math will help you be successful. We work hard Monday through Thursday and then we take the weekend off.”

After a few weeks of being consistent, the moaning and groaning of homework dissipates.

How to keep up with homework?

The papers!!! They used to be the bane of my existence. 28ish papers flying at you, six different times a day, it is simply impossible to keep up with.

Then, I introduced the Homework Agenda. My life was revolutionized. The purpose of the agenda was three-fold:

  1. This eliminated the paper craziness and allowed me to only collect it once each week.
  2. Students were well aware of the expectations for the week and could keep everything together.  At this age, there are students who are involved in many extra-curricular things and they loved knowing the assignments and what to expect at the beginning of the week.
  3. Parents knew what to look for and what was expected of their students.  I am well aware that by middle school, students are more on their own and need to take responsibility for their assignments.  I am a huge advocate of responsibility.  However, there are students who need more support at home and whose parents are happy to help.  This made it easy for them.

Math homework is quite the debated topic, but it CAN be practical and useful. Quick tips on organizing homework using an agenda. | maneuveringthemiddle.com

How to Use the Homework Agenda?

Each week I determined and prepped the assignments for the following week.  I used my homework agenda template to update the dates and information, along with any class announcements.  Then on Thursdays, my parent volunteer, would come in and copy the assignments.

On Monday, students received the Math Homework Agenda with subsequent assignments attached.  I would aim to finish the lesson with 8-10 minutes of class, students would begin their assignment, and then whatever was not finished was to be completed by the following day.

The next day, students were to have their homework agenda out during the warm up.  I would circulate and initial or stamp the Homework Agenda if it was complete.  I created my own key that indicated whether the assignment was incomplete, late, or a student was absent (the day prior).  This was written on their Homework Agenda, so I could see it on Friday when I entered grades.

At this point, you could go over the homework, answer questions, grade it as a class, etc.  More on that later.

The same process was repeated on Wednesday. If Savina had her late work from the day before, I would make a note on her Homework Agenda.

Why the minimalist approach to homework works?

  • You only have to collect the homework agenda once each week.  Hallelujah.
  • You only have to record grades (if you so choose) once each week.  Sign me up.
  • Excellent communication tool for parents, students, and teachers.  Happy parents, happy teacher.
  • Everything is together, students do not need anything else to complete the assignments.  Let’s not make it harder than it needs to be.
  • Students know what is expected of them each week.  I firmly believe the vast majority (95%) of students want to meet expectations.
  • It is consistent and predictable.  Students thrive in consistent and predictable environments.

For further reading, check out these posts about homework:


I know this is a heated topic in education.  I welcome respectful comments and questions in the comments. If you have something else that works well for you, I would love to hear it.

The post Practical Math Homework appeared first on Maneuvering the Middle.

]]>
https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/math-homework/feed/ 12
The Marshmallow Challenge https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/2mc4v877zbn82ulxopk53zhkwnyi0y/ Tue, 12 May 2015 09:00:00 +0000 https://mtmmigration.flywheelsites.com/2015/05/13/20155122mc4v877zbn82ulxopk53zhkwnyi0y/ The Marshmallow Challenge is going to get you through May, I promise. It is that time of year.  The time you look forward to all year.  But, when it arrives can be difficult, busy, and overall chaotic.  May has arrived.   It is tempting to want students quietly working in their seats, but the reality is […]

The post The Marshmallow Challenge appeared first on Maneuvering the Middle.

]]>
The Marshmallow Challenge is going to get you through May, I promise. It is that time of year.  The time you look forward to all year.  But, when it arrives can be difficult, busy, and overall chaotic.  May has arrived.  

It is tempting to want students quietly working in their seats, but the reality is that is more difficult than planning some fun, engaging activities.  That is where “The Marshmallow Challenge” proves to be helpful.

All classes should try the Marshmallow Challenge! It is a great problem solving activity that incorporates STEM skills & teaches communication & cooperation.

THe Marshmallow challenge

“The Marshmallow Challenge” was originally designed as a leadership and business exercise to be used to jump start a meeting or team.  The first time I participated in this was as a team building exercise during a professional development.  It is handy for teaching others to work together, problem solve, and communicate.

With a little more structure, it is easily transferable to a classroom of students.

I would suggest groups of three or four, no more.  Since there are limited resources, this group size allows everyone to participate easily.

materials Per group

  • 1 large marshmallow
  • 20 pieces of spaghetti
  • 1 yard of tape
  • 1 yard of string
  • 1 pair of scissors
  • 1 paper bag to place all of the materials

Assemble enough bags for your classroom and staple them closed.

the rules

Explain to students that everyone has equal supplies and the goal is to create the tallest freestanding structure, however the marshmallow must be on top.  All group members must participate and work together.

The official challenge calls for 18 minutes, but depending on your class you may want to extend that to 30 minutes.  I would suggest displaying a timer, so that students can pace themselves.

Depending on the age and maturity level of the students you might even consider breaking up the time into a brainstorming portion and a working portion.

All classes should try the Marshmallow Challenge! It is a great problem solving activity that incorporates STEM skills & teaches communication & cooperation. | maneuveringthemiddle.com

The debrief

Hopefully, at least one group is able to construct a tall structure that is study enough to hold the marshmallow.  Depending on what learning you want to focus on, you can discuss some follow up questions:

  • What was difficulty?
  • What did you not anticipate?
  • What would you do differently?
  • How did your team interact?
  • Did you team’s interactions impact the result?
  • What mathematical skills did you apply?
  • What scientific skills did you apply?
  • Given the challenge again, how would you fare?

Try it out, the kids will love it!  A great way to incorporate problem solving and thinking skills into a fun end of the year activity.

The post The Marshmallow Challenge appeared first on Maneuvering the Middle.

]]>
Determining What to Review https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/qmtbz09pasftx75lwlidxee75e0cwp/ Mon, 02 Mar 2015 10:00:00 +0000 https://mtmmigration.flywheelsites.com/2015/03/02/201531qmtbz09pasftx75lwlidxee75e0cwp/ March 1st always brings about two things:  the impending countdown to spring break (yay!) and the daunting task of test prep review (eek!). In my years of teaching, testing season began immediately after spring break.  Different grades and subjects were state tested towards the end of March and throughout April. First and foremost, I support best teaching practices, which […]

The post Determining What to Review appeared first on Maneuvering the Middle.

]]>
March 1st always brings about two things:  the impending countdown to spring break (yay!) and the daunting task of test prep review (eek!). In my years of teaching, testing season began immediately after spring break.  Different grades and subjects were state tested towards the end of March and throughout April.

First and foremost, I support best teaching practices, which involve monitoring your students throughout the year, consistently spiraling older material, and in general striving for high mastery.  However, there is still a test and we want our students to go into the test feeling confident and prepared, with the material fresh on their minds.

When planning a review for standardized testing, it is impossible to review it all. Three suggestions on where to place your time and energy.

Determining What to Review

Everything.  Well in a dream world, everything.  But, we all know that there is not enough time to review everything.  And, we know its not wise, good for kids, or good for us to be reviewing forever.

There are three things I consider when determining what to review:

1. Most Frequently Tested Items/Concepts

Each test has a different focus.  Some equally weigh each concept, some emphasize certain concepts.  Carefully take a look at the areas in which are most frequently tested.  This would be an area of focus and where I spend a larger portion of my review time.

Most of the standardized tests do place emphasis on certain standards or concepts.  In Texas, the STAAR exam has readiness and supporting standards.  Two-thirds of the test come from the readiness category, and one-third from the supporting standards.  Mathematically, it makes more sense to focus on the readiness standards, and incorporate supporting standards as you are able.

2. Lowest Benchmark Standards

I gathered the data from my benchmarks throughout the year.  The lowest standards (which I am sure are not surprising) are not something that I would just review.  These concepts are in need of reteaching.  One suggestion that worked well, was designing short mini lessons over these low standards.

For example, one concept that was difficult for my students was determining the pattern of a sequence.  I planned a short mini lesson that addressed sequences at the beginning of class.  In that same class period, the activity would also incorporate equivalent representations, coordinate planes, and proportionality.

When planning a review for standardized testing, it is impossible to review it all. Three suggestions on where to place your time and energy. | maneuveringthemiddle.com

3. Highest benchmark standards/easiest for students

Lastly, there are always those standards that are easy for students.  They perform well with the concept and truly grasp it.  Though easy to ignore, my philosophy is that I wanted students to be confident and not caught off guard.  These questions are perfect for a quick warm up to get class started or to incorporate in homework, if you see fit.

There is no perfect science to review, but preparing ahead will allow you to put all of those precious minutes to work for you.

The post Determining What to Review appeared first on Maneuvering the Middle.

]]>
Standardized Test Review, Yes or No? https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/201527to-review-or-not/ Sun, 08 Feb 2015 22:00:00 +0000 https://mtmmigration.flywheelsites.com/2015/02/08/201527to-review-or-not/ With the increase in testing days, the time for a standardized test review can be difficult to find.  Each district and even school take their own stance on benchmark exams, unit tests, common assessments, and even weekly quizzes. In this day and age of assessment as “king”, we see the impact of instructional time in […]

The post Standardized Test Review, Yes or No? appeared first on Maneuvering the Middle.

]]>
With the increase in testing days, the time for a standardized test review can be difficult to find.  Each district and even school take their own stance on benchmark exams, unit tests, common assessments, and even weekly quizzes. In this day and age of assessment as “king”, we see the impact of instructional time in the classroom.  In one school, the district provided exams every three weeks and at the end of each quarter, it was a full blown “testing environment” situation.

standardized test review, yes or no?

I believe it is safe to say by the time our students reach middle school they are familiar with the testing environment.  In Texas they have been taking standardized tests since the third grade.

This is not to say there isn’t a place for assessment, I believe strongly in assessment and the value it provides to my students and the impact on my instruction.  However, there is a fine line that the education world seems to be towing right now.

With numerous school days allotted to assessment, teachers often wonder if a review is necessary or if there is time for review?

I have found great value in standardized test review to prepare students for upcoming high stakes exams and I would like to share some reasons why I believe review can be valuable.

brings several math concepts together

Throughout the year, our calendars are typically organized by unit.  We teach proportional reasoning, then the number system, then geometric concepts.  Ideally we want to show students how it all comes together and applies to our everyday life.  We want students to understand how a proportional relationship is also linear and how a ratio and a fraction are on in the same.  The reality is, that is hard.  It is tough in 50 minutes to teach a new concept and make all of those connections.

Review is a perfect time to bring it all together.  You can incorporate the different standards and really allow students to make those connections on their own.  Students will surprise you with what they remember and how they go about solving a problem when it is not specifically in a unit.

individualized for each student

If structured well, a standardized test review has great potential to be individualized for each student.  This involves, quick pre-assessments and a lot of “teacher gut” knowledge.

When I structured my review, I gave short pre-assements that covered specific standards on each day.  Each question was labeled and quickly allowed me to see who needed work with what concept.  Based on the results of the pre-assessment, students moved on to various activities.  In my class, I had activities for the following groups:

  • mastery – 90% or higher:  typically hands on activities requiring more application
  • keep practicing – 75% to 89%: often activities with extra practice like task cards or cut and pastes focused specifically on the content
  • work with me – less than 75%:  you know these students, this is where the “teacher gut” comes in, we did a lot of analyzing the question and really processing the information work with whiteboards*

relieves anxiety for students

I would put my money on the fact that most students are nervous about testing.  They may act all big and bad, but there is often quite a bit of pressure.  In Texas, students are retained at certain grade levels if they do not master the content on the exam.

By throughly reviewing the content, students gain confidence in what they are able to do.  They feel more familiar, are able to ask questions, and in emotionally feel more prepared for the exam.  Emotions have a lot to do with performance in a testing environment.  That is why we encourage students to get a good nights rest, eat breakfast, and arrive early.  Yes, their brain works better when they are rested and well fed, but also they emotionally feel more prepared.

it can be fun

It well organized with engaging activities, standardized test review can be fun!  I know my students enjoyed the predictability of the review, the activities, and the fact that everyone was doing something different.  A few ways we made it fun:

  • lots of cooperative learning activities
  • at least one large class competition
  • we set individual goals for the review material (not the test grade, but their mastery of the review material)
  • we used stickers!
  • we discussed meeting goals and celebrated when students did
  • we used technology
  • I gave out tons of praise
  • I emphasized the class as a whole and the role each student played

I want my students to be successful

The truth of the matter is that I am not ashamed to say I want my students to be successful!  Not so that I might receive accolades over a test score, but so that they gain a sense of accomplishment in working hard and grow their love of math.  Students who are unsuccessful are more likely to give up over time.  I don’t sing because I am tone deaf, it is not a gifting of mine.

As a teacher, the things we do in the classroom are much more about growing character and work ethic and thinking skills, than it is about the specific math skill.  Math is the means in which we learn those things.  We practice, we struggle, we are tenacious and keep at it, we think about other ways in which we can apply the content.

We become problem solvers who press on, those are the life lessons.  That is what I want for the next generation.

 

The post Standardized Test Review, Yes or No? appeared first on Maneuvering the Middle.

]]>
Maximizing Your Planning Time https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/2015115maximizing-your-planning-time/ https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/2015115maximizing-your-planning-time/#comments Tue, 20 Jan 2015 11:00:00 +0000 https://mtmmigration.flywheelsites.com/2015/01/20/2015115maximizing-your-planning-time/ Conference. Planning. PLC. Team Meeting.  To the outsider these all seem very similar, time away from your students throughout the day.  Today, I am going to share ideas for maximizing your planning time, or whatever you call it. To the teacher, we know better. Each name comes with a distinct expectation and amount of flexibility. […]

The post Maximizing Your Planning Time appeared first on Maneuvering the Middle.

]]>
Conference. Planning. PLC. Team Meeting.  To the outsider these all seem very similar, time away from your students throughout the day.  Today, I am going to share ideas for maximizing your planning time, or whatever you call it.

To the teacher, we know better.

Each name comes with a distinct expectation and amount of flexibility.  I have worked in each of the settings below at a different point in my career.  In certain situations I was fortunate enough to have a conference and planning or team meeting time.  In other situations I had one conference, that was frequently filled with meetings.

Conference:  insinuates time you are to work on what you need, make copies, etc

Planning:  time for lesson planning, planning with grade level or departmental team

PLC (professional learning community):  meets regularly to share expertise and works collaboratively to improve student learning

Team Meeting:  discuss various student needs, plans events and incentives for students, meets with parents

Far too often, meetings, parent conferences, test training and other events interfere with planning time.  Or possibly you receive daily planning time, but it is ineffective due to circumstances out of your control.

Conference. Planning. PLC. Team Meeting.  Three ideas for maximizing your planning time for productivity, so you can leave at a decent hour.

How do you maximize planning time?

1.  Be prepared

Like the boy scout moto, always be prepared, it is essential that you have everything you need readily available and within arms reach.  I personally recommend a binder with heavy duty plastic pocket tabs.

There is nothing like missing some of the right pieces when it comes to planning.  I think we can all relate to traipsing back to our classrooms for specific items, it is the antithesis of maximizing your planning time.

Here is what I kept in my planning binder:

  • blank calendars with district holidays
  • testing calendar
  • standards and district planning guides
  • notes from previous years (this was not my strength)

You might also need a cup of coffee and snack, if you are anything like me.  Lessons flow better with caffeine.

2.  Be knowledgeable

I taught many different grade levels and multiple preps at any given time.  It was difficult to keep up with all the intricacies of the standards.  Do they need to know how to subtract decimals to the tenths or hundredths place?  Is the coordinate plane introduced the year prior?  Simple questions like that can take previous minutes away as you delve to find answers.

I used a quick reference guide with all the different standards in one page.  I placed them in page protectors and referenced them daily.

If you are working with a team, it also helps to familiarize yourself before and ask others to do so as well.  There is nothing more infuriating than consistently having to get someone up to speed.  It wastes others time and everyone starts to zone out.

3.  Be structured

Especially when planning with others it is essential to be structured.  If not, it is so easy to chase rabbit trails, i.e. discuss problems with lesson, discuss problems like Johnny, discuss problems at the faculty meeting, discuss problems… you get the idea and we have all experienced it.

One of my favorite apps that brings structure to my work time is the Pomodro app. It counts down for 25 minutes and then gives you a five minute break.  This is perfect for accomplishing a specific task and gives you a few minutes to chat, a perfect solution to maximizing your planning time.  I love using when I am working on my own as well and after completing four cycles, it gives you a 30 minute break.

I also suggest beginning with a calendar.  Not a monthly calendar, but a calendar by grading period.  When planning a new unit, start with reviewing the standards and allocating a time frame to those standards.  If someone mentions a great lesson that goes with it, jot it on the calendar, DO NOT begin looking at the lesson.  You can then add it appropriate places for assessments, projects or any other event.  This will give you a good reference point to follow throughout the grading point.

Bonus:  In the comments below, Teresa shares about using post-its!

Conference. Planning. PLC. Team Meeting.  Three ideas for maximizing your planning time for productivity, so you can leave at a decent hour.   | maneuveringthemiddle.com

The post Maximizing Your Planning Time appeared first on Maneuvering the Middle.

]]>
https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/2015115maximizing-your-planning-time/feed/ 7
Bright Idea: The Sticky Side of Painters Tape https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/bright-idea-sticky-side-of-painters-tape-html/ https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/bright-idea-sticky-side-of-painters-tape-html/#comments Sat, 19 Jul 2014 14:00:00 +0000 https://mtmmigration.flywheelsites.com/?p=131 With July ending and August around the corner, this Bright Idea will be one you can use all year long. I personally have used this in the math classroom, but I have seen it in social studies as well.  It basically is a revamp of the number line (or time line, or sequencing events in […]

The post Bright Idea: The Sticky Side of Painters Tape appeared first on Maneuvering the Middle.

]]>
With July ending and August around the corner, this Bright Idea will be one you can use all year long.

img

I personally have used this in the math classroom, but I have seen it in social studies as well.  It basically is a revamp of the number line (or time line, or sequencing events in a story, etc).

Enter the key ingredient:  Painters Tape

img

Painters tape can be found at any home improvement store, as well as your neighborhood Wal-Mart and Target.  It comes in many different colors and has a fabulous characteristic:  It can be repositioned!

In the middle school classroom, a new group of kiddos are entering your room every 50 or so minutes.  The activities you do in class have to be quick, easy to explain, and easy to clean up.

Many times I have students do a card sort or a ordering activity.  This is perfect for all types of numbers whether you are just working with whole numbers or integers or want to practice with all forms of rational numbers.  Simply set up your number line with the sticky side out.  Yup, that is it!

img-1

Tape off the ends and add marks to keep it up and sturdy.  Students can then position the numbers in the correct order, but they can be removed quickly or can be corrected.  At the end of the period, have students take off the numbers and leave the line for the next class.  Super easy!

If you enjoyed this Bright Idea, please consider following my

blog

 or

facebook

 for more great ideas!

For more bright ideas from more than 100 different bloggers, please browse through the link-up below and choose a topic/grade level that interests you.  Thanks for visiting!

An InLinkz Link-up

The post Bright Idea: The Sticky Side of Painters Tape appeared first on Maneuvering the Middle.

]]>
https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/bright-idea-sticky-side-of-painters-tape-html/feed/ 4
Successful 50 Minute Classes {Part 2} https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/successful-50-minute-classrooms-part-2-html/ Fri, 06 Sep 2013 02:13:00 +0000 https://mtmmigration.flywheelsites.com/?p=168 Earlier this week, I began a blog series Successful 50 Minute Classes. This year I am working with some brand new first year teachers, so this has been constantly on my mind.  Plus, it is easy to get caught by the bell when you are rocking and rolling! Today, I am going to focus on […]

The post Successful 50 Minute Classes {Part 2} appeared first on Maneuvering the Middle.

]]>
Earlier this week, I began a blog series

Successful 50 Minute Classes.

This year I am working with some brand new first year teachers, so this has been constantly on my mind.  Plus, it is easy to get caught by the bell when you are rocking and rolling!

Today, I am going to focus on the small things that eat away at those 50 minutes, without us even realizing.

img

Supplies

Scissors, glue, netbooks, iPads.  Supplies can easily eat a few minutes out of each lesson.  When planning your lesson, think about how you can easily distribute supplies.  Depending on what is necessary you could:

  • Have them pick it up as they enter the room
  • Utilize a group bucket
  • Have a supply manager
  • Pass them out as students are working on a different piece of the lesson

Avoid:

  • Students all coming to one location to pick up supplies
  • Getting out supplies at multiple times during the lesson
  • Not having enough supplies

Transitions

Transitions can turn into talking, loud movement, and the teacher having to get everyone focused again.  Each transition can easily eat 2 minutes or more.  Consider using a timer or making it a competition.  No matter what you do, be sure to state the expectation on how to move or what to be getting out, putting away, etc.  Also, it helps to call out time.

For example, if you gave students 2 minutes to put away supplies, get back to their seat, and have a new item out…you might set the timer for 2 minutes, then give a 1 minute warning, 30 second warning, begin praising students who are ready to go, 15 seconds, count how many are still working, then count down from 10.  It gives students a bit of pressure to be ready to go.

to be continued…

The post Successful 50 Minute Classes {Part 2} appeared first on Maneuvering the Middle.

]]>
Successful 50 Minute Classes {Part 1} https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/successful-50-minute-classes-part-1-html/ https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/successful-50-minute-classes-part-1-html/#comments Wed, 04 Sep 2013 11:00:00 +0000 https://mtmmigration.flywheelsites.com/?p=171 What should a typical 50 minute class look like?  Just like any other classroom question, it is going to look different in each classroom.  There are components will benefit students and teachers alike, that I would venture to say are necessary.  Part of these components tend to be on the routines and procedures aspect of […]

The post Successful 50 Minute Classes {Part 1} appeared first on Maneuvering the Middle.

]]>
What should a typical 50 minute class look like?  Just like any other classroom question, it is going to look different in each classroom.  There are components will benefit students and teachers alike, that I would venture to say are necessary.  Part of these components tend to be on the routines and procedures aspect of the classroom dynamics, while others are more essential for the delivery of instruction and impacting the students learning.

I do recall that the 50 minute class is the number one thing that I struggled with as a new teacher.

I seemed to be caught by the bell on a daily basis and wasn’t giving my students the time necessary to practice with my assistance.  Even seven years later, it is a struggle come August to be get back in the rhythm and pacing of a 50 minute lesson.

Here is a visual of what my 50 minute classes look like, when I am introducing new material.  Later, I will share more about other types of days and what both the teacher and student are doing.

img-1

Over the next few blog posts, I will be discussing what a successful 50 minute lesson CAN look like and how to structure that for

yourself

 your students.

Happy Wednesday!

The post Successful 50 Minute Classes {Part 1} appeared first on Maneuvering the Middle.

]]>
https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/successful-50-minute-classes-part-1-html/feed/ 4